StormCAD Users Guide PDF

Welcome to Bentley
StormCAD V8 Help
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition Help provides complete information for using

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition.
“Welcome to Bentley StormCAD V8 Help” on page -1
“Getting Started” on page 1-1
“Introducing the Workspace” on page 2-13
“Quick Start Lessons” on page 3-69
“Quick Start Lessons” on page 3-69
“Starting a Project” on page 4-121
“Creating Your Model” on page 5-145
“Using Modelbuilder” on page 6-257
“Calculating Your Model” on page 7-275
“Using Scenarios and Alternatives” on page 8-291
“Presenting Your Results” on page 9-339
“Theory” on page 10-455
“Gravity Flow Diversions” on page 11-555
“About Haestad Methods” on page 12-569
“References” on page 13-577
“Glossary” on page Glossary-579
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide -1

-2 Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide
Contents
Chapter : Welcome to Bentley StormCAD V8 Help 1
Chapter Contents: Contents i
Chapter 1: Getting Started 1

What is Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
When to Use Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
What’s New in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
MicroStation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
AutoCAD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Installation Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Municipal License Administrator Auto-Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Starting Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Working with stm and stc Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Exiting StormCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Using Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SELECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Checking Your Current Registration Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Chapter 2: Introducing the Workspace 13

Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
File Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Analysis Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Components Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
View Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Report Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Contents-i

Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Drawing Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Standard Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Edit Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Analysis Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
View Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Scenarios Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Compute Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Tools Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Help Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Components Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Reports Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Select Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Zoom Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Customizing the Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
ADDING AND REMOVING TOOLBAR BUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
CONTROLLING TOOLBARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Dynamic Manager Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Opening Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Customizing Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Customization Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Customization Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Stand-Alone Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
MicroStation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
MicroStation Mode Graphical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
MicroStation Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition Element Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Element Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
ELEMENT LEVELS DIALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Working with Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
EDIT ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
DELETING ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
MODIFYING ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
CHANGE PIPE WIDTHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
EDIT ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Working with Elements Using MicroStation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
BENTLEY STORMCAD V8 XM EDITION CUSTOM MICROSTATION ENTITIES . . 2-56
MICROSTATION COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
MOVING ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
MOVING ELEMENT LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Snap Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Polygon Element Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Undo/Redo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Contents-ii Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

IMPORT BENTLEY STORMCAD V8 XM EDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
ANNOTATION DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
USE STORMCAD Z ORDER COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
The AutoCAD Workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
AutoCAD Integration with StormCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
Drawing Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
Symbol Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
AutoCAD Project Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
DRAWING SYNCHRONIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62
SAVING THE DRAWING AS DRAWING*.DWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
STORMCAD CUSTOM AUTOCAD ENTITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
AUTOCAD COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
EXPLODE ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
MOVING ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
MOVING ELEMENT LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
SNAP MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
POLYGON ELEMENT VISIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65
Undo/Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
IMPORTING STORMCAD DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
WORKING WITH PROXIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
Chapter 3: Quick Start Lessons 69

Lesson 1: Creating a Schematic Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-69
Part 1 - Creating a New Schematic Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-70
Part 2 - Laying Out the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-71
Part 3 - Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-73
ENTERING DATA THROUGH THE PROPERTIES EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-74
ENTERING DATA USING FLEXTABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79
Part 4 - Defining Storm Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-81
Part 5 - Analyzing the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84
Lesson 2 - Automatic Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-85
Part 1 - Creating the Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-85
Part 2 - Defining Design Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-88
Part 3 - Performing the Automatic Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-93
Lesson 3 - Scenario Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-94
Part 1 - Creating a New Alternative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-95
Part 2 - Creating New Scenarios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-98
Part 3 - Calculating Multiple Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-100
Lesson 4 - Presentation of Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-100
Part 1 - Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-101
Part 2 - FlexTables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-104
Part 3 - Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-107
Part 4 - Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-109
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Contents-iii

Part 5 - Color Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
Chapter 4: Starting a Project 121

Welcome Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Setting Project Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Options Dialog Box - Global Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
STORED PROMPT RESPONSES DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Options Dialog Box - Project Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Options Dialog Box - Drawing Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
Options Dialog Box - Units Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Options Dialog Box - Labeling Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Options Dialog Box - ProjectWise Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Considerations for ProjectWise Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
General Guidelines for using ProjectWise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Performing ProjectWise Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Importing Data From Other Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
Importing Data from a StormCAD Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Importing Submodels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Importing LandXML Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
Exporting a .DXF File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
Exporting a Submodel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Exporting LandXML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Chapter 5: Creating Your Model 145

Starting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Elements and Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147
Link Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
ENTERING ADDITIONAL DATA TO LINK ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-150
WHAT HAPPENS WHEN THE WATER LEVEL EXCEEDS THE TOP ELEVATION OF AN
OPEN CHANNEL? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153
Catch Basins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154
INLET TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154
INFLOW CAPTURE CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154
Manholes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155
Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155
TRANSITION DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156
Outfalls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
ADDING ELEVATION VS. FLOW DATA TO AN OUTFALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
Catchments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159
SPECIFYING A TIME OF CONCENTRATION (TC) METHOD FOR A CATCHMENT 5-159
RATIONAL CATCHMENT COLLECTION DIALOG BOX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163
Contents-iv Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

Other Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-163
Flow-Headloss Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-164
Flow-Headloss Curves Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-165
Adding Elements to Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-167
Modeling Curved Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-168
Connecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-168
When To Use a Conduit vs. a Gutter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-169
How Do I Get Rainfall from a Catchment Into the Rest of My Model? . . . . .5-169
Modeling Catch Basins and Manholes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-170
Manipulating Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-171
Splitting Conduits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-172
Batch Split Pipe Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-173
Editing Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-174
Property Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-174
RELABELING ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-177
SET FIELD OPTIONS DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-177
Adding Storm Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-179
Storm Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-180
Global Storm Events Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-189
Creating Inlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-190
Inlet Catalog Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-191
Modeling Neenah Grates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-195
Changing the Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-199
Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-199
Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-199
USING THE ZOOM CENTER COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-201
Using Selection Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-202
Selection Sets Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-203
Viewing Elements in a Selection Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-205
Creating a Selection Set from a Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-206
Creating a Selection Set from a Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-206
Adding Elements to a Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-208
Removing Elements from a Selection Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-209
Performing Group-Level Operations on Selection Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-209
Using the Network Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-211
Query Parameters Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-213
Using Prototypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-213
Creating Prototypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-214
Automatic Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-216
Using Automatic Constraint Based Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-216
Default Design Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-219
Conduit and Inlet Catalog Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-222
Engineering Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-222
Working with Engineering Libraries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-223
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Contents-v

SHARING ENGINEERING LIBRARIES ON A NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-225
Converting Legacy Engineering Library Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-226
Conduit Catalog Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-227
Adding Hyperlinks to Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-231
Adding a Hyperlink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-233
Editing a Hyperlink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-233

Deleting a Hyperlink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-234
Using Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-234
Query Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-235
Creating Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-237
USING THE LIKE OPERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-242
Using TRex to Assign Node Elevations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-244
TRex Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-244
User Data Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-246
User Data Extensions Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-248
Sharing User Data Extensions Among Element Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-252
Shared Field Specification Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-253
Enumeration Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-254
External Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-255
Chapter 6: Using Modelbuilder 257

Preparing to Use ModelBuilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-257
ModelBuilder Connections Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-259
ModelBuilder Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-261
Step 1—Specify Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-261
Step 2—Specify Spatial Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-262
Step 3—Specify Field Mappings for each Table/Feature Class . . . . . . . . . . 6-263
Step 4—Build Operation Confirmation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-266
Reviewing Your Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-266
Multi-select Data Source Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-266
ModelBuilder Warnings and Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-266
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-267
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-268
ESRI ArcGIS Geodatabase Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-269
Geodatabase Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-270
Geometric Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-270
ArcGIS Geodatabase Features versus ArcGIS Geometric Network . . . . . . 6-270
Subtypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-271
SDE (Spatial Database Engine). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-271
Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-271
Sample Spreadsheet Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-273
Contents-vi Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

Chapter 7: Calculating Your Model 275
Calculation Options Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-275
Creating Calculation Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-276
Calculation Profile Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-277
Calculation Executive Summary Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-282
Calculation Detailed Summary Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-282
Calculation Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-283
Catchment Summary Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-284
Conduit Summary Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-285
Node Summary Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-286
Inlet Summary Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-287
User Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-287
User Notifications Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-288
USER NOTIFICATION DETAILS DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-290
Chapter 8: Using Scenarios and Alternatives 291

Understanding Scenarios and Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-291
Advantages of Automated Scenario Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-292
A History of What-If Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-292
BEFORE HAESTAD METHODS - DISTRIBUTED SCENARIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-292
WITH HAESTAD METHODS: SELF-CONTAINED SCENARIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-294
The Scenario Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-294
Scenario Attributes and Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-296
A Familiar Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-296
Inheritance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-297
OVERRIDING INHERITANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-298
DYNAMIC INHERITANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-298
Local and Inherited Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-299
Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-299
Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-300
Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-301
Building the Model (Average Day Conditions). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-302
Analyzing Different Demands (Maximum Day Conditions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-302
Another Set of Demands (Peak Hour Conditions). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-303
Correcting an Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-303
Analyzing Improvement Suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-304
Finalizing the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-305
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-305
Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-306
Base and Child Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-307
Creating Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-307
Editing Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-308
Running Multiple Scenarios at Once (Batch Runs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-308
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Contents-vii

Scenario Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-309
Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-311
Types of Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-312
Base and Child Alternatives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-312
Creating Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-312
Editing Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-313
Alternative Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-313
Alternative Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-315
Active Topology Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-315
CREATING AN ACTIVE TOPOLOGY CHILD ALTERNATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-316
Physical Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-317
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR CONDUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-317
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR MANHOLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-324
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR CATCH BASINS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-325
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR TRANSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-327
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR OUTFALLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-328
Headloss Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-328
Boundary Condition Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-330
Rainfall Runoff Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-331
Hydrologic Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-331
Design Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-333
System Flows Alternatives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-337
User Data Extensions Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-338
Calculation Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-338
Chapter 9: Presenting Your Results 339

Using Background Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-339
Background Layer Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-340
Working with Background Layer Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-341
Adding Background Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-342
Deleting Background Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-343
Editing Background Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-343
Renaming Background Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-344
Turning Background Layers On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-344
Image Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-344
Shapefile Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-346
DXF Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-347
Annotating Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-348
Element Symbology Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-348
Using Folders in the Element Symbology Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-350
Adding Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-351
Deleting Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-352
Editing Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-352
Renaming Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-353
Annotation Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-353
FREE FORM ANNOTATION DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-355
Contents-viii Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

Drawing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-355
Color Coding Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-356
Adding Color-Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-356
Deleting Color-Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-357
Editing Color-Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-357
Renaming Color-Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-357
Color-Coding Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-357
Using Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-359
Profiles Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-360
Viewing Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-360
Creating a New Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-361
Editing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-362
Deleting Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-362
Renaming Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-363
Profile Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-363
Profile Viewer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-364
AXIS OPTIONS DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-365
CREATE PROFILE DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-366
Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-366
FlexTables Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-366
Working with FlexTable Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-367
FlexTable Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-368
Opening FlexTables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-371
Creating a New FlexTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-371
Deleting FlexTables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-372
Naming and Renaming FlexTables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-372
Editing FlexTables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-373
Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-375
CUSTOM SORT DIALOG BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-378
Customizing Your FlexTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-379
FlexTable Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-380
Element Relabeling Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-382
Copying, Exporting, and Printing FlexTable Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-383
Statistics Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-385
Using Predefined Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-385
Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-385
Using Standard Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-386
CREATING A PROJECT INVENTORY REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-386
CREATING A SCENARIO SUMMARY REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-386
CREATING A CONDUIT INVENTORY REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-386
CREATING A DOT REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-387
Reporting on Element Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-387
Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-388
Filter Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-389
Using Named Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-389
Using Aerial View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-390
Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-391
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Contents-ix

Contour Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-393
Contour Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-395
Contour Browser Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-395
Chart Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-395
Chart Options Dialog Box - Chart Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-395
SERIES TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-396
PANEL TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-396
AXES TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-399
GENERAL TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-406
TITLES TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-408
WALLS TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-412
PAGING TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-413
LEGEND TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-414
3D TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-420
Chart Options Dialog Box - Series Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-421
FORMAT TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-421
POINT TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-422
GENERAL TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-423
DATA SOURCE TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-424
MARKS TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-424
Chart Options Dialog Box - Tools Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-429
Chart Options Dialog Box - Export Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-430
Chart Options Dialog Box - Print Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-432
Border Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-433
Gradient Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-434
Color Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-435
Color Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-435
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-436
HATCH BRUSH EDITOR DIALOG BOX - SOLID TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-436
HATCH BRUSH EDITOR DIALOG BOX - HATCH TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-437
HATCH BRUSH EDITOR DIALOG BOX - GRADIENT TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-437
HATCH BRUSH EDITOR DIALOG BOX - IMAGE TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-438
Pointer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-439
Change Series Title Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-440
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-440
CHART TOOLS GALLERY DIALOG BOX - SERIES TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-440
CHART TOOLS GALLERY DIALOG BOX - AXIS TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-444
CHART TOOLS GALLERY DIALOG BOX - OTHER TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-447
TeeChart Gallery Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-452
SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-452
FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-452
Print Preview Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-452
Chapter 10: Theory 455

Hydrologic Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-455
Rational Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-456
CATCHMENT AREAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-457
Contents-x Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

RATIONAL COEFFICIENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-457
COMPOSITE CATCHMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-457
TIME OF CONCENTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-458
SYSTEM TIME / CONTROLLING TIME / DURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-458
RAINFALL INTENSITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-459
RETURN PERIOD AND FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-460
INTENSITY DURATIONS FREQUENCY DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-460
RAINFALL TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-461
RAINFALL EQUATIONS THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-461
BASIC ASSUMPTIONS ABOUT THE RATIONAL METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-461
Additional Flow Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-461
Known Flow Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-462
KNOWN FLOWS PRIOR TO STORMCAD V3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-462
Location of Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-462
SURFACE CATCHMENT LOADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-465
SURFACE CARRYOVER LOADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-466
INLET APPROACH LOADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-466
INLET CAPTURED (INTERCEPTED) LOADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-466
INLET BYPASSED LOADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-466
SUBSURFACE PIPED LOADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-466
SUBSURFACE EXTERNAL LOADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-467
SUBSURFACE TOTAL PIPED LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-467
The Energy Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-467
THE ENERGY EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-468
HYDRAULIC GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-469
ENERGY GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-469
HGL CONVERGENCE TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-469
Friction Loss Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-470
CHÉZY’S EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-470
KUTTER ’S EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-470
MANNING’S EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-471
DARCY-WEISBACH EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-472
SWAMEE AND JAIN EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-473
COLEBROOK-WHITE EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-474
HAZEN-WILLIAMS EQUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-474
Flow Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-475
PRESSURE FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-475
UNIFORM FLOW AND NORMAL DEPTH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-475
CRITICAL FLOW, CRITICAL DEPTH, AND CRITICAL SLOPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-476
Gradually Varied Flow Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-477
SLOPE CLASSIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-477
ZONE CLASSIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-478
PROFILE CLASSIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-478
Energy Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-481
STANDARD STEP METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-482
DIRECT STEP METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-482
Mixed Flow Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-482
SEALING (SURCHARGING) CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-482
RAPIDLY VARIED FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-482
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Contents-xi

Backwater Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-483
FREE OUTFALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-483
STRUCTURE FLOODING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-484
Frontwater Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-484
Pipe Average Velocity and Travel Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-485
UNIFORM FLOW VELOCITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-485
FULL FLOW VELOCITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-485
SIMPLE AVERAGE VELOCITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-486
WEIGHTED AVERAGE VELOCITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-486
Capacity Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-486
FULL CAPACITY PROFILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-487
EXCESS CAPACITY PROFILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-487
Conduit Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-489
CIRCULAR CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-490
TRAPEZOIDAL CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-490
ELLIPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-491
PIPE-ARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-492
TRIANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-493
RECTANGULAR CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-493
IRREGULAR OPEN CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-494
Junction Headlosses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-494
STRUCTURE HEADLOSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-494
Headloss - Absolute Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-494
Headloss - Standard Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-495
Headloss - Generic Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-495
Headloss - HEC-22 Energy Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-496
SPECIAL ASSUMPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-496
PRESSURE FLOW, FREE SURFACE FLOW, AND TRANSITIONAL FLOW . . . . 10-497
INITIAL HEADLOSS COEFFICIENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-497
CORRECTION FOR PIPE DIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-497
CORRECTION FOR FLOW DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-498
CORRECTION FOR RELATIVE FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-498
CORRECTION FOR PLUNGING FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-499
CORRECTION FOR BENCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-499
Headloss - AASHTO Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-501
AASHTO CONTRACTION LOSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-501
AASHTO BEND LOSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-502
AASHTO EXPANSION LOSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-503
AASHTO CORRECTION FOR NON-PIPED FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-504
AASHTO CORRECTION FOR SHAPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-504
Channel Weighting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-504
Inlet Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-507
HEC-22 Inlet Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-508
Depth Calculation in StormCAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-508
Flows in Gutters on Grade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-509
UNIFORM GUTTER CROSS SLOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-509
COMPOSITE GUTTER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-510
Flow in Ditch or Median Section on Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-512
Contents-xii Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

Inlet Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-513
INLETS ON GRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-516
INLETS IN SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-522
Time of Concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-528
MINIMUM TIME OF CONCENTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-530
USER-DEFINED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-530
CARTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-530
EAGLESON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-531
ESPEY/WINSLOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-531
FEDERAL AVIATION AGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-531
KIRPICH (PA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-532
KIRPICH (TN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-532
LENGTH AND VELOCITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-533
SCS LAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-533
TR-55 SHEET FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-533
TR-55 SHALLOW CONCENTRATED FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-534
TR-55 CHANNEL FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-535
Constraint Based Automatic Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-535
Subsurface Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-535
PIPE AND SUBSURFACE NODE STRUCTURE DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-536
PART FULL DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-536
LIMIT SECTION SIZE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-537
PIPE MATCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-537
OFFSET MATCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-538
DROP STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-538
STRUCTURE SUMP ELEVATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-538
DESIGN PRIORITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-538
Inlet Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-541
Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-542
Flow Balance at Junctions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-542
Energy Discontinuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-544
Structure Energy Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-544
Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-545
Engineer’s Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-545
Table of Rational Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-545
Headloss Coefficients for Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-547
Roughness Values - Manning’s Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-549
Roughness Values - Kutter’s Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-550
Roughness Values - Darcy-Weisbach Equation (Colebrook-White) . . . . . .10-551
Roughness Values, Hazen-Williams Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-552
Chapter 11: Gravity Flow Diversions 555

Basic Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-555
What Are Diversions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-555
What Happens to the Flow at a Diversion? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-558
Why do Diversions Exist only in Gravity Systems? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-559
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Contents-xiii

Is a Surcharged Gravity Pipe Considered a Pressure Pipe? . . . . . . . . . . . 11-560
How Can a User Model a Diversion?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-560
What Happens to the Diverted Flow? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-560
Are There Rules for the Diversion Targets?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-561
What Does a Diversion Look Like in the Drawing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-562
How Does a Diversion Split the Flow Between Flow Being Piped Downstream and
Flow Being Diverted?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-562
Rating Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-563
How Many Data Points Do I Need to Describe a Rating Curve? . . . . . . . . 11-563
How Can the Values for the Rating Curve be Determined?. . . . . . . . . . . . 11-564
What if Flow Measurements Cannot Be Obtained?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-564
Special Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-564
Hydraulic Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-564
How Can Parallel Relief Sewers be Modeled? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-565
How Can Diversions be Used to Model Off-line Storage? . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-566
How Should the Models be Used to Handle Basement Flooding? . . . . . . 11-566
Modeling the Effect of Tailwater Depth on the Rating Curve . . . . . . . . . . . 11-567
Can I Divert Water Uphill? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-567
Where Can I Enter and View Data on Diversions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-567
Diversion Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-567
Chapter 12: About Haestad Methods 569

Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-569
StormCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-570
WaterGEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-570
WaterCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-571
SewerCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-571
StormCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-571
PondPack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-572
FlowMaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-572
CulvertMaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-572
HAMMER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-572
GISConnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-573
Bentley Institute Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-573
Training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-574
Accreditations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-575
Internet Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-575
Chapter 13: References 577
Chapter Glossary: Glossary 579
Contents-xiv Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

Chapter
Getting Started 1
“What is Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition?” on page 1-1
“When to Use Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition?” on page 1-2
“What’s New in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition?” on page 1-2
“System Requirements” on page 1-4
“Municipal License Administrator Auto-Configuration” on page 1-6
“Starting Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition” on page 1-7
“Working with stm and stc Files” on page 1-7
“Exiting StormCAD” on page 1-7
“Using Online Help” on page 1-8
“Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SELECT” on page 1-11
“Troubleshooting” on page 1-11
“Checking Your Current Registration Status” on page 1-12
What is Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition?

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition is an extremely powerful program for the design
and analysis of gravity flow pipe networks.
The program can be run within MicroStation or AutoCAD, giving you all the power of
those software packages’ capabilities, or in Stand-Alone mode utilizing its own graph-
ical interface. StormCAD allows you to construct a graphical representation of a pipe
network containing all your information, such as pipe data, inlet characteristics, water-
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide 1-1

When to Use Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition?
shed areas, and rainfall information. You have a choice of conveyance elements
including circular pipes, pipe arches, boxes and more. Rainfall information is calcu-
lated using rainfall tables, rainfall equations, or the National Weather Service’s Hydro-
35 data. StormCAD also plots the resulting Intensity Duration Frequency Curves.
The gravity network is solved using the built-in numerical model, which utilizes both
the direct step and standard step gradually varied flow methods. Flow calculations are
valid for both pressure and varied flow situations, including hydraulic jumps, back-
water, and drawdown curves. StormCAD’s flexible reporting feature allows you to
customize and print the model results in both a report format and as a graphical plot.
When to Use Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition?

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition is so flexible you can use it for all phases of your
project, from the feasibility report to the final design drawings and analysis of existing
networks. During the feasibility phase, you can use StormCAD to create several
different system layouts with an AutoCAD or MicroStation drawing as the back-
ground, or within MicroStation or AutoCAD itself. For the final design, you can
complete detailed drawings with notes that can be used to develop the construction
plans. In summary, you can use StormCAD to:
• Design multiple storm sewer systems.
• Analyze various design scenarios for storm sewer systems.
• Import and export AutoCAD and MicroStation .DXF files.
• Predict rainfall runoff.
What’s New in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition?

This release of StormCAD incorporates the following new features:
• Completely New Interface: The modern new interface offers greatly enhanced
accessibility, presentation, and customization options. See “Introducing the Work-
space” on page 2-13 for more information.
• MicroStation XM Client: Use MicroStation’s powerful drafting environment to
get more from your StormCAD model. Use any MicroStation function or tool
with StormCAD-specific elements.
• ACAD 2008 Support
• LandXML Import/Export: Import data from your LandXML format files, and
export StormCAD models in LandXML format.
• Support for Analysis of Prismatic Open Channel Sections
1-2 Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

Getting Started
• Active Topology Selection: Make an element or a group of elements inactive in

certain scenarios to model different situations without the need for multiple
models. See “Active Topology Alternative” on page 8-315 for more information.
• Catchment Elements: More accurately model real-world networks using a
seperate catchment element.
• Gutter Elements: More accurately model real-world networks using a gutter
element.
• ModelBuilder: Use ModelBuilder to create your model and import existing data
assets from a wide variety of databases, CAD drawings, and GIS shapefiles. See
“Using Modelbuilder” on page 6-257 for more information.
• TRex: Automatically assign elevations to the nodes in your model using data
from DXF drawings, LandXML files, or shapefiles. See “Using TRex to Assign
Node Elevations” on page 5-244 for more information.
• Improved Element Symbology: Use CAD-style or GIS-style element symbols to
improve appearance and visibility for your particular model.
• Improved Background Layer Support: Use one or more image files in a variety
of formats as background layers.
• Network Navigator: Quickly view elements, pinpoint problems, and create
selection sets based on input data, results, or connectivity criteria. See “Using the
Network Navigator” on page 5-211 for more information.
• Queries: Filter data in FlexTables and create dynamic selection sets based on
powerful SQL (Structured Query Language) expressions. See “Using Queries” on
page 5-234 for more information.
• Contours: Visually display calculated results for many attributes using contour
plots. See “Contours” on page 9-391 for more information.
• Named Views: Define various views of your network as points of interest and use
the Named Views Manager to return to them quickly. See “Using Named Views”
on page 9-389 for more information.
• Customizable Reports: Customize the format for the predefined reports to
include only the information you want. See “Report Options” on page 9-388 for
more information.
• Diversion Link Element/Integrated Diversion Network: Model diversions
within the normal network drawing view.
• Conduit Catalog: Define commonly used conduits once, then reuse them as often
as necessary across projects. See “Conduit Catalog Dialog Box” on page 5-227
for more information.
• Inlet Catalog: Define commonly used inlets once, then reuse them as often as
necessary across projects. See “Creating Inlets” on page 5-190 for more informa-
tion.

System Requirements
• Batch Pipe Split: Automatically split conduits whose neighboring nodes are
found to be within the specified tolerance. See “Batch Split Pipe Dialog Box” on
page 5-173 for more information.
• Hyperlinks: Associate external files, such as pictures or movie files, with any
element in the model. See “Adding Hyperlinks to Elements” on page 5-231 for
more information.
• External Tools: Use the External Tool Manager to create and manage custom
menu commands from any executable file. Your commands are then located in the
Tools menu for quick accessibility. See “External Tools” on page 5-255 for more
information.
• Time of Concentration Calculator: Calculate the Time of Concentration for a
catchment element using a variety of different methods.
• Additional Options for Inlet Capacity Definition: New inlet capacity defini-
tions include Max Capacity, Percent Capture, Flow to Inlet vs. Flow Captured and
Gutter Depth vs. Captured Flow.
• Additional Option for Junction Headloss: Use the Headloss vs. Flow curves to
simulate varying roughness values at various flow points. See “Flow-Headloss
Curves” on page 5-164 for more information.
• Additional Outfall Tailwater Condition: Use the Elevation vs. Flow Table to
define changes at various flow points.
• Improved Performance: Faster calculation and save times.
• Improved installation and license activation
System Requirements
System requirements for Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition are:
• Processor: Pentium III - 1 GHz

• RAM:
– For Windows XP: 256 megabytes
– For Windows Vista: 512 megabytes
Note: 1GB recommended: adding RAM is an economical way to boost

performance for large pipe networks.
• Hard Disk: 500 megabytes of free storage space (or more depending on data
files)
• Display: 800 x 600 resolution at 256 colors
• Operating System: Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows XP 64 bit, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows Vista are the only supported operating systems.

Getting Started
MicroStation Mode
In addition to the system requirements listed above for Modeler, your system should
also meet the following requirements for running Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition
in MicroStation mode:
StormCAD V8 XM Edition has been certified with MicroStation V8 (8.9.4).
Refer to your MicroStation documentation for complete installation instructions,

including any additional hardware or software requirements.
AutoCAD Mode
In addition to the system requirements listed above for Modeler, your system should
also meet the following requirements for running Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition
in AutoCAD mode:
• AutoCAD 2008 is the only supported version of AutoCAD.

Refer to your AutoCAD documentation for complete installation instructions,
including any additional hardware or software requirements.
Installation Directories
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition installs files in a number of different locations.

These locations are listed here in the event you need to manually edit, inspect, or
delete them:
Windows Vista:
• C:\Program Files\Bentley\StormCAD8
• C:\Users\user.name\AppData\Roaming\Bentley\StormCAD\8
• C:\Users\user.name\AppData\Local\Bentley\StormCAD\8
• C:\ProgramData\Bentley\StormCAD\8
• C:\ProgramData\Microsoft\Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Bentley\StormCAD
V8 XM
• C:\Users\user.name\AppData\Roaming\Microsoft\Windows\Start
Menu\Programs\Bentley\StormCAD V8 XM
• C:\Users\user.name\AppData\Local\Temp\Bentley\StormCAD

Municipal License Administrator Auto-Configuration
Windows XP/2000
• C:\Program Files\Bentley\StormCAD8
• C:\Documents and Settings\user.name\Application Data\Bentley\StormCAD
• C:\Documents and Settings\user.name\Local Settings\Application
Data\Bentley\StormCAD
• C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Bentley\StormCAD
• C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Start Menu\Programs\Bentley\StormCAD
V8 XM
• C:\Documents and Settings\user.name\Start Menu\Programs\Bentley\StormCAD
V8 XM
• C:\Documents and Settings\user.name\Local Settings\Temp\Bentley\StormCAD
• C:\Documents and Settings\user name\Application Data\Bentley\EngineeringLib-
raries (this is shared with other Haestad products).
Municipal License Administrator Auto-

Configuration
At the conclusion of the installation process, the Municipal License Administrator will
be executed, to automatically detect and set the default configuration for your product,
if possible. However, if multiple license configurations are detected on the license
server, you will need to select which one to use by default, each time the product
starts. If this is the case, you will see the screen below. Simply press OK to clear the
Warning dialog, then press Refresh Configurations to display the list of available
configurations. Select one and press Make Default, then exit the License Adminis-
trator. (You only need to repeat this step if you decide to make a different configura-
tion the default in the future.)

Getting Started
Starting Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition

After you have finished installing StormCAD, restart your system before starting
StormCAD for the first time.
To start StormCAD
1. Double-click on the StormCAD icon on your desktop.

or
Click Start > All Programs > Bentley > StormCAD V8 XM > StormCAD V8 XM.
Working with stm and stc Files

A StormCAD document file is called a stm or stc file. These files are composed of one
or more elements, each of which is represented using attributes such as pipes, junc-
tions, and hydrants. StormCAD’s File menu has items for creating, opening, and
saving stm files.
You can have up to five stm and/or stc files open at a time in StormCAD.
Exiting StormCAD
To exit StormCAD
Click the application window's Close icon.
or
From the File menu, choose Exit.
If you have made changes to the project file without saving, the following dialog box
will open. Click Yes to save before exiting, No to exit without saving, or Cancel to
stop the operation.

Using Online Help
Using Online Help

StormCAD Help menu and Help window are used to access StormCAD exten-
sive online help.
Context-sensitive online help is available. Hypertext links, which appear in

color and are underlined when you pass the pointer over them, allow you to
move easily between related topics.
Note: Certain Windows DLLs must be present on your computer in order to

use Online Help. Make sure you have Microsoft Internet Explorer
(Version 5.5 or greater) installed. You do not need to change your
default browser as long as Internet Explorer is installed.
To open the Help window
1. From the Help menu, choose StormCAD Help.

The Help window opens, and the Table of Contents displays.
The Help window consists of two panes - the navigation pane on the left and the
topic pane on the right.
2. To get help on a dialog box control or a selected element:
Press <F1> and the Help window opens (unless it is already open) and shows the
information about the selected element.
Subtopics within a help topic are collapsed by default. While a subtopic is
collapsed only its heading is visible. To make visible a subtopic's body text and
graphics you must expand the subtopic.

Getting Started
To expand a subtopic
Click the expand (+) icon to the left of the subtopic heading or the heading
itself.
To collapse a subtopic
Click the collapse (-) icon to the left of the subtopic heading or the heading
itself.
The navigation pane has the following tabs:
• Contents - used for browsing topics.

• Index - index of help content.
• Search - used for full-text searching of the help content.
• Favorites - customizable list of your favorite topics
To browse topics using the Contents tab
1. On the Contents tab, click the folder symbol next to any book folder (such
as Getting Started, Using Scenarios and Alternatives) to expand its
contents.
2. Continue expanding folders until you reach the desired topic.
3. Select a topic to display its content in the topic pane.
To display the next or previous topic according to the topic order shown in the
Contents tab
To display the next topic, click the right arrow or to display the previous topic, click
the left.
To use the index of help content
1. Click the Index tab.

2. In the search field, type the word you are searching for.
or
Scroll through the index using the scroll bar to find a specific entry.
3. Select the desired entry and click the Display button.
or
Double-click the desired entry.
The content that the selected index entry is referencing displays in the topic pane.

Using Online Help
Note: If you select an entry that has subtopics, a dialog box opens
from which you can select the desired subtopic. In this case,
select the subtopic and click the Display button.
To search for text in the help content
1. Click the Search tab.

2. In the search field, type the word or phrase for which you are searching.
3. Click the List Topics button.
Results of the search display in the list box below the search field.
4. Select the desired topic and click the Display button.
or
Double-click the desired topic.
Search results vary based on the quality of the search criteria entered in the Search
field. The more specific the search criteria, the more narrow the search results. You
can improve your search results by improving the search criteria. For example, a word
is considered to be a group of contiguous alphanumeric characters. A phrase is a
group of words and their punctuation. A search string is a word or phrase on which
you search.
A search string finds any topic that contains all of the words in the string. You
can improve the search by enclosing the search string in quotation marks. This
type of search finds only topics that contain the exact string in the quotation
marks.
To add a help topic to a list of “favorite” help topics
1. In the Contents, Index, or Search tabs, select the desired help topic.
2. Click the Favorites tab.
The selected help topic automatically displays in the “Current topic” field
at the bottom of the tab.
3. Click the Add button.
To display a topic from your Favorites list
1. Click the Favorites tab.

2. In the list box, select the desired topic and click the Display button.
or
Double-click the desired topic.
The selected topic's content displays in the topic pane.

Getting Started
Online help is periodically updated and posted on Bentley's Documentation

Web site, http://docs.bentley.com/ for downloading. On this site you can also
browse the current help content for this product and other Bentley products.
Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SELECT

Bentley SELECT is the comprehensive delivery and support subscription program
that features product updates and upgrades via Web downloads, around-the-clock
technical support, exclusive licensing options, discounts on training and consulting
services, as well as technical information and support channels. It’s easy to stay up-to-
date with the latest advances in our software. Software updates can be downloaded
from our Web site, and your version of Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition can then
be upgraded to the current version quickly and easily. Just click Check for Updates
on the toolbar to launch your preferred Web browser and open our Web site. The Web
site automatically checks to see if your installed version is the latest available, and if
not, it provides you with the opportunity to download the correct upgrade to bring it
up-to-date. You can also access our KnowledgeBase for answers to your Frequently
Asked Questions (FAQs).
Note: Your PC must be connected to the Internet to use the Check for
Updates button.
Troubleshooting
Due to the multitasking capabilities of Windows, you may have applications running
in the background that make it difficult for software setup and installations to deter-
mine the configuration of your current system.
Try these steps before contacting our technical support staff
1. Shut down and restart your computer.

2. Verify that there are no other programs running. You can see applications
currently in use by pressing Ctrl+Shift+Esc in Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
Exit any applications that are running.
3. Disable any antivirus software that you are running.
Caution: After you install Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition, make

certain that you restart any antivirus software you have
disabled. Failure to restart your antivirus software leaves
you exposed to potentially destructive computer viruses.
4. Try running the installation or uninstallation again (without running any other
program first).

Checking Your Current Registration Status
If these steps fail to successfully install or uninstall the product, contact Technical
Support.
Checking Your Current Registration Status

After you have registered the software, you can check your current registration status
by opening the About... box from within the software itself.
To view your registration information
1. Select Help > About Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition.

2. The version and build number for Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition display in
the lower-left corner of the About Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition dialog box.
The current registration status is also displayed, including: user name and company,
serial number, license type and check-in status, feature level, expiration date, and
SELECT Server information.

Chapter
Introducing the 2
Workspace
This chapter describes the menus and toolbars that are used to control the various
features and fuctions of Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition. This part of the chapter
discusses the following topics:
• “Menus”
• “Toolbars”
• “Dynamic Manager Display”
• “Customization Manager”
It also provides details about the differences in functionality between the available
user environemts that are available:
• “Stand-Alone Editor”
• “MicroStation Environment”
• “The AutoCAD Workspace”
Menus
Menus are located at the top of Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition stand-alone editor
window and provide access to program commands, which are broken down by type of
functionality.
The following menus are available:
• “File Menu”
• “Edit Menu”
• “Analysis Menu”
• “View Menu”
• “Tools Menu”
• “Report Menu”

Menus
• “Help Menu”
File Menu
The File menu contains the following commands:
New Creates a new project. When you select this

command, a new untitled project is created.
Open Opens an existing project. When you select this

command, the Open dialog box appears, allowing
you to browse to the project to be opened.
Close Closes the current project without exiting the

program.
Close All Closes all currently open projects.
Save Saves the current project.
Save As Saves the current project under a new project name

and/or to a different directory location.
Save All Saves all currently open projects.

Introducing the Workspace
ProjectWise Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Open—Open an existing StormCAD project
from ProjectWise. You are prompted to log into
a ProjectWise datasource if you are not already
logged in.
• Save As—Saves the current project to a
ProjectWise datasource. You are prompted to
log into a ProjectWise datasource if you are not
already logged in.
• Change Datasource—Lets you connect to a
different ProjectWise datasource for future
Open and Save As operations.
Note: For more information about

using StormCAD with
ProjectWise, see “Considerations
for ProjectWise Users”
• Import—Opens a submenu containing the

following commands:
• StormCAD Database—Lets you import a
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition project
database file.
• Submodel—Lets you import a Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition submodel file.
• LandXML—Lets you import a LandXML
.xml file.
Import Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• StormCAD Database—Lets you import a
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition project data-
base file.
• Submodel—Lets you import a Bentley
• LandXML—Lets you import a LandXML .xml
file.

Menus
Export Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• DXF—Lets you export the current network
layout as a DXF drawing.
• Submodel—Lets you export a Bentley
• LandXML—Lets you export a LandXML .xml
file.
Page Setup Defines the print settings that will be used when the
current view is printed.
Print Preview Opens the Print Preview window, displaying the

current view exactly as it will be printed.
Print Prints the current view.
Project Properties Opens the Project Properties dialog box, allowing

you to specify project-level settings.
Recent Files When the Recent Files Visible option is selected in

the Options dialog box, the most recently opened
files will appear in the File menu. See “Options
Dialog Box - Global Tab” for more information.
Exit Closes the program.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains the following commands:
Undo Cancels the last data input action on the currently

active dialog box. Clicking Undo again cancels
the second-to-last data input action, and so on.
Redo Cancels the last undo command.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted element.

Select By Polygon Lets you select elements in your model by

drawing a polygon in the drawing pane. Click in
the drawing pane to draw each side of the
polygon, then right-click and select Done when
the polygon is complete. All elements contained
within the polygon will be selected.
Select All Selects all of the elements in the network.
Invert Selection Selects all currently unselected elements and

deselects all currently selected elements.
Select by Element Opens a submenu listing all available element

types. Select one of the element types from the
submenu to select all elements of that type in the
model.
Select by Attribute Opens a submenu listing all available element

types. Select one of the element types from the
submenu to open a query builder that allows you
to choose the attribute criteria that will determine
what elements will be selected.
Clear Selection Deselects the currently selected element(s).
Clear Highlight Removes highlight visibility. Highlighting is

created through the Network Navigator.
Find Element Lets you find a specific element by entering the

element’s label.
Analysis Menu
The Analysis menu contains the following commands:
Scenarios Opens the Scenario Manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage project scenarios.
Alternatives Opens the Alternative Manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage alternatives.
Calculation Options Opens the Calculation Options Manager, which

lets you create, view, and manage calculation
settings for the project.

Menus
Calculation Summary Opens the calculation executive summary report,

which reports a summary of the calculations
performed on your model. For more
information, see “Calculation Executive Summary
Dialog Box”.
User Notifications Opens the User Notifications Manager, allowing

you to view warnings and errors uncovered by the
validation process.
Validate Runs a diagnostic check on the network data to

alert you to possible problems that may be
encountered during calculation. This is the manual
validation command, and it checks for input data
errors. It differs in this respect from the automatic
validation that StormCAD runs when the compute
command is initiated, which checks for network
connectivity errors as well as many other things
beyond what the manual validation checks.
Compute Calculates the network. Before calculating, an

automatic validation routine is triggered, which
checks the model for network connectivity errors
and performs other validation. For more
information, see “Calculating Your Model”.
Pressing F9 also selects this command.
Components Menu
The Tools menu contains the following commands:
Default Design Opens the Default Design Constraints dialog ,

Constraints allowing you to specify the parameters of an automatic
design calculation. For more information, see “Default
Design Constraints”.
Storm Data Opens the Storm Data dialog box, which lets you
create, edit, and delete storm data. For more
information, see “Storm Data Dialog Box”.
Global Storm Events Opens the Global Storm Event Settings dialog box,
which lets you define project-wide global storm event
data. For more information, see “Global Storm Events
Dialog Box”.

Inlet Catalog Opens the Inlet Catalog dialog box, which lets you
create, edit, and view catalog inlets. Catalog inlets are
an efficient way to reuse common inlet definitions. For
more information, see “Creating Inlets”.
Conduit Catalog Opens the Conduit Catalog dialog box, which lets you
create, edit, and view catalog conduits. Catalog
conduits are an efficient way to reuse common
physical conduit definitions. For more information,
see “Conduit Catalog Dialog Box”.
Flow-Headloss Curves Opens the Flow-Headloss Curves dialog box, allowing

you to view, edit, and manage the flow-headloss
curves used in the project. For more information, see
“Flow-Headloss Curves”.
Engineering Libraries Opens the Engineering Libraries Manager. For more

information, see “Working with Engineering
Libraries”.
View Menu
The View menu contains the following commands:
Element Symbology Opens the “Element Symbology Manager”, which

lets you create, view, and manage annotation and
color-coding in your project.
Background Layers Opens the “Background Layer Manager”, which

lets you create, view, and manage the background
layers associated with the project.
Network Navigator Opens the Network Navigator Manager (see

“Using the Network Navigator”), which lets you
quickly navigate to and review any selection set.
Selection Sets Opens the “Selection Sets Manager”, which lets

you create, view, and manage selection sets
associated with the project.
Queries Opens the “Query Manager”, which lets you

create SQL expressions for use with selection sets
and FlexTables.

Menus
Prototypes Opens the Prototypes Manager (see “Creating

Prototypes”), which lets you enter default values
for elements in your model. Prototypes can reduce
data entry requirements dramatically if a group of
network elements share common data.
FlexTables Opens the “FlexTables Manager”, which lets you

create, view, and manage the tabular reports for
the project.
Profiles Opens the “Profiles Manager”, which lets you

create, view, and manage the profiles for the
project.
Contours Opens the Contours Manager (see “Contours”),

which lets you create, view, and manage the
contours for the project.
Named Views Opens the Named Views manager (see “Using

Named Views”) where you can create, edit, and
use Named Views.
Aerial View Opens the Aerial View (see “Using Aerial View”)
navigation window.
Properties Turns the “Property Editor” display on or off.
Customizations Opens the “Customization Manager”, allowing

you to view, edit, and manage your
customizations.
Auto-Refresh Turns automatic updates to the main window view

on or off whenever changes are made to the
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition datastore.
When selected, a check mark appears next to this
menu command, indicating that automatic updates
are turned on.
Refresh Drawing Updates the main window view according to the

latest information contained in the Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition datastore.

Zoom Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Zoom Extents—Sets the view so that the
entire network is visible in the drawing pane.
• Zoom Window—Activates the manual zoom
tool, which lets you specify a portion of the
drawing to enlarge.
• Zoom In—Enlarges the size of the model in
the drawing pane.
• Zoom Out—Reduces the size of the model in
the drawing pane.
• Zoom Realtime—Enables the realtime zoom
tool, which lets you zoom in and out by
moving the mouse while holding down the left
mouse button.
• Zoom Center—Opens the Zoom Center
dialog box, which lets you enter drawing coor-
dinates that will be centered in the drawing
pane.
• Zoom to Selection—Zooms to the currently
selected element.
• Zoom Previous—Resets the zoom level to
the last setting.
• Zoom Next—Resets the zoom level to the
setting that was active before a Zoom
Previous command was executed.
Pan Activates the Pan tool, which lets you move the
model within the drawing pane. When you select
this command, the cursor changes to a hand,
indicating that you can click and hold the left
mouse button and move the mouse to move the
drawing.
Toolbars Opens a submenu that lists each of the available

toolbars. Select one of the toolbars in the submenu
to turn that toolbar on or off. For more
information, see “Toolbars”.
Reset Workspace Resets the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition

workspace so that the dockable managers appear
in their default factory-set positions.

Menus
Tools Menu
The Tools menu contains the following commands:
Active Topology Opens the Active Topology Selection toolbar,

Selection allowing you to add and remove elements from the
current “Active Topology Alternative”.
ModelBuilder Opens the ModelBuilder Connections Manager, which

lets you create, edit, and manage ModelBuilder
connections to be used in the model-building/model-
synchronizing process. For more information, see
“ModelBuilder Connections Manager”.
TRex Opens the TRex Wizard dialog, allowing you to use

TRex to assign node elevations automatically. For
more information, see “Using TRex to Assign Node
Elevations”.
Hyperlinks Lets you associate external files, such as pictures or

movie files, with elements. For more information, see
“Adding Hyperlinks to Elements”.
User Data Extensions Opens the User Data Extension dialog box, which lets
you add and define custom data fields. For example,
you can add new fields such as the pipe installation
date. For more information, see “User Data
Extensions”.
Batch Pipe Split Opens the “Batch Split Pipe Dialog Box”, allowing
you to perform pipe split operations on multiple pipes
simultaneously.

Database Utilities Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Compact Database—When you delete data from
a Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition project, such
as elements or alternatives, the database store
that Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition uses can
become fragmented, causing unnecessarily large
data files, which impact performance substantially.
Compacting the database eliminates the empty
data records, thereby defragmenting the datastore
and improving the performance of the file.
Note: Every tenth time a file is saved,

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition
will automatically prompt you to
compact the database. If you open
a file without saving it, the count
does not go up. If you open and
save a file multiple times in the
same session, the count only goes
up on the first save. If you open,
save, and close the file, the count
goes up. Click Yes to compact the
database, or no to close the prompt
dialog box without compacting.
Since compacting the database can
take time, especially for larger
models, you may want to postpone
the compact procedure until a later
time. You can modify how Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition compacts
the database in the Options dialog
box. For more information, see
“Options Dialog Box - Global Tab”.
• Synchronize Drawing—Synchronizes the current

model drawing with the project database.
• Update Database Cache—Update for the open
model.
Layout Opens a submenu that lists each of the available

element types. Select one of the element types in the
submenu to place that element in your model.
External Tools Run an existing external tool or create a new one by

opening up the External Tools manager (see “External
Tools”).

Menus
Options Opens the Options (see “Setting Options”) dialog box,

which lets you change global settings such as display
pane settings, drawing scale, units, display precision
and format used, and element labeling.
Report Menu
The Report menu contains the following commands:
Element Tables Opens a submenu that lets you display FlexTables

for any link or node element. These predefined
FlexTables contain most of the input data and
results for each instance of the selected element in
the model. You can also access a DOT report from
this submenu.
Headloss Detailed Opens a submenu that allows you to display

Reports headloss reports of the following types:
• AASHTO Detailed Report
• AASHTO Summary Report
• HEC-22 Detailed Report
• HEC-22 Summary Report
Scenario Summary Opens the Scenario Summary Report.
Project Inventory Opens the Project Inventory Report, which

contains the number of each of the various
element types that are in the network.
Conduit Inventory Opens the Conduit Inventory Report, which

contains the number of each kind of conduit along
with the total length for each type.
Report Options Opens the Report Options dialog, allowing you to

customize the appearance of the preformatted
reports. See “Report Options” for more
information.

Help Menu
The Help menu contains the following commands:
StormCAD Help Opens the online help Table of Contents.
Quick Start Lessons Opens the online help to the Quick Start Lessons
Overview topic.
Welcome Dialog Opens the Welcome dialog box.
Check for Updates Opens your Web browser to the our Web site,
allowing you to check for Bentley StormCAD V8
XM Edition updates.
Bentley Institute Opens your browser to the Bentley Institute page

Training of our website.
Bentley Professional Opens your browser to the Bentley Professional

Services Services page of our website.
Online Support Opens your browser to the SelectServices Support

page of our website.
Discussion Groups Opens your browser to the online sign up form for
our forum discussion groups:
• WaterTalk
• StormTalk
• SewerTalk
• GISTalk
• UTalk
Bentley.com Opens your browser to the main page of our

website.
About StormCAD Opens the About Bentley StormCAD V8 XM

Edition dialog box, which displays copyright
information about the product, registration
information, and the current version number of
this release.

Toolbars
Toolbars
Toolbars provide access to frequently used menu commands and are organized by the
type of functionality offered. Many of the toolbars have additional buttons available
that are not displayed by default. You can display these additional buttons by
following the procedure in “Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons”.
The following toolbars are available:
• “Drawing Toolbar”
• “Standard Toolbar”
• “Edit Toolbar”
• “Analysis Toolbar”
• “View Toolbar”
• “Scenarios Toolbar”
• “Compute Toolbar”
• “Tools Toolbar”
• “Help Toolbar”
• “Components Toolbar”
• “Reports Toolbar”
• “Select Toolbar”
• “Zoom Toolbar”
Click on the following links to learn how to customize the toolbars:
• “Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-40

• “Controlling Toolbars” on page 2-41

Drawing Toolbar
You use the Drawing toolbar to lay out your model in the drawing pane. The Drawing
toolbar provides access to the following buttons:
Select Changes your mouse cursor into a selection

tool. The selection tool behavior varies
depending on the direction in which the mouse
is dragged after defining the first corner of the
selection box, as follows:
If the selection is made from left-to-right, all
elements that fall completely within the
selection box that is defined will be selected.
If the selection is made from right-to-left, all
elements that fall completely within the
selection box and that cross one or more of the
lines of the selection box will be selected.
Layout Changes your mouse cursor into a network
layout tool. Right-click to change the type of
element and the type of link.
• Conduit—Lets you place a closed section
element through which water moves. A
conduit has a constant roughness and
cross section shape along its entire length.
Available conduit shapes consist of both
open and closed cross sections.
• Gutter—Lets you place an open-section
element that models overflow. A gutter
accepts the inflows that are not being taken
in by an inlet because of capacity
constraints. In addition, a gutter also takes
in the overflow from an inlet due to
flooding. There can only be one gutter
downstream of any element and the gutter
cannot be the only way water can leave an
element, there must also be a channel or a
conduit. Gutters are only used for routing;
no dynamic calculations are performed for
gutter elements.
Conduit Lets you place a closed section element
through which water moves. A conduit has a
constant roughness and cross section shape
along its entire length. Available conduit
shapes consist of both open and closed cross
sections.

Toolbars
Gutter Lets you place an open-section element that

models overflow. A gutter accepts the inflows
that are not being taken in by an inlet because
of capacity constraints. In addition, a gutter
also takes in the overflow from an inlet due to
flooding. There can only be one gutter
downstream of any element and the gutter
cannot be the only way water can leave an
element, there must also be a channel or a
conduit. Gutters are only used for routing; no
dynamic calculations are performed for gutter
elements.
Catch Basin Changes your mouse cursor into a catch basin
element symbol. Clicking the left mouse button
while this tool is active causes a catch basin
element to be placed at the location of the
mouse cursor.
Manhole Changes your mouse cursor into a manhole
while this tool is active causes a manhole
mouse cursor.
Transition Changes your mouse cursor into a transition
while this tool is active causes a transition
mouse cursor.
Outfall Changes your mouse cursor into an outfall
while this tool is active causes an outfall
mouse cursor.
Catchment Changes your mouse cursor into a catchment
element symbol. When this tool is active, click
in the drawing pane to begin drawing a polygon
that represents the catchment.
Border Changes your mouse cursor into a border
symbol. When the border tool is active, you can
draw a simple box in the drawing pane using
the mouse. For example, you might want to
draw a border around the entire model.

Text Changes your mouse cursor into a text symbol.

When the text tool is active, you can add
simple text to your model. Click anywhere in
the drawing pane to display the Text Editor
dialog box, which lets you enter text to be
displayed in your model.
Line Changes your mouse cursor into a line symbol.
When this tool is active, you can draw lines and
polygons in your model using the mouse.
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar provides access to the following buttons:
New Creates a new Bentley StormCAD V8 XM

Edition project. When you select this command,
the Select File to Create dialog box appears,
allowing you to define a name and directory
location for the new project.
Open Opens an existing Bentley StormCAD V8 XM

Edition project. When this command is
initialized, the Select Bentley StormCAD V8 XM
Edition Project to Open dialog box appears,
allowing you to browse to the project to be
opened.
Close Closes the current project.
Close All Closes all projects that are currently open.

Toolbars
Save Saves the current project.
Save All Saves all of the currently open projects.
Print Preview Opens the Print Preview window, displaying the

current view exactly as it will be printed. You can
select whether you want the print preview to be
Fit to Page or Scaled.
Print Prints the current view of the network as

displayed in the drawing pane. You can select
whether you want the printed image to be Fit to
Page or Scaled.
Edit Toolbar
The Edit toolbar provides access to the following buttons:
Undo Cancels your most recent action.
Redo Lets you redo the last cancelled action.
Delete Deletes the element(s) currently highlighted in

the drawing pane.
Clear Removes highlight visibility. Highlighting is

Highlight created through the Network Navigator.
Find Element Lets you find a specific element by choosing it

from a menu containing all elements in the
current model.

Analysis Toolbar
The Analysis toolbar provides access to the following button:
Calculation Opens the calculation executive summary

Summary report, which reports a summary of the
calculations performed on your model. For
more information, see “Calculation Executive
Summary Dialog Box”.
View Toolbar
The View toolbar provides access to the following buttons, which give you easy
access to many of the managers in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition.:
Element Opens the “Element Symbology Manager”,

Symbology which lets you create, view, and manage
annotation and color-coding in your project.
Background Opens the “Background Layer Manager”, which

Layers lets you create, view, and manage the
background layers associated with the project.
Network Opens the Network Navigator Manager (see

Navigator “Using the Network Navigator”), which lets you
quickly navigate to and review any selection set.
Selection Sets Opens the “Selection Sets Manager”, which lets

you create, view, and manage selection sets
associated with the project.
Queries Opens the “Query Manager”, which lets you

create SQL expressions for use with selection
sets and FlexTables.
Prototypes Opens the Prototypes Manager (see “Creating

Prototypes”), which lets you enter default values
for elements in your model. Prototypes can
reduce data entry requirements dramatically if a
group of network elements share common data.
FlexTables Opens the “FlexTables Manager”, which lets

you create, view, and manage the tabular reports
for the project.

Toolbars
Profiles Opens the “Profiles Manager”, which lets you

create, view, and manage the profiles for the
project.
Contours Opens the Contours Manager (see “Contours”),

which lets you create, view, and manage the
contours for the project.
Named Views Opens the Named Views manager (see “Using

Named Views”) where you can create, edit, and
use Named Views.
Aerial View Opens the Aerial View (see “Using Aerial

View”) navigation window.
Properties Turns the “Property Editor” display on or off.
Scenarios Toolbar
The Scenario toolbar provides access to the following buttons:
Scenario List Lets you quickly change the current scenario.

Box
Scenarios Opens the “Scenario Manager”, which lets you

create, view, and manage project scenarios.
Alternatives Opens the “Alternative Manager”, which lets

you create, view, and manage project
alternatives.
Calculation Opens the “Calculation Options Manager”,

Options which lets you create different profiles for
different calculation settings.

Compute Toolbar
The Compute toolbar provides access to the following buttons:
Validate Runs a diagnostic check on the network data to

alert you to possible problems that may be
encountered during calculation. This is the
manual validation command, and it checks for
input data errors. It differs in this respect from
the automatic validation that StormCAD runs
when the compute command is initiated, which
checks for network connectivity errors as well
as many other things beyond what the manual
validation checks.
Compute Calculates the network. Before calculating, an

automatic validation routine is triggered, which
checks the model for network connectivity
errors and performs other validation. For more
information, see “Calculating Your Model”.
User Opens the User Notifications Manager, allowing

Notifications you to view warnings and errors uncovered by
the validation process. This button does not
appear in the toolbar by default, but can be
added. For more information, see “Adding and
Removing Toolbar Buttons”.

Toolbars
Tools Toolbar
The Tools toolbar provides quick access to the same commands that are available in
the Tools menu. The Tools toolbar provides access to the following buttons.
Active Opens the Active Topology Selection toolbar,

Topology allowing you to add and remove elements from
Selection the current “Active Topology Alternative”.
ModelBuilder Opens the ModelBuilder Connections Manager,

which lets you create, edit, and manage
ModelBuilder connections to be used in the
model-building/model-synchronizing process.
For more information, see “ModelBuilder
Connections Manager”.
TRex Opens the TRex Wizard dialog, allowing you to

use TRex to assign node elevations
automatically. For more information, see “Using
TRex to Assign Node Elevations”.
Hyperlinks Lets you associate external files, such as

pictures or movie files, with elements. For more
information, see “Adding Hyperlinks to
Elements”.
User Data Opens the User Data Extension dialog box,

Extensions which lets you add and define custom data
fields. For example, you can add new fields such
as the pipe installation date. For more
information, see “User Data Extensions”.
Compact When you delete data from a Bentley

Database StormCAD V8 XM Edition project, such as
elements or alternatives, the database store that
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition uses can
become fragmented, causing unnecessarily large
data files, which impact performance
substantially. Compacting the database
eliminates the empty data records, thereby
defragmenting the datastore and improving the
performance of the file.
Synchronize Synchronizes the current model drawing with

Drawing the project database.

Update Update for the open model.

Database
Cache
Batch Pipe Opens the “Batch Split Pipe Dialog Box”,

Split allowing you to perform pipe split operations on
multiple pipes simultaneously.
Customize Run an existing external tool or create a new one

by opening up the External Tools manager (see
“External Tools”).
Options Opens the Options (see “Setting Options”)

dialog box, which lets you change global
settings such as display pane settings, drawing
scale, units, display precision and format used,
and element labeling.
Help Toolbar
The Help toolbar provides quick access to the same commands that are available in
the Help menu. The Help toolbar provides access to the following buttons.
Check for Opens your Web browser to our Web site,

Updates allowing you to check for Bentley StormCAD
V8 XM Edition updates.
Training Opens your browser to the Bentley Institute

page of the Bentley web site.
Online Opens your browser to the Support Center of the

Support Bentley web site.
Bentley.com Opens your browser to Bentley’s main web site.
Help Opens the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition

online help.

Toolbars
Components Toolbar
The Components toolbar provides quick access to the same commands that are avail-
able in the Components menu. The Components toolbar provides access to the
following buttons.
Default Design Opens the Default Design Constraints dialog ,

Constraints allowing you to specify the parameters of an automatic
design calculation. For more information, see “Default
Design Constraints”.
Storm Data Opens the Storm Data dialog box, which lets you
create, edit, and delete storm data. For more
information, see “Storm Data Dialog Box”.
Global Storm Opens the Global Storm Event Settings dialog box,
Events which lets you define project-wide global storm event
data. For more information, see “Global Storm Events
Dialog Box”.
Inlet Catalog Opens the Inlet Catalog dialog box, which lets you
create, edit, and view catalog inlets. Catalog inlets are
an efficient way to reuse common inlet definitions. For
more information, see “Creating Inlets”.
Conduit Opens the Conduit Catalog dialog box, which lets you
Catalog create, edit, and view catalog conduits. Catalog
conduits are an efficient way to reuse common
physical pipe definitions. For more information, see
“Conduit Catalog Dialog Box”.
Flow-Headloss Opens the Flow-Headloss Curves dialog box, allowing

Curves you to view, edit, and manage the flow-headloss
curves used in the project. For more information, see
“Flow-Headloss Curves”.
Engineering Opens the Engineering Libraries Manager. For more

Libraries information, see “Working with Engineering
Libraries”.

Reports Toolbar
The Reports toolbar provides quick access to the same commands that are available in
the Reports menu. The Reports toolbar provides access to the following buttons.
Scenario Opens the Scenario Summary Report.

Summary
Project Opens the Project Inventory Report, which

Inventory contains the number of each of the various
element types that are in the network.
Conduit Opens the Conduit Inventory Report, which

Inventory contains the number of each kind of conduit
along with the total length for each type.
Report Opens the Report Options dialog, allowing you

Options to customize the appearance of the preformatted
reports. See “Report Options” for more
information.

Toolbars
Select Toolbar
The Select toolbar provides quick access to the same select commands that are avail-
able in the Edit menu. The Select toolbar provides access to the following buttons.
Select By Lets you select elements in your model by

Polygon drawing a polygon in the drawing pane. Click in
the drawing pane to draw each side of the
polygon, then right-click and select Done when
the polygon is complete. All elements contained
within the polygon will be selected.
Select All Selects all of the elements in the network.
Select by Opens a submenu listing all available element

Element types. Select one of the element types from the
submenu to select all elements of that type in the
model.
Select by Opens a submenu listing all available element

Attribute types. Select one of the element types from the
submenu to open a query builder that allows you
to choose the attribute criteria that will
determine what elements will be selected.
Clear Deselects the currently highlighted element(s).

Selection
Invert Selects all currently unselected elements and

Selection deselects all currently selected elements.

Zoom Toolbar
The Zoom toolbar provides access to the zooming and panning tools. It provides
access to the following buttons:
Zoom Extents Sets the view so that the entire network is visible
in the drawing pane.
Zoom Window Activates the manual zoom tool, which lets you
specify a portion of the drawing to enlarge.
Zoom In Enlarges the size of the model in the drawing

pane.
Zoom Out Reduces the size of the model in the drawing

pane.
Zoom Enables the realtime zoom tool, which lets you

Realtime zoom in and out by moving the mouse while
holding down the left mouse button.
Zoom Center Opens the Zoom Center dialog box, which lets
you enter drawing coordinates that will be
centered in the drawing pane.
Zoom to Zooms to the currently selected element.

Selection

Toolbars
Zoom Previous Resets the zoom level to the last setting.
Zoom Next Resets the zoom level to the setting that was
active before a Zoom Previous command was
executed.
Pan Activates the Pan tool, which lets you move the
model within the drawing pane. When you select
this command, the cursor changes to a hand,
indicating that you can click and hold the left
mouse button and move the mouse to move the
drawing.
Refresh Updates the main window view according to the

Drawing latest information contained in the Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition datastore.
Customizing the Toolbars
You can customize Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition toolbars in any of the

following ways:
• “Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons”

• “Controlling Toolbars”
Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons

Toolbar buttons represent Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition menu commands. You
can remove buttons from any toolbar, and add commands to any toolbar on the
Commands tab of the Customize dialog box.
To add or remove a button from a toolbar:
1. Click the down arrow on the end of the toolbar you want to customize. A series of
submenus appear, allowing you to select or deselect any button in that toolbar.
2. Click Add or Remove Buttons then move the mouse cursor to the right until all
of the submenus appear, as shown in the following figure:

3. Click the space to left of the toolbar button you want to add. A check mark
appears in the submenu and the button appears in the toolbar.
or
Click the check mark next to the toolbar button you want to remove. The button
will no longer appear in the toolbar.
Controlling Toolbars
You can control toolbars in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition on the Toolbars tab of
the Customize dialog box. You can turn toolbars on and off, or move the toolbar to a
different location in the workspace.
To turn toolbars off:
Click View > Toolbars, then click the check mark next to the toolbar you want to turn
off.
To turn toolbars on:
Click View > Toolbars, then click in the space to the left of the toolbar you want to
turn on.
To move a toolbar to a different location in the workspace:
Move your mouse to the vertical dotted line on the left side of any toolbar, then drag
the toolbar to the desired location. If you move a toolbar away from the other toolbar,
the toolbar becomes a floating dialog box.

Dynamic Manager Display

You access most of the features in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition through a
system of dynamic windows called managers. For example, the look of the
elements is controlled in the Element Symbology manager while animation is
controlled in the Animation Control manager.
When you first start Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition, only two managers are
displayed: the Element Symbology and Background Layers managers. This is the
default workspace. You can display as many managers as you want and move them to
any location in the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition workspace.
To return to the default workspace:
Click View > Reset Workspace.
• If you return to the default workspace, the next time you start Bentley StormCAD
V8 XM Edition, you will lose any customizations you might have made to the
dynamic manager display.
Opening Managers
To open a manager:
1. Do one of the following:

– Select the desired manager from the View menu.
– Click a manager’s button on one of the toolbars.
– Press the keyboard shortcut for the desired manager.
2. If the manager is not already docked, you can drag it to the top, left- or right-side,
or bottom of the StormCAD window to dock it. For more information on docking
managers, see “Customizing Managers”.

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition Managers
The following table lists all the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition managers, their
toolbar buttons, and keyboard shortcuts.
Toolbar Keyboard
Button Manager Shortcut
Scenarios—lets you build a model run ALT+1

from alternatives. For more information,
see “Scenario Manager”.
Alternatives—lets you create and manage ALT+2

alternatives. For more information, see
“Alternative Manager”.
Calculation Options—lets you set ALT+3

parameters for the numerical engine. For
more information, see “Calculation Options
Manager”.
Element Symbology—controls how CTRL+1

elements look and what attributes are
displayed. For more information, see
“Element Symbology Manager”.
Background Layers—lets you control the CTRL+2

display of background layers. For more
information, see “Background Layer
Manager”.
Selection Sets—lets you create and CTRL+3

manage selection sets. For more
information, see “Selection Sets Manager”.
Network Navigator—helps you find nodes CTRL+4

in your model. For more information, see
“Using the Network Navigator”.
Queries—lets you create SQL expressions CTRL+5

for use with selection sets and FlexTables
For more information, see “Using Queries”.
Prototypes—lets you create and manage CTRL+6

prototypes. For more information, see
“Using Prototypes”.

Toolbar Keyboard
Button Manager Shortcut
FlexTables—lets you display and edit CTRL+7

tables of elements. For more information,
see “FlexTables Manager”.
Profiles —lets you draw profiles of parts of CTRL+9

your network. For more information, see
“Profiles Manager”.
Property Editor—displays properties of F4

individual elements or managers. For more
information, see “Property Editor”.
User Notifications—presents error and F8

warning messages resulting from a
calculation. For more information, see
“User Notifications”.
Note: Although the toolbar

button for this manager
does not appear by
default, you can add it to
the Compute toolbar.
Customizing Managers
When you first start Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition, you will see the default
workspace, in which a limited set of dockable managers are visible. You can decide
which managers will be displayed at any time and where they will be displayed. You
can also return to the default workspace any time.
There are four states for each manager:
Floating—A floating manager sits above the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition

workspace like a dialog box. You can drag a floating manager anywhere and continue
to work.
You can also:
• Resize a floating manager by dragging its edges.

• Close a floating manager by clicking on the x in the top right-hand corner of the
title bar.
• Change the properties of the manager by right-clicking on the title bar.

• Switch between multiple floating managers in the same location by clicking the
manager’s tab.
• Dock the manager by double-clicking the title bar.
Docked static—A docked static manager attaches to any of the four sides of the
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition window. If you drag a floating manager to any of
the four sides of the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition window, the manager will
attach or dock itself to that side of the window. The manager will stay in that location
unless you close it or make it dynamic. A vertical pushpin in the manager’s title bar
indicates its static state; click the pushpin to change the manager’s state to dynamic.
When the push pin is pointing downward (vertical push pin), the manager is docked.
You can also:
• Close a docked manager by left clicking on the x in the upper right corner of the
title bar.
• Change a docked manager into a floating manager by double-clicking the title bar,
or by dragging the manager to the desired location (for example, away from the
side of the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition window).
• Change a static docked manager into a dynamically docked manager by clicking
the push pin in the title bar.
• Switch between multiple docked managers in the same location by clicking the
manager’s tab.
Docked dynamic—A docked dynamic manager also docks to any of the four sides of
the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition window, but remains hidden except for a
single tab. Show a docked dynamic manager by moving the mouse over the tab, or by
clicking the tab. When the manager is showing (not hidden), a horizontal pushpin in
its title bar indicates its dynamic state.
You can also:
• Close a docked manager by left clicking on the x in the upper right corner of the
title bar.
• Change a docked dynamic manager into a docked static manager by clicking the
push pin (converting it from vertical to horizontal).
• Switch between multiple docked managers in the same location by moving the
mouse over the manager’s tab or by clicking the manager’s tab.
Closed—When a manager is closed, you cannot view it. Close a manager by clicking
the x in the right corner of the manager’s title bar. Open a manager by selecting the
manager from the View menu (for example, View > Element Symbology), or by
selecting the button for that manager on the appropriate toolbar.

Customization Manager
Customization Manager
The Customization Manager allows you to create customization profiles that define
changes to the default user interface. Customization profiles allow you to turn off the
visibility of properties in the Properties Editor.
Customization Profiles can be created for a single project or shared across projects.
There are also a number of predefined profiles.
The Customization Manager consists of the following controls:
New This button opens a submenu containing the

following commands:
• Folder: This command creates a new
folder under the currently highlighted
node in the list pane.
• Customization: This command creates a
new customization profile under the
currently highlighted node in the list
pane.
Delete This button deletes the currently highlighted

folder or customization profile.
Rename This button allows you to rename the

currently highlighted folder or customization
profile.
Edit Opens the Customization Editor dialog

allowing you to edit the currently highlighted
customization profile.
Help Opens the online help.

Customization Editor Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to edit the customization profiles that are created in the
Customization Manager. In the Customization editor you can turn off the visibility of
various properties in the Property Grid.
You can turn off any number of properties and/or entire categories of properties in a
single customization profile.
To remove a property from the property grid:
1. Select the element type from the pulldown menu.

2. Find the property you want to turn off by expanding the node of the category the
property is under.
3. Uncheck the box next to the property to be turned off.
4. Click OK.
To turn off all of the properties under a category:
1. Select the element type from the pulldown menu.

2. Uncheck the box next to the category to be turned off.
3. Click OK.

Stand-Alone Editor
Stand-Alone Editor
The Stand-Alone Editor is the workspace that contains the various managers, toolbars,
and menus, along with the drawing pane, that make up the Bentley StormCAD V8
XM Edition interface. The Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition interface uses dock-
able windows and toolbars, so the position of the various interface elements can be
manually adjusted to suit your preference.

By default, the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition environment looks like this:

MicroStation Environment
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition features support for MicroStation integration.
You run Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition in both MicroStation and stand-alone
mode.
The MicroStation functionality has been implemented in a way that is the same as the
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition base product. Once you become familiar with the
stand-alone mode, you will not have any difficulty using the product in MicroStation
mode.
In MicroStation mode, you will have access to the full range of functionality available
in the MicroStation design and drafting environment. The standard environment is
extended and enhanced by using MicroStation’s MDL (MicroStation Development
Language) client layer that lets you create, view, and edit the native Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition network model while in MicroStation.
MDL is a complete development environment that lets applications take full advan-
tage of the power of MicroStation and MicroStation-based vertical applications. MDL
can be used to develop simple utilities, customized commands or sophisticated
commercial applications for vertical markets.
Some of the advantages of working in MicroStation mode include:
• Lay out network links and structures in fully-scaled mode in the same design and
drafting environment that you use to develop your engineering plans.
• You will have access to any other third party applications that you currently use,
along with any custom MDL applications.
• Use native MicroStation insertion snaps to precisely position Bentley StormCAD
V8 XM Edition elements with respect to other entities in the MicroStation
drawing.
• Use native MicroStation commands on Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition model
entities with automatic update and synchronization with the model database.
• Control destination levels for model elements and associated label text and anno-
tation, giving you control over styles, line types, and visibility of model elements.
Note: StormCAD V8 XM Edition has been certified with MicroStation V8

(8.9.4).
The MicroStation environment includes:
• “MicroStation Mode Graphical Layout”

• “MicroStation Project Files”
• “Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition Element Properties”

• “Element Properties”
• “Levels”
• “Text Styles”
• “Working with Elements”
• “Working with Elements Using MicroStation Commands”
• “Snap Menu”
• “Polygon Element Visibility”
• “Undo/Redo”
• “Special Considerations”
MicroStation Mode Graphical Layout
In MicroStation mode, our products provide a set of extended options and function-
ality beyond those available in stand-alone mode. This additional functionality
provides enhanced control over general application settings and options and extends
the command set, giving you control over the display of model elements within
MicroStation.
Key differences between MicroStation and stand-alone mode include:
• Full element symbol editing functionality is available through the use of custom
cells. All elements and graphical decorations (flow arrows, control indicators,
etc.) are contained within a StormCAD .cel file.
You can control the appearance and destination of all model elements using the
Element Levels command under the MicroStation View menu. For example, you can
assign a specific level for all outlets, as well as assign the label and annotation text
style to be applied.

Note: Any MicroStation tool that deletes the target element (such as
Trim and IntelliTrim) will also remove the connection of that
element to StormCAD. After the StormCAD connection is
removed, the element is no longer a valid StormCAD link and will
not show properties on the property grid.
MicroStation Project Files
When using Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition in MicroStation mode, there are

three files that fundamentally define a Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition model
project:
• Drawing File (.DGN)—The MicroStation drawing file contains the elements that
define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that
serves as the model background.
• Model File (.STC or .STM)—The model file contains model data specific to
StormCAD, including project option settings, color-coding and annotation
settings, etc. Note that the MicroStation .dgn that is associated with a particular
model may not have the same filename as the model’s .stc or .stm file.
• Database File (.MDB)—The model database file that contains all of the input and
output data for the model. Note that the MicroStation .dgn that is associated with a
particular model may not bave the same filename as the model’s .mdb file.
To send the model to another user, all three files are required.
It is important to understand that archiving the drawing file is not sufficient to repro-
duce the model. You must also preserve the associated .stc or .stm and .MDB files.
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition Element Properties
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition element properties includes:
• “Element Properties”
• “Levels”
• “Text Styles”

Element Properties
When working in the MicroStation mode, this feature will display a dialog box
containing fields for the currently selected element’s associated properties. To modify
an attribute, click each associated grid cell.
You can also review or modify MicroStation drawing information about an

element(s), such as its type, attributes, and geometry, by using the Element Informa-
tion dialog. To access the Element Information dialog, click the Element Information
button or click the Element menu and select the Information command.
Levels
To control display of elements in the selected levels, use the Level Display dialog box.
To access the Level Display dialog, click the Settings menu and select the Level >
Display command.
If you want to freeze elements in levels, select Global Freeze from the MicroStation
View Display menu in the Level Display dialog.
You can create new Levels in the Level Manager. To access the Level Manager, click
the Settings menu and select the Level > Manager command.
To control the display of levels, use level filters. Within MicroStation, you can also
create, edit, and save layer filters to DWG files in the Level Manager. To access the
Level Manager, click the Settings menu and select the Level > Manager command.
Layer filters are loaded when a DWG file is opened, and changes are written back
when the file is saved.
Element Levels Dialog

This dialog allows you to assign newly created elements and their associated annota-
tions to specific MicroStation levels.
To assign a level, use the pulldown menu next to an element type (under the Element
Level column heading) to choose the desired level for that element. You can choose a
seperate level for each element and for each element’s associated annotation.
You cannot create new levels from this dialog; to create new levels use the MicroSta-
tion Level Manager. To access the Level Manager, click the Settings menu and select
the Level > Manager command.

Text Styles
You can view, edit, and create Text Style settings in MicroStation mode by clicking
the Element menu and selecting the Text Styles command to open the Text Styles
dialog.
Working with Elements
Working with elements includes:
• “Edit Elements”
• “Deleting Elements”
• “Modifying Elements”
• “Working with Elements Using MicroStation Commands”
• “Snap Menu”
• “Undo/Redo”
Edit Elements
Elements can be edited in one of two ways in MicroStation mode:
Element Properties Dialog: To access the Element Properties dialog, click the
StormCAD View menu and select the Properties command. For more information
about the Element Properties dialog, see “Property Editor”.
FlexTables: To access the FlexTables dialog, click the StormCAD View menu and
select the FlexTables command. For more information about the FlexTables dialog,
see “Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables”.

Deleting Elements
In MicroStation mode, you can delete elements by clicking on them using the Delete
Element tool, or by highlighting the element to be deleted and clicking your
keyboard’s Delete key.
Note: Any MicroStation tool that deletes the target element (such as
Trim and IntelliTrim) will also remove the connection of that
element to StormCAD. After the StormCAD connection is
removed, the element is no longer a valid link and will not show
properties on the property grid. Storm.
Modifying Elements
In MicroStation mode, these commands are selected from the shift-right-click shortcut
menu (hold down the Shift key while right-clicking). They are used for scaling and
rotating model entities.
Change Pipe Widths

In MicroStation mode, you can change the line width through the Element Informa-
tion dialog. To access the Element Information dialog, click the Element menu and
select the Information command. To change the width of a pipe, select it and open the
Element Information dialog. Then change the value in the Weight pulldown menu
Edit Elements
In MicroStation mode, this menu command is used to open a spreadsheet FlexTable
editor or a selection of one or more network figures. You are prompted to select
figures on which to build a table.
Working with Elements Using MicroStation Commands
Working with elements using MicroStation commands includes:
• “Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition Custom MicroStation Entities”

• “MicroStation Commands”
• “Moving Elements”
• “Moving Element Labels”

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition Custom MicroStation Entities

The primary MicroStation-based Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition element enti-
ties—pipes, channels, gutter links, manholes, catch basins, outfalls, pond outlet struc-
tures, and cross section nodes—are all implemented using native MicroStation
elements. These elements have feature linkages to define them as StormCAD objects.
This means that you can perform standard MicroStation commands (see “MicroSta-
tion Commands”) as you normally would, and the model database will be updated
automatically to reflect these changes.
It also means that the model will enforce the integrity of the network topological state.
Therefore, if you delete a nodal element such as a junction, its connecting pipes will
also be deleted since their connecting nodes topologically define model pipes.
Using MDL technology ensures the database will be adjusted and maintained during
Undo and Redo transactions.
MicroStation Commands
When running in MicroStation mode, Haestad Methods products make use of all the
advantages that MicroStation has, such as plotting capabilities and snap features.
Additionally, MicroStation commands can be used as you would with any design
project. For example, our products’ elements and annotation can be manipulated using
common MicroStation commands.
Moving Elements
When using MicroStation mode, the MicroStation commands Move, Scale, Rotate,
Mirror, and Array can be used to move elements.
To move a node, execute the MicroStation command by either typing it at the

command prompt or selecting it. Follow the MicroStation prompts, and the node and
its associated label will move together. The connecting pipes will shrink or stretch
depending on the new location of the node.
Moving Element Labels

When using MicroStation mode, the MicroStation commands Move, Scale, Rotate,
Mirror, and Array can be used to move element text labels.
To move an element text label separately from the element, click the element label you
wish to move. The grips will appear for the label. Execute the MicroStation command
either by typing it at the command prompt, by selecting it from the tool palette, or by
selecting it from the right-click menu. Follow the MicroStation prompt, and the label
will be moved without the element.

Snap Menu
When using MicroStation mode, you can enable the Snaps button bar by clicking the
Settings menu and selecting the Snaps > Button Bar command. See the MicroStation
documentation for more information about using snaps.
Polygon Element Visibility
By default, polygon elements are sent to the back of the level order when they are
drawn. If the level order is modified, polygon elements can interfere with the visibility
of other elements. This can be remedied using the MicroStation Level Manager (Click
the Settings menua and select the Level > Manager command.).
To access the MicroStation Level Manager, click the Settings menu and select the
Level > Manager command.
Undo/Redo
If you use the native MicroStation undo, you are limited to a single redo level.
If you undo using the MicroStation undo/redo and you restore Bentley StormCAD V8
XM Edition elements that have been previously deleted, some model state attributes
such as diameters or elevations may be lost, even though the locational and topolog-
ical state is fully consistent. This will only happen in situations where the Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition command history has been deleted. In such cases, you will
be warned to check your data carefully.
In MicroStation mode, you have two types of undo/redo available to you. From the
Edit menu, you have access to Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition undo and redo.
Alternatively, you can perform the native MicroStation undo and redo by typing at the
MicroStation command line. The implementations of the two different operation types
are quite distinct.
The menu-based undo and redo commands operate exclusively on Bentley StormCAD
V8 XM Edition elements by invoking the commands directly on the model server. The
main advantage of using the specialized command is that you will have unlimited
undo and redo levels. This is an important difference, since in layout or editing it is
quite useful to be able to safely undo and redo an arbitrary number of transactions.
Whenever you use a native MicroStation undo, the server model will be notified when
any Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition entities are affected by the operation. Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition will then synchronize the model to the drawing state.
Wherever possible, the model will seek to map the undo/redo onto the model server’s

managed command history. If the drawing’s state is not consistent with any pending
undo or redo transactions held by the server, Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition will
delete the command history. In this case, the model will synchronize the drawing and
server models.
Special Considerations
Special considerations include:
• “Import Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition”

• “Annotation Display”
• “Use StormCAD Z Order Command”
Import Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition

When running Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition in MicroStation mode, this
command imports a selected Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition .stc or .stm data file
for use in the current drawing. The new project file will now correspond to the
drawing name, such as, CurrentDrawingName.stc (or .stm). Whenever you save
changes to the network model through Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition, the asso-
ciated .stc or .stm data file is updated and can be loaded into Bentley StormCAD V8
XM Edition 4.0 or higher.
Warning! A StormCAD Project can only be imported to a new, empty

MicroStation design model.
Annotation Display
Some fonts do not correctly display the full range of characters used by StormCAD’s
annotation feature because of a limited character set. If you are having problems with
certain characters displaying improperly or not at all, try using another font.
Use StormCAD Z Order Command

When this control is toggled on, StormCAD will parse the elements when the screen is
redrawn. It takes significant time to do this parsing, so for larger models performance
can be improved by toggling this control off.

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition features support for AutoCAD integration. You

can determine if you have purchased AutoCAD functionality for your license of
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition by using the Help > About menu option. Click
the Registration button to view the feature options that have been purchased with
your application license. If AutoCAD support is enabled, then you will be able to run
your Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition application in both AutoCAD and stand-
alone mode.
The AutoCAD Workspace

In AutoCAD mode, you will have access to the full range of functionality available in
the AutoCAD design and drafting environment. The standard environment is extended
and enhanced by an AutoCAD ObjectARX Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition client
layer that lets you create, view, and edit the native Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition
network model while in AutoCAD.
The AutoCAD functionality has been implemented in a way that is the same as the
StormCAD base product. Once you become familiar with the stand-alone mode, you
will not have any difficulty using the product in AutoCAD mode.
Some of the advantages of working in AutoCAD mode include:
• Layout network links and structures in fully-scaled mode in the same design and
drafting environment that you use to develop your engineering plans. You will
have access to any other third party applications that you currently use, along with
any custom LISP, ARX, or VBA applications that you have developed.
• Use native AutoCAD insertion snaps to precisely position Bentley StormCAD V8
XM Edition elements with respect to other entities in the AutoCAD drawing.
• Use native AutoCAD commands such as ERASE, MOVE, and ROTATE on
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition model entities with automatic update and
synchronization with the model database.
Control destination layers for model elements and associated label text and annota-
tion, giving you control over styles, line types, and visibility of model elements.
Note: Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition supports AutoCAD 2008 only.
Click one of the following links to learn more about Bentley StormCAD V8 XM
Edition AutoCAD environment:
• “AutoCAD Integration with StormCAD”

• “AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout”
• “Drawing Setup”
• “Symbol Visibility”

• “AutoCAD Project Files”

• “Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands”
• “Undo/Redo”
• “Special Considerations”
• “Importing StormCAD Data”
• “Working with Proxies”
• “AutoCAD Integration with StormCAD”
• “AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout”
• “Menus”
• “Toolbars”
• “Drawing Setup”
• “Symbol Visibility”
AutoCAD Integration with StormCAD
When you install StormCAD after you install AutoCAD, integration between the two
is automatically configured.
If you install AutoCAD after you install StormCAD, you must manually integrate the
two by selecting Start > All Programs > Haestad Methods >StormCAD > Integrate
StormCAD with AutoCAD. The integration utility runs automatically. You can then
run StormCAD in AutoCAD mode.
The Integrate StormCAD with AutoCAD command can also be used to fix problems
with the AutoCAD configuration file. For example, if you have StormCAD installed
on the same system as Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition and you uninstall or rein-
stall StormCAD, the AutoCAD configuration file becomes unusable. To fix this
problem, you can delete the configuration file then run the Integrate StormCAD with
AutoCAD command.

AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout
In AutoCAD mode, our products provide a set of extended options and functionality
beyond those available in stand-alone mode. This additional functionality provides
enhanced control over general application settings and options and extends the
command set, giving you control over the display of model elements within
AutoCAD.
Note: In AutoCAD 2006, you must hold down the mouse button to keep
the submenu open while selecting an element from the layout
toolbar. Alternate layout methods include using the right-click
menu to select elements or using the command line.
Drawing Setup
When working in the AutoCAD mode, you may work with our products in many
different AutoCAD scales and settings. However, Haestad Methods product elements
can only be created and edited in model space.
Symbol Visibility
Note: In AutoCAD, it is possible to delete element label text using the

ERASE command. You should not use ERASE to control
visibility of labels. If you desire to control the visibility of a
selected group of element labels, you should move them to
another layer that can be frozen or turned off.
In AutoCAD mode, you can control display of element labels using the check box in
the Drawing Options dialog box.
AutoCAD Project Files
When using Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition in AutoCAD mode, there are three
files that fundamentally define a Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition model project:
• Drawing File (.dwg)—The AutoCAD drawing file contains the custom entities
that define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that
serves as the model background.

• Model File (.stc or .stm)—The native Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition model

database file that contains all the element properties, along with other important
model data. Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition .STC or .STM files can be loaded
and run using the Stand-Alone Editor. These files may be copied and sent to other
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition users who are interested in running your
project. This is the most important file for the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition
model.
• SewerCAD Exchange Database (.stc.mdb)—The intermediate format for
SewerCAD project files. When you import a SewerCAD file into Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition, you first export it from SewerCAD into this format,
then import the .stc.mdb file into Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition. Note that
this works the same in the Stand-Alone Editor and in AutoCAD. For more infor-
mation on importing SewerCAD files, see “Importing StormCAD Data”.
The three files have the same base name. It is important to understand that archiving
the drawing file is not sufficient to reproduce the model. You must also preserve the
associated .STC or .STM and stc.mdb file.
Since the .STC or .STM file can be run and modified separately from the .dwg file
using the Stand-Alone Editor, it is quite possible for the two files to get out of sync.
Should you ever modify the model in the Stand-Alone Editor and then later load the
AutoCAD .dwg file, the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition program compares file
dates, and automatically use the built-in AutoCAD synchronization routine.
Click one of the following links to learn more about AutoCAD project files and
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition:
• “Drawing Synchronization”
• “Saving the Drawing as Drawing*.dwg”
Drawing Synchronization
Whenever you open a Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition-based drawing file in
AutoCAD, the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition model server will start. The first
thing that the application will do is load the associated Bentley StormCAD V8 XM
Edition model (.STC or .STM) file. If the time stamps of the drawing and model file
are different, Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition will automatically perform a
synchronization. This protects against corruption that might otherwise occur from
separately editing the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition model file in stand-alone
mode, or editing proxy elements at an AutoCAD station where the Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition application is not loaded.

The synchronization check will occur in two stages:
• First, Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition will compare the drawing model

elements with those in the server model. Any differences will be listed. Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition enforces network topological consistency between the
server and the drawing state. If model elements have been deleted or added in the
.STC or .STM file during a StormCAD session, or if proxy elements have been
deleted, Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition will force the drawing to be consis-
tent with the native database by restoring or removing any missing or excess
drawing custom entities.
• After network topology has been synchronized, Bentley StormCAD V8 XM
Edition will compare other model and drawing states such as location, labels, and
flow directions.
You can run the Synchronization check at any time using the following command:
STMCSYNCSERVER
Or by selecting Tools > Database Utilities > Synchronize Drawing.
Saving the Drawing as Drawing*.dwg
Note: If this situation inadvertently occurs (save on quit for example),

restart AutoCAD, use the Open command to open the
Drawing*.dwg file from its saved location, and use the Save As
command to save the drawing and model data to a different
name.
AutoCAD uses Drawing*.dwg as its default drawing name. Saving your drawing as
the default AutoCAD drawing name (for instance Drawing1.dwg) should be avoided,
as it makes overwriting model data very likely. When you first start AutoCAD, the
new empty drawing is titled Drawing*.dwg, regardless of whether one exists in the
default directory. Since our modeling products create model databases associated with
the AutoCAD drawing, the use of Drawing*.dwg as the saved name puts you at risk of
causing synchronization problems between the AutoCAD drawing and the modeling
files.
Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands
This section describes how to work with elements using AutoCAD commands,
including:
This section includes the following topics about working with elements using
AutoCAD commands:
• “StormCAD Custom AutoCAD Entities”

• “AutoCAD Commands”
• “Explode Elements”
• “Moving Elements”
• “Moving Element Labels”
• “Snap Menu”
StormCAD Custom AutoCAD Entities
The primary AutoCAD-based StormCAD element entities—conduits, channels,

gutters, manholes, catch basins, outfalls, catchments, and transitions—are all imple-
mented using ObjectARX custom objects. Thus, they are vested with a specialized
model awareness that ensures that any editing actions you perform will result in an
appropriate update of the model database.
This means that you can perform standard AutoCAD commands (see “AutoCAD
Commands”) as you normally would, and the model database will be updated auto-
matically to reflect these changes.
It also means that the model will enforce the integrity of the network topological state.
Therefore, if you delete a nodal element such as a junction, its connecting pipes will
also be deleted since their connecting nodes topologically define model pipes.
Using ObjectARX technology ensures the database will be adjusted and maintained
during Undo and Redo transactions.
AutoCAD Commands
When running in AutoCAD mode, Haestad Methods products make use of all the
advantages that AutoCAD has, such as plotting capabilities and snap features. Addi-
tionally, AutoCAD commands can be used as you would with any design project. For
example, our products’ elements and annotation can be manipulated using common
AutoCAD commands.

Explode Elements
In AutoCAD mode, running the AutoCAD Explode command will transform all
custom entities into equivalent AutoCAD native entities. When a custom entity is
exploded, all associated database information is lost. Be certain to save the exploded
drawing under a separate filename.
Use Explode to render a drawing for finalizing exhibits and publishing maps of the
model network. You can also deliver exploded drawings to clients or other individuals
who do not own a Bentley Systems Product license, since a fully exploded drawing
will not be comprised of any ObjectARX proxy objects. For more information, see
“Working with Proxies”.
Moving Elements
When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror,
and Array can be used to move elements.
To move a node, execute the AutoCAD command by either typing it at the command
prompt or selecting it. Follow the AutoCAD prompts, and the node and its associated
label will move together. The connecting pipes will shrink or stretch depending on the
new location of the node.
Moving Element Labels

When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror,
and Array can be used to move element text labels.
To move an element text label separately from the element, click the element label you
wish to move. The grips will appear for the label. Execute the AutoCAD command
either by typing it at the command prompt, by selecting it from the tool palette, or by
selecting it from the right-click menu. Follow the AutoCAD prompt, and the label will
be moved without the element.
Snap Menu
When using AutoCAD mode, the Snap menu is a standard AutoCAD menu that
provides options for picking an exact location of an object. See the Autodesk
AutoCAD documentation for more information.
Polygon Element Visibility

By default, polygon elements are sent to the back of the draw order when they are
drawn. If the draw order is modified, polygon elements can interfere with the visibility
of other elements. This can be remedied using the AutoCAD Draw Order toolbar.
To access the AutoCAD Draw Order toolbar, right-click on the AutoCAD toolbar and
click the Draw Order entry in the list of available toolbars.

By default, polygon elements are filled. You can make them unfilled (just borders
visible) using the AutoCAD FILL command. After turning fill mode OFF, you must
REGEN to redraw the polygons.
Undo/Redo
Note: If you use the native AutoCAD undo, you are limited to a single
redo level. The Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition undo/redo is
faster than the native AutoCAD undo/redo. If you are rolling back
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition model edits, it is
recommended that you use the menu-based Bentley StormCAD
V8 XM Edition undo/redo.
If you undo using the AutoCAD undo/redo and you restore

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition elements that have been
previously deleted, morphed, or split, some model state
attributes such as diameters or elevations may be lost, even
though the locational and topological state is fully consistent.
This will only happen in situations where the Bentley StormCAD
V8 XM Edition command history has been deleted. In such
cases, you will be warned to check your data carefully.
In AutoCAD mode, you have two types of undo/redo available to you. From the Edit
menu, you have access to Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition undo and redo. Alterna-
tively, you can perform the native AutoCAD undo and redo by typing at the AutoCAD
command line. The implementations of the two different operation types are quite
distinct.
The menu-based undo and redo commands operate exclusively on Bentley StormCAD
V8 XM Edition elements by invoking the commands directly on the model server. The
main advantage of using the specialized command is that you will have unlimited
undo and redo levels. This is an important difference, since in layout or editing it is
quite useful to be able to safely undo and redo an arbitrary number of transactions.
Whenever you use a native AutoCAD undo, the server model will be notified when
any Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition entities are affected by the operation. Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition will then synchronize the model to the drawing state.
Wherever possible, the model will seek to map the undo/redo onto the model server’s
managed command history. If the drawing’s state is not consistent with any pending
undo or redo transactions held by the server, Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition will
delete the command history. In this case, the model will synchronize the drawing and
server models.

There are special considerations to remember when you perform the following tasks
in AutoCAD mode:
• “Importing StormCAD Data”

• “Working with Proxies”
Importing StormCAD Data
When running StormCADin AutoCAD mode, this command imports a selected

StormCAD data (.STC or .STM) file for use in the current drawing. The new project
file will now correspond to the drawing name, such as, CurrentDrawingName.STC or
CurrentDrawingName.STM. Whenever you save changes to the network model
through StormCAD, the associated .STC or .STM data file is updated and can be
loaded into StormCAD.
Warning! A StormCAD Project can only be imported to a new, empty

AutoCAD drawing.
Working with Proxies

If you open a Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition drawing file on an AutoCAD work-
station that does not have the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition application
installed, you will get an AutoCAD Proxy Information message box. This is because
the executable logic for managing the AutoCAD entities is not available, and the
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition modeling elements are not associated with the
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition native database.
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition proxy objects can be moved and erased.

However, doing so will put the drawing state out of sync with the model database if
the drawing is saved with its original name. If this happens, and you later reload the
drawing on an AutoCAD station that is running a Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition
application, the application will automatically load and will attempt to reconcile any
differences it finds by automatically loading its Database Synchronization routine.
(For more information, see “Drawing Synchronization”).


Chapter
Quick Start Lessons 3

The purpose of this chapter is to provide step-by-step lessons to familiarize you with
some of the features and capabilities of StormCAD. The lessons serve as a means to
get you started exploring and using the software. We have included sample files
located in your Bentley\StormCAD8\Lessons directory for you to experiment with
and explore. If you need help, press F1 to access our on-line help.
Each lesson is independent. You do not need to complete one to start the next. Lessons
3 and 4 can be started using files located in your Bentley\StormCAD8\Lessons direc-
tory.
Lesson 1: Creating a Schematic Network

StormCAD is an extremely efficient tool for laying out a gravity flow sewer model. It
is easy to prepare a schematic model and let StormCAD take care of the link-node
connectivity.
You do not need to be concerned with assigning labels to pipes and junctions, because
StormCAD will handle this automatically. When creating a scaled drawing, pipe
lengths are automatically calculated from the pipe’s drawn alignment. Since this
example is a schematic (not scaled) layout, you will need to enter the pipe lengths.

In this lesson, we will layout and analyze the following schematic network.
Part 1 - Creating a New Schematic Project File
1. Start StormCAD.
2. When the Welcome to StormCAD dialog appears, click the Create New Project
button. If it does not appear, choose File\New from the pull-down menu.
3. Click the File menu and select Save As.
4. Enter a file name such as Lesson.stc for your project, and click Save.

Quick Start Lessons
5. Click the File menu and select Project Properties.

6. Enter the information as pictured below, then click OK
Part 2 - Laying Out the Network
This example is a schematic (not scaled) drawing, and the units used are US
customary units. Before laying out any elements:
1. Click the Tools menu and select Options.

2. Click the Drawing tab and change the Drawing Mode to Schematic.
3. Click the Units tab and ensure that the Default Unit System for New Project
menu is set to US. Click OK.
4. To draw the sewer network shown previously, click the Layout tool from the
toolbar , then select Conduit from the submenu. Notice that the cursor is
a crosshair with a square to show that you are placing catchbasins.
5. Move the cursor onto the drawing space and click once to place the catchbasin
representing catchbasin CB-1.

6. Move the cursor to the location of the next catchbasin, CB-2, and click again to
place the element. A conduit will automatically be drawn between the two catch-
basins.
7. Place the third catchbasin, CB-3, in the same fashion.

8. Right-click anywhere in the drawing pane to open a pop-up menu. This menu is
used to change the element type while laying out a system. We will use it to place
the outfall, OF-1, at the end of the next conduit. From the pop-up menu, click
Outfall and click the drawing pane to place the outlet at the desired location.
9. Right-click again and select the Done command to stop laying out elements.
10. Click the Catchment button on the toolbar.

Quick Start Lessons
You can lay out catchment elements in either of two ways:

– Click each corner of the catchment polygon, then select Done from the right-
click popup menu, or
– Hold down the Ctrl button, then click in the drawing view to define where the
center of the catchment polygon will be. Drag the mouse to define the size of
the catchment, then click again.
11. Lay out 3 catchments, one around each of the catch basin elements.
Part 3 - Entering Data
There are four ways to enter and modify element data in StormCAD:
• Properties Editor- You may use the Select tool and double-click an element to bring
up its Properties Editor.
• FlexTables - Click the View menu and select FlexTables, or click the FlexTables
button to bring up dynamic tables that show all the editable and non-editable attributes
of elements of a similar type, such as nodes and links. You can edit the data as you
would in a spreadsheet.
• ModelBuilder - ModelBuilder allows the direct import and export of element data
from outside sources such as Excel spreadsheets, GIS, Jet Databases like Microsoft
Access, and many others. This is further explained in the chapter on ModelBuilder.

• Alternative Editors - Alternatives are used for entering data for different "What If?"
situations for use in Scenario Management. This is covered extensively in the
Scenarios and Alternatives chapter and a later Lesson.
Entering Data through the Properties Editor

To access an element’s Properties Editor, double-click the element in the drawing pane
with the cursor. If the Properties Editor dialog is already open, a single click will
switch the editor to display the attributes for the newly highlighted element.
1. Open the Properties Editor for the outfall, OF-1.

2. Enter 94.0 ft for the Elevation (Ground).
3. Enter 83.0 ft for the Elevation (Invert). If the Set Invert to Ground Elevation
field is marked True, StormCAD will automatically set the invert elevation to the
ground elevation.
4. Finally, ensure that Free Outfall is selected from the Boundary Condition Type
choice list.

Quick Start Lessons
5. All other elements can be modified in the same way using the input data from the
following tables. If a value is not specified for a particular attribute, leave the
default value:
Table 3-1: Catch Basin Input Data: Physical and Physical (Structure Losses) Sections
Catch Elevation Elevation Elevation Headloss Headloss

Basin (Ground) (Rim) (Invert) Method Coefficient
Label
CB-1 99.0 99.0 89.0 Standard 0.5
CB-2 97.0 97.0 87.0 Standard 0.5
CB-3 95.0 95.0 85.0 Standard 0.5
Inlet data is associated with Catch basin elements. When selecting an inlet, you
can choose a generic Maximum Capacity or Percent Capture inlet type, or you can
define a custom inlet in the Inlets Catalog dialog. After an inlet is defined in the
Inlets Catalog dialog, it can be reused for any number of catch basin elements.
6. Click the Components menu and select Inlet Catalog.
7. In the Inlets Catalog dialog, click the New button. Leave the default name of
Inlet - 1.
8. Change the Inlet Type to Grate.
9. Enter the remaining data in the appropriate fields as shown in the screen below:
10. Click the Close button.

11. Click CB-1.

12. Change the Inlet Type to Catalog Inlet.

13. In the Inlet field, choose Inlet - 1.
14. Enter the remaining inlet data according to the values in the table below. Use the
Catalog Inlet type and Inlet - 1 for each catch basin. :
Table 3-2: Catch Basin Input Data: Inlet Location and Inlet Opening Sections
Catch Inlet Longitudinal Manning’s Grate Clogging

Basin Location Slope (Inlet) n (Inlet) Length Factor
Label
CB-1 On Grade 0.020 0.012 4.0 20.0
CB-2 On Grade 0.020 0.012 4.0 20.0
CB-3 In Sag 0.020 N/A 4.0 20.0
15. Click on CM-1.

16. In the Outflow Node field, click <Select...>.
17. Click CB-1 in the drawing pane to select it as the outflow node for CM-1.
18. Enter the remaining data for CM-1 and the other catchment elements (including
ourflow node assignment) using the values in the following table:.
Table 3-3: Catchment Input Data
Catchment Outflow Area Rational C Time of

Label Node Concentration
CM-1 CB-1 0.50 0.8 10
CM-2 CB-2 0.30 0.8 15
CM-3 CB-3 0.35 0.7 15
19. Conduits can be one of two types: User Defined or a Catalog Conduit. The
attributes of User Defined conduits are edited directly. The attributes of a Catalog
Conduit are associated with the definition created in the Conduit Catalog dialog.
Catalog Conduits can be reused any number of times.
20. Click the Components menu and select Conduit Catalog.
21. Click the New button. Leave the default name of Catalog Conduit - 1.
22. Change the Conduit Shape to Circle.
23. Enter a Diameter of 24 in.

Quick Start Lessons
24. Click the ellipsis (...) button next to the Material Field. This will open the Mate-
rials Engineering Libraries.
Engineering Libraries store a number of predefined values associated with a
specific attribute. The Materials Library contains various material definitions and
include the customary roughness values for common materials.
25. In the Engineering Libraries dialog that appears, expand the top-level Material
Libraries node, then expand the MaterialLibrary.xml node.
26. Highlight the Concrete library entry and click the Select button. You can select a
number of different materials to create a list of allowable materials for the catalog
conduit. You will then be able to select from the allowable materials when you
define the conduit catalog in the model.

27. The new catalog conduit has now been defined. Click the Close button.
28. Now we will assign the properties associated with the catalog conduit we just
created to the conduits in the model. Click conduit CO-1.
29. Under Conduit Type, select Catalog Conduit.
30. Under Material, select the only available entry, Concrete.
31. Click Section Size and select Conduit Catalog - 1.
32. Repeat steps 28-31 for CO-2 and CO-3.

Quick Start Lessons
Entering Data using FlexTables

It is often more convenient to enter data for similar elements into a tabular form rather
than to individually click each element, enter the data through the Properties editor,
and then move on to the next element.
1. Click the View menu and select FlexTables or click the FlexTables button to
open the FlexTables Manager.
2. Double-click the Conduit table under the Tables - Predefined category.

3. The upstream and downstream inverts and the length still need to be defined for
the conduits. These attributes are not in the predefined table, so we must add
them. Click the Edit button.
4. In the table editor, the left pane lists the available attributes, and the right pane
lists the attributes displayed in the table. Double-click the following attributes in
the left pane to add them to the right pane: Invert (Downstream), Invert
(Upstream), Length (User Defined), Set Invert to Downstream?, and Set
Invert to Upstream?. Click OK.
5. The newly added attributes are now displayed at the right side of the table.
Uncheck the boxes under Set Invert to Downstream? and Set Invert to
Upstream? for all three conduits and enter the remaining data as shown in the
screen below.
6. Close the FlexTable and the FlexTables manager.

Quick Start Lessons
Part 4 - Defining Storm Events
The last piece of information we need to enter is the rainfall data. Rainfall data is
applied to the model by creating storm data definitions and then defining global storm
events using the storm data.
1. Click the Components menu and select Storm Data.

2. Click the New button and select User Defined IDF Table. A blank IDF table is
created with 2, 5, and 10 year return periods and 5, 15, 30, and 60 minute dura-
tions.
3. The data we have for the IDF table is in a different format, so we must modify the
return periods and durations of the table. Click the Add/Remove Return Periods
button above the blank IDF table and select Delete 2 Year. Also delete the 5 year
return period.
4. Click the Add/Remove Return Periods button and select Add Return Period.
In the Add Return Period dialog that appears, enter a value of 20 and click OK.
Also add a 100 year return period.
5. Click the Add/Remove Durations button and select Delete 15.000 min. Also
delete the 60 minute duration.

6. Click the Add/Remove Durations button and select Add Duration. In the Add
Duration dialog that appears, enter a value of 10 and click OK. Also add a 20
minute duration. Your IDF Table should now look like this:
7. Fill in the values for the IDF table using the data from the table below.
Table 3-4: IDF Table Input Data
Duration 10 Year 20 Year 100 Year
5 4.2 6.6 8.6
10 2.3 4.3 6.3
20 1.6 2.7 4.7
30 1.0 1.8 3.8

Quick Start Lessons
8. Your Storm Data dialog should look like the screen below. Click the Close button.
9. Storm Data definitions created in the Storm Data Dialog Box need to be assigned
to Global Storm Events. Global Storm Events are applied to all catchments during
analysis. Click the Components menu and select Global Storm Events.
The Global Storm Events dialog consists of a table that displays a list of all of the
Rainfall Runoff Alternatives and their associated global storm events. The storm
event source is also displayed, showing whether the storm event was created
manually for the project or if it was imported from an engineering library entry.
10. In the Global Storm Events dialog, click the Global Storm Event field and
select User Defined IDF Table - 1 - 20 Year. Click the Close button.

Part 5 - Analyzing the System
Now that all of the required input data has been entered, the model can be calculated.
Before computing the model, it is a good idea to validate it first. Validation runs a
diagnostic check on the network data to alert you to possible problems that may be
encountered during calculation. This is the manual validation command, and it checks
for input data errors. It differs in this respect from the automatic validation that
StormCAD runs when the Compute command is initiated, which checks for network
connectivity errors as well as many other things beyond what the manual validation
checks.
1. Click the Validate button.

2. An error message appears, notifying you that problems were found during valida-
tion. Click the OK button.
3. The User Notifications manager opens, displaying a list of warnings that were
generated during the validation routine. Warnings are shown in yellow, and do not
prevent the model from being successfully calculated. Errors, if any are present,
would be shown in red. Errors must be corrected before the model can be
computed. For now, let’s ignore the warnings.
4. Click the Compute button to calculate the model.

5. After the calculation is complete, the Calculation Executive Summary is
displayed.
The Calculation Executive Summary displays the scenario name, rainfall alterna-
tive, and storm event information for the analysis. It also displays some engine
messages relating to convergence.
In the lower left corner notice the yellow symbol. This indicates that warnings
were generated during the calculation. A red symbol would indicate that the
calculation failed due to errors. In either circumstance, you can review warnings
and errors in the User Notifications dialog.
You can generate an executive summary report by clicking the Report button in
this dialog, or access a more comprehensive summary of the calculated results by
clicking the Detailed Summary button.
6. Click the Close button.
7. Before proceeding to the next lesson, click the Save button.

Quick Start Lessons
Lesson 2 - Automatic Design

StormCAD will automatically design all or parts of your storm sewer system. Simply
specify the ground elevations, tailwater conditions, and design constraints, and
StormCAD will do the rest.
In this lesson, we will use the automatic design feature to develop a design to replace
an existing undersized storm drainage system.
Part 1 - Creating the Project File
First we must create a project file. When performing an Automatic Design,

StormCAD suggests only conduit and inlet types that are contained within the Conduit
and Inlet Catalogs. A new project starts with empty Conduit and Inlet Catalogs. You
can populate the Inlet and Conduit Catalogs with pipes and inlets of your choosing, or
you can open one of the predefined Templates we have provided. You may also create
new Templates and use those in future projects.
For this lesson, we will use the predefined Template that is installed with StormCAD.
1. Click the File menu and select Open. Browse to the Bentley/StormCAD8/
Templates folder and select Template-US.stc and click the Open button.
2. Click the File menu and select Save As. Browse to the Bentley/StormCAD8/
Lessons folder. Type in Lesson2.stc for the file name and click Save.
3. Go through the steps as outlined in Lesson 1 to create a schematic project using
Manning’s Formula for friction calculations and employing the US unit system.
4. Once the project has been set up, use the Layout tool to draw the network
pictured below.

5. Use the Properties editor or FlexTables to enter the data provided for each
element in the tables below.
Table 3-5: Catchment Input Data
Catchment Area Rational C Outflow Time of

Label Node Concentration
CM-1 1.00 0.7 CB-1 9
CM-2 0.30 0.8 CB-2 5
CM-3 0.20 0.8 CB-3 6
Table 3-6: Inlet Input Data
Inlet Inlet Structur Structur Curb Default Grate Default

Label Type e Width e Length Opening Curb Width Grate
Height Opening Length
Length
Inlet - 1 Combinati 3.0 5.0 6.0 4.0 2.0 3.0

on
Inlet - 2 Grate 4.0 5.0 N/A N/A 3.0 3.0
Table 3-7: Catch Basin Input Data: Physical and Physical (Structure Losses) Sections
:
Catch Elevation Elevation Elevation Headloss Headloss

Basin (Ground) (Rim) (Invert) Method Coefficient
Label
CB-1 78.0 78.0 76.9 Standard 0.5
CB-2 82.0 82.0 76.5 Standard 0.5
CB-3 79.0 79.0 76.0 Standard 0.5

Quick Start Lessons
Table 3-8: Catch Basin Input Data: Inlet Location and Inlet Opening Sections
Catch Inlet Inlet Inlet Longitud Manning’ Grate Clogging

Basin Type Location inal s n (Inlet) Length Factor
Label Slope
(Inlet)
CB-1 Catalog Inlet - 1 In Sag N/A N/A 3.0 20.0

Inlet
CB-2 Catalog Inlet - 2 On Grade 0.020 0.012 3.0 20.0

Inlet
CB-3 Catalog Inlet - 1 In Sag N/A N/A 3.0 20.0

Inlet
Table 3-9: Outfall Input Data
Outfall Elevation Elevation Boundary

(Ground) (Invert) Condition
Type
OF-1 78.0 74.0 Free Outfall
Table 3-10: Conduit Input Data
Conduit Has Length Condui Materia Diamet Set Invert Set Invert
Label User (User t Shape l er Invert (Upstre Invert (Downs
Define Defined to am) to tream)
d ) Upstrea Downst
Length m? ream?
?
CO-1 True 250 Circle Concrete 12 False 76.9 False 76.5
6. Using the data in the following table, create a Storm Data definition of the User
Defined IDF Table type and assign it to a Global Storm Event. Use the 20 Year
Return Period Storm for the Global Storm Event.

Table 3-11: User Defined IDF Table Input Data
Duration 10 Year 20 Year 100 Year
5 4.2 6.6 8.6
10 2.3 4.3 6.3
20 1.6 2.7 4.7
30 1.0 1.8 3.8
Part 2 - Defining Design Parameters
Once you have entered all the input data:
1. Click the Compute button.

2. Notice the yellow Warning icon in the Calculation Executive Summary. Click
the Messages button.
Notice the 2nd warning. This is an existing system that is undersized, and your job
is to fix it. Close the User Notifications Details and Calculation Executive
Summary dialogs.

Quick Start Lessons
3. Click the Analysis menu and select Alternatives. Expand the Design node and
double-click the Base Design alternative.
We want to use StormCAD’s automatic design feature to find a design that satis-
fies the constraints. This alternative allows us to set the design constraints that
StormCAD will use to design the system. If you wish, you can use the table of
elements to set local constraints for specific elements, or use the check boxes to
specify certain elements you do not want to automatically design. In this example,
we will design all of the pipes using the same constraints.
4. On the Gravity Pipe tab:
a. In the Default Constraints section, Velocity tab: Ensure that the Velocity
(Minimum) value is set to 2.0 and the Velocity (Maximum) value is set to
15.0.
b. In the Default Constraints section, Cover tab: Ensure that the Cover
(Minimum) value is set to 3.0 and the Cover (Maximum) value is set to
15.0.

c. In the Default Constraints section, Slope tab: Ensure that the Slope
(Minimum) value is set to 0.005 and the Slope (Maximum) value is set to
0.100.
5. On the Inlet tab:

a. Ensure the Maximum Spread In Sag value is set to 12.0 ft.
b. Ensure the Maxmum Depth in Sag value is set to 8.0 in.

Quick Start Lessons
c. Enter a Minimum Efficiency on Grade value of 70.0%.
6. Click Close in this dialog, and Close the Alternatives manager.

7. You must also specify which of the catalog conduits will be available for
StormCAD to choose from during the design run. Click the Components menu
and select Conduit Catalog.

8. Click on the Label heading to sort the available conduits by name.
9. Highlight the 15 inch Circle Concrete conduit and make sure the Available for
Design? checkbox is checked.
10. Repeat the above step for the 18 and 21 inch Circle Concrete conduits to make
sure they are available for design as well.
11. Close the Conduit Catalog.

Quick Start Lessons
Part 3 - Performing the Automatic Design
To run a Design calculation, we must change the calculation type from analysis to
design.
1. Click the Analysis menu and select Calculation Options.

2. In the Calculation Options dialog, highlight Base Calculation Options.
3. In the Properties editor, change the Calculation Type to Design.

5. A prompt appears, asking if you want to create a new alternative to capture the
changes made by the automatic design. Click the Yes button.
6. In the New Alternative dialog, type Automatic Design and click OK.
7. Close the Calculation Executive Summary.
8. In the Calculation Options dialog, highlight Base Calculation Options.
9. In the Properties editor, change the Calculation Type to Analysis.
11. In the Calculation Executive Summary, click the Messages button.

Lesson 3 - Scenario Management
12. Notice that the new Design alternative has eliminated the flooding warning.
13. Close the User Notifications Details and Calculation Executive Summary
dialogs.
14. In the Drawing pane, click on CO-1. In the Physical section of the Properties
manager, note that the Section Size is 15 inches. Check the other conduits; CO-2
is 15 inches, and CO-3 is 18 inches. The automatically designed physical alterna-
tive chose larger conduits that were available to it to relieve the flooding issue and
meet the design criteria.

One of StormCAD’s many powerful and versatile project management tools is
Scenario Management. Scenarios allow you to calculate multiple "What If?" situa-
tions in a single project file. You may wish to try several designs and compare the
results, or analyze an existing system using several different rainfall events and
compare the generated profiles. A scenario is a group of alternatives, while alterna-
tives are groups of actual model data. Both scenarios and alternatives are based on a
parent/child relationship where child scenarios and alternatives inherit data from the
parent scenarios and alternatives.
In this lesson, we will use Scenario Management to set up the scenarios needed to test
four "What If?" situations for the purpose of analyzing a new drainage system design.
At the end we will compare all of the results using the Scenario Comparison tool.

Quick Start Lessons
Part 1 - Creating a New Alternative
For this lesson we will use an existing project file.
1. Click the Open Existing Project button in the Welcome dialog, or select
File\Open from the pull-down menu to bring up the Open dialog.
2. Browse to the Bentley/StormCAD8/Lessons directory and open Lesson3.stc.
The storm drainage system is a new design that is being analyzed. We are going to
test the new design under pre- and post-developed conditions (Inlet C = 0.6 and
0.9) during both a 2-year and a 10-year storm.
We could calculate the model using a 2-year rainfall event, change the C value and
recalculate, change the rainfall event and do another two calculations. However,
this method is time consuming, and the results will be in an unwieldy form. It is
preferable to take advantage of the Scenarios and Alternatives tools included in
StormCAD.
First we need to set up the required data sets (alternatives). An alternative is a
group of data that describes a specific part of the model. There are ten available
alternatives: Active Topology, Physical, Headloss, Boundary Conditions, Rainfall
Runoff, Hydrologic, Design, System Flows, Capital Cost, and User Data Exten-
sions.

In this example, we need one hydrologic alternative with the pre-developed C

value of 0.6, and one hydrologic alternative with the post-developed C value of
0.9. Therefore, we must set up two hydrologic alternatives using each of the C
values.
3. Click the Analysis menu and select Alternatives.
4. In the Alternatives manager, expand the Hydrologic node.
In StormCAD, we can create families of alternatives. There are parent alternatives
(base alternatives) and there are child alternatives. A child alternative will inherit
its data from the parent. However, you can change the child’s inherited data,
thereby making the data local to that alternative.
Currently, there is only one Hydrologic alternative listed. The Base-Catchments
alternative contains the Inlet C value of 0.6, which is associated with our base
scenarios. We would like to add a child of the Base-Catchments alternative so that
we can inherit most of the data, but change the Inlet C value.
5. Highlight the Base-Catchments alternative and click the New button.
6. Highlight the newly created alternative and click the Rename button, then type
Inlet C = 0.9 as the new name.
7. Double click the new child alternative to open the Hydrologic alternative editor.
Click the Catchment tab. The table in the alternative already contains data that
was inherited from the parent alternative.

Quick Start Lessons
Notice the key at the bottom describing the check boxes. As the key indicates, all
of our data is inherited. If you change any piece of data, the check box will
become checked because that record is now local to this alternative and not inher-
ited from the parent.
8. We want all of the values in the Rational C column to be 0.9. Right-click the
Rational C column and select the Global Edit option from the menu.
9. Select Set from the Operation list box and enter 0.9 into the Value field. Click
OK to set all of the rows in the Inlet C column to 0.9.
10. Click Close to exit the Hydrologic alternative editor. Click Close to exit the
Alternatives manager.
You now have two Catchment alternatives. One alternative contains Inlet C values
of 0.6, and one contains Inlet C values of 0.9. However, the rest of the data is the
same. We must now create the scenarios that will contain the Catchment alterna-
tives.

Part 2 - Creating New Scenarios
In this part of the lesson we will set up the base scenarios and create new scenarios
that will contain the Hydrologic alternatives created in the previous part.
1. Click the Analysis menu and select Scenarios.

Currently, there is only the single Base scenario.Highlight the Base scenario to
view the alternatives that the scenario is comprised of in the Properties editor.
Alternatives are the building blocks of a scenario. A scenario is a group of the ten
alternatives and all of the calculation information needed to solve a model.
For our example, we wish to analyze the exact same system using two different
rainfall events. To do this, we must have two scenarios that are exactly the same,
except with different global storm events.
2. The first step in this process is to rename the Base scenario appropriately and set
the correct global storm event. Highlight the Base scenario and click the Rename
button. When using multiple scenarios, it’s good to use names that are as descrip-
tive as possible. Type New Design - 2 yr storm, C=0.6 as the scenario name. The
Base scenario should already be using the 2-Year Rainfall Rainfall Runoff alter-
native, which is what we want.
3. Highlight the New Design - 2 yr storm, C=0.6 scenario and click the New button.
Select Base Scenario from the submenu.
4. Click the Rename button and type in New Design – 10 yr storm, C=0.6 as the
new scenario name.
5. With the New Design – 10 yr storm, C=0.6 scenario highlighted, click the Rain-
fall Runoff field in the Properties editor and select the 10-Year Rainfall alterna-
tive.

Quick Start Lessons
6. You now have two scenarios that are exactly the same except for the return event.
Next, we need to add two more scenarios that use our new hydrologic alternative,
Inlet C = 0.9 to model the other two "What If?" situations.
Scenarios work in families just like alternatives, except scenarios do not inherit
the data directly. A scenario is a group of alternatives, so a child scenario will
inherit the parent’s alternatives. To change the data in a scenario, you need to
change one or more of the scenario’s alternatives.
7. Highlight the New Design - 2 yr storm, C=0.6 Scenario and click the New button.
Select Child Scenario. Type in New Design – 2 yr storm, C=0.9 as the name of
the new child scenario.
8. Our new child initially consists of the same alternatives as its parent alternative.
We want the Hydrologic alternative to be the new alternative we created, Inlet C =
0.9. With the new child scenario highlighted, click the Hydrologic field in the
Properties editor and select the Inlet C = 0.9 alternative.
9. Highlight the New Design - 10 yr storm, C=0.6 Scenario and click the New
button. Select Child Scenario. Type in New Design – 10 yr storm, C=0.9 as the
name of the new child scenario.
10. With the new child scenario highlighted, click the Hydrologic field in the Proper-
ties editor and select the Inlet C = 0.9 alternative.
We now have four scenarios. The two base scenarios are the same except for the
return event. The two child scenarios are the same as their respective parents
except for the Inlet C value. The next step is to calculate them.

Lesson 4 - Presentation of Results
Part 3 - Calculating Multiple Scenarios
The Scenarios manager allows you to calculate multiple scenarios at once using the
Batch Run tool.
1. Click the Compute button and select the Batch Run command.
2. The Batch Run dialog lists all of the scenarios within the current project. All
scenarios that have their associated checkbox checked will be calculated during
the batch run. Click the Select button and choose Select All to check all of the
checkboxes.
3. Click the Batch button. In the Please Confirm prompt that appears, click Yes.
4. Click OK in the Information prompt that confirms when the calculation has
completed successfully.

An important feature in all modeling software is the ability to present results clearly.
This lesson outlines several of StormCAD’s reporting features including:
• Reports - Display and print information for any or all elements in the system.
• FlexTables - Display information in a tabular spreadsheet format.
• Profiles - Graphically show how HGL and elevation vary throughout the storm
sewer.
• Element Annotation - Dynamically presents the values of user-selected variables
in the drawing.
• Color Coding - Assign colors to ranges of values of a variable and apply those
colors to the appropriate locations on the plan view for a quick diagnostic on how
the system is working.

Quick Start Lessons
Part 1 - Reports
For this lesson we will use an existing project file.
1. Click the Open Existing Project button in the Welcome dialog, or select
File\Open from the pull-down menu to bring up the Open dialog.
2. Browse to the Bentley/StormCAD8/Lessons directory and open Lesson3.stc.
3. Click the Compute button to calculate the model.
4. In the Calculation Executive Summary dialog, click the Report button. This
opens a report Preview dialog that contains the information presented in the
Calculation Executive Summary in a print-ready format.
All of the reports in this part of the lesson are presented in the Preview dialog.
From this dialog, you can print, change print settings, export to another format, or
send the report via email.
5. Close the Preview dialog.

6. In the Calculation Executive Summary, click the Details button.

7. In the Calculation Detailed Summary dialog, click the Report button. This
opens a report containing all of the information from each of the tabs in the
detailed summary. Close the Preview, the Calculation Detailed Summary, and
the Calculation Executive Summary dialogs.
8. There are a number of pieces of information that you can add to the formatted
reports using the Report Options dialog. Click the Report menu and select
Report Options.
9. In this dialog, the header and footer can be fully customized and you can edit text
to be displayed in the cells or select from pre-defined dynamic variables from the
cell's menu. You can also modify the margins and the font used in the header and
footer text. Click the Footer tab.

Quick Start Lessons
10. In the first row, Align Center column, choose %(ReportTitle) from the menu.
This is a variable, such that the information will be dynamically updated to reflect
the current state for whichever attribute the variable references, in this case, the
report title. Click OK.
11. Click the Report menu and select Project Inventory. This report displays a list of
all of the various types of elements used in the model. Scroll to the bottom to see
the variable that was added in the previous step.
The Element Tables and Headloss Detailed Reports are specialized FlexTables,
which will be discussed in the next part of the lesson.

Part 2 - FlexTables
FlexTables are extremely powerful tools in StormCAD. These reports are not only
good presentation tools, they are also very helpful in data entry and analysis.
When data must be entered for a large number of elements, clicking each element
and entering the data can be very tedious and time consuming.
Using the FlexTables, elements can be changed using the global edit tool or
filtered to display only the desired elements. Values that are entered into the table
will be automatically updated in the model. The tables can also be customized to
contain only the desired data. Columns can be added or removed or you can
display duplicates of the same column with different units.
1. Click the View menu and select FlexTables, or click the FlexTables button.
2. In the FlexTables manager, double-click the Conduit Table.
Tabular reports are dynamic tables of input values and calculated results. White
columns are input values and yellow columns are non-editable calculated values.
When data is entered into a table directly, the value in the model will be automati-
cally updated. These tables can be printed or copied into a spreadsheet program.
Two very powerful features in these tables are Global Editing and Filtering.
Suppose we decide that all of the conduits with a velocity exceeding 5 ft/s should
be increased in diameter. It would be time consuming to go through and re-enter
every conduit diameter. Instead, we will use the Filter tool in this example to filter
out the conduits with a velocity less than 5 ft/s, and the Global Edit tool to
increase the diameter of just those pipes.
3. Diameter and Velocity are not in the predefined table, so we must add them. Click
the Edit button.

Quick Start Lessons
4. In the table editor, the left pane lists the available attributes, and the right pane
lists the attributes displayed in the table. Double-click the Diameter and Velocity
(In) attributes in the left pane to add them to the right. Click OK.
5. Right click the Velocity (In) column and select Filter...Custom from the submenu.
6. In the Query Builder, double-click Velocity (In) in the Fields list. Click the
Greater Than (>) operator button. Add a space and then type in 5 in the query
pane.

7. Click OK. Now only the conduits whose velocity is greater than 5 ft/s are being
displayed. Two visual cues allow you to see when a filter is active: the text in the
lower left corner notes that “3 out of 10 elements displayed” and the row headings
are displayed in blue.
8. Right-click the Diameter column and select Global Edit. Leave the Operation at
Set and enter a Value of 16. Click OK.
9. Turn off the filter to see all conduits again. Right-click the Velocity (In) column
and select Filter (Active)...Reset. Click Yes in the Reset Filter confirmation
prompt that appears.
10. Close the FlexTable and the FlexTables manager.

Quick Start Lessons
Part 3 - Profiles
A profile is a side view of a section of the calculated network that displays the ground
elevation, inverts, water level, HGL (hydraulic grade line), and EGL (energy grade
line).
1. Click the Compute button and close the Calculation Executive Summary.
2. Click the View menu and select Profiles.
3. In the Profiles manager, click the New button.
4. In the Profile Setup dialog, click the Select from Drawing button.
5. The Select toolbar allows you to add elements to the selection, remove elements
from the selection, or finish selecting elements and go back to the Profile Setup
dialog. You can also right-click to open a submenu containing the same
commands. Click on the following elements in turn: P-7, P-9, and P-8. Click
Done.

6. In the Profile Setup dialog, the list now contains the selected conduits along with
their end nodes.Click Open Profile.
7. In the Profile viewer, the Ground Elevation is represented by the Green line, the
HGL is the Blue line, the EGL is the Red line, and the Water Level is the Light
Blue area. Click the Chart Settings button and select Display Annotation
Labels. This adds labels that show the element label, type, and ID.
8. Click the Chart Settings button and select Profile Annotation Table. This
displays a table containing more detailed results and information for the profile
elements.
9. The Profile viewer provides zoom capability. Click the Zoom button.

Quick Start Lessons
10. The zoom tool allows you to draw a box around the area you want to zoom.
Drawing from the top left to the bottom right zooms in and drawing from the
bottom right to the top left zooms back out.
11. From the profile view, you can print it using the Print button, copy it to the
Windows clipboard using the Copy button, or export the profile as a .dxf drawing
using the Chart Settings > Export to DXF command.
12. Close the Profile viewer and the Profiles manager.
Part 4 - Annotation
Element annotation functionality allows the display of values for user-selected

attributes in the drawing pane.
1. Click the Compute button and close the Calculation Executive Summary.
2. Annotation is assigned through the Element Symbology manager. If you are
using the default workspace configuration, the Element Symbology manager is
located directly below the toolbars on the left side of the dialog. If not, click the
View menu and select the Element Symbology command. Highlight Conduit
and click the New button, then select Annotation from the shortcut menu that
appears.
3. In the Annotation Properties dialog that appears, change the Field Name to
Flow. In the Prefix field, type in Flow: (with a space after the colon).

4. The X and Y Offset fields allow you to define, respectively, the horizontal and
vertical distance between the element and the annotation. A positive value for X
Offset will cause the annotation to be placed to the right of the element at the
distance specified; a negative value will cause the annotation to be placed to the
left of the element. A positive value for Y Offset will cause the annotation to be
placed above the element; a negative value will cause the annotation to be placed
below it. Enter a value of -5.00 feet for the Y Offset.

Quick Start Lessons
5. The Initial Height Multiplier allows you to increase the size of text used for the
annotation. Change this value to 0.600. The Selection Set control allows you to
apply the current annotation to only those elements contained within a previously
defined selection set. Leave this value at <All Elements>. Click the OK button.
6. In the Element Symbology manager, Highlight Conduit and click the New
button, then select New Annotation from the shortcut menu that appears.

7. Change the Field Name to Hydraulic Grade (In). Enter HGL: (with a space
after the colon) in the Prefix field. Change the Y Offset to -7.00. Change Initial
Height Multiplier value to 0.600. Click the OK button.
8. Note that the hydraulic grade line value is now displayed below the flow annota-
tion. However, the two annotations slightly overlap. Highlight the Hydraulic
Grade annotation node in the Element Symbology manager and click the Edit
button.

Quick Start Lessons
9. In the Annotation Properties dialog that appears, highlight Hydraulic Grade

Line (In) in the list pane on the left side of the dialog. Change the Y Offset to -
8.00 and click the Apply button.
Note the Initial Offset and Initial Multiplier checkboxes. When these are checked,
the settings for the annotation that is currently highlighted in the list pane will be
applied to all of the elements with that particular annotation (in this case, all
conduits). If you have manually moved some of the annotations in the drawing
pane, you should clear the Initial Offset checkbox so that the new settings won't
interfere with your manually repositioned annotations.

10. You can manually move the annotations by clicking them and holding the mouse
button, then dragging and releasing it. Move the annotations as necessary so that
everything is visible and annotations are not overlapping.
11. In the Element Symbology manager, you can create folders to organize the
various annotations for an element type. Highlight Conduit and click the New
button, then select New Folder from the shortcut menu that appears.
12. Highlight the newly created folder and click the Rename button. Enter the name
Calculated Results.

Quick Start Lessons
13. Click on the Flow annotation label and hold down the mouse button, then drag the
mouse cursor to the Calculated Results folder. Your mouse cursor will change to
a drag object icon. Release the mouse button to place the Flow annotation in the
folder. Repeat this procedure with the HGL annotation.
14. The checkboxes next to each node in the Element Symbology manager list control
the visibility of the associated object in the drawing pane, as follows:
The checkbox next to the Conduit node (and the corresponding checkboxes next
to each of the other element types) controls the visibility of conduit elements in
the drawing pane.
The checkbox next to the Label node controls the visibility of conduit element
labels in the drawing pane.
The checkbox next to a folder controls the visibility of all annotation definitions
within that folder. In the case of the Calculated Results folder, it controls the visi-
bility of the Flow and HGL annotations for conduit elements in the drawing pane.
15. Clear the checkbox next to the Calculated Results folder. Note that both the
Flow and HGL annotations disappear from the drawing pane, while the Label
annotation is still displayed. Click the checkbox next to the Calculated Results
folder to turn the annotations back on.
Part 5 - Color Coding
Color Coding allows you to assign colors based on ranges of values for a specified
attribute to elements in the plan view. Color coding is useful in performing quick diag-
nostics on the network.
1. Click the Compute button, then close the Calculation Executive Summary
dialog.
2. Color Coding is assigned through the Element Symbology manager. If you are
using the default workspace configuration, the Element Symbology manager is
located directly below the toolbars on the left side of the dialog. If not, click the
View menu and select the Element Symbology command. Highlight Conduit
and click the New button, then select Color Coding from the shortcut menu that
appears.

3. In the Color Coding Properties dialog that appears, change the Field Name to
Flow. The Selection Set control allows you to apply the current color coding to
only those elements contained within a previously defined selection set. Leave
this value at <All Elements>.
4. Click the Calculate Range button and select Full Range.
5. This fills in the Min. and Max. fields using the highest and lowest calculated
values (over the duration of the entire simulation, not just the current time step)
for the attribute specified in the Field Name menu. The Steps field lets you specify
how many intermediate points are created between the minimum and maximum
values defined by the Min. and Max. fields (with the min and max values each
representing a point counting towards the total as well). Leave the Steps value at
5.
6. Under Color Maps, leave the Options field set to Color. Click the Initialize
button. The Color Maps table is now populated with 5 rows (because there were
5 steps in the range) and a different color has been assigned to each step.

Quick Start Lessons
7. Click the arrow button in the Color column of the first row and select Yellow.
Click the Ramp button. The three middle colors are changed to various shades of
orange. The Ramp button assigns colors to the intermediate rows to create a
gradient between the first and last colors in the table. Click the OK button.
You can also set up color coding to change the size of an element type in the
drawing pane according to the value of a specified attribute.
8. In the Element Symbology manager, highlight Conduit and click the New button,
then select Color Coding from the shortcut menu that appears.

9. In the Color Coding Properties dialog, change the Field Name to Hydraulic
Grade Line (In). Leave the Selection Set value at <All Elements>. Click the
Calculate Range button. Leave the Steps value at 5.
10. Under Color Maps, change the Options value to Size. Click the Initialize button.
The Size values are a multiplier of the default element symbol size. In the case of
link elements like conduits, the value is a multiplier of the default line weight
(width). So a Size value of 5 for a conduit means that a conduit displayed at that
value will be five times wider than a default conduit. Click the OK button.

Quick Start Lessons
11. In the Element Symbology manager, you can create Theme Folders to organize
the various color coding definitions for an element type. Highlight Conduit and
click the New button, then select New Folder from the shortcut menu that
appears.
12. Highlight the newly created folder and click the Rename button. Enter the name
Color Coding Definitions.
13. Click on the Flow color coding label and hold down the mouse button, then drag
the mouse cursor to the Color Coding Definitions folder. Your mouse cursor will
change to a drag object icon. Release the mouse button to place the Flow color
coding definition underneath the folder. Repeat this procedure with the HGL
color coding definition.
14. The checkboxes next to each node in the Element Symbology manager list control
the visibility of the associated object in the drawing pane, as follows:
The checkbox next to the Conduit node (and the corresponding checkboxes next
to each of the other element types) controls the visibility of conduit elements in
the drawing pane.
The checkbox next to the Label node controls the visibility of conduit element
labels in the drawing pane.
The checkbox next to a folder controls the visibility of all annotation definitions
within that folder. In the case of the Color Coding folder, it controls the visibility
of the Velocity and HGL color coding definitions for conduit elements in the
drawing pane.
15. Clear the checkbox next to the Color Coding Definitions folder. Note that both
the Flow and HGL color codings disappear from the drawing pane, leaving the
conduits displayed in the default color and size. Click the checkbox next to the
Color Coding Definitions folder to turn the color coding definitions back on.
This concludes the QuickStart Lessons. For more information on any of Bentley
CivilStorm v8 XM Edition's functions, you can right-click or press the F1 key to
access the context-sensitive online help at any time.


Chapter
Starting a Project 4
Click one of the following links to learn more about starting a Bentley StormCAD V8
XM Edition project:
• “Welcome Dialog Box” on page 4-121

• “Projects” on page 4-122
• “Setting Project Properties” on page 4-123
• “Setting Options” on page 4-123
• “Considerations for ProjectWise Users” on page 4-135
• “Importing Data From Other Models” on page 4-139
• “Exporting Data” on page 4-142
Welcome Dialog Box

When you first start Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition, the Welcome dialog box
appears. The Welcome dialog box contains the following controls:
Introduction to Bentley Starts the Introduction to StormCAD multimedia

StormCAD V8 XM presentation.
Edition
Overview topic.
Create New Project Creates a new Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition

project. When you click this button, an untitled
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition project is
created.

Projects
Open Existing Project Opens an existing project. When you click this
button, the Windows Select Bentley StormCAD V8
XM Edition Project to Open dialog box appears,
opened.
Open from Open an existing Bentley StormCAD V8 XM

ProjectWise Edition project from ProjectWise. You are
prompted to log into a ProjectWise datasource if
you are not already logged in.
Show This Dialog at When selected, the Welcome dialog box appears
Start whenever you start Bentley StormCAD V8 XM
Edition. Clear this box if you do not want the
Welcome dialog box to appear whenever you start
You can access the Welcome dialog box at any time from the Help menu in Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition.
Projects
All data for a model are stored in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition as a project.
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition project files have the file name extension .swg.
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition lets you open more than one project at a time.
You can assign a title, date, notes and other identifying information about each project
using the Project Properties dialog box. You can have up to five Bentley StormCAD
V8 XM Edition projects open at one time.
Starting a New Project
To start a new project, select File > New or press Ctrl+N. An untitled project is
opened in the drawing pane.
Opening an Existing Project
To open an existing project, select File > Open or press Ctrl+O. A dialog box appears
allowing you to browse for the project you want to open.
Displaying Multiple Projects
To switch between multiple open projects, click the appropriate tab at the top of the
drawing pane. The file name of the project is displayed on the tab.

Starting a Project
Setting Project Properties

The Project Properties dialog box let you enter project-specific information to help
identify the project. Project properties are stored with the project.
To set project properties:
Select File > Project Properties, enter information in the Project Properties dialog
box and click OK.
Project Properties Dialog Box
The dialog box contains the following text fields and controls:
Title Lets you type a title for the project.
File Name Displays the file name for the current project. If
you have not saved the project yet, the file name is
listed as “Untitled.stc.”
Engineer Lets you type name of the project engineer.
Company Lets you type the name of your company.
Date Click this field to display a calendar, which lets

you use your mouse to set a date for the project.
Notes Lets you type additional information about the

project.
Setting Options
You can change global settings for Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition in the Options
dialog box. The Options dialog box contains four tabs, each of which lets you change
a different group of global settings.
Click one of the following links to learn more about the Options dialog box:
• “Options Dialog Box - Global Tab”

• “Options Dialog Box - Project Tab”
• “Options Dialog Box - Drawing Tab”
• “Options Dialog Box - Units Tab”

Setting Options
• “Options Dialog Box - Labeling Tab”

• “Options Dialog Box - ProjectWise Tab”
Options Dialog Box - Global Tab
The Global tab lets you change general program settings for the Bentley StormCAD
V8 XM Edition stand-alone editor, including whether or not to display the status pane,
as well as window color and layout settings. The Global tab contains the following
controls:
General Settings
Backup Levels Indicates the number of backup copies that

are retained when a project is saved. The
default value is 1.
Note: The higher this number, the

more .BAK files (backup
files) are created, thereby
using more hard disk space
on your computer.
Show Recently Turns the list of recently opened files on and

Used Files off. The File menu has the ability to display a
list of recently opened files, providing
shortcuts that let you quickly access projects.
When this check box is cleared, these
shortcuts are not available from the File menu.
The field next to the checkbox allows you to
specify how many recently used files are
shown in the list.
Compact Database When selected, the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM

After Edition database is automatically compacted
when you select File > Open. The Opens
Between Contact Prompt fields become
available when this option is selected.
The field next to the checkbox determines
how many times a single project can be saved
before the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition
database is compacted. The default value is
10, which means that when the Compact
Database Enabled option is selected, the
database will be compacted every ten times
you save a single project.

Starting a Project
Show Status Pane When selected, activates the Status Pane

display at the bottom of the Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition stand-alone editor.
This check box is selected by default.
Show Welcome When selected, activates the Welcome dialog

Page on Startup that appears when you first start Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition. This check box is
selected by default.
Zoom Extents On When selected, performs a zoom extents

Open command upon opening the file, thereby
displaying the entire model in the drawing
view.
Prompts Opens the Stored Prompt Responses dialog,

which allows you to change the behavior of
the default prompts (messages that appear
allowing you to confirm or cancel certain
operations).
Window Color Settings
Background Displays the color that is currently assigned to

the drawing pane background. You can
change the color by clicking the ellipsis button
(...) to open the Color dialog box.
Foreground Displays the color that is currently assigned to

elements and labels in the drawing pane. You
can change the color by clicking the ellipsis
button (...) to open the Color dialog box.
Read Only Displays the color that is currently assigned to

Background data field backgrounds. You can change the
color by clicking the ellipsis button (...) to open
the Color dialog box.
Read Only Displays the color that is currently assigned to

Foreground data field text. You can change the color by
clicking the ellipsis button (...) to open the
Color dialog box.
Selection Displays the color that is assigned to elements

that are selected in the drawing pane. You can
change the color by clicking the ellipsis button
(...) to open the Color dialog box.

Setting Options
Layout Settings
Display Inactive When selected, activates the display of

Topology inactive element in the drawing pane in the
color defined in Inactive Topology Line Color.
When not selected, inactive elements will not
be visible in the drawing pane. This check box
is selected by default.
You can change the color by clicking the
ellipsis button (...) to open the Color dialog
box.
Auto Refresh Activates Auto Refresh. When Auto-Refresh is

active, the drawing pane automatically
updates whenever changes are made to the
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition datastore.
This check box is selected by default.
Sticky Tool Palette When selected, activates the Sticky Tools

feature. When Sticky Tools is activated, the
drawing pane cursor does not reset to the
Select tool after you create a node or finish a
pipe run in your model, allowing you to
continue dropping new elements into the
drawing without re-selecting the tool. When
Sticky Tools is not activated, the drawing pane
cursor resets to the Select tool after you
create a node. This check box is selected by
default.
Select Polygons by When selected, lets you select polygons in

Edge your model at their edges instead of anywhere
inside the polygon. This check box is cleared
by default.
Selection Handle Specifies, in pixels, the size of the handles

Size In Pixels that appear on selected elements. Enter a
number from 1 to 10.
Default Drawing Allows you to select GIS or CAD drawing

Style for New styles. Under GIS style, the size of element
Projects symbols in the drawing pane will remain the
same regardless of zoom level. Under CAD
style, element symbols will appear larger or
smaller depending on zoom level.

Starting a Project
Stored Prompt Responses Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to change the behavior of command prompts back to their
default settings. Some commands trigger a command prompt that can be suppressed
by using the Do Not Prompt Again check box. You can turn the prompt back on by
accessing this dialog and unchecking the box for that prompt type.
Options Dialog Box - Project Tab
This tab contains miscellaneous settings. You can set pipe length calculation, spatial
reference, label display, and results file options in this tab.
The Project tab contains the following controls:
Geospatial Options
Spatial Reference Used for integration with Projectwise. Can leave

System the field blank if there is no spatial information.
Element Identifier Options
Element Identifier Specifies the format in which reference fields are

Format used. Reference fields are fields that link to
another element or support object (pump
definitions, patterns, controls, zones, etc.).
Result Files
Specify Custom When checked, allows you to edit the results file
Results File Path? path and format by enabling the other controls in
this section.

Setting Options
Root Path Allows you to specify the root path where results
files are stored. You can type the path manually or
choose the path from a Browse dialog by clicking
the ellipsis (...) button.
Path Format Allows you to specify the path format. You can
type the path manually and use predefined
attributes from the menu accessed with the [>]
button.
Path Displays a dynamically updated view of the

custom result file path based on the settings in the
Root Path and Path Format fields
Pipe Length
Round Length to The program will round to the nearest unit

Nearest specified in this field when calculating scaled pipe
length
Calculate Pipe Lengths When this box is checked, differences in Z

Using Node Elevations (elevation) between nodes is considered when
(3D Length) calculating conduit lengths.
Hydraulic Analysis
Friction Method Allows you to specify the friction method that will
be used in the project.
Structure Loss Mode Allows you to choose between Hydraulic Grade

Line and Energy Grade Line to be used for
structure loss calculations.
Conduit Description Options
Conduit Shape Allows you to specify the shape of the conduit that
to be edited in the Conduit Description Format
field.
Conduit Description Allows you to define the format that will be used
Format in conduit descriptions. Click the arrow button to
choose from the premade attribute variables.

Starting a Project
Options Dialog Box - Drawing Tab
This tab contains drawing layout and display settings. You can set the scale that you
want to use as the finished drawing scale for the plan view output. Drawing scale is
based upon engineering judgment and the destination sheet sizes to be used in the final
presentation. The Drawing tab contains the following controls:
Drawing Scale Settings
Drawing Mode Drop-down list that lets you select either Scaled or
Schematic mode for models in the drawing pane.
Horizontal Scale Controls the scale of the plan view.

Factor 1 in. =:
Annotation Multipliers Settings
Symbol Size Mulitplier Increases or decreases the size of your symbols by

the factor indicated. For example, a multiplier of 2
would result in the symbol size being doubled.
The program selects a default symbol height that
corresponds to 4.0 ft. (approximately 1.2 m) in
actual-world units, regardless of scale.
Text Size Multiplier Increases or decreases the default size of the text
associated with element labeling by the factor
indicated. The program automatically selects a
default text height that displays at approximately
2.5 mm (0.1 in) high at the user-defined drawing
scale. A scale of 1.0 mm = 0.5 m, for example,
results in a text height of approximately 1.25 m.
Likewise, a 1 in. = 40 ft. scale equates to a text
height of around 4.0 ft.
Text Options
Align Text with Pipes Turns text alignment on and off. When this check
box is selected, labels are aligned to their
associated pipes. When the check box is cleared,
labels are displayed horizontally near the center of
the associated pipe.
Color Element Turns colored element annotations on or off.

Annotations When the box is checked, annotation text will be
displayed in the same color as the associated
element.

Setting Options
Options Dialog Box - Units Tab
The Units tab lets you modify the unit settings for the current project. The Units tab
contains the following controls:
Save As Lets you save the current unit settings as a separate

.xml file. This file allows you to reuse your Units
settings in another project. When the button is clicked,
a Windows Save As dialog box appears, allowing you
to enter a name and specify the directory location of
the .xml file.
Load Lets you load a previously created Units project .xml

file, thereby transferring the unit and format settings
that were defined in the previous project. When the
button is clicked, a Windows Load dialog box appears,
allowing you to browse to the location of the desired
.xml file.
Reset Defaults - SI Resets the unit and formatting settings to the original
factory defaults for the System International (Metric)
system.
Reset Defaults - US Resets the unit and formatting settings to the original
factory defaults for the Imperial (U.S.) system.
Default Unit System Lets you specify the unit system that is used globally
for New Project across the project. Note that you can locally change
any number of attributes to use system other than the
one specified here.

Starting a Project
Units Table The units table contains the following columns:

• Label—Displays the parameter measured by the
unit.
• Unit—Displays the type of measurement. To
change the unit of an attribute type, click the
choice list and click the unit you want. This option
also allows you to use both U.S. customary and SI
units in the same worksheet.
• Display Precision—Sets the rounding of
numbers and number of digits displayed after the
decimal point. Enter a negative number for
rounding to the nearest power of 10: (-1) rounds to
10, (-2) rounds to 100, (-3) rounds to 1000, and so
on. Enter a number from 0 to 15 to indicate the
number of digits after the decimal point.
• Format Menu—Lets you select the display format
used by the current field. Choices include:
• Scientific—Converts the entered value to a
string of the form "-d.ddd...E+ddd" or "-
d.ddd...e+ddd", where each 'd' indicates a
digit (0-9). The string starts with a minus sign
if the number is negative.
• Fixed Point—Abides by the display precision
setting, and automatically enters zeros after
the decimal place to do so. With a display
precision of 3, an entered value of 3.5
displays as 3.500.
• General—Truncates any zeros after the
decimal point, regardless of the display preci-
sion value. With a display precision of 3, the
value that would appear as 5.200 in Fixed
Point format displays as 5.2 when using
General format. The number is also rounded.
So, an entered value of 5.35 displays as 5.4,
regardless of the display precision.
• Number—Converts the entered value to a
string of the form "-d,ddd,ddd.ddd...", where
each 'd' indicates a digit (0-9). The string
starts with a minus sign if the number is nega-
tive. Thousand separators are inserted
between each group of three digits to the left
of the decimal point.

Setting Options
Options Dialog Box - Labeling Tab
The Element Labeling tab is used to specify the automatic numbering format of new
elements as they are added to the network. You can save your settings to an .xml file
for later use. The Element Labeling tab contains the following controls:
Save As Lets you save your element labeling settings to an

element label project file, which is an. xml file.
Load Lets you open an existing element label project

file.
Reset Assigns the correct Next value for all elements

based on the elements currently in the drawing and
the user-defined values set in the Increment,
Prefix, Digits, and Suffix fields of the Labeling
table.

Starting a Project
Labeling Table The labeling table contains the following columns:

• Element—Shows the type of element to
which the label applies.
• On—Lets you turn automatic element labeling
on and off for the associated element type.
• Next—Lets you enter the integer you want to
use as the starting value for the ID number
portion of the label. Bentley StormCAD V8 XM
Edition generates labels beginning with this
number and chooses the first available unique
label.
• Increment—Lets you enter the integer that is
added to the ID number after each element is
created to yield the number for the next
element.
• Prefix—Lets you enter the letters or numbers
that appear in front of the ID number for the
elements in your network.
• Digits—Lets you enter the minimum number
of digits that the ID number has. For instance,
1, 10, and 100 with a digit setting of two would
be 01, 10, and 100.
• Suffix—Lets you enter the letters or numbers
that appear after the ID number for the
elements in your network.
• Preview—Lets you see what the label looks
like, based on the information you have
entered in the previous fields.
Options Dialog Box - ProjectWise Tab
Note: These settings affect ProjectWise users only.
The ProjectWise tab contains options for using StormCAD with ProjectWise. This tab

Setting Options
Default Datasource Displays the current ProjectWise datasource. If

you have not yet logged into a datasource, this
field will display <login>. To change the
datasource, click the Ellipses (...) button to open
the Change Datasource dialog box. If you click
Cancel after you have changed the default
datasource, the new default datasource is retained.
Update server on Save When this is checked, any time you save your
StormCAD project locally using the File > Save
menu command, the files on your ProjectWise
server will also be updated and all changes to the
files will immediately become visible to other
ProjectWise users. This option is turned off by
default.
Note: This option, when turned on,

can significantly affect
performance, especially for
large, complex projects.
For more information about using StormCAD with ProjectWise, see “Considerations
for ProjectWise Users” on page 4-135.

Starting a Project
Considerations for ProjectWise Users

Bentley ProjectWise provides managed access to StormCAD content within a work-
group, across a distributed organization, or among collaborating professionals. When
ProjectWise is integrated with StormCAD, project files can be accessed quickly,
checked out for use, and checked back in directly from within StormCAD.
If ProjectWise is installed on your system, StormCAD automatically installs all the

components necessary for you to use ProjectWise to store and share your StormCAD
projects.
To learn more about ProjectWise, refer to the ProjectWise online help.

To learn more about using ProjectWise with StormCAD, see the following topics:
• “General Guidelines for using ProjectWise” on page 4-135

• “Performing ProjectWise Operations” on page 4-136
General Guidelines for using ProjectWise
Follow these guidelines when using StormCAD with ProjectWise:
• Use the File > ProjectWise commands to perform ProjectWise file operations,
such as Save, Open, and Change Datasource.
• The first time you choose one of the File > ProjectWise menu commands in your
current StormCAD session, you are prompted to log into a ProjectWise data-
source. The datasource you log into remains the current datasource until you
change it using the File > ProjectWise > Change Datasource command.
• Use StormCAD’s File > New command to create a new project. The project is not
stored in ProjectWise until you select File > ProjectWise > Save As.
• Use StormCAD’s File > Open command to open a local copy of the current
project.
• Use StormCAD’s File > Save command to save a copy of the current project to
your local computer.
• When you Close a project already stored in ProjectWise using File > Close, you
are prompted to select one of the following options:
– Check In—Updates the project in ProjectWise with your latest changes and
unlocks the project so other ProjectWise users can edit it.
– Unlock—Unlocks the project so other ProjectWise users can edit it but does
not update the project in ProjectWise. Note that this will abandon any changes
you have made since the last server update.

– Leave Out—Leaves the project checked out so others cannot edit it and
retains any changes you have made since the last server update to the files on
your local computer. Select this option if you want to exit Bentley StormCAD
V8 XM Edition but continue working on the project later.
• In the StormCAD Options dialog box, there is a ProjectWise tab with the Update
server on Save check box. This option, when turned on, can significantly affect
performance, especially for large, complex projects. When this is checked, any
time you save your StormCAD project locally using the File > Save menu
command, the files on your ProjectWise server will also be updated and all
changes to the files will immediately become visible to other ProjectWise users.
This option is turned off by default.
• In this release of StormCAD, calculation result files are not managed inside
ProjectWise. A local copy of results is maintained on your computer, but to ensure
accurate results you should recalculate projects when you first open them from
ProjectWise.
• StormCAD projects associated with ProjectWise appear in the Most Recently
Used Files list (at the bottom of the File menu) in the following format:
pwname://PointServer:_TestDatasource/Documents/TestFolder/Test1.prj
Performing ProjectWise Operations
You can quickly tell whether or not the current StormCAD project is in ProjectWise or
not by looking at the title bar and the status bar of the StormCAD window. If the
current project is in ProjectWise, “pwname://” will appear in front of the file name in
the title bar, and a ProjectWise icon will appear on the far right side of the status bar,
as shown below.
You can perform the following ProjectWise operations from within StormCAD:
To save an open StormCAD project to ProjectWise:
1. In StormCAD, select File > ProjectWise > Save As.

2. If you haven’t already logged into ProjectWise, you are prompted to do so. Select
a ProjectWise datasource, type your ProjectWise user name and password, then
click Log in.

Starting a Project
3. In the ProjectWise Save Document dialog box, enter the following information:
a. Click Change next to the Folder field, then select a folder in the current
ProjectWise datasource in which to store your project.
b. Type the name of your StormCAD project in the Name field. We recommend
that you keep the ProjectWise name the same as or as close to the StormCAD
project name as possible.
c. Keep the default entries for the rest of the fields in the dialog box
d. Click OK.
To open a StormCAD project from a ProjectWise datasource:
1. Select File > ProjectWise > Open.

click Log in.
3. In the ProjectWise Select Document dialog box, perform these steps:
a. From the Folder drop-down menu, select a folder that contains StormCAD
projects.
b. In the Document list box, select a StormCAD project.
c. Keep the default entries for the rest of the fields in the dialog box
d. Click Open.
To copy an open StormCAD project from one ProjectWise datasource to another:
1. Select File > ProjectWise > Open to open a project stored in ProjectWise.
2. Select File > ProjectWise > Change Datasource.
3. In the ProjectWise Log in dialog box, select a different ProjectWise datasource,
then click Log in.
4. Select File > ProjectWise > Save As.
5. In the ProjectWise Save Document dialog box, change information about the
project as required, then click OK.
To make a local copy of a StormCAD project stored in a ProjectWise datasource:
1. Select File > ProjectWise > Open.

click Log in.

3. Select File > Save As.

4. Save the StormCAD project to a folder on your local computer.
To change the default ProjectWise datasource:
1. Start StormCAD.
2. Select File > ProjectWise > Change Datasource.
3. In the ProjectWise Log in dialog box, type the name of ProjectWise datasource
you want to log into, then click Log in.
To use background layer files with ProjectWise:
• Using File > ProjectWise > Save As—If there are background files, you are
prompted with two options: you can copy the background layer files to the project
folder for use by the project, or you can remove the background references and
manually reassign them once the project is in ProjectWise to other existing
ProjectWise documents.
• Using File > ProjectWise > Open—This works the same as the normal Project-
Wise > Open command, except that background layer files are not locked in
ProjectWise for the current user to edit. The files are intended to be shared with
other users at the same time.
• To add a background layer file reference to a project that exists in Project Wise—
The ProjectWise Select Document dialog box opens, and you can choose any
existing ProjectWise document. You must have previously added these back-
ground layer files as described in the first bullet above, or by using the Project-
Wise Explorer.
• When you remove a background layer file reference from a project that exists in
ProjectWise, the reference to the file is removed but the file itself is not deleted
from ProjectWise.
• Using File > Save As—When you use File > Save As on a project that is already
in ProjectWise and there are background layer files, you are prompted with two
options: you can copy all the files to the local project folder for use by the project,
or you can remove the background references and manually reassign them after
you have saved the project locally.

Starting a Project
Using ProjectWise with Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition for

AutoCAD
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition for AutoCAD maintains a one to one relationship
between the AutoCAD drawing (.dwg) and the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition
project file. When using ProjectWise with this data, we recommend that you create a
Set in the ProjectWise Explorer. Included in this set should be the AutoCAD drawing
(example.dwg), the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition database (example.swg.mdb),
the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition project file (example.swg), and optionally for
stand-alone, the stand-alone drawing setting file (example.swg.dwh).
If you use the Set and the ProjectWise Explorer for all of your check-in / check-out
procedures, you will maintain the integrity of this relationship. We recommended that
you do not use the default ProjectWise integration in AutoCAD, as this will only work
with the .dwg file.
Using ProjectWise with Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition for

MicroStation
When using ProjectWise with a MicroStation StormCAD project, we recommend that
you create a Set in the ProjectWise Explorer. Included in this set should be the
MicroStation drawing (example.dgn), the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition data-
base (example.swg.mdb), the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition project file
(example.swg), and optionally for stand-alone, the stand-alone drawing setting file
(example.swg.dwh).
If you use the Set and the ProjectWise Explorer for all of your check-in / check-out
procedures, you will maintain the integrity of this relationship. We recommended that
you do not use the default ProjectWise integration in AutoCAD, as this will only work
with the .dgn file.
Importing Data From Other Models

• “Importing Data from a StormCAD Database”
• “Importing Submodels”
• “Importing LandXML Files”

Importing Data From Other Models
Importing Data from a StormCAD Database
You can import data from another StormCAD project by importing the StormCAD
database (.MDB) file. You might want to do this if you need to rebuild your model, or
if you want to open a StormCAD project sent to you by another StormCAD user.
When you import a StormCAD database (.MDB) file, the model will notice that the
model does not have any element symbology definitions (annotations and color-
coding), project-level options, text customizations, or border and line customizations
that may have been associated with the project. These are stored in the project’s .SWG
and .DWH files, which are not imported.
To import data from another StormCAD project:
1. Select File > Import > StormCAD Database.

2. In the Select Database File to Import dialog box, select the StormCAD .mdb file
(database file). The data will display as a new project in StormCAD.
Importing Submodels
Using the Submodel Import feature, you can import another model, or any portion
thereof, into your project. Input data stored in the Alternatives as well as any
supporting data (i.e. Patterns, etc) will also be imported. It is important to notice that
existing elements in the model you want to import the submodel into (i.e. the target
model) will be matched with incoming elements by using their label. Incoming input
data will override existing data in the target model for any element matched by its
label. That also applies to scenarios, alternatives, calculation options and supporting
data. Furthermore, any element in the incoming submodel that could not be matched
with any existing element by their label, will be created in the target model.
For example, the submodel you want to import contains input data that you would like
to transfer in two Physical Alternatives named "Smaller Conduits" and "Larger
Conduits". The target model contains only one Physical Alternative named "Larger
Conduits". In that case, the input data in the alternative labeled "Larger Conduits" in
the submodel will replace the alternative with the same name in the target model.
Moreover, the alternative labeled "Smaller Conduits" as well as its input data will be
added to the target model without replacing any existing data on it because there is no
existing alternative with the same label. Notice that imported elements will be
assigned default values in those existing alternatives in the target model that could not
be matched.
Notice that regular models can be imported as a submodel of a larger model as their
file format and extension are the same.
For more information about input data transfer, see “Exporting a Submodel”.

Starting a Project
The label-matching strategy used during submodel import will be applied to any set of
alternatives, including Active Topology alternatives. Therefore, if no Active Topology
alternative stored in the submodel matches the existing ones in the target model, the
imported elements will preserve their active topology values in the alternatives
created from the submodel, but they will be left as "Inactive" in those previously
existing alternatives in the target model. That is because the default value for the "Is
Active" attribute in active topology alternatives other than the one that is current is
"False".
Note: User-defined data is not transferred during submodel import and

export operations.
To import a submodel
1. Click the File menu and select Import...Submodel.

2. In the Select Submodel File to Import dialog box, select the submodel file to be
imported. Click the Open button.
Importing LandXML Files
You can import a model from a LandXML format .xml file. LandXML is a non-
proprietary data standard for the persistence of civil engineering and survey measure-
ment data commonly used in the Land Development and Transportation Industries.
StormCAD utilizes the PipeNetworks functionality of the LandXML file. StormCAD

is primarily concerned with the overall physical structure and connectivity of the pipe
network; hence some of the available hydrologic and hydraulic data necessary for a
hydraulic analysis is not transferred during export/import.
The following table describes the fundamental mappings between StormCAD

elements and their LandXML analogs for both import and export to and from
StormCAD.
Table 4-1: LandXML to StormCAD Mappings
LandXML StormCAD Element
Struct - RectStruct Manhole
Struct - CircStruct Manhole

Exporting Data
Table 4-1: LandXML to StormCAD Mappings
LandXML StormCAD Element
Struct - Outlet Outfall
Struct - Inlet Catch Basin
Struct - Connection Transition
Pipe Conduit
To import a LandXML .xml file:
1. Select File > Import > LandXML.

2. In the Select LandXML File to Import dialog, browse to the LandXML file to
be imported, highlight it, and click Open.
Exporting Data
Yopu can export your model as a DXF drawing or to LandXML format. You can also
export any portion of your model as a submodel. Click one of the following links to
learn more:
• “Exporting a .DXF File” on page 4-142

• “Exporting a Submodel”
• “Exporting LandXML”
Exporting a .DXF File
You can export your StormCAD model as a .DXF file if you plan to edit the file in
AutoCAD or another program. When you export a .DXF file, you export only the
graphical (vector) representation of the model. The DXF file is an ASCII file.
To export the current project to a .DXF file:
1. Select File > Export > DXF.

2. Type the name of the DXF file, then click Save.
You may now open the DXF file in another program.

Starting a Project
Exporting a Submodel
You can export any portion of a model as a submodel for import into other projects.
Input data is also stored in the file that is created in the process of Exporting a
Submodel. This input data will be imported following a label-matching strategy for
any element, alternative, scenario, calculation option or supporting data in the
submodel. For more information about input data transfer, see “Importing
Submodels”.
Note: User-defined data is not transferred during submodel import and

export operations.
To export a submodel
1. In the drawing view, highlight the elements to be exported as a submodel. To

highlight multiple elements, hold down the Shift key while clicking elements.
2. Click the File menu and select Export...Submodel.
3. In the Select Submodel File to Export dialog box, specify the directory to which
the file should be saved, enter a name for the submodel and click the Save button.
Exporting LandXML
You can export a model to LandXML format. See “Importing LandXML Files” for
information about the data that will be exported.
To export the current project to a LandXML .xml file:
1. Select File > Export > LandXML.

2. Type the name of the xml file , then click Save.
You may now open the .xml file in another program.

Exporting Data

Chapter
Creating Your Model 5

This chapter discusses the following topics:
• “Starting a Project”
• “Elements and Element Attributes”
• “Adding Elements to Your Model”
• “Connecting Elements”
• “Manipulating Elements”
• “Editing Element Attributes”
• “Adding Storm Data”
• “Creating Inlets”
• “Changing the Drawing View”
• “Using Selection Sets”
• “Using the Network Navigator”
• “Using Prototypes”
• “Automatic Design”
• “Engineering Libraries”
• “Adding Hyperlinks to Elements”
• “Using Queries”
• “Using TRex to Assign Node Elevations”
• “User Data Extensions”
• “External Tools”

Starting a Project
Starting a Project
When you first start Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition, the Welcome dialog box
opens.
The Welcome dialog box contains the following controls:
Overview topic.
Create New Project Creates a new StormCAD project. When you click
this button, an untitled Bentley StormCAD V8 XM
Edition project is created.
Open Existing Project Opens an existing project. When you click this
button, a Windows browse dialog box opens
opened.
Open from Open an existing StormCAD project from

ProjectWise ProjectWise. You are prompted to log into a
ProjectWise datasource if you are not already
logged in.
Show This Dialog at When selected, the Welcome dialog box opens
Start whenever you start Bentley StormCAD V8 XM
Edition. Turn off this box if you do not want the
Welcome dialog box to open whenever you start
To Access the Welcome Dialog During Program Operation
Click the Help menu and select the Welcome Dialog command.

Creating Your Model
To Disable the Automatic Display of the Welcome Dialog Upon Startup
In the Welcome dialog, turn off the box labeled Show This Dialog at Start.
To Enable the Automatic Display of the Welcome Dialog Upon Startup
In the Welcome dialog, turn on the box labeled Show This Dialog at Start.
Click one of the following links to learn how to create your model using Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition’ layout and editing tools:
• “Elements and Element Attributes” on page 5-147

• “Adding Elements to Your Model” on page 5-167
• “Connecting Elements” on page 5-168
• “Manipulating Elements” on page 5-171
• “Editing Element Attributes” on page 5-174
• “Changing the Drawing View” on page 5-199
• “Using Selection Sets” on page 5-202
• “Using the Network Navigator” on page 5-211
• “Using Prototypes”
• “Engineering Libraries” on page 5-222
• “Adding Hyperlinks to Elements” on page 5-231
• “Using Queries” on page 5-234
• “User Data Extensions” on page 5-246
Elements and Element Attributes

You use the Layout toolbar to add elements to your model and edit the attributes of
elements using the Property Editor, one of the dockable managers in Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition’ stand-alone editor.
To learn about the different elements available in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition,

click one of the following links:
• “Link Elements”
• “Catch Basins”
• “Manholes”
• “Transitions”
• “Outfalls”

• “Catchments”
• “Other Tools”
Link Elements
Layout tool
Link elements connect the other elements to form the storm network. The link
elements are the conveyance elements that carry flow through the network to its even-
tual discharge point at an outlet. You can add either of the following link elements to
your model, depending on the link element’s location within the network:
• Conduits
• Gutters
When you click the Layout tool on the Layout toolbar, you select the type of link
element to add (conduit or gutter), then select an element. You can place multiple
elements with different kinds of connections using the Layout tool.

Creating Your Model
Conduit Elements
The shape parameters (rise, span, diameter, etc... ) of a conduit can be delineated in
one of 2 ways by setting the Conduit Type attribute as follows.
• User Defined Conduit -When this conduit type is selected, the shape parameters
of the conduit are entered locally on the conduit level, making it easier to try
various shapes, sizes and materials when calibrating or designing without having
to go through the process of setting up the various components in the engineering
libraries. Irregular channel shapes are only available if this conduit type is
selected.
• Catalog Conduit - When this conduit type is selected, the user can select from a
list of pre-defined conduit types from the engineering libraries. Note that the
Section Sizes available for selection in the property grid are filtered by by the
Conduit Shape and the Material Fields. Pipe Arch shapes are only available if this
Conduit Type is selected.

Gutter Elements
The purpose of a gutter element is to dictate where flow bypassed by the inlet at the
start node is emptied at the stop node. The physical properties (cross-slope, rough-
ness, etc... ) of the gutter are associated with the bounding nodes. They are not directly
associated with the gutter element, as gutters are not necessarily uniform, and the
calculated spread and depth in the gutter are based on the gutter characteristics at the
inlet opening. Hence, spread and depth are also presented at the catch basin.
The gutter slope value is derived from the start and stop ground elevations and the
scaled length of the gutter. This attribute is primarily informational and does not
affect the calculations. However, if the slope is negative a warning message is gener-
ated.
Entering Additional Data to Link Elements

There are several dialog boxes that are available from the Property Editors that let you
enter additional data for link elements.
• “Defining the Geometry of a Link Element”

• “Irregular Channel Dialog Box”
Defining the Geometry of a Link Element
You define the geometry of a link element by entering the location and angle of bends
for the selected link element. You enter X vs. Y points that plot the shape of the
polyline that represents the element in the Polyline Vertices dialog box .
To define the geometry of a link element:
1. Click a link element in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a
link element and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Geometry section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses (...) button next
to the Geometry field.
3. In the Polyline Vertices dialog box, click the New button to add a new row to the
table.
4. Type values for X and Y points for each row in the table.
5. To remove rows from the table, click the Delete button.
6. Click OK.

Creating Your Model
Polyline Vertices Dialog Box
This dialog box contains the X vs. Y table that allows you to define any number of
points that plot the shape of the polyline representing the selected link element. The
dialog box contains the following controls:
New This button creates a new row in the table.

row from the table.
Irregular Channel Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to enter Station vs. Depth data for the cross-sectional
shape of an irregular channel conduit element.
The dialog box contains the station vs. depth table along with the following controls:
New This button creates a new row in the station-

depth table.

row from the station-depth table.
Report Opens a print preview window containing a

report that details the input data for this
dialog box.
Help Opens the online help topic for this dialog.

The table may contain the following columns:
Column Description
Station This field allows you to define the cross-sectional

distance at the current curve point. You can enter
these in any order that defines the conduit (e.g.,
from left-to-right, from right-to-left, with an
upstream or downstream perspective). This
column will be available for any Roughness Type
that is selected.
Depth This field allows you to define the depth for the
current curve point for a conduit. This value can
be a negative number. Note that the depth defined
here is used purely to define the shape of the
section, and it is not meant to represent a real
elevation. In the calculations, StormCAD uses the
irregular section shape defined here, as well as the
Invert (Upstream) and Invert (Downstream)
properties of the conduit. To do this, StormCAD
sets the lowest point on the irregular section equal
to the invert elevation at the upstream and
downstream ends of the conduit, and the elevation
of other points in the irregular section are adjusted
accordingly. This column will be available for any
Roughness Type that is selected.
Manning’s n This field allows you to define the roughness

value of the section between the current curve
point and the next. This column is available when
the Horizontal Segment Roughness Type is
selected.

Creating Your Model
When the Bank Channel Roughness Type is selected the following additional controls
will become available:
Left Bank Select the station point that marks the end of
Station the left bank. The left bank is measured from
the first station-depth point in the table to the
selected point.
Left Bank Enter the Manning’s n value for the left bank
Manning’s n or click the ellipsis button to open the
Engineering Library and choose a predefined
Manning’s n value.
Right Bank Select the station point that marks the

Station beginning of the right bank. The right bank is
measured from the selected point to the last
station-depth point in the table.
Right Bank Enter the Manning’s n value for the right

Manning’s n bank or click the ellipsis button to open the
Channel Enter the Manning’s n value for the channel

Manning’s n (the area between the left and right banks) or
click the ellipsis button to open the
What Happens When the Water Level Exceeds the Top Elevation of
an Open Channel?
StormCAD does not model channel overflow, so when the hydraulic grade line (HGL)
exceeds the channel top elevation during a calculation, the sides of the channel are
extended vertically upwards so the calculation can proceed. However, when the calcu-
lation is complete a User Notification message will appear to inform users that the
channel has overtopped. The HGL computed in this case will not be realistic, and it
will be necessary for users to increase the channel capacity and re-compute in order to
obtain realistic HGL results.

Catch Basins
Catch basin element
Catch basins convey surface water into a storm sewer pipe system. A catch basin
(a.k.a., storm drain inlet, curb inlet) is an inlet to the storm drain system that typically
includes a grate or curb inlet where stormwater enters the catch basin and a sump to
capture sediment, debris and associated pollutants. They are also used in combined
sewer watersheds to capture floatables and settle some solids.
When you click the catch basin element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a catch basin element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this
tool is active causes a catch basin element to be placed at the location of the mouse
cursor.
Inlet Type
The inflow to a catch basin does not all enter the basin. The flow that actually enters
the basin is referred to as its “capture.”
A catch basin may:
• Capture all of the flow up to a “maximum capacity,” and you specify the
maximum flow.
• Capture a percentage of all flow that reaches the inlet, and you specify the
percentage captured.
• According to the properties of a user-defined catalog inlet.
Any inflow that is not captured goes to a gutter. If there is no gutter, the inflow that is
not captured is lost from the system.
Inflow Capture Curve

The Inflow Capture Curve dialog box allows you to define Flow to Inlet vs. Flow
Captured tables for inlets.

Creating Your Model
The dialog box contains the flow vs. capture table along with the following controls:
New This button creates a new row in the flow vs.

capture table.

row from the flow vs. capture table.
Manholes
Manhole element
Manholes are placed in a sewer system to provide access for inspection, maintenance,
and emergency service. Manholes should be placed at sewer junctions (i.e., tees, wyes,
and crosses), upstream terminal ends of sewers, and locations where there is a change
in sewer grade or direction. Manholes are locations where loads enter the gravity
portion of the sewer system.
When you click the manhole element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a manhole element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool
is active causes a manhole element to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
Transitions
Transition elements, also known as junction chambers, are locations where upstream
flows in a gravity system combine (see “Transition Diagrams”). No loads enter the
sewer at these points.
When you click the transition element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a transition element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool
is active causes a transition element to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
Transition element

Transition Diagrams

Creating Your Model
Outfalls
Outfall element
Outfalls represent the ultimate termination points in a sanitary sewer network.
When you click the outfall element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes
into a outfall element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active
causes a outfall element to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
Adding Elevation vs. Flow Data to an Outfall

You can add an Elevation-Flow (E-Q-T) curve to an outfall in StormCAD. Each series
of Elevation-Flow (E-Q-T) curves represents the performance curves for an outlet
operating under various downstream tailwater (T) elevations.
To add an Elevation vs. Flow (E-Q-T) curve to an outfall:
1. Click an outfall in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click an

outfall and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Boundary Condition section of the Property Editor, select Elevation-Flow
Curve in the Boundary Condition Type field. The Elevation-Flow Curve field
becomes available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Elevation-Flow Curve field.
4. In the Elevation-Flow Curve dialog box, each row in the table represents a point
on the Elevation-Flow curve. Type values for Elevation and Flow for each row.
Click the New button to add a row or press the Tab key to advance to the next
field in the table.
5. To delete a row from the table, select the row then click Delete.
6. Close the dialog box.

Elevation-Flow Curve Dialog Box

The dialog box contains the elevation vs. flow table and the following buttons:
New This button creates a new row in the E-

Q-TW curve table.
Delete This button deletes the currently

highlighted row from the E-Q-TW curve
table.
Report This button opens a print preview

window containing a report that details
the input data for this dialog box.
The table contains the following columns:
Column Description
Outlet Elevation This field allows you to define the elevation of the
E-Q-T curve point.
Outlet Flow This field allows you to define the flow for the E-
Q-T curve point.

Creating Your Model
Catchments
Catchment element
Catchments represent the area drained by a stream, lake or other body of water in a
sewer or stormwater system.
When you click the catchment element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a catchment element symbol. Catchment elements are polygons.
Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active causes one point of the catch-
ment polygon to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor. Continue clicking to
define the other points that make up the polygon to define the shape fo the catchment.
To finish placing the catchment, right-click and select Done.
If the shape of the catchment is not important, such as in a schematic drawing, you can
place a generic catchment by holding down the Ctrl button after clicking once, then
moving the mouse cursor to define the size of the catchment, then clicking again to
place it.
Specifying a Time of Concentration (Tc) Method for a Catchment

You can add Time of Concentration (Tc) Methods to a catchment in your model.
StormCAD supports 13 different methods, which are listed below. You define the TC
Method in the TC Data Collection dialog box. You can define both single and multiple
flow segments for a catchment.
Some types of Tc equations can apply to flow segments within a multiple-segment Tc

calculation. Other Tc methods are equations intended to model the entire average
subarea flow distance and slope in one single flow segment. When combining
multiple flow segments to compute Tc, it is up to you to only combine Tc methods that
can be modeled in combination with multiple flow segments.
To define the Tc Method for a catchment:
1. Click a catchment in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a

catchment and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Runoff section of the Property Editor, select Modified Rational Method in
the Runoff Method field. The Tc (hours) field becomes available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Tc (hours) field. The Tc Data Collection
dialog box appears.

4. Click New, then select a Tc Method from the submenu.

5. Different fields become available depending on which Tc Method you select. For
each Tc Method, type values in the appropriate fields.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your Tc Collection data (time of
concentration in hours) in the Property Editor.
Tc Data Collection Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define the Time of Concentration method. Both single
and multiple flow segments can be modeled in this dialog box.
The dialog box contains the Tc Method display pane, which lists all of the methods
currently assigned to the catchment, a control section that allows you to edit the
attributes associated with the method currently highlighted in the table, and the
following buttons:
New Displays a submenu that allows you to

specify the Tc method to be created.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted method

from the table.
Report Opens a print preview window

containing a report that details the input
data for this dialog box.
StormCAD supports the following 13 methods, which are listed along with the
required input data for each:
• User Defined Tc—The user-defined time of concentration (Tc) is a method that

allows the direct input of the Tc rather than using an equation to calculate it. This
method would be used when the Tc needs to be calculated using a methodology
that is not supported by Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition, or when a quick esti-
mate of Tc is sufficient for the analysis.
– User Defined Tc—Lets you explicitly define the Tc, rather than have it calcu-
lated for you using one of the other methods.
• Carter—This method requires the following input data:

– Hydraulic Length—Lets you define the flow length of the catchment
section.
– Slope—Lets you define the slope of the catchment section.

Creating Your Model
• Eagleson—This method requires the following input data:

section.
– Manning’s n—Lets you enter the Manning’s roughness value of the catch-
ment section.
– Hydraulic Radius—Lets you define the hydraulic radius of the catchment
section.
• Espey/Winslow—This method requires the following input data:

– Channel Factor—Lets you define the Espey channelization factor of the
catchment section.
section.
– Impervious—Lets you define the percentage of impervious area of the catch-
ment section.
• FAA Equation—This method requires the following input data:

– Overland Flow Length—Lets you define the length of the overland pipe
flow of the catchment section.
– Rational Method C—Lets you define the rational C coefficient of the catch-
ment section.
• Kerby/Hathaway—This method requires the following input data:

ment section.
section.
• Kirpich PA—This method requires the following input data:

– Tc Multiplier—Lets you define the time-of-concentration adjustment multi-
plier.
section.

• Kirpich TN—This method requires the following input data:

section.
– Tc Multiplier—Lets you define the time-of-concentration adjustment multi-
plier.
• Length and Velocity—This method requires the following input data:

section.
– Velocity—Lets you define the velocity of flow in the catchment section.
• SCS Lag—This method requires the following input data:

section.
– CN—Lets you define the SCS runoff curve number of the catchment section.
– Slope—Lets you define the slope of the catchment section of the catchment
section.
• TR-55 Sheet Flow—This number represents the sheet flow time computed for
each column of sheet flow data. This method requires the following input data:
section.
ment section.
– 2 yr. 24 hr. Depth—Depth of 2 year 24 hour storm.
• TR-55 Shallow Conc.—This number represents the sheet flow time computed for
each column of shallow concentrated flow data. This method requires the
following input data:
section.
– Is Paved—Lets you specify whether the catchment section is paved or
unpaved.

Creating Your Model
• TR-55 Channel Flow—This number represents the channel flow time computed
for each column of channel flow data. This method requires the following input
data:
– Flow Area—Lets you define the flow area of the catchment section.
section.
ment section.
– Wetted Perimeter—Lets you define the wetted perimeter of the catchment
section.
Rational Catchment Collection Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to specify a composite rational C coefficient for the catchment.
It consists of a Area vs. Rational C table in which you can define multiple Rational C
values for different areas of the catchment.
New Creates a new row in the table.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted row

from the table.
Report Opens a print preview window

containing a report that details the input
data for this dialog box.
Other Tools
Although Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition is primarily a modeling application,

some additional drafting tools can be helpful for intermediate calculations and
drawing annotation. Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition provides the following tools:
• Border tool
• Text tool
• Line tool

Flow-Headloss Curves
Border Tool
Border tool
The Border tool lets you add rectangles to the drawing pane.
Text Tool
Text tool
The Text tool lets you add text to the drawing pane.
Line Tool
Line tool
The Line tool lets you add lines and polylines (multisegmented lines) to the drawing
pane.
Flow-Headloss curves can be applied to an catch basin, manhole, or transition node
element.
To assign a Flow-Headloss curve to a node element (catch basin, manhole, or

transition):
1. Double-click the node element in your model to display the Property Editor, or
right-click a node and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Physical (Structure Losses) section of the Property Editor, select Flow-
Headloss Curve as the Headloss Method. The Flow-Headloss Curve field
becomes available.

Creating Your Model
3. Click the <Select...> list item in the Flow-Headloss Curve field.

4. In the “Flow-Headloss Curves Dialog Box”, all of the Flow-Headloss Curves that
have been created for the model are listed in the left pane. Create a new Curve by
clicking the New button.
5. The data for each Flow-Headloss Curve is displayed in the table on the right. Each
row in the table represents a data point on the Flow-Headloss Curve curve. Type
values for the Flow and Headloss for each row. Click the New button to add a row
or press the Tab key to advance to the next field in the table.
6. Perform the following optional steps:
a. To delete a row from the table, select the row then click Delete.
b. To view a report on the curve, click Report.
7. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your curve data in the Property Editor.
Flow-Headloss Curves Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to enter flow vs. headloss data for a catch basin, manhole,
or transition element.
The dialog box contains the Flow vs. Headloss table along with the following
controls:
New This button creates a new Flow-Headloss

Curve.
Duplicate Creates a copy of the currently selected

Flow-Headloss Curve.


Flow-Headloss Curve.
Rename This button allows you to rename the

currently highlighted Flow-Headloss Curve.
Report Opens a print preview window containing a

report that details the input data for this
dialog box.
Synchronization Clicking this button opens a submenu

Options containing the following commands:
• Browse Engineering Library—Opens the
Engineering Library manager dialog,
allowing you to browse the Flow-Head-
loss Curve Library.
• Synchronize From Library—Lets you
update a flow-headloss curve previously
imported from a Flow-Headloss Curve
Library. The updates reflect changes that
have been made to the library since it
was imported.
• Synchronize To Library—Lets you
update an existing Flow-Headloss Curve
Library using current flow-headloss
curves that were initially imported but
have since been modified.
• Import From Library—Lets you import a
flow-headloss curve from an existing
Flow-Headloss Curve Library.
• Export To Library—Lets you export the
current flow-headloss curve to an
existing Flow-Headloss Curve Library.
Column Description
Flow This field allows you to define the flow at the

current curve point.
Headloss This field allows you to define the headloss for the
current curve point.

Creating Your Model
Adding Elements to Your Model

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition provides several ways to add elements to your
model. They include:
• Adding individual elements

• Adding elements using the layout tool
• Replacing an element with another element
To add individual elements to your model:
1. Click an element symbol on the Layout toolbar. The mouse cursor changes to the
element symbol you selected.
2. Click in the drawing pane to add the element to your model.
3. Click again to add another element of the same type to your model.
4. To add a different element, click on the desired element symbol in the Layout
toolbar, then click in the drawing pane.
5. To stop adding an element, right-click in the drawing pane to display a shortcut
menu, then click Done.
To add elements using the layout tool:
The layout tool lets you quickly add new elements to your model without having to
select a new element button on the Layout toolbar. When the layout tool is active, you
can right-click in the drawing pane to select different elements and pipes to add to the
model.
Layout Tool
1. Click the Layout tool on the Layout toolbar. A shortcut menu appears.
2. Click the type of pipe you want to use to connect your elements in the model.

Connecting Elements
3. Right-click in the drawing pane, then select the type of element you want to add
from the shortcut menu. The shortcut menu displays only those element types that
are compatible with your pipe selection.
4. Click in the drawing pane to add the element.
5. Click again to add another of the same element type. The elements you add will
automatically be connected by the type of pipe you selected earlier.
6. To change the type of pipe, right-click and select a different type from the shortcut
menu.
7. To change the element, right-click and select a different element from the shortcut
menu.
8. To stop adding elements using the Layout tool, right-click anywhere in the
drawing pane and click Done.
Modeling Curved Pipes
You can model curved pipes in StormCAD by using the Bend command, which is
available by right-clicking in the Drawing Pane when placing a link element.
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition does not account for any additional head loss due
to the curvature because in most cases the increased head loss is negligible. If you feel
the extra head loss is significant, it is possible to increase the Manning's n value to
account for such losses.
To model a curved pipe:
1. Select the desired link element using the Layout button on the Layout
toolbar.
2. Place the first segment of the curved pipe in your model, then right click and
select Bend from the shortcut menu.
3. Repeat Step 2 for each segment in the curved pipe. Be sure to insert bends to
clearly show the curved alignment.
4. When the curved pipe is complete, right click and select the next downstream
element (for a conduit, this is usually a manhole)
Connecting Elements
When building your model, you must consider these rules of connectivity:
• A network needs at least one outfall to end the network.

• Gutters cannot be the only link exiting a catch basin, or the catch basin is consid-
ered hydraulically disconnected.

Creating Your Model
Table 5-1: Element Connectivity
Element Permissible Upstream Permissible Downstream

Elements Elements
Catchment None Catch basin, manhole, transition
Manhole Via a gutter: None Via a gutter: None

Via a conduit: Manhole, Via a conduit: Manhole, catch
catch basin, transition, basin, transition, outfall
catchment
Catch basin Via a gutter: Catch basin Via a gutter: Catch basin, outfall
catch basin, transition, basin, transition, outfall
catchment
Transition Via a gutter: Manhole, Via a gutter: Manhole, transition,

transition, outfall outfall
transition, outfall, catchment, basin, transition, outfall
Outfall Via a gutter: Catch basin Via a gutter:None

Via a conduit: Manhole, Via a conduit: None
catch basin, transition
When To Use a Conduit vs. a Gutter
Gutters are used in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition only to model the water which
exceeds the capacity of in catch basin inlet and must flow through a surface gutter to
the next catch basin. A Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition gutter can only receive
water from a catch basin.
A conduit can refer to any prismatic channel or pipe that conveys flow. The cross
section of a conduit must remain constant from one end to the next.
See the “Gutter Elements” topic for more information.
How Do I Get Rainfall from a Catchment Into the Rest of My Model?
To get rainfall to move from a catchment into the rest of your model, you must specify
an Outflow Node.

Connecting Elements
To set the outflow node for a catchment:
1. If the Property Editor is not open, click View > Properties (F4) to open it.
2. Click the catchment for which you want to set an outflow node.
3. In the Catchment section of the Property Editor, click the Outflow Node field to
enable the selection drop-down.
4. Click Select if you want to select the outflow node from the model, or select the
outflow node from the drop-down list.
Modeling Catch Basins and Manholes
Catch basins and manholes can be modeled as one element or they can be modeled as
two separate elements. There can be a significant distance and elevation change
between the actual catch basin and manhole being modeled, or the lateral between
them may be undersized. These factors will influence your decision as to whether the
real-world situation would be more accurately modeled using one or two elements.
The diagrams below show an example of the relationship between manholes and
catchbasins.

Creating Your Model
Manipulating Elements
You can manipulate elements in your model in any one of the following ways:
• Select elements—manually select individual elements, manually select multiple

elements, select all elements, or select all elements of a single element type
• Move elements
• Delete elements
• Split pipes
To manually select an element:
Click the element. Selected elements appear in red.
Note: You can change the selection color in the Options dialog box,
which is accessible by selecting Tools > Options.
To manually select multiple elements:
Click the first element, then click additional elements while holding down Shift or
Ctrl.
To select all elements:
To select all of the elements in your model, select Edit > Select All.
To select all elements of the same type:
To select all elements of the same type (for example, all transitions), select Edit >
Select by Element, then click the desired element type.

Manipulating Elements
All elements of the selected type appear in red, including connecting pipes.
To clear selected elements:
Click the Select tool then click any blank space in the drawing pane.
or
Click Edit > Clear Selection.
or
Press the Esc key.
You can also clear a selected element by clicking a different element.
To move an element in the model:
1. Click the Select tool on the Layout toolbar.

2. Select the element(s) you want to move, then drag it to its new location. Pipe
connections move with the element.
To delete an element:
Select the element, then press Delete.
or
Select Edit > Delete.
Splitting Conduits
You may encounter a situation in which you need to add a new element in the middle
of an existing conduit. For example, you may want to insert a new manhole to main-
tain maximum access hole spacing.
To split an existing conduit:
1. Select the desired element symbol on the Layout toolbar.

2. In the drawing pane, place the cursor over the conduit you want to split and click.
3. You are prompted to confirm that you want to split the conduit.

Creating Your Model
– If you choose to split the conduit, the element will be inserted and two new
conduits will be created with the same characteristics as the original conduit
(lengths are split proportionally).
– If you choose not to split the conduit, the new element will be placed on top of
the conduit without connecting to anything.
If you accidentally split a conduit, this action can be undone by selecting Edit >
Undo.
You can also split an existing conduit with an existing element:
To do this in the Stand-Alone version, drag the element into position along the conduit
to be split, then right-click the node and select Split <conduit Label> from the
shortcut menu (where <conduit Label> is the name of the conduit to be split).
To do this in the MicroStation version, drag the element into position along the
conduit to be split. Hold down the Shift key, then right-click the node and select Split
<conduit Label> from the shortcut menu (where <conduit Label> is the name of the
conduit to be split).
Batch Split Pipe Dialog Box
The Batch Pipe Split dialog allows you to split pipes with neighboring nodes that are
found within the specified tolerance.
• Choose Features to Process Allows you to specify which pipes to include in the
split operation. The following options are available:
– All: All pipes in the model that have a neighboring node within the specified
tolerance will be split by that junction.
– Selection: Only the pipes that are currently selected in the drawing pane will
be split by a neighboring junction that lies within the specified tolerance.
– Selection Set: Only those pipes that are contained within the selection set
specified in the drop down list will be split by a neighboring junction that lies
within the specified tolerance.
• Allow splitting with inactive nodes When this box is checked, nodes that are
marked Inactive will not be ignored during the split operation.
• Tolerance This value is used to determine how close a pipe must be to a node in
order for the pipe to be split by that junction.

Editing Element Attributes
Pipes will be split by every junction that falls within the specified tolerance. To
prevent unwanted pipe splits, first use the Network Navigator's "Network Review >
Pipe Split Candidates" query to verify that the tolerance you intend to use for the
Batch Split operation will not include nodes that you do not want involved in the pipe
split operation.
To use the Network Navigator to assist in Batch Pipe Split operations
1. Open the Network Navigator.

Click the [>] button and select the Network Review...Pipe Split Candidates query.
2. In the Query Parameters dialog box, type the tolerance you will be using in the
pipe split operation and click OK.
3. In the Network Navigator, highlight nodes in the list that you do not want to be
included in the pipe split operation and click the Remove button.
4. Open the Batch Pipe Split dialog.
5. Click the Selection button.
6. Type the tolerance you used in the Network Review query and click OK.

You edit element properties in the Property Editor, one of the dockable managers in
To edit element properties:
Double-click the element in the drawing pane. The Property Editor displays the
attributes of the selected element.
or
Select the element whose properties you want to edit, then select View > Properties
or click the Properties button on the Analysis toolbar.
Property Editor
The Property Editor is a contextual dialog box that changes depending on the status of
other dialog boxes. For example, when a network element is highlighted in the
drawing pane, the Property Editor displays the attributes and values associated with
that element. When one of the manager dialog boxes is active, the Property Editor
displays the properties pertaining to the currently highlighted manager element.

Creating Your Model
Attributes displayed in the Property Editor are grouped into categories. An expanded
category can be collapsed by clicking the plus (+) button next to the category heading.
A collapsed category can be expanded by clicking the minus (-) button next to the
category heading.
For the most efficient data entry in Text Box style fields, instead of clicking on the
Field, click on the label to the left of the field you want to edit, and start typing. Press
Enter to commit the value, then use the Up/Down keyboard arrows to navigate to the
next field you want to edit. You can then edit the field data without clicking the label
first; when you are finished editing the field data, press the Enter key, and proceed to
the next field using the arrow keys, and so on.
Find Element
The top section of the Property Editor contains the Find Element tool. The Find
Element tool lets you:
• Quickly find a recently-created or added element in your model. The Element

menu contains a list of the most recently-created and added elements. Click an
element in the Element menu to center the drawing pane around that element and
highlight it.
• Find an element in your model by typing the element label or ID in the Element
menu then clicking the Find button or pressing Enter. The drawing pane centers
around the highlighted element.
• Find all elements of a certain type by using an asterisk (*) as a wild-card char-
acter. For example, if you want to find all of the conduits in your model, you type
co* (this is not case-sensitive) then click the Find button. The drawing pane
centers around and highlights the first instance of a conduit in your model, and
lists all conduits in your model in the Element menu. Once the Element menu is
populated with a list of elements, you can use the Navigate Upstream and Navi-
gate Downstream buttons to quickly navigate to the next or previous element in
the list.

The following controls are included:
Element Type an element label or ID in this field then

click the Find button to quickly locate it in
your model. The element selected in this menu
will be centered in the drawing pane when the
Zoom To command is initiated, at the
magnification level specified by the Zoom
Level menu. The drop-down menu lists
recently-created or added elements, elements
that are part of a selection set, and that are part
of the results from a recent Find operation.
Find Zooms the drawing pane view to the element

typed or selected in the Element menu at the
magnification level specified in the Zoom
Level menu.
Help Displays online help for the Property Editor.
Zoom Level Allows you to specify the magnification level

at which elements are displayed in the drawing
pane when the Zoom To command is initiated.
Navgate This button allows you to find the next

Upstream upstream element in the list of results from a
recent Find operation.
Navigate This button allows you to find the next

Downstream downstream element in the list of results from
a recent Find operation.
Add to Any element clicked while this box is checked

Selection will be added to list in the Element menu.

Creating Your Model
Property Filter This menu allows you to filter the properties

that are visible in the Properties editor. By
default, <Default View> is selected, which
displays all available properties for that
element type.
Edit Opens the Customization dialog for the

currently selected Property Filter, allowing
you to change the properties that are displayed
when the currently selected filter is active.
This button is not active when <Default
View> is selected.
Categorized Displays the attribute fields in the Property

Editor in categories. This is the default.
Alphabetic Displays the attribute fields in the Property

Editor in alphabetical order.
Relabeling Elements
You can relabel elements from within the Property Editor.
To relabel an element:
1. Select the element in the Drawing Pane then, if the Property Editor is not already
displayed, select View > Properties.
2. In the General section of the Property Editor, click in the Label field, then type a
new label for the element.
Set Field Options Dialog Box

The Set Field Options dialog box lets you set the units for a specific attribute without
affecting the units used by other attributes or globally.
To use the Set Field Options dialog box, right-click any numerical field that has units,
then select Units and Formatting.

Value Displays the value of the currently selected item.
Unit Displays the type of measurement. To change the

unit, select the unit you want to use from the drop-
down list. This option also lets you use both U.S.
customary and S.I. units in the same worksheet.
Display Precision Sets the rounding of numbers and number of digits

displayed after the decimal point. Enter a negative
number for rounding to the nearest power of 10: (-1)
rounds to 10, (-2) rounds to 100, (-3) rounds to
1000, and so on. Enter a number from 0 to 15 to
indicate the number of digits after the decimal point.

Creating Your Model
Format Lets you select the display format used by the

current field.
Choices include:
• Scientific—Converts the entered value to a
string of the form "-d.ddd...E+ddd" or "-
d.ddd...e+ddd", where each 'd' indicates a digit
(0-9). The string starts with a minus sign if the
number is negative.
• Fixed Point—Abides by the display precision
setting, and automatically enters zeros after the
decimal place to do so. With a display precision
of 3, an entered value of 3.5 displays as 3.500.
• General—Truncates any zeros after the
decimal point, regardless of the display preci-
sion value. With a display precision of 3, the
value that would appear as 5.200 in Fixed Point
format displays as 5.2 when using General
format. The number is also rounded. So, an
entered value of 5.35 displays as 5.4 regardless
of the display precision.
• Number—Converts the entered value to a
string of the form "-d,ddd,ddd.ddd...", where
each 'd' indicates a digit (0-9). The string starts
with a minus sign if the number is negative.
Thousand separators are inserted between
each group of three digits to the left of the
decimal point.
Adding Storm Data

A storm data definition is a single rainfall curve that represents one rainfall event for a
given recurrence interval. The rainfall curve can be represented in one of five ways.
• User Defined IDF Table

• Hydro-35
• IDF Table Equation
• IDF Curve Equation
• IDF Polynomial Log Equation
Once the storm data definition is created it is applied to the model by assigning it to a
Global Storm Event. This will apply the storm event to the current scenario. This
storm event will then be applied to all catchments during analysis.

Adding Storm Data
Storm Data definitions are created in the “Storm Data Dialog Box”.
Storm Events are then applied to the model in the “Global Storm Events Dialog Box”
For background on rainfall data, see the Modeling Rainfall chapter in Stormwater
Conveyance Modeling and Design. This book is published by and available from
Bentley Institute Press.
Storm Data Dialog Box
The Storm Event dialog box allows you to create, edit, and delete the Storm Data defi-
nitions that will make up the Global Storm Events that are applied to the model.
A storm data definition can be created in any of the following ways, both from within
the Storm Data dialog box:
• You can manually create a storm data definition by clicking the New buttonand
selecting one of the five metohds in the Storm Data dialog.
• You can import storm data defintions from a text file.
• You can import a storm data definition from the associated Storm Event Group
engineering library. To do so Click the Engineering Libraries button and select
Import From Library in the Storm Data dialog.

Creating Your Model
The dialog box contains a list pane on the left, a tabbed input data area on the upper
right, and a graph pane on the lower right, and includes the following controls:
New Creates a new storm data definition that

uses an automatically created label.
• User Defined IDF Table—Adds a new
storm event to the list pane of the type
User Defined IDF Table.
• Hydro-35—Adds a new storm event to
the list pane of the type Hydro-35.
• IDF Table Equation—Adds a new
IDF Table Equation.
• IDF Curve Equation—Adds a new
IDF Curve Equation.
• IDF Polynomial Log Equation—Adds
a new storm event to the list pane of
the type IDF Polynomial Log Equation
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted storm

data definition.

Adding Storm Data
Rename Lets you rename the currently highlighted

storm data definition.
Report Lets you generate a preformatted report

that contains the input data associated with
the currently highlighted storm data
definition.
Import Opens a browse dialog, allowing you to

select a text file from which to import
storm definition data.
Engineering Clicking this button opens a submenu

Libraries containing the following commands:
• Browse Engineering Library—
Opens the Engineering Library
manager dialog, allowing you to
browse the Storm Event Groups
Library.
update a set of storm data defintions
previously imported from a Storm
Event Groups Library. The updates
reflect changes that have been made
to the library since it was imported.
update an existing Storm Event
Groups Library using current storm
data defintions that were initially
imported but have since been modi-
fied.
• Import From Library—Lets you
import a storm data defintion from an
existing Storm Event Groups Library.
• Export To Library—Lets you export
the current storm data defintions to an
existing Storm Event Groups Library.
The fields and controls that appear in the tabbed area depend on which definition type
is currently highlighted in the list pane on the left.

Creating Your Model
User Defined IDF Table

When you create a definition of the User Defined IDF Table definition type, a default
IDF Table is created with all values set to 0. You can add or remove Durations and
Return Periods using the buttons above the table.
When editing a definition of the User Defined IDF Table definition type, the tabbed
area of the dialog contains the following controls:
IDF Storm Event Input

Tab
Add/Remove Return Opens a submenu containing the following

Periods commands:
• Add Return Period—Adds a column to the
table for the specified return period. When you
select this command an Add Return Period
dialog will open, allowing you to type the
return period in years for the new column.
• Add Range—Adds columns to the table for
multiple return periods that are specified in the
Add Multiple Return Periods dialog that opens
when this command is selected.
• Delete <Return Period>—A Delete command
will be added to the submenu for each return
period (column) in the table. Use the Delete
command to remove the undesired column
from the table.
Add/Remove Opens a submenu containing the following

Durations commands:
• Add Duration—Adds a row to the table for the
specified duration. When you select this
command an Add Duration dialog will open,
allowing you to type the duration in minutes
(by default, you may select another unit to
use) for the new row.
• Add Range—Adds rows to the table for
multiple durations that are specified in the Add
Multiple Durations dialog that opens when this
command is selected.
• Delete <Duration>—A Delete command will
be added to the submenu for each duration
(row) in the table. Use the Delete command to
remove the undesired row from the table.

Adding Storm Data
Notes Tab This tab contains a text field that allows you to
enter descriptive notes that will be associated with
the currently highlighted storm data definition.
Library Tab This tab displays information about the storm data
definition that is currently highlighted in the list
pane. If the storm data definition is derived from
an engineering library, the synchronization details
can be found here. If the storm data definition was
created manually for this project, the
synchronization details will display the message
Orphan (local), indicating that the storm data
definition was not derived from a library entry.
Hydro-35
When editing a definition of the Hydro-35 definition type, the tabbed area of the
dialog contains the following controls:

Tab
Data Tables When you create a definition of the Hydro-35

definition type, the dialog will display 2 tables in
the tabbed area:
• The upper table is the input table. It includes
input fields for depth for the 2 year and 100
year return periods at 5, 15, and 60 minutes.
• The lower table is the non-editable results
table. The results table displays the rainfall
intensity values for the 2, 5, 10, 25, 50 and
100 year return periods at durations of 5, 10,
15, 30 and 60 minutes.

Creating Your Model
IDF Table Equation

The IDF Table Equation definition type calculates the storm data using the following
equation:
m
a ⋅ Rp
i = ---------------------
n
(b + D)
Where i = rainfall intensity

D = rainfall duration
Rp = return period
a, b, m, n = rainfall equation coefficients
When editing a definition of the IDF Table Equation type, the tabbed area of the

Tab
Equation Duration Specify the unit to be used for duration (D) value
Unit in the equation.
Equation Intensity Specify the unit to be used for intensity (i) value in
Unit the equation.
a Specify the value to be used for the a coefficient in

the equation.

Adding Storm Data
m Specify the value to be used for the m coefficient

in the equation.
b Specify the value to be used for the b coefficient

in the equation.
n Specify the value to be used for the n coefficient

in the equation.
Results Table This table displays the calculated rainfall intensity

values for the 2, 3, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200, and
500 year return periods at durations of 5, 10, 15,
20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100, and 120 minutes.
IDF Curve Equation

The IDF Table Equation definition type calculates the storm data using the following
equation:
a
i = ---------------------
n
(b + D)

a, b, n = rainfall equation coefficients

Creating Your Model
When editing a definition of the IDF Table Equation type, the tabbed area of the

Tab
Unit the equation.
Add Button Adds another Return Period row to the table.

When you click this button an Add Return Period
dialog appears, allowing you to specify the return
period for the new row.
Delete Button Removes the currently highlighted Return Period

row from the table.
a (log) Specify the value to be used for the a coefficient in

the equation for the associated return period.
b Specify the value to be used for the b coefficient

in the equation for the associated return period.
n Specify the value to be used for the n coefficient


values for the each of the return periods in the
table at durations of 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,
80, 100, and 120 minutes.

Adding Storm Data
IDF Polynomial Log Equation

The IDF Polynomial Log Equation definition type calculates the storm data using the
following equation:
2 3
i = a + b ⋅ ( ln D ) + c ⋅ ( ln D ) + d ⋅ ( ln D )

a, b, c, d = rainfall equation coefficients
When editing a definition of the IDF Polynomial Log Equation type, the tabbed area
of the dialog contains the following controls:

Tab
Unit the equation.
Add Button Adds another Return Period row to the table.

When you click this button an Add Return Period
dialog appears, allowing you to specify the return
period for the new row.
Delete Button Removes the currently highlighted Return Period

row from the table.
a (log) Specify the value to be used for the a coefficient in

b (log) Specify the value to be used for the b coefficient

c (log) Specify the value to be used for the c coefficient in

d (log) Specify the value to be used for the d coefficient


Creating Your Model

values for the each of the return periods in the
table at durations of 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,
80, 100, and 120 minutes.
Global Storm Events Dialog Box
Global Storm Events contain project-wide storm data derived from the Storm Data
definitions created in the Storm Data Dialog Box. Global Storm Events are applied to
all catchments during analysis. Global storm events are associated with Rainfall
Runoff alternatives.
You define project-wide global storm events in the Global Storm Events dialog box.
To add a global storm event:
1. Select Components > Global Storm Events.

2. In the Global Storm Events dialog box, each row in the table represents a Rainfall
Runoff alternative. In the Global Storm Event column, select the storm data defi-
nition from the submenu or click the Ellipses (...) button to display the Storm Data
dialog box, where you can create a new storm data definition.
3. The rest of the data is automatically added to the table based on the settings of the
selected storm event. Click Close.
The dialog box contains a table with the following columns:
Alternative Displays the name of the Rainfall Runoff

alternative that is used by the current scenario.

Creating Inlets
Global Storm Event Lists all of the storm data definitions that have
been created for the current project in the Storm
Data dialog box, which is accessible by clicking
the ellipsis button.
Storm Event Source Displays the location of the library file for storm
data defenitions that are derived from an
engineering library entry. Displays the message
Orphan (local) if the event was created for this
project and does not reference a library storm.
Creating Inlets
You have the following three options when assigning an inlet type to a catch basin
element:
• Maximum Capacity: When using this inlet type, any flow up to the specified
maximum inflow that reaches the inlet will be captured and added to the total flow
for the associated catch basin element.
• Percent Capture: When using this inlet type, only the specified percentage of
flow that reaches the inlet will be captured and added to the total flow for the asso-
ciated catch basin element.
• Catalog Inlet: This option allows you to select an inlet that was previously
created in the “Inlet Catalog Dialog Box”, or to access the Inlet Catalog dialog
box and create a new inlet.

Creating Your Model
To assign an inlet type to a catch basin element:
1. Double-click the catch basin to highlight it in the in the drawing pane and open the
Properties dialog for that catchment.
2. Under the Inlet section, click the Inlet Type field and select either Maximum
Capacity, Percent Capture, or Catalog Inlet.
a. If you select Maximum Capacity, enter a value in the Maximum Inflow field
to define the upper limit of inflow that will be captured by the inlet. Skip the
following steps.
b. If you select Percent Capture, enter a value in the Capture Efficiency field to
define the percentage of inflow that will be captured by the inlet. Skip the
following steps.
c. If you select Catalog Inlet, continue on with the next step.
3. Click the Inlet field and select a previously defined Inlet definition or choose the
<Select..> command to open the Inlet Catalog dialog and create a new one. For
more information about creating inlet definitions in the Inlets Catalog dialog, see
the “Inlet Catalog Dialog Box” topic.
Inlet Catalog Dialog Box
The Inlet Catalog dialog box allows you to create, edit, and delete inlet definitions that
can then be assigned to catchment elements in your model.
The following inlet types are available from this dialog:
• Combination
• Curb
• Ditch
• Grate
• Slot
• Generic
• Gutter Depth vs. Captured Flow
You can also import an inlet definition from the Inlet Libraries Engineering Library,
and export inlet definitions to the Engineering Library for later use.

Creating Inlets
The dialog box contains a list pane on the left and a tabbed input data area on the right,
and includes the following controls:
New Creates a new inlet defintion in the list

pane on the left.
Duplicate Copies the currently highlighted inlet

definition.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted inlet

definition.

inlet definition.

that contains the input data associated with
the currently highlighted inlet definition.
Synchronization Clicking this button opens a submenu

Options containing the following commands:
• Browse Engineering Library—
Opens the Engineering Library
manager dialog, allowing you to
browse the Inlet Libraries.
update a set of inlet defintions previ-
ously imported from one of the Inlet
Libraries. The updates reflect changes
that have been made to the library
since it was imported.
update one of the existing Inlet
Libraries using current inlet definitions
that were initially imported but have
since been modified.
• Import From Library—Lets you
import a inlet defintion from one of the
existing Inlet Libraries.
• Export To Library—Lets you export
the current inlet defintions to one of the
existing Inlet Libraries.

Creating Your Model
The fields and controls that appear in the tabbed area depend on which inlet type is
chosen. Not all fields will be available for all inlet types.
Inlet Tab
Structure Width Define the width of the inlet structure. This field is
available for all inlet types.
Structure Length Define the length of the inlet structure. This field
is available for all inlet types.
Curb Opening Height Define the height of the curb opening. This field is
available for Curb and Combination inlet types.
Default Curb Opening Define the default length of the curb opening. This
Length field is available for Curb and Combination inlet
types.
Local Depression Define the depth of the gutter depression at the

inlet, if any. This field is available for Curb and
Combination inlet types.
Depression Width Define the width of the gutter depression at the

inlet, if any. This field is available for Curb and
Throat Type Choose the throat type. The throat type defines the
shape of curb opening. This field is available for
Curb and Combination inlet types.
Throat Angle Define the angle of the inlet throat. This field is
only available when the Inclined Throat Type is
chosen. This field is available for Curb and
Grate Type Choose the grate type. This field is available for
Combination, Ditch, and Grate inlet types.
Grate Width Define the width of the grate. This field is

available for Combination, Ditch, and Grate inlet
types.
Default Grate Length Define the default length of the grate. This field is
available for Combination, Ditch, and Grate inlet
types.

Creating Inlets
Slot Width Define the default width of the slot. This field is
available for Slot inlet type.
Default Slot Length Define the default length of the slot. This field is
available for Slot inlet type.
Generic Table This table is only available when the Generic Inlet
type is selected. It allows you to define the amount
of Flow Captured at various Flow to Inlet points.
Click the New button to add a new row to the
table. Click the Delete button to remove the
currently highlighted row from the table.
Gutter Depth vs. This table is only available when the Cutter Depth
Captured Flow Table vs. Captured Flow Inlet type is selected. It allows
you to define the amount of Captured Flow at
various gutter Depth values. Click the New button
to add a new row to the table. Click the Delete
button to remove the currently highlighted row
from the table.
Design Tab This tab contains a list of allowable design

lengths. When performing a design analysis, the
program will only be able to select inlets of one of
lengths specified here. To add a new length to the
list click the New button and type in the length. To
remove a length from the list, highlight it and click
the Delete button.
the currently highlighted inlet definition.
Library Tab This tab displays information about the inlet

pane. If the inlet definition is derived from an
engineering library, the synchronization details
can be found here. If the inlet definition was
Orphan (local), indicating that the inlet definition
was not derived from a library entry.

Creating Your Model
To create a new Inlet:
1. Click the New button above the list pane.

2. Type a name for the inlet.
3. Choose an Inlet Type from the Inlet Type field in the tabbed section to the right.
4. Type in input data in the input fields in the tabbed section to the right. The avail-
able fields will vary according to the Inlet Type that is chosen.
5. Click Close when you have finished defining the inlet parameters.
To import an inlet from the Engineering Library:
1. Click the Synchronization Options button and select Import From Library from
the submenu.
2. Expand the Inlet Libraries node to view all of the existing Inlet Libraries. There
will be the default Inlets Library, along with any additional custom libraries
you’ve created.
3. Expand the desired library to view all of the inlet definitions within that library.
Click on the inlet definitions to view their properties on the right side of the
dialog.
4. When you have chosen the desired inlet definition click the Select button. The
new inlet will appear in the list pane.
To access the Inlet Catalog
In Stand-Alone, click the Components menu and select the Inlet Catalog command.
In MicroStation mode, click the StormCAD menu, then select Components > Inlet
Catalog.
Modeling Neenah Grates
The Neenah Foundry Company (Neenah, Wisconsin - http://www.nfco.com) produces

an extensive range of storm water inlets/catch basins, commonly referred to as
'Neenah grates'.
These Neenah grates are not currently included in the default StormCAD Engineering
Libraries, but in StormCAD V8 it is quite straightforward for users to add them as
required.

Creating Inlets
To Model a Neenah Grate for On Grade Inlets:
1. Click the Components menu, then select Inlets.

2. In the Inlets Catalog dialog, click New. Type a name for the new inlet.
Note: We suggest using the Neenah catalog number, and the

transverse and longitudinal slopes that the curve capacity
values will correspond too).
Unlike the in HEC-22 calculations, there is no general

relationship available for Neenah grate capacity versus
longitudinal slope, so each Neenah grate is entered in
StormCAD as a Gutter Depth vs. Captured Flow'curve which is
specific to a particular transverse and longitudinal slope.
3. Next click Inlet Type and select Gutter Depth vs. Captured Flow. Enter the
below ground Structure Width and Structure Length.
4. Now refer to the Neenah technical information to find the K value associated with
this grate (for the appropriate transverse and longitudinal slopes).

Creating Your Model
5. For this example, for a longitudinal slope of 2% and a tranverse slope of 5%, use a
K value of 16. Then a depth versus captured flow relationship can be determined
(5 ⁄ 3)
using the equation: Q = K⋅D . So:
Table 5-2: Depth vs. Flow Values
Depth (ft) Flow (cfs)
0.00 0.00
0.05 0.11
0.10 0.34
0.15 0.68
0.20 1.09
0.25 1.59
0.30 2.15
0.35 2.78
0.40 3.47
0.45 4.23
0.50 5.04
6. Now this relationship can be copied and pasted into the Gutter Depth vs. Captured
Flow area of the Inlet editor. To do this, copy the data to the windows clipboard,
then in StormCAD, select the top right cell in Gutter Depth vs. Captured Flow
grid and press Ctrl+V to paste.

Creating Inlets
Note: Make sure the units used in the Inlet editor match the units used
in determining the Depth vs. Captured Flow relationship.
7. This inlet is now set up and ready to use in the current StormCAD project. To
make it available for use in other projects, click on the Synchronization Options
button and select Export to Library.
To Model a Neenah Grate for In Sag Inlets:
For rectangular grates in sag, it is generally possible to enter a Neenah grate as a stan-
dard Grate Inlet Type.
However, please note that the StormCAD uses the HEC-22 methodology for
computing capacity, which does not always produce capacities that correspond to
capacities given by Neenah Foundary (since some discharge coefficients are slightly
different).
The designer should verify that they are satisfied with the calculated capacity in these
cases.
For non-rectangular grates, the designer should compute, or request from Neenah
Foundry, a Gutter Depth vs. Captured Flow relationship for the grate and then enter
that in StormCAD using a procedure similar to the procedure outlined for Inlets On
Grade above.
Note that the capacities of grate inlets in sag are not a function of the transverse of
longitudinal slopes, so one Gutter Depth vs. Captured Flow curve per grate is suffi-
cient for all transverse and longitudinal slopes.

Creating Your Model
Changing the Drawing View

You change the drawing view of your model by using the pan tool or one of the zoom
tools:
• “Panning” on page 5-199

• “Zooming” on page 5-199
Panning
You can change the position of your model in the drawing pane by using the Pan tool.
Pan tool
To use the Pan tool:
1. Click the Pan button on the Tools toolbar.

The mouse cursor changes to the Pan icon.
2. Click anywhere in the drawing, hold down the mouse button and move the mouse
to reposition the current view.
or
If your mouse is equipped with a mousewheel, you can pan by simply holding down
the mousewheel and moving the mouse to reposition the current view.
or
Select View > Pan, then click anywhere in the drawing, hold down the mouse button
and move the mouse to reposition the current view
Zooming
You can enlarge or reduce your model in the drawing pane using one of the following
zoom tools:
Zoom In and Out
The simple Zoom In and Zoom Out commands allow you to increase or decrease,
respectively, the zoom level of the current view by one step per mouse click.

Changing the Drawing View
Zoom In
Zoom Out
To use Zoom In or Zoom Out, click the desired button on the Tools toolbar, or select
View > Zoom > Zoom In or View > Zoom > Zoom In.
If your mouse is equipped with a mousewheel, you zoom in or out by simply moving
the mousewheel up or down respectively.
Zoom Window
The Zoom Window command lets you zoom in on an area of your model defined by a
window that you draw in the drawing pane.
To use Zoom Window, select View > Zoom > Zoom Window button, then click and
drag the mouse inside the drawing pane to draw a rectangle. The area of your model
inside the rectangle will appear enlarged.
Note: If you use the Zoom Window command frequently, you might
find it more convenient to add them to the Tools toolbar. See
“Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-40 for more
information.
Zoom Extents
The Zoom Extents command automatically sets the zoom level such that the entire
model is displayed in the drawing pane.
Zoom Extents
To use Zoom Extents, click the Zoom Extents button on the Tools toolbar. The entire
model is displayed in the drawing pane.
or
Select View > Zoom > Zoom Extents.

Creating Your Model
Zoom Realtime
The Zoom Realtime command lets you dynamically scale up and down the zoom
level. The zoom level is defined by the magnitude of mouse movement while the tool
is active.
Zoom Realtime
Zoom Previous and Zoom Next
Zoom Previous
Zoom Previous returns the zoom level to the most recent previous setting. To use
Zoom Previous, click the Zoom Previous button on the Tools toolbar.
or
Select View > Zoom > Zoom Previous.
Zoom Next returns the zoom level to the setting that was active before a Zoom
Previous command was executed. To use Zoom Previous, click View > Zoom >
Zoom Next.
Note: If you use the Zoom Next command frequently, you might find it
more convenient to add them to the Tools toolbar. See “Adding
and Removing Toolbar Buttons” on page 2-40 for more information.
Using the Zoom Center Command

The Zoom Center command lets you enter drawing coordinates that will be centered
in the drawing pane.
To use the Zoom Center command:
1. Select View > Zoom > Zoom Center. The Zoom Center dialog box appears.
2. Enter the X and Y coordinates.
3. Select the zoom factor from the Zoom drop-down, then click OK.

Using Selection Sets
Zoom Center Dialog Box

The Zoom Center dialog box contains the following options:
X Defines the X coordinate of the point at which the

model will be centered.
Y Defines the Y coordinate of the point at which the

model will be centered.
Zoom Factor Defines the zoom level that will be applied

when the zoom center command is initiated.
Available zoom levels are listed in percentages
of 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200 and 400.

Selection sets are user-defined groups of network elements. They allow you to
predefine a group of network elements that you want to manipulate together. You
manage selection sets in the “Selection Sets Manager”.
There are two ways to create a selection set:
• From a selection of elements—You create a new selection set in the Selection Sets
Manager, then use your mouse to select the desired elements in the drawing pane.
• From a query—Create a query in the Query Manager, then use the named query to
find elements in your model and place them in the selection set.

Creating Your Model
The following illustration shows the overall process.
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition contains powerful features that let you view or
analyze subsets of your entire model. You can find these elements using the Network
Navigator (see “Using the Network Navigator” on page 5-211).
You can perform the following operations with selection sets:
• “Viewing Elements in a Selection Set” on page 5-205

• “Creating a Selection Set from a Selection” on page 5-206
• “Creating a Selection Set from a Query” on page 5-206
• “Adding Elements to a Selection Set” on page 5-208
• “Removing Elements from a Selection Set” on page 5-209
Selection Sets Manager
The Selection Sets Manager allows you to create, edit, and navigate to selection sets.
The Selection Sets Manager consists of a toolbar and a list pane, which displays all of
the selection sets that are associated with the current project. The toolbar contains the
following buttons:

New Contains the following commands:

• Create from Selection—Creates a new
static selection set from elements you
select in your model.
• Create from Query—Creates a new
dynamic selection set from existing
queries.
Delete Deletes the selection set that is currently

highlighted in the list pane. This command
is also available from the short-cut menu,
which you can access by right-clicking an
item in the list pane.
Duplicate Creates a copy of the set that is currently

highlighted in the list pane.

Creating Your Model
Edit • When a selection-based selection set is

highlighted when you click this button,
opens the Selection Set Element
Removal dialog box, which lets you edit
the selection set. This command is also
available from the short-cut menu,
which you can access by right-clicking
an item in the list pane.
• When a query-based selection set is
highlighted when you click this button,
opens the Selection By Query dialog
box, which lets you add or remove
queries from the selection set. This
command is also available from the
short-cut menu, which you can access
by right-clicking an item in the list pane.
Rename Lets you rename the selection set that is

currently highlighted in the list pane. This
command is also available from the short-
cut menu, which you can access by right-
clicking an item in the list pane.
Select In Drawing Lets you quickly select all the elements in

the drawing pane that are part of the
currently highlighted selection set. Once you
have selected the elements in a selection set
using Select In Drawing, you can delete
them all at once or create a report on them.
This command is also available from the
short-cut menu, which you can access by
right-clicking an item in the list pane.
Help Displays online help for the Selection Sets

Manager.
You can view the properties of a selection in the Property Editor by right-clicking the
selection set in the list pane and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu.
Viewing Elements in a Selection Set
You use the Network Navigator to view the elements that make up a selection set.

To view the elements that make up a selection set:
1. Open the Network Navigator by selecting View > Network Navigator or clicking
the Network Navigator button on the View toolbar.
2. Select a selection set from the Selection Set drop-down list. The elements in the
selection set appear in the Network Navigator.
Tip: You can double-click an element in the Network Navigator to

select and center it in the Drawing Pane.
Creating a Selection Set from a Selection
You create a new selection set by selecting elements in your model.
To create a new selection set from a selection:
1. Select all of the elements you want in the selection set by either drawing a selec-
tion box around them or by holding down the Ctrl key while clicking each one in
turn.
2. When all of the desired elements are highlighted, right-click and select Create
Selection Set.
3. Type the name of the selection set you want to create, then click OK to create the
new selection set. Click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating the selec-
tion set.
4. Alternatively, you can open the Selection Set Manager with the elements high-
lighted and click the New button and then select Create from Selection. Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition prompts you to select one or more elements if none
are highlighted in the drawing pane.
Create Selection Set Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you create a new selection set. It contains the following
field:
New selection set name Lets you type the name of the new selection set.
Creating a Selection Set from a Query
You create a dynamic selection set by creating a query-based selection set. A query-
based selection set can contain one or more queries, which are valid SQL expressions.

Creating Your Model
To create a new selection set from a query:
1. In the Selection Sets Manager, click the New button and select Create from
Query. The Selection by Query dialog box appears.
2. Available queries appear in the list pane on the left; queries selected to be part of
the selection set appear in the list pane on the right. Use the arrow buttons in the
middle of the dialog to add one or all queries from the Available Queries list to the
Selected Queries list, or to remove queries from the Selected list.
– You can also double-click queries on either side of the dialog box to add them
to or remove them from the selection set.
Selection by Query Dialog Box

The Selection by Query dialog box lets you create selection sets from available
queries. The dialog box contains the following controls:
Available Queries Contains all the queries that are available for your
selection set. The Available Columns list is
located on the left side of the dialog box.
Selected Queries Contains queries that are part of the selection set.
To add queries to the Selected Queries list, select
one or more queries in the Available Queries list,
then click the Add button [>].

Query Manipulation Lets you select or clear queries to be used in the

Buttons selection set:
• [ > ] Adds the selected items from the Avail-
able Queries list to the Selected Queries list.
• [ >> ] Adds all of the items in the Available
Queries list to the Selected Queries list.
• [ < ] Removes the selected items from the
Selected Queries list.
• [ << ] Removes all items from the Selected
Queries list.
Note: You can select multiple queries

in the Available Queries list by
holding down the Shift key or
the Control key while clicking
with the mouse. Holding down
the Shift key provides group
selection behavior. Holding
down the Control key provides
single element selection
behavior.
Adding Elements to a Selection Set
You can add a single or multiple elements to a static selection set.
To add an element to a static selection set:
1. Right-click the element to be added, then select Add to Selection Set from the
shortcut menu.
2. In the Add to Selection Set dialog box, select the selection set to which you want
to add the element.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the element to the selected selection set.
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating the selection set.
To add a group of elements to a static selection set all at once:
1. Select all of the elements to be added by either drawing a selection box around
them, or by holding down the Ctrl key while clicking each one in turn.
2. When all of the desired elements are highlighted, right-click and select Add to
Selection Set.

Creating Your Model
3. In the Add to Selection Set dialog box, select the selection set to which you want
to add the element.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the element to the selected selection set.
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating the selection set.
Add To Selection Set Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select the Add to Selection Set command. It
contains the following field:
Add to: Drop-down menu that lets you select the selection
set to which the currently highlighted element or
elements will be added.
Removing Elements from a Selection Set
You can easily remove elements from a static selection set in the Selection Set
Element Removal dialog box.
To remove an element from a static selection set:
1. Display the Selection Sets Manager by selecting View > Selection Sets or
clicking the Selection Sets button on the View toolbar.
2. In the Selection Sets Manager, select the desired selection set then click the Edit
button.
3. In the Selection Set Element Removal dialog box, find the element you want to
remove in the table. Select the element label or the entire table row, then click the
Delete button.
4. Click OK.
Selection Set Element Removal Dialog Box

This dialog appears when you click the edit button from the Selection Set Manager. It
allows you to remove elements from the selection set that is highlighted in the Selec-
tion Sets Manager when the Edit button is clicked.
Performing Group-Level Operations on Selection Sets
StormCAD lets you perform group-level deletions on elements in a selection set using
the Select In Drawing button in the Selection Sets Manager.

Note: While it is not possible to directly edit groups of elements in a

selection set, you can use the Next button in the Network
Navigator to quickly navigate through each element in the
selection set and edit its properties in the Property Editor.
To delete multiple elements from a selection set:
1. Open the Selection Sets Manager by selecting View > Selection Sets or clicking
the Selection Sets button on the View toolbar.
2. In the Selection Sets Manager, highlight the selection set that contains elements
you want to delete.
3. Click the Select In Drawing button in the Selection Sets Manager to highlight all
of the selection set’s elements in the drawing pane.
– If there is only one selection set listed in the Selection Set Manager, you don’t
have to highlight it before clicking the Select In Drawing button.
4. Shift-click (hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button) any selected
elements that you do not want to delete.
5. Right-click and select Delete. The highlighted elements in the selection set are
deleted from your model.
To create a report on a group of elements in a selection set:
1. Open the Selection Sets Manager by selecting View > Selection Sets or clicking
the Selection Sets button on the View toolbar.
2. In the Selection Sets Manager, highlight the selection set that contains elements
you want to report on.
3. Click the Select In Drawing button in the Selection Sets Manager to highlight all
of the selection set’s elements in the drawing pane.
– If there is only one selection set listed in the Selection Set Manager, you don’t
have to highlight it before clicking the Select In Drawing button.
4. Shift-click (hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button) any selected
elements that you do not want to include in the report.
5. Right-click and select Report. A report window displays the report.

Creating Your Model
Using the Network Navigator

The Network Navigator consists of a toolbar and a table that lists the Label and ID of
each of the elements contained within the current selection. The selection can include
elements highlighted manually in the drawing pane, elements contained within a
selection set, (see “Using Selection Sets” for more information) or elements returned
by a query.
To open the Network Navigator, click the View menu and select the Network Navi-
gator command, press <Ctrl+3>, or click the Network Navigator button on the View
toolbar.
Query Selection Choose the element sets to use in the query.

List Once a query is selected, it can be executed
when you click the > icon.
If there is already a Query listed in the list

box, it can be run when the Execute icon is
clicked.
Execute Click to run the selected query.
Previous Chooses the element above the currently

selected one in the list.
Zoom To Zooms the drawing pane view to the

selected element at the magnification level
specified in the Zoom Level menu.

Using the Network Navigator
Next Chooses the element below the currently

selected one in the list.
Copy Copies the list of elements to the Windows

clipboard.
Remove Removes the selected element from the list.
Select In Selects the elements in the drawing pane and

Drawing performs a zoom extent based on the
selection.
Highlight When this toggle button is on, elements

returned by a query will be highlighted in
the drawing pane to increase their visibility.
Refresh Refreshes the current selection.

Drawing
Help Opens the StormCAD help.
Zoom Level This menu lets you specify the

magnification level at which elements are
displayed in the drawing pane when the
Zoom To command is initiated.

Creating Your Model
Query Parameters Dialog Box
The Query Parameters dialog appears when you perform a Network Trace >
Upstream or a Network Trace > Downstream query. The network trace query will
find all elements that are upstream or downstream of the element chosen in this dialog.
To perform an Upstream Network Trace:
1. In the Network Navigator, click the Query Selection List button and select
Network Trace > Upstream.
2. In the Query Parameters dialog, click the Downstream Node field and choose
Select...
3. In the drawing pane, click the downstream element. The trace query will find all
elements that are upstream of the element chosen here.
4. Click OK.
To perform a Downstream Network Trace:
1. In the Network Navigator, click the Query Selection List button and select
Network Trace > Downstream.
2. In the Query Parameters dialog, click the Upstream Node field and choose
Select...
3. In the drawing pane, click the upstream element. The trace query will find all
elements that are downstream of the element chosen here.
4. Click OK.
Using Prototypes
Prototypes allow you to enter default values for elements in your network. These
values are used while laying out the network. Prototypes can reduce data entry
requirements dramatically if a group of network elements share common data.

Using Prototypes
For example, if a section of the network contains all three foot-diameter manholes ,
use the manhole prototype to set the Diameter field to 3.00 ft. When you create a new
manhole in your model, its diameter attribute will default to 3.00 ft.
Note: Changes to the prototypes are not retroactive and will not affect
any elements created prior to the change.
If a section of your system has distinctly different

characteristics than the rest of the system, adjust your
prototypes before laying out that section. This will save time
when you edit the properties later.
For instructions on how to create prototypes, see “Creating Prototypes” on page 5-

214.
Creating Prototypes
Prototypes contain default values for Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition elements.

You create prototypes in the Prototypes Manager.
To create a prototype:
1. Open your Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition project or start a new project.

2. Select View > Prototypes or press Ctrl+6.
The Prototypes Manager opens. All Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition element
types are displayed in an expanding and collapsing list.
3. Select the element type for which you want to create a prototype, then click the
New button.
The element type in the list expands to display all the prototypes that exist for that
element type.
Each element type contains a default prototype, which is not editable, and any
prototypes that you have created. The current set of default values for each
element type is identified by the Make Current icon.
4. Double-click the prototype you just created. The Property Editor for the element
type opens.
5. Edit the attribute values in the Property Editor as required.
6. To make the new prototype the default, click the Make Current button in the
Prototypes Manager.
The icon next to the prototype changes to indicate that the values in the prototype
will be applied to all instances of that element type that you add to your current
project.

Creating Your Model

– To rename a prototype, select the prototype in the list and click the Rename
button.
– To delete a prototype, select the prototype in the list and click the Delete
button.
– To view a report of the default values in the prototype, select the prototype in
the list and click the Report button.
Prototypes Manager
The Prototypes Manager allows you to create prototypes, which contain default
common data for each element type. The Prototypes Manager consists of a toolbar and
a list pane, which displays all of the elements available in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM
Edition.
The list of elements in the Prototypes Manager list pane is expandable and collapsible.
Click on the Plus sign to expand an element and see its associated prototypes. Click on
the Minus sign to collapse the element.
Each element in the list pane contains a default prototype; you cannot edit this default
prototype. The default prototypes contains common values for each element type; if
you add elements to your model without creating new prototypes, the data values in
the default prototypes appear in the Property Editor for that element type.
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
New Creates a new prototype of the selected

element.
Delete Deletes the prototype that is currently

Rename Lets you rename the prototype that is

currently highlighted in the list pane.
Make Current Lets you make the prototype that is currently

highlighted in the list pane the default for
that element type. When you make the
current prototype the default, every element
of that type that you add to your model in
the current project will contain the same
common data as the prototype.

Automatic Design
Report Lets you view a report of the data associated

with the prototype that is currently
Expand All Expands all of the branches in the hierarchy

displayed in the list pane.
Collapse All Collapses all of the branches in the

hierarchy displayed in the list pane.
Help Displays online help for the Prototypes

Manager.
Automatic Design
StormCAD allows you to design many parts of the sewer network, including gravity
piping and structures. The design is flexible enough to allow you to specify the
elements to be designed, from a single pipe size to the entire system.
Pipes and structures are designed to consider several constraints, such as allowable
ranges of slope, velocity, and cover. In general, the design algorithm attempts to mini-
mize excavation, which is typically the most expensive part of installing sewer piping
and structures.
Changes suggested to the model by an automatic design calculation will be saved to

the Physical Alternative that you specify. This Physical Alternative should be
uniquely created just for the automatic design to avoid overwriting the data in your
other Physical Alternatives.
Using Automatic Constraint Based Design
StormCAD can automatically size conduits, set node invert elevations and determine
the size of inlets to pass a design storm while meeting user-specified constraints. To
use this feature: set up the model for analysis, specify which elements are to be sized
and the sizes available for use in the design, indicate the constraints to be met, and set
the scenario’s Calculation Type (found in the calculation options) to Design as
opposed to Analysis.

Creating Your Model
Note: Automated conduit sizing only relates to closed conduits such

as circular and elliptical pipes and box conduits, not open
channels.
The detailed steps are provided below:
1. Create a StormCAD model with all the elements to be designed. Make initial esti-
mates of the decision variables such as conduit size and invert elevations. Run the
model to make sure that it is complete and will calculate without fatal errors.
2. Create a list of candidate conduit section sizes in the Conduit Catalog (click the
Components menu and select Conduit Catalog). These candidate conduits
should have the same conduit shape and material as the pipe in the original model.
There must be at least one conduit in the Conduit Catalog with the same shape
(e.g. circular) and material (e.g. PVC) as the conduit being designed. While the
user can construct this list manually, it is generally recommended to build it using
the Import from Library command and then picking the shape and material from
the list in the library, then deleting those sizes that should not be considered in
design.
3. In the case of inlet sizing for catch basins, StormCAD can automatically design
the inlet opening length for the inlet at any catch basin element in the network.
However, there are three different Inlet Types in StormCAD: Percent Capture,
Maximum Capacity and Catalog Inlet. Of these, only Catalog Inlets have a config-
urable opening length, therefore, in order for StormCAD to design opening length,
the Inlet Type must be set to Catalog Inlet, and an Inlet must be selected. It may
be necessary to add a new inlet to Inlet Catalog (click the Component menu and
select Inlet Catalog), or import one or more from the Engineering Libraries.
StormCAD will select an opening length for a particular inlet from the list of
Design Lengths associated with that inlet in the Inlet Catalog. The Design
Lengths may be viewed or edited by clicking on the Design tab in the Inlet
Catalog. The design algorithm will determine the minimum available inlet length
that meets the design constraints.
StormCAD will not select a different Catalog Inlet during the design run, it will
only select a different opening length for the inlet specified.
4. Go to the Design Alternative (click the Analysis menu and select Alternatives)
and set up the options for the run. There are three decisions that need to be made
for conduits in terms of which properties should be adjusted during design:
– Design Conduit?
– Design Start Invert?
– Design End Invert?
Checking any of these boxes means that these properties will be adjusted during
design. ("Design Conduits" means the software should determine the size of the
conduit.) Unchecking them means that the values set in the initial model will be
maintained.

Automatic Design
For nodes, the choices are:

– Design Structure Elevations?
– Allow Drop Structure?
Note: If you do not want to the Start (Upstream) and/or Stop

(Downstream) invert elevations to change during the design, you
must set the Design Start Invert? and/or Design Stop Invert?
property to False.
For catch basin inlets, the choice is:

– Design Inlet Opening?
5. Next set up the design constraints.
For conduits, if you pick Simple as the type, the Minimum and Maximum
Velocity need to be specified (or the defaults kept). If Table is selected, you can
vary the constraints based on pipe Rise. If you do not want to use velocity
constraints, set the Minimum to zero and Maximum to a large number.
For inverts, decide whether to match Inverts or Crowns or specify an offset
through the structure.
For inlets, specify the Maximum Spread in Sag and the maximum Depth in Sag.
Note: If you set up constraints under Default Design Constraints (click

the Components menu and select Default Design Constraints),
these constraints will be used for any new Design Alternative as
well as the alternative associated with the current scenario.
You can modify the constraints for just an individual element by checking Specify
Local Pipe (Inlet) Constraints box associated with that element.
6. You can specify some additional options under the Extended Design portion of
the alternative manager. In some cases, the pipes must be designed to carry the
design flow at less than 100% full (100% Full is the default). You can check
Partly Full Design and specify the design percent as either a constant (Simple) or
a tabular list as a function of conduit rise.
Note: The design percentage is defined as a percentage of full depth.
You can also allow for multiple parallel pipe barrels or limit the maximum section
size by specifying maximum rise.
7. Create a new calculation option (click the Analysis menu and select Calculation
Options) with the Calculation Type set to Design (as opposed to Analysis).

Creating Your Model
8. Create a new scenario using the desired Design Alternative and Calculation
Options. Make that scenario the current scenario and start the design by picking
Compute.
9. When the design starts, it will indicate the (current) Physical Alternative in which
the results will be stored. If the user wants the results stored there, pick Yes. If the
user wants the new design properties stored in another Physical Alternative, this is
the place to specify that alternative by picking No. That Physical Alternative is
associated with the current scenario.
Default Design Constraints
Pipe diameters, invert elevations, node structures, and inlets can be all designed with
the same set of design constraints. You also have the option to adjust these values indi-
vidually for each pipe or structure.
The Default Design Constraints dialog is divided into the three following tabs:
• Gravity Pipe
• Node
• Inlet
Gravity Pipe Tab

The Gravity Pipe tab allows you to enter default constraints to be used for the design
of pipes when performing a calculation run in design mode. The dialog is divided into
the following sections:
• Default Constraints
• Extended Design
Default Constraints Section
In this section, there is a Velocity tab, a Cover tab, and a Slope tab. You can specify
the following default constraints to be used for the design of gravity pipes:
• Velocity Tab: The Velocity tab consists of the following controls:

– Velocity Constraints Type–When Simple is chosen, a single minimum and
maximum Velocity value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Velocity (Minimum) vs Velocity (Maximum) points in
tabular format.

Automatic Design
– Velocity (Minimum)–Specify the minimum allowable velocity value. This

control is only available when the Velocity Constraint Type is set to Simple.
– Velocity (Maximum)–Specify the maximum allowable velocity value. This
• Cover Tab: The Cover tab consists of the following controls:

– Cover Constraints Type–When Simple is chosen, a single minimum and
maximum Cover value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Cover (Minimum) vs Cover (Maximum) points in tabular
format.
– Cover (Minimum)–Specify the minimum allowable cover value. This
control is only available when the Cover Constraint Type is set to Simple.
– Cover (Maximum)–Specify the maximum allowable cover value. This
• Slope Tab: The Slope tab consists of the following controls:

– Slope Constraints Type–When Simple is chosen, a single minimum and
maximum Slope value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Slope (Minimum) vs Slope (Maximum) points in tabular
format.
– Slope (Minimum)–Specify the minimum allowable slope value. This control
is only available when the Slope Constraint Type is set to Simple.
– Slope (Maximum)–Specify the maximum allowable slope value. This control
Extended Design Section
This section lets you specify if the following design parameters are to be used. If they
are to be used, you can also specify the associated default value. The Extended Design
section is split into three tabs:
• Part Full Design Tab: The Part Full Design tab consists of the following controls:
– Is Part Full Design?–When checked, allows you to specify the Percent Full
target to be used by the design algorithm.
– Percent Full Constraint Type–Allows you to specify how the Percent Full
constraints are defined. When Simple is chosen, a single Percentage Full
value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify multiple Rise vs
Percent Full points in tabular format.
– Percentage Full–Specify the Percent Full value to be used when the Is Part
Full Design? box is checked. This control is only availble when the Percent
Full Constraint Type is set to Simple.

Creating Your Model
• Number of Barrels Tab: The Number of Barrels tab consists of the following
controls:
– Allow Multiple Barrels?–When checked, allows the design algorithm to use
more than one identical section in parallel, up to the specified Maximum
Number of Barrels.
– Maximum Number of Barrels–The maximum number of identical sections
allowed to be used in parallel when the Allow Multiple Barrels? box is
checked.
• Section Size Tab: The Section Size tab consists of the following controls:
– Limit Section Size?–When checked, limits the pipe section height to the
specified Maximum Rise value during the design process.
– Maximum Rise–The maximum rise a section height is allowed to be used in
the design when the Limit Section Size? box is checked.
Node Tab
This tab lets you specify the design constraints to be used by default for all gravity
structures when performing calculations in design mode. During an automatic design,
the program will adjust the elevations of the pipes adjacent to the structure according
to the structure’s matching constraints. The two choices for matching are Inverts and
Crowns. Additionally, the downstream pipe can be offset from the upstream pipe(s) by
a specified amount. This value is called the Matchline Offset. Optionally, the program
supports the design of drop structures. In some situations, drop structures can mini-
mize pipe cover depths while maintaining adequate hydraulic performance.
Inlet Tab
This tab lets you specify the design constraints to be used for all inlets when
performing a calculation run in design mode. During an automatic design, the
program will adjust the length of the inlet in order to meet the design constraints.
• For an inlet in sag, the Default In Sag Design Constraints consist of maintaining the
gutter spread and water depth under a given value.
• For an inlet on a grade, the Default on Grade Design Constraints consist of ensuring
that at least a given percentage of the gutter flow is intercepted.
Default In Sag Design Constraints Section
This section lets you specify the design constraints to be used for all inlets located in
sag when performing calculations in design mode.

Engineering Libraries
During an automatic design, the program will adjust the length of the inlet in order to
meet both design constraints:
• Maximum Spread in Sag–The maximum allowed spread of water at the inlet,

measured from the curb.
• Maximum Depth in Sag–The maximum depth of water allowed at the inlet.
Default On Grade Design Constraints
This section lets you specify the design constraints to be used for all inlets located on
a grade when performing a calculation run in design mode. During an automatic
design, the program will adjust the length of the inlet in order to meet a minimum inlet
efficiency, or percentage of gutter flow intercepted by the inlet, that you specify.
Conduit and Inlet Catalog Templates
When performing an Automatic Design, StormCAD suggests only conduit and inlet
types that are contained within the Conduit and Inlet Catalogs. A new project starts
with empty Conduit and Inlet Catalogs. You can populate the Inlet and Conduit Cata-
logs with pipes and inlets of your choosing, or you can open one of the predefined
Templates we have provided. The templates can be found in the Bentley/
StormCAD8/Templates folder. There is a template for US units and one for SI units.
Warning! The predefined templates are Read-Only files. Do not modify

the read-only setting on these files.
You may also create new Templates and use those in future projects. To create a new
template, populate the inlet and conduit catalogs with the desired data and save the
project to the template folder. To use the new template, simply open it and save it as a
new file name to use it for a new project.
Engineering Libraries are powerful and flexible tools that you use to manage specifi-
cations of common materials, objects, or components that are shared across projects.
Some examples of objects that are specified through engineering libraries include pipe
materials, storm events, and unit sanitary loads. You can modify engineering libraries
and the items they contain by using the Engineering Libraries command in the Tools
menu, or by clicking the ellipsis (…) buttons available next to the fields in dialog
boxes that make use of engineering libraries.

Creating Your Model
Note: The data for each engineering library is stored in an XML file in
your Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition program directory. We
strongly recommend that you edit these files only using the
built-in tools available by selecting Tools > Engineering
Libraries.
You work with engineering libraries and the items they contain in the Engineering
Libraries dialog box, which contains all of the project’s engineering libraries. Indi-
vidual libraries are compilations of library entries, along with their attributes. For
more information about working with engineering libraries, see “Working with Engi-
neering Libraries” on page 5-223.
By default, each project you create in StormCAD uses the items in the default
libraries. In special circumstances, you may wish to create custom libraries to use with
one or more projects. You can do this by copying a standard library or creating a new
library.
When you change the properties for an item in an engineering library, those changes
affect all projects that use that library item. At the time a project is loaded, all of its
engineering library items are synchronized to the current library. Items are synchro-
nized based on their label. If the label is the same, then the item’s values will be made
the same.
The default libraries that are installed with Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition are
editable. In addition, you can create a new library of any type, and can then create new
entries of your own definition.
• Library types are displayed in the Engineering Library manager in an expanding/

collapsing tree view.
• Library types can contain categories and subcategories, represented as folders in
the tree view.
• Individual library entries are contained within the categories, subcategories, and
folders in the tree view.
• Libraries, categories, folders, and library entries are displayed in the tree view
with their own unique icons. You can right-click these icons to display submenus
with different commands.
Working with Engineering Libraries
When you select a library entry in the tree view, the attributes and attribute values
associated with the entry are displayed in the editor pane on the right side of the dialog
box.

Working with Libraries
Right-clicking a Library icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing the
following commands:
Create Library Creates a new engineering library of the currently

highlighted type.
Add Existing Library Lets you add an existing engineering library that
has been stored on your hard drive as an .xml file
to the current project.
Working with Categories
Right-clicking a Category icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing the
following commands:
Add Item Creates a new entry within the current library.
Add Folder Creates a new folder under the currently

highlighted library.
Save As Lets you save the currently highlighted category

as an .xml file that can then be used in future
projects.
Remove Deletes the currently highlighted category from

the library.
Working with Folders
Right-clicking a Folder icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing the
following commands:
Add Item Creates a new entry within the current folder.
Add Folder Creates a new folder under the currently

highlighted folder.
Rename Lets you rename the currently highlighted folder.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted folder and its

contents.

Creating Your Model
Working with Library Entries
Right-clicking a Library Entry icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing
the following commands:
Rename Lets you rename the currently highlighted entry.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted entry from the

library.
Engineering Libraries Dialog Box

The Engineering Libraries dialog box contains an explorer tree-view pane on the left,
a library entry editor pane on the right, and the following buttons above the explorer
tree view pane:
New Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Create Library—Creates a new engi-
neering library.
• Add Existing Library—Lets you add an
existing engineering library that has
been stored on your hard drive as an
.xml file to the current project.
Remove Removes the currently highlighted

engineering library from the current project.

engineering library.
Sharing Engineering Libraries On a Network

You can share engineering libraries with other StormCAD users in your organization
by storing the engineering libraries on a network drive. All users who will have access
to the shared engineering library should have read-write access to the network folder
in which the library is located.
To share an engineering library on a network, open the Engineering Libraries in

StormCAD and create a new library in a network folder to which all users have read-
write access.

Converting Legacy Engineering Library Files
You can convert your legacy format engineering library files (.hlb) to the .xml format
used in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition using the WaterObjects.Net.Engineer-
ingLibraryConverter.exe utility. This utility can be found in your Bentley/
StormCAD8 folder.
The utility consists of the following controls:
• Product: Select whether the .hlb file to be converted is a SewerGEMS, Water-

GEMS, or StormCAD engineering library file.
• Library Type: Select the type of engineering library you are converting.
• HLB Library File: Enter the path of the .hlb file to be converted, or click the
Browse button to find it using a Windows browse dialog.
• Material Library: Enter the path of the material.hlb file. This control is only
available when the Library Type being converted is a Section Size library.
• Use SI Label: Check this box if the library being converted uses System Interna-
tional (SI) units.
• Destination Root: Enter the path where the converted .xml file should be created,
or click the Browse button to browse to the location.
• Convert: Click this button to perform the conversion.
• Close: Closes the utility dialog.
Note: Rainfall Table Files (*.tbl) created in StormCAD 5.6 are not
supported in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition. To import the
rainfall data contained in these files, it is necessary to import the
*.tbl file into a StormCAD 5.6 project, save the project, then open
the 5.6 project in V8. Once open in V8, the storm data can be
saved to the Engineering Libraries for reuse.
If StormCAD 5.6 is not available, the *.tbl file should be

forwarded to Bentley Tech Support for import to StormCAD V8.
To convert an .hlb Engineering Library file to an .xml Engineering Library file
1. Double-click the WaterObjects.Net.EngineeringLibraryConverter.exe utility

found in the Bentley/StormCAD8 folder.
2. In the Classic Engineering Library Converter Utility dialog that appears, select
StormCAD from the Product menu.
3. Choose the Library Type that is stored in the .hlb file to be converted.
4. Click the Browse button next to the HLB Library File field and find the .hlb file
to be converted.

Creating Your Model
5. If the Library Type you are converting is a Section Size library:

a. Click the Browse button next to the Material Library field and find the
material.hlb file associated with the Section Size .hlb file to be converted.
b. Place a check in the Use SI Label box if the Section Size library file uses SI
units.
6. Click the Browse button next to the Destination Root field and browse to the
directory where you want the new .xml engineering library file to be created.
7. Click the Convert button.
Conduit Catalog Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to create, edit, and view catalog conduits. Catalog conduits
are an efficient way to reuse common physical conduit definitions.
The dialog box contains a toolbar, a Conduit Catalog list pane, and two tabs. The
toolbar contains the following buttons:
New Creates a new entry in the Conduit

Catalog List Pane.

Delete Deletes the entry that is currently

highlighted in the Conduit Catalog List
Pane.
Rename Lets you rename the entry that is

currently highlighted in the Conduit
Catalog List Pane.

that contains the input data associated
with the entry that is currently
highlighted in the Conduit Catalog List
Pane.
Synchronize Clicking this button opens a submenu

containing the following commands:
• Browse Engineering Library—This
command opens the Engineering
Library manager dialog, allowing you
to browse the Conduit Catalog
Library.
• Synchronize From Library—This
command allows you to update a
conduit catalog that was previously
imported from a Conduit Catalog
Engineering Library to reflect
changes that have been made to the
library since it was imported.
• Synchronize To Library—This
command allows you to update an
existing Conduit Catalog Engineering
Library using current Conduit
Catalog entries that were initially
imported but have since been modi-
fied.
• Import From Library—This
command allows you to import
catalog entries from an existing
Conduit Catalog Engineering Library.
• Export To Library—This command
allows you to export the current
catalog entries to an existing Conduit
Catalog Engineering Library.

Creating Your Model
The following table describes the rest of the controls in the Conduit Catalog dialog
box.
Conduit Catalog List Located on the left side of the dialog box, displays
Pane a list of all of the catalog conduits that have been
defined in the current project. Highlighting a
catalog conduit in this list causes the Cross
Section Shape and Roughness Sections to
display the associated information with the
highlighted conduit.
Cross Section Shape Located in the top-right corner of the Conduit

Catalog tab, contains controls that allow you to
define the size and shape of the catalog conduit
that is currently highlighted in the List Pane. The
controls that appear change according to the
Cross Section Type that is selected.
Cross Section Type Lets you define the type of cross section for the
currently highlighted catalog conduit.
Diameter Lets you define the diameter of the conduit. This

field is only available for Circular catalog conduits.
<Section Type> Rise Lets you define the rise (height) of the catalog
conduit. This field is available for all cross section
types except Circular.
<Section Type> Span Lets you define the span (width) of the catalog
conduit. This field is available for all cross section
types except Circular.
Full Area Lets you define the full area of the conduit. This
field is only available for Pipe-Arch catalog
conduits. See “Conduit Shapes” on page 10-489
for a diagram of this conduit shape and the
associated measurements.
Bottom Radius Lets you define the bottom radius of the conduit.
This field is only available for Pipe-Arch catalog
Bottom Distance Lets you define the bottom distance of the conduit.

Corner Radius Lets you define the corner radius of the conduit.
Top Radius Lets you define the top radius of the conduit. This
field is only available for Pipe-Arch catalog
Bottom Width Lets you define the bottom width of the conduit.
This field is only available for Trapezoidal Channel
catalog conduits. See “Conduit Shapes” on
page 10-489 for a diagram of this conduit shape
and the associated measurements.
Left Side Slope Lets you define the left side slope of the conduit.
Right Side Slope Lets you define the right side slope of the conduit.
Roughness Located in the bottom-right corner of the Conduit

Catalog tab, lets you define the roughness
attributes of the catalog conduits currently
highlighted in the List Pane. The controls that are
available change depending on the Roughness
Type selected.
Roughness Type Lets you specify which of the available roughness

methods to be applied to the catalog conduit
currently highlighted in the List Pane. The other
controls available in section are dependent on the
selection made in this box.
Friction Method Lets you specify which of the available friction

methods to be applied to the catalog conduit
currently highlighted in the List Pane. The other
controls available in section are dependent on the
selection made in this box.

Creating Your Model
Material Lets you enter a material label. This field is

informational only, and will not affect the
roughness properties of the associated catalog
entry.
Manning’s n Lets you define the roughness value for the

catalog conduit. This field is available only when
the Roughness Type is Single Manning’s n.
Depth vs. Manning’s Lets you define a depth vs. roughness curve for
Table the catalog conduit. This field is available only
when the Roughness Type is Manning’s n-Depth
Curve.
Manning’s vs. Lets you define a flow vs. roughness curve for the
Discharge Table catalog conduit. This field is available only when
the Roughness Type is Manning’s n-Flow.
Library Tab Displays information pertaining to the catalog

entry that is currently highlighted in the List Pane,
including:
• ID
• Label
• Modified Date
• Library Source
• Library Modified Date
• Synchronization Status
Adding Hyperlinks to Elements

The Hyperlinks feature lets you associate external files, such as pictures or movie
files, with elements. You can perform the following operations with hyperlinks:
• “Adding a Hyperlink” on page 5-233

• “Deleting a Hyperlink” on page 5-234
To use hyperlinks, select Tools > Hyperlink. The Hyperlink dialog box opens.
Hyperlinks Dialog Box

The Hyperlinks dialog contains a toolbar and a tabular view of all your existing hyper-
links.

Adding Hyperlinks to Elements
New Lets you create a new hyperlink.

Launches the Add Hyperlink dialog box.
Delete Deletes the currently highlight hyperlink.
Edit Lets you edit the currently highlighted

hyperlink. Launches the Edit Hyperlink
dialog box.
Launch Launches the external file associated

with the currently highlighted hyperlink.
Column Description
Element Type Displays the element type of the element

associated with the hyperlink.
Element Displays the label of the element associated with

the hyperlink.
Link Displays the complete path of the hyperlink.
Description Displays a description of the hyperlink, which you

can optionally enter when you create or edit the
hyperlink.

Creating Your Model
Adding a Hyperlink
To add a hyperlink:
Note: You can add more than one associated file to an element using
the hyperlink feature, but you must add the associations one at a
time.
1. Select Tools > Hyperlink. The Hyperlink dialog box opens.

2. Click Add to add a hyperlink. The Add Hyperlink dialog box opens.
3. Select the element to which you want to associate an external file.
4. Browse to the external file you want to use. This might be something like a picture
of the element or a movie about the element.
Add Hyperlink Dialog Box

You create new hyperlinks in the Add Hyperlink dialog box. The dialog box contains
the following controls:
Element Type Lets you select an element type from the drop-
down list.
Element Lets you select an element from a drop-down list

of specific elements from your model. Only those
element types selected in the Element Type drop-
down list are displayed.
Link Lets you enter the complete path of the external

file you want to associate with the selected
element. You can type the path yourself or click
the Ellipsis (...) button to search your computer
for the file.
Once you have selected the file, you can
test the hyperlink by clicking the Launch
button.
Description Lets you type a description of the hyperlink.
Editing a Hyperlink
You can edit existing hyperlinks using the Edit Hyperlink dialog box.

Using Queries
To edit a hyperlink:

2. Select the hyperlink you want to edit.
3. Click Edit to modify a hyperlink. The Edit Hyperlink dialog box opens.
4. Select the element you want to edit.
5. Edit the hyperlink by adding or deleting an associated file.
Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box

You edit existing hyperlinks in the Edit Hyperlink dialog box. The dialog box contains
Link Lets you edit the complete path of the external file
associated with the selected hyperlink. You can
type the path yourself or click the Ellipsis (...)
button to search your computer for the file.
Once you have selected the file, you can
test the hyperlink by clicking the Launch
button.
Description Lets you edit an existing description of the

hyperlink or type a new description.
Deleting a Hyperlink
To delete a hyperlink:

2. Select the hyperlink you want to edit.
3. Click Edit to modify a hyperlink. The Edit Hyperlink dialog box opens.
4. Select the element you want to delete.
5. Click Delete.
Using Queries
A query in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition is a user-defined SQL expression that
applies to a single element type. You use the Query Manager to create and store
queries; you use the Query Builder dialog box to construct the actual SQL expression.

Creating Your Model
You can create the following types of queries:
• Project queries—Queries you define that are available only in the Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition project in which you define them.
• Shared queries—Queries you define that are available in all Bentley StormCAD
V8 XM Edition projects you create. You can edit shared queries.
• Predefined queries—Factory-defined queries included with Bentley StormCAD
V8 XM Edition that are available in all projects you create. You cannot edit
predefined queries.
You can also use queries in the following ways:
• Create dynamic selection sets based on one or more queries. For more informa-
tion, see “Creating a Selection Set from a Query” on page 5-206.
• Filter the data in a FlexTable using a query. For more information, see “Sorting
and Filtering FlexTable Data” on page 9-375.
For more information on how to construct queries, see “Creating Queries” on page 5-
237.
Query Manager
The Query Manager is a docking manager that displays all queries in the current
project, including predefined, shared, and project queries. You can create, edit, or
delete shared and project queries from within the Query Manager, as well as use it to
select all elements in your model that are part of the selected query.
The Query Manager consists of a toolbar and a tree view, which displays all of the
queries that are associated with the current project. The toolbar contains the following
buttons:

Using Queries

• Query—Lets you create a new SQL
expression as either a project or shared
query, depending on which item is high-
lighted in the tree view.
• Folder—Creates a folder in the tree
view, allowing you to group queries. You
can right-click a folder and create
queries or folders in that folder.
Delete Deletes the currently-highlighted query or

folder from the tree view. When you delete a
folder, you also delete all of its contents (the
queries it contains).
Rename Lets you rename the query or folder that is

currently highlighted in the tree view.
Edit Opens the Query Builder dialog box,

allowing you to edit the SQL expression that
makes up the currently-highlighted query.

Creating Your Model


Select in Drawing Opens a submenu containing the following

options:
• Select in Drawing—Selects the element
or elements that satisfy the currently
highlighted query.
• Add to Current Selection—Adds the
element or elements that satisfy the
currently highlighted query to the group
of elements that are currently selected
in the Drawing Pane.
• Remove from Current Selection—
Removes the element or elements that
satisfy the currently highlighted query
from the group of elements that are
currently selected in the Drawing Pane.
Help Displays online help for the Query Manager.
Creating Queries
A query is a valid SQL expression that you construct in the Query Builder dialog box.
You create and manage queries in the Query Manager. You also use queries to filter
FlexTables and as the basis for a selection set.
To create a query from the Query Manager:
1. Open the Query Manager by selecting View > Queries, clicking the Queries
button on the View toolbar, or by pressing CTRL+5.
2. Perform one of the following steps:
– To create a new project query, highlight Queries - Project in the list pane,
then click the New button and select Query.
– To create a new shared query, highlight Queries - Shared in the list pane,
then click the New button and select Query.

Using Queries
Note: You can also right-click an existing item or folder in the list pane
and select New > Query from the shortcut menu.
3. In the Select Element Type dialog box, select the desired element type from the
drop-down menu. The Query Builder dialog box appears.
4. All input and results fields for the selected element type appear in the Fields list
pane, available SQL operators and keywords are represented by buttons, and
available values for the selected field are listed in the Unique Values list pane.
Perform the following steps to construct your query:
a. Double-click the field you wish to include in your query. The database
column name of the selected field appears in the preview pane.
b. Click the desired operator or keyword button. The SQL operator or keyword
is added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
c. Click the Refresh button above the Unique Values list pane to see a list of
unique values available for the selected field. Note that the Refresh button is
disabled after you use it for a particular field (because the unique values do
not change in a single query-building session).
d. Double-click the unique value you want to add to the query. The value is
added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
Note: You can also manually edit the expression in the preview pane.
e. Click the Validate button above the preview pane to validate your SQL
expression. If the expression is valid, the word “VALIDATED” is displayed in
the lower right corner of the dialog box.
f. Click the Apply button above the preview pane to execute the query. If you
didn’t validate the expression, the Apply button validates it before executing
it.
g. Click OK.

Creating Your Model
Double-click the Click the desired operator Click the Refresh

desired field to add it or keyword button to add it button to display the
to the preview pane to the SQL expression in list of available
the preview pane unique values
Double-click the
desired unique
value to add it to
the SQL
expression in the
preview pane
Apply button
Preview pane
Validate
checkbox
5. Perform these optional steps in the Query Manager:

– To create a new folder in the tree view, highlight the existing item or folder in
which to place the new folder, then click the New button and select Folder.
You can create queries and folders within folders.
– To delete an existing query or folder, click the Delete button. When you delete
a folder, you also delete all of its contents (the queries it contains).
– To rename an existing query or folder, click the Rename button, then type a
new name.
– To edit the SQL expression in a query, select the query in the list pane, then
click the Edit button. The Query Builder dialog box appears.
– To quickly select all the elements in the drawing pane that are part of the
currently highlighted query, click the Select in Drawing button.
Query Builder Dialog Box

You construct the SQL expression that makes up your query in the Query Builder
dialog box. The Query Builder dialog box is accessible from the Query Manager and
from within a FlexTable.

Using Queries
The top part of the dialog box contains all the controls you need to construct your
query: a list pane displaying all available attributes for the selected element type, a
SQL control panel containing available SQL keywords and operators, and list view
that displays all the available values for the selected attribute. The bottom part of the
dialog box contains a preview pane that displays your SQL expression as you
construct it.

Creating Your Model
All the dialog box controls are described in the following table.
Fields Lists all input and results fields

applicable to the selected element
type. This list displays the labels of
the fields, while the underlying
database column names of the
fields become visible in the
preview pane when you add them
to the expression. Double-click a
field to add it to your SQL
expression.
SQL Controls These buttons represent all the SQL

operators and controls that you can
use in your query. They include =,
>, <, _, ?, *, <>, >=, <=, [ ], Like,
And, and Or. Click the appropriate
button to add the operator or
keyword to the end of your SQL
expression, which is displayed in
the preview pane.
Unique Values When you click the Refresh

button, this list displays all the
available unique values selected
field. Double-click a value in the
list to add it to the end of your SQL
expression, which is displayed in
the preview pane. If you select a
different field, you must click the
Refresh button again to update the
list of unique values for the
selected field. When you first open
the Query Builder dialog box, this
list is empty.
Refresh Updates the list of unique values

for the selected field. This button is
disabled after you use it for a
particular field.
Copy Copies the entire SQL expression

displayed in the preview pane to
the Windows clipboard.

Using Queries
Paste Pastes the contents of the Windows

clipboard into the preview pane at
the location of the text cursor. For
example, if your cursor is at the end
of the SQL expression in the
preview pane and you click the
Paste button, the contents of your
clipboard will be added to the end
of the expression.
Validate on OK Validates the SQL expression in the

preview pane when this box is
checked. If the expression is not
valid, a message appears. When
you click this button and your SQL
expression passes validation, the
word “VALIDATED” appears in
the lower right corner of the dialog
box.
Apply Executes the query. The results of

the query are displayed at bottom
of the Query Builder dialog box in
the form “x of x elements returned.”
Preview Pane Displays the SQL expression as

you add fields, operators and/
keywords, and values to it.
Using the Like Operator

The Like operator compares a string expression to a pattern in an SQL expression.
Syntax
expression Like “pattern”
The Like operator syntax has these parts:
Part Description
expression SQL expression used in a WHERE clause .
pattern String or character string literal against which expression is

compared.

Creating Your Model
You can use the Like operator to find values in a field that match the pattern you
specify. For pattern, you can specify the complete value (for example, Like
“Smith”), or you can use wildcard characters to find a range of values (for example,
Like “Sm*”).
In an expression, you can use the Like operator to compare a field value to a string
expression. For example, if you enter Like “C*” in an SQL query, the query returns
all field values beginning with the letter C. In a parameter query , you can prompt the
user for a pattern to search for.
The following example returns data that begins with the letter P followed by any letter
between A and F and three digits:
Like “P[A-F]###”
The following table shows how you can use Like to test expressions for different
patterns.
Match No match
Kind of match Pattern (returns True) (returns False)
Multiple characters a*a aa, aBa, aBBBa aBC
*ab* abc, AABB, Xab aZb, bac
Special character a[*]a a*a aaa
Multiple characters ab* abcdefg, abc cab, aab
Single character a?a aaa, a3a, aBa aBBBa
Single digit a#a a0a, a1a, a2a aaa, a10a
Range of characters [a-z] f, p, j 2, &
Outside a range [!a-z] 9, &, % b, a
Not a digit [!0-9] A, a, &, ~ 0, 1, 9
Combined a[!b-m]# An9, az0, a99 abc, aj0

Using TRex to Assign Node Elevations
Using TRex to Assign Node Elevations

The TRex Terrain Extractor was designed to expedite the elevation assignment
process by automatically assigning elevations to the model features according to the
elevation data stored within DXF Point or Contour files, LandXML files, and shape-
files.
The TRex Terrain Extractor can quickly and easily assign elevations to any or all of
the nodes in the model. All that is required is a valid source file of one of the above
types containing the elevation data . Data input for TRex consists of:
1. Specify the field in the source file from which elevation data will be extracted.
2. Specify the measurement unit associated with the source file (feet, meters, etc.).
3. Select the model features to which elevations should be applied; all model
features or a selection set of features can be chosen.
TRex then interpolates an elevation value for each specific point occupied by a model
feature. The final step of the wizard displays a list of all of the features to which an
elevation was applied, along with the elevation values for those features. These eleva-
tion values can then be applied to a new physical properties alternative, or an existing
one.
TRex Wizard
The TRex Wizard steps you through the process of automatically assigning elevations
to specified nodes based on data from a DXF, XML, or SHP file.
Step 1: File Selection

The DXF, XML, or SHP (contour shapefile) file containing the source data is speci-
fied.
This step of the wizard contains the following controls:
• Data Source Type—This menu allows you to choose the type of file that contains
the input data you will use.
• File—This field displays the path where the DXF, XML, or SHP file is located.
Use the browse button to find and select the desired file.
• Spatial Reference—Click the Ellipsis (...) next to this field to open the Spatial
Reference Properties dialog box, allowing you to specify the spatial reference
being used by the elevation data file.
• Select Elevation Field—Select the elevation unit.

Creating Your Model
• X-Y Units—This menu allows the selection of the measurement unit type associ-
ated with the X and Y coordinates of the elevation data file.
• Z Units—This menu allows the selection of the measurement unit type associated
with the Z coordinates of the elevation data file.
• Spatial Reference—Click the Ellipsis (...) next to this field to open the Spatial
Reference Properties dialog box, allowing you to specify the spatial reference
being used by the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition model file.
• Also update inactive elements—Check this box to include inactive elements in
the elevation assignment operation. When this box is unchecked, elements that are
marked Inactive will be ignored by TRex.
• All—When this button is selected, TRex will attempt to assign elevations to all
nodes within the Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition model.
• Selection—When this button is selected, TRex will attempt to assign elevations to
all currently highlighted nodes.
• Selection Set—When this is selected, the Selection Set menu is activated. When
the Selection Set button is selected, TRex will assign elevations to all nodes
within the selection set that is specified in this menu.
Step 2: Completing the TRex Wizard

The results of the elevation extraction process are displayed and the results can be
applied to a new or existing physical alternative.
• Results Preview Pane—This tabular pane displays the elevations that were
calculated by TRex. The table can be sorted by label by clicking the Label column
heading and by elevation by clicking the Elevation column heading. You can filter
the table by right-clicking a column in the table and selecting the Filter...Custom
command. You can also right-click any of the values in the elevation column to
change the display options.
• Use Existing Alternative—When this is selected, the results will be applied to
the physical alternative that is selected in the Use Existing Alternative menu. This
menu allows the selection of the physical alternative to which the results will be
applied.
• New Alternative —When this is selected, the results will be applied to a new
physical alternative. First, the currently active physical alternative will be dupli-
cated, then the results generated by TRex will be applied to the newly created
alternative. The name of this new alternative must be supplied in the New Alter-
native text field.

User Data Extensions
• Parent Alternative—Select an alternative to duplicate from the menu, or select

<None> to create a new Base alternative.
• Export Results—This exports the results generated by TRex to a tab or comma-
delimited text file (.TXT). These files can then be re-used by Bentley StormCAD
V8 XM Edition or imported into other programs.
Click Finish when complete, or Cancel to close without making any changes

User data extensions are a set of one or more attribute fields that you can define to
hold data to be stored in the model. User data extensions allow you to add your own
data fields to your project. For example, you can add a field for keeping track of the
date of installation for an element, or the type of area serviced by a particular element.
Note: The user data does not affect the hydraulic model calculations.
However, their behavior concerning capabilities like editing,
annotating, sorting and database connections is identical to any
of the standard pre-defined attributes.
User data extensions exhibit the same characteristics as the predefined data used in
and produced by the model calculations. This means that user data extensions can be
imported or exported through database and shapefile connections, viewed and edited
in the Property Editor or in FlexTables, included in tabular reports or element detailed
reports, annotated in the drawing, color coded, and reported in the detailed element
reports.
Note: The terms “user data extension” and “field” are used
interchangeably here. In the context of the User Data Extension
feature, these terms mean the same thing.
You define user data extensions in the User Data Extensions dialog box.
To define a user data extension:
1. Select Tools > User Data Extensions.

2. In the list pane on the left, select the element type for which you want to define a
new attribute field.
3. Click the New button to create a new user data extension. A user data extension
with a default name appears under the element type. You can rename the new field
if you wish.
4. In the Property Editor for the new field, enter the following:
– Type the name of the new field. This is the unique identifier for the field. The
name field in the Property Editor is the name of the column in the data source.

Creating Your Model
– Type the label for the new field. This is the label that will appear next to the
field for the user data extension in the Property Editor for the selected element
type. This is also the column heading if the data extension is selected to
appear in a FlexTable.
– Click the Ellipses (...) button in the Category field, then use the drop-down
menu in the Select Category dialog box to select an existing category in which
the new field will appear in the Property Editor. To create a new category,
simply type the category name in the field.
– Type a number in the Field Order Index field. This is the display order of
fields within a particular category in the Property Editor. This order also
controls the order of columns in Alternative tables. An entry of 0 means the
new field will be displayed first within the specified category.
– Type a description for the field. This description will appear at the bottom of
the Property Editor when the field is selected for an element in your model.
You can use this field as a reminder about the purpose of the field.
– Select an alternative from the drop-down menu in the Alternative field. This is
the alternative that you want to extend with the new field. Need more infor-
mation on this.
– Select a data type from the drop-down menu in the Data Type field.
- If you select Enumerated, an Ellipses (...) button appears in the Default
Value field. Enumerated user data extensions are fields that present
multiple choices.
– Enter the default value for the new field. If the data type is Enumerated, click
the Ellipses (...) button to display the Enumeration Editor dialog box, where
you define enumerated members.

– To import an existing User Data Extension XML File, click the Import
button, then select the file you want to import. User Data Extension XML
Files contain the file name extension .xml or .udx.xml.
– To export existing user data extensions, click the Export to XML button, then
type the name of the udx.xml file. All user data extensions for all element
types defined in the current project are exported.
– To share the new field among two or more element types, select the user data
extension in the list pane, then click the Sharing button or right-click and
select Sharing. In the Shared Field Specification dialog box, select the check
box next to the element or elements that will share the user data extension.
The icon next to the user data extension changes to indicate that it is a shared
field. For more information, see “Sharing User Data Extensions Among
Element Types” on page 5-252.

– To delete an existing user data extension, select the user data extension you
want to delete in the list pane, then click the Delete button, or right-click and
select Delete.
– To rename a the display label of an existing user data extension, select the
user data extension in the list pane, click the Rename button or right-click and
select Rename, then type the new display label.
– To expand the list of elements and view all user data extensions, click the
Expand All button.
– To collapse the list of elements so that no user data extensions are displayed,
click the Collapse All button.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your user data extensions. The new
field(s) you created will appear in the Property Editor for every instance of the
specified element type in your model.
User Data Extensions Dialog Box
The User Data Extensions dialog box displays a summary of the user data extensions
associated with the current project. The dialog box contains a toolbar, a list pane
displaying all available Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition element types, and a
property editor.

Creating Your Model
The toolbar contains the following controls:
Import Lets you merge the user data

extensions in a saved User Data
Extension XML file (.udx.xml or
.xml) into the current project.
Importing a User Data Extension
XML file will not remove any of the
other data extensions defined in your
project. User data extensions that
have the same name as those already
defined in your project will not be
imported.
Export to XML Lets you save existing user data

extensions for all element types in
your model to a User Data Extension
XML file (.udx.xml) for use in a
different project.
New Lets you create a new user data

extension for the currently
highlighted element type.
Sharing Lets you share the current user data

extension with another element type.
When you click this button, the
Shared Field Specification dialog
box opens. For more information,
see “Sharing User Data Extensions
Among Element Types” on page 5-
252.

Delete Deletes the currently highlighted

user data extension
Rename Lets you rename the display label of

the currently highlighted user data
extension.
Expand All Expands all of the branches in the


The Property Editor contains the following controls:
Alphabetized Displays the attribute fields in the

Property Editor in alphabetical
order.
Categorized Displays the attribute fields in the

Property Editor in categories. This
is the default.
and the following fields, which define your new user data extension:
Table 5-3:
Attribute Description
General
Name The unique identifier for the field. The name field in the
Property Editor is the name of the column in the data source.
Label The label that will appear next to the field for the user data
extension in the Property Editor for the selected element type.
This is also the column heading if the data extension is
selected to appear in a FlexTable.
Category The section in the Property Editor for the selected element
type in which the new field will appear. You can create a new
category or use an existing category. For example, you can
create a new field for manholes and display it in the Physical
section of that element’s Property Editor.

Creating Your Model
Table 5-3:
Field Order The display order of fields within a particular category in the
Index Property Editor. This order also controls the order of columns
in Alternative tables. An entry of 0 means the new field will be
displayed first within the specified category.
Field The description of the field. This description will appear at the
Description bottom of the Property Editor when the field is selected for an
element in your model. You can use this field as a reminder
about the purpose of the field.
Alternative Lets you select an existing alternative to extend with the new
field.
Referenced Displays all the element types that are using the field. For
By example, if you create a field called "Installation Date" and you
set it up to be shared, this field will show the element types that
share this field. So for example, if you set up a field to be
shared by manholes and catch basins, the Referenced By field
would show "Manhole, Catch Basin".
Units
Data Type Lets you specify the data type for the user data extension.
Click the down arrow in the field then select one of the
following data types from the drop-down menu:
• Integer—Any positive or negative whole number.
• Real—Any fractional decimal number (for example, 3.14).
It can also be unitized with the provided options.
• Text—Any string (text) value up to 255 characters long.
• Long Text—Any string (text) up to 65,526 characters long.
• Date/Time—The current date. The current date appears
by default in the format month/day/year. Click the down
arrow to change the default date.
• Boolean—True or False.
• Enumerated—When you select this data type, an Ellipses
button appears in the Default Value field. Click the
Ellipses (...) button to display the Enumeration Editor
dialog box, where you can add enumerated members and
their associated values. For more information, see
“Enumeration Editor Dialog Box” on page 5-254.

Table 5-3:
Default Value The default value for the user data extension. The default
value must consistent with the selected data type. If you chose
Enumerated as the data type, click the Ellipses (...) button to
display the Enumeration Editor.
Dimension Lets you specify the unit type. Click the drop-down arrow in the
field to see a list of all available dimensions. This field is
available only when you select Real as the Data Type.
Storage Unit Lets you specify the storage units for the field. Click the drop-
down arrow in the field to see a list of all available units; the
units listed change depending on the Dimension you select.
This field is available only when you select Real as the Data
Type.
Numeric Lets you select a number format for the field. Click the drop-
Formatter down arrow in the field to see a list of all available number
formats; the number formats listed change depending on the
Dimension you select. For example, if you select Flow as the
Dimension, you can select Flow, Flow - Pressurized Condition,
Flow Tolerance, or Unit Load as the Numeric Formatter. This
field is available only when you select Real as the Data Type.
Sharing User Data Extensions Among Element Types
You can share user data extensions across multiple element types in Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition. Shared user data extensions are displayed in the Property
Editor for all elements types that share that field.
The icons displayed next to the user data extensions in the User Data Extensions
dialog box change depending on the status of the field:
• Indicates a new unsaved user data extension.

• Indicates a user data extension that has been saved to the data source.
• Indicates a user data extension that is shared among multiple element types
but has not been applied to the data source.
• Indicates a user data extension that is shared among multiple element types
and that has been applied to the data source. Fields with this icon appear in
the Property Editor for any elements of the associated element types that appear in
your model.

Creating Your Model
Observe the following rules when sharing user data extensions:
• You can select any number of element types with which to share the field. The list
is limited to element types that support the Alternative defined for the Field. For
example, the Physical Alternative may only apply to five of the element types. In
this case, you will only see these five items listed in the Alternative drop-down
menu.
• You cannot use the sharing feature to move a field from one element type to
another. Validation is in place to ensure that only one item is selected and if it is
the same as the original, default selection. If it is not, a message appears telling
you that when sharing a field, you must select at least two element types, or select
the original element type.
• To unshare a field that is shared among multiple element types, right-click the user
data extension you want to keep in the list pane, then select Sharing. Clear all the
element types that do not want to share the field with and click OK. If you leave
only one element type checked in the Shared Field Specification dialog box, it
must be the original element type for which you created the user data extension.
– The fields that were located under the catch basin and conduit element type
root nodes will be removed completely.
– You can also unshare a field by using the Delete button or right-clicking and
selecting Delete. This will unshare and delete the field.
To share a user data extension:
1. Open the User Data Extensions dialog box by selecting Tools > User Data Exten-
sions.
2. In the list pane, create a new user data extension to share or select an existing user
data extension you want to share, then click the Sharing button.
3. In the Shared Field Specification dialog box, select the check box next to each
element type that will share the user data extension.
4. Click OK.
5. The icon next to the user data extension in the list pane changes to indicate that it
is a shared field.
Shared Field Specification Dialog Box
You select element types to share a user data extension in the Shared Field Specifica-
tion dialog box. The dialog box contains a list of all possible element types with check
boxes.

Select element types to share the current user data extension by selecting the check
box next to the element type. Clearing a selection if you no longer want that element
type to share the current field.
Enumeration Editor Dialog Box
The Enumeration Editor dialog box appears when you select Enumerated as the Data
Type for a user data extension, then click the Ellipses (...) button in the Default Value
field. Enumerated fields are fields that contain multiple selections - you define these
as members in the Enumeration Editor dialog box.
For example, suppose you want to identify conduits in a model of a new subdivision
by one of the following states: Existing, Proposed, Abandoned, Removed, and
Retired. You can define a new user data extension with the label “Pipe Status” for
conduits, and select Enumerated as the data type. Click the Ellipses (...) button in the
Default Value field in the Property Editor for the user data extension to display the
Enumeration Editor dialog box. Then enter five members with unique labels (one
member for each unique pipe status) and enumeration values in the table. After you
close the User Data Extensions dialog box, the new field and its members will be
available in the Property Editor for all conduits in your model. You will be able to
select any of the statuses defined as members in the new Pipe Status field.
You can specify an unlimited number of members for each user data extension, but
member labels and values must be unique. If they are not unique, an error message
appears when you try to close the dialog box.
The dialog box contains a table and the following controls:
• New—Lets you add a new row to the table. Each row in the table represents a
unique enumerated member of the current user data extension.
• Delete—Deletes the current row from the table. The enumerated member defined
in that row is deleted from the user data extension.
You define enumerated members in the table, which contains the following columns:
• Enumeration Member Display Label—The label of the member. This is the

label you will see in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition where ever the user data
extension appears (Property Editor, FlexTables, etc.).
• Enumeration Value—A unique integer index associated with the member label.
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition uses this number when it performs operations
such as queries.

Creating Your Model
External Tools
Use the External Tool Manager to manage custom menu commands, which are then
located in the Tools menu for quick accessibility.
Click Tools>External Tools to create a custom menu command from any executable
file. Executable file types include:
• .exe
• .com
• .pif
• .bat
• .cmd
The External Tool Manager consists of the following elements:
• External Tool List Pane—This pane lists the external tools that have been
created. All of the tools listed in this pane will be displayed in the Tools >
External Tools menu.
• New—Creates a new external tool in the list pane.
• Delete—Deletes the currently highlighted tool.
• Rename—Allows you to rename the currently highlighted tool.
• Command—This field allows you to enter the full path to the executable file that
the tool will initiate. Click the ellipsis button to open a Windows Open dialog to
allow you to browse to the executable.
• Arguments—This optional field allows you to enter command line variables that
are passed to the tool or command when it is activated. Click the > button to open
a submenu containing predefined arguments. Arguments containing spaces must
be enclosed in quotes. The available arguments are:
– Project Directory—This argument passes the current project directory to the
executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is %(ProjDir).
– Project File Name—This argument passes the current project file name to the
executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is %(ProjFile-
Name).
– Project Store File Name—This argument passes the current project datastore
file name to the executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is
%(ProjStoreFileName).
– Working Directory—This argument passes the current working directory to
the executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is %(Proj-
WorkDir).

External Tools
• Initial Directory—Specifies the initial or working directory of the tool or

command. Click the > button to open a submenu containing predefined directory
variables. The available variables are:
– Project Directory—This variable specifies the current project directory as
the Initial Directory. The variable string is %(ProjDir).
– Working Directory—This variable specifies the current working directory as
the Initial Directory. The variable string is %(ProjWorkDir).
• Test—This button executes the external tool using the specified settings.

Chapter
Using Modelbuilder 6
ModelBuilder lets you use your existing GIS asset to construct a new Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition model or update an existing Bentley StormCAD V8 XM
Edition model. ModelBuilder supports a wide variety of data formats, from simple
databases (such as Access and DBase), spreadsheets (such as Excel or Lotus), GIS
data (such as shapefiles, coverages, ESRI ArcGIS Geodatabases, and ArcGIS
Geometric Networks), to high end data stores (such as Oracle, and SQL Server), and
more.
Using ModelBuilder, you map the tables and fields contained within your data source
to element types and attributes in your Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition model.
The result is that a Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition model is created, either in
stand-alone mode or in an existing ArcMap project.
ModelBuilder is the first tool you will use when constructing a model from GIS data.
The steps that you take at the outset will impact how the rest of the process goes. Take
the time now to ensure that this process goes as smoothly and efficiently as possible.
The following topics are included:
• “Preparing to Use ModelBuilder” on page 6-257

• “ModelBuilder Connections Manager” on page 6-259
• “ModelBuilder Wizard” on page 6-261
• “Reviewing Your Results” on page 6-266
• “Multi-select Data Source Types” on page 6-266
• “ModelBuilder Warnings and Error Messages” on page 6-266
• “ESRI ArcGIS Geodatabase Support” on page 6-269
• “Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder” on page 6-271
Preparing to Use ModelBuilder

• Determine the purpose of your model—Once you establish the purpose of your
model, you can start to make decisions about how detailed the model should be.

Preparing to Use ModelBuilder
• Get familiar with your data—If you obtained your GIS data from an outside
source, you should take the time to get acquainted with it. Review spatial and
attribute data directly in your GIS environment. Do the nodes have coordinate
information, and do the pipes have start and stop nodes specified? If not, the best
method of specifying network connectivity must be determined.
Contact those involved in the development of the GIS to learn more about the GIS
tables and associated attributes. Find out the purpose of any fields that may be of
interest, ensure that data is of an acceptable accuracy, and determine units associ-
ated with fields containing numeric data.
Ideally, there will be one GIS source data table for each Bentley StormCAD V8
XM Edition element type. This isn’t always the case, and there are two other
possible scenarios:
Many GIS tables for one element type—In this case, there may be several tables
in the GIS/database corresponding to a single GEMS modeling element . In this
case each data source table must be individually mapped to the Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition element, or the tables must be combined into a single
table in the GIS/database before running ModelBuilder.
One GIS table containing many element types—In this case, there may be
entries that correspond to several Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition modeling
elements in one GIS/database table. You should separate these into individual
tables before running ModelBuilder. The one case where a single table can work
is when the features in the table are ArcGIS subtypes. ModelBuilder handles these
subtypes by treating them as separate tables when setting up mappings. See
“Subtypes” on page 6-271 for more information.
Note: If you are working with an ArcGIS data source, see “ESRI ArcGIS
Geodatabase Support” on page 6-269 for additional information.
• Preparing your data—When using ModelBuilder to get data from your GIS into
your model, you will be associating rows in your GIS to elements in Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition. Your data source needs to contain a Key/Label field
that can be used to uniquely identify every element in your model. The data
source tables should have identifying column labels, or ModelBuilder will inter-
pret the first row of data in the table as the column labels. Be sure data is in a
format suited for use in ModelBuilder. Use powerful GIS and Database tools to
perform Database Joins, Spatial Joins, and Update Joins to get data into the appro-
priate table, and in the desired format.

Using Modelbuilder
Note: When working with ID fields, the expected model input is the
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition ID. After creating these items
in your Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition model, you can obtain
the assigned ID values directly from your Bentley StormCAD V8
XM Edition modeling file. Before synchronizing your model, get
these Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition IDs into your data
source table (e.g., by performing a database join).
One area of difficulty in building a model from GIS data is the fact that unless the GIS
was created solely to support modeling, it most likely contains much more detailed
information than is needed for modeling. This is especially true with regard to the
number of piping elements. It is not uncommon for the GIS to include every service
line and hydrant lateral. Such information is not needed for most modeling applica-
tions and should be removed to improve model run time, reduce file size, and save
costs.
ModelBuilder Connections Manager

To access the ModelBuilder Connections Manager:
• In Stand-Alone: Click the Tools menu and select the ModelBuilder command.
The ModelBuilder Connections manager allows you to create, edit, and manage
ModelBuilder connections to be used in the model-building/model-synchronizing
process.
At the center of this window is the Connections List which displays the list of
connections that you have defined.
There is a toolbar located along the top of the Connections list. The set of buttons on
the left of the toolbar allow you to manage your connections:
New Create a new connection using the

ModelBuilder Wizard.

ModelBuilder Connections Manager
Edit Edit the selected connection using the

ModelBuilder Wizard.
Rename Rename the selected connection.
Duplicate Create a copy of the selected connection.
Delete Permanently Remove the selected connection.
The button on the right of the toolbar allows you to either build or synchronize a
model. Click the menu arrow associated with this button to access the following
options:
• Build Model—Starts the ModelBuilder build process using the selected

connection. You will be prompted to interactively specify a new filename.
• SyncOut—Starts the ModelBuilder synchronize process using the selected

connection. You will be prompted to interactively specify an existing Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition model filename.
After specifying your target, ModelBuilder will perform the selected operation.
During the process, a progress-bar will be displayed indicating the step that Model-
Builder is currently working on.
When ModelBuilder completes, you will be presented with a summary window that
outlines important information about the build process. We recommend that you save
this summary so that you can refer to it later.

Using Modelbuilder
ModelBuilder Wizard
The ModelBuilder Wizard assists in the creation of ModelBuilder connections. The
Wizard will guide you through the process of selecting your data source and mapping
that data to the desired input of your model.
Tip: The ModelBuilder Wizard can be resized, making it easier to

preview tables in your data source. In addition, Step 1 and Step 3
of the wizard offer a vertical split bar, letting you adjust the size
of the list located on the left side of these pages.
There are 4steps involved:
• “Step 1—Specify Data Source”

• “Step 2—Specify Spatial Options”
• “Step 3—Specify Field Mappings for each Table/Feature Class”
• “Step 4—Build Operation Confirmation”
Step 1—Specify Data Source
In this step, the data source type and location are specified. After selecting your data
source, the desired database tables can be chosen and previewed.
The following fields are available:
• Data Source type (drop-down list)—This field allows you to specify the type of
data you would like to work with.
Note: If your specific data source type is not listed in the Data Source
type field, try using the OLE DB data source type. OLE DB can be
used to access many database systems (including ORACLE, and
SQL Server, to name a few).
• Data Source (text field)—This read-only field displays the path to your data
source.
• Browse (button)—This button opens a browse dialog box that allows you to inter-
actively select your data source.
Note: Some Data Source types expect you to choose more than one
item in the Browse dialog box. For more information, see “Multi-
select Data Source Types” on page 6-266.
• Table/Feature Class (list)—This pane lists the tables/feature classes that are
contained within the data source. Use the check boxes (along the left side of the
list) to specify the tables you would like to include.

ModelBuilder Wizard
Tip: The list can be resized using the split bar (located on the right
side of the list).
Right-click to Select All or Clear the current selection in the list.
• Preview Pane—A tabular preview of the highlighted table is displayed in this

pane when the Show Preview check box is enabled.
Step 2—Specify Spatial Options
In this step you will specify the spatial options to be used during the ModelBuilder
process. The spatial options will determine the placement and connectivity of the
model elements. The fields available in this step will vary depending on the data
source type.
• Specify the Coordinate Unit of your data source (drop-down list)—This field
allows you to specify the coordinate unit of the spatial data in your data source.
• Create nodes if none found at pipe endpoint (check box)—When this box is
checked, ModelBuilder will create a pressure junction at any pipe endpoint that:
a) doesn't have a connected node, and b) is not within the specified tolerance of an
existing node. This field is only active when the Establish connectivity using
spatial data box is checked. (This option is not available if the connection is
bringing in only point type geometric data.)
• Create referenced element automatically (check box)—When this box is
checked, ModelBuilder will create referenced start and stop node's automatically
at the pipe's start and stop locations.
• Add objects to destination if present in source (check box)—When this box is
not checked, ModelBuilder will not append the model with new element data
from the data source.
• Prompt before adding objects (check box)—When this box is checked, Model-
Builder will pause during model generation to present a confirmation message
box to the user each time an element is about to be created in the model.
• Remove objects from destination if missing from source (check box)—When
this box is checked, ModelBuilder will delete elements from the model if they do
not exist in the data source.
• Prompt before removing objects (check box)—When this box is checked,
ModelBuilder will pause during model generation to present a confirmation
message box to the user each time an element is about to be deleted from the
model.

Using Modelbuilder
Step 3—Specify Field Mappings for each Table/Feature Class
In this step, data source tables are mapped to the desired modeling element types, and
data source fields are mapped to the desired model input attributes. You will assign
mappings for each Table/Feature Class that appears in the list; Step 1 of the wizard
can be used to exclude tables, if you wish.
• Tables (list)—This pane, located along the left side of the dialog box, lists the
data source Tables/Feature Classes to be used in the ModelBuilder process. Select
an item in the list to specify the settings for that item.
Tip: The list can be resized using the split bar.
There are two toolbar buttons located directly above Tables list (these buttons can
be a great time saver when setting up multiple mappings with similar settings).
– Copy Mappings (button)—This button copies the mappings (associated with
the currently selected table) to the clipboard.
– Paste Mappings (button)—This button applies the copied mappings to the
currently selected table.
• Settings Tab—The Settings tab allows you to specify mappings for the selected
item in the Tables list.
The top section of the Settings tab allows you to specify the common data
mappings:
– Table Type (drop-down list)—This field allows you to specify the target
modeling element type that the source table/feature class represents. For
example, a source table that contains pipe data should be associated with the
Pressure Pipe element type.

ModelBuilder Wizard
Note: Each table in your data source can be assigned to a single

Element Type. For this reason, individual tables in your data
source should contain only data that will be assigned to
elements of the same type. For instance, the source data table
that will be designated as the Pressure Junction element type
should contain only data that will be applied to Pressure
Junctions, not data relating to pressure valves, tanks, etc. The
exception to this general rule is when the source table contains
subtypes, each of which can be assigned to different elements.
For more information see “Subtypes” on page 6-271.
Tip: Shapefiles can be converted into Geodatabase format if you

would like to make use of Subtypes. This can be useful if a
single data source table needs to be mapped to multiple Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition element types.
– Key/Label Field (drop-down list)—This required field allows you to asso-

ciate a row in this table to a particular element in the model. The model refer-
ences each element using a unique alphanumeric label. Your data source must
have a field that can be used to uniquely identify all elements in the model.
Note: When working with ArcGIS data sources, OBJECTID is not a

good choice for Key field (because OBJECTID is only unique for
that particular Feature Class). If you do not have a field that can
be used to uniquely identify each element, you may use the
<label> field (which is automatically generated by ModelBuilder
for this purpose).
These optional fields are available for Pipe element types:

– Start/Stop—Select the fields in your pipe table that contain the Label of the
start and stop nodes. For more information, see “Specifying Network Connec-
tivity in ModelBuilder” on page 6-271.
Note: When working with an ArcGIS Geometric Network data source,

these fields will be set to <auto> (indicating that ModelBuilder
will automatically determine connectivity from the geometric
network).
These fields are available for Node element types:

– X/Y Field—These fields are used to specify the node X and Y coordinate
data.

Using Modelbuilder
Note: The Coordinate Unit setting in Step 2 of the wizard allows you to
specify the units associated with these fields.
When working with ArcGIS Geodatabase or shapefile data

sources, these fields will be set to <auto> (indicating that
ModelBuilder will automatically determine node geometry from
the data source).
These optional fields are available for Pump element types:

– Suction Element (drop-down list)—For tables that define pump data, select
a pipe label or other unique identifier to set the suction element of the Pump.
– Downstream Edge (drop-down list)—For tables that define pump or valve
data, select a pipe label or other unique identifier to set the direction of the
Pump.
The bottom section of the Settings tab allows you to specify additional data
mappings.
– Field—Field refers to a field in the selected data source. The Field list
displays the associations between fields in the database to attributes in the
model.
– Attribute (drop-down list)—Attribute refers to a Bentley StormCAD V8 XM
Edition attribute. Use the Attribute drop-down list to map the highlighted field
to the desired attribute.
– Unit (drop-down list)—This field allows you to specify the units of the values
in the database (no conversion on your part is required).
To map a field in your GIS to a particular Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition
attribute:
1. In the Field list, select the item you would like to update.
2. In the Attribute drop-down list, select the desired Bentley StormCAD V8 XM
Edition attribute.
3. In the Unit drop-down list, specify the unit of this field in your data source.
To remove the mapping for a particular field:
1. Select the field you would like to update.

2. In the Attribute drop-down list, select <none>.
– Preview Tab—The Preview tab displays a tabular preview of the currently

highlighted source data table when the Show Preview check box is checked.

Reviewing Your Results
Step 4—Build Operation Confirmation
In this step, you are prompted to build a new model or update an existing model.
To build a new model, click the Yes radio button under Would you like to build the
model now?.
If you choose No, you will be returned to the ModelBuilder Manager dialog. The
connection you defined will appear in the list pane. To build the model from the
ModelBuilder Manager, highlight the connection and click the Build Model button.
Reviewing Your Results

At the end of the ModelBuilder process, you will be presented with statistics, and a list
of any warning/error messages reported during the process. You should closely review
this information, and be sure to save this data to disk where you can refer to it later.
Note: Refer to the section titled “ModelBuilder Warnings and Error

Messages” on page 6-266 to determine the nature of any
messages that were reported.
Multi-select Data Source Types

When certain Data Source types are chosen in Step 1 of the ModelBuilder Wizard (see
“Step 1—Specify Data Source” on page 6-261), multiple items can be selected for
inclusion in your ModelBuilder connection.
After clicking the Browse button to interactively specify your data source, use stan-
dard Windows selection techniques to select all items you would like to include in the
connection (e.g., Ctrl+click each item you would like to include).
The following are multi-select Data Source types:
• ArcGIS Geodatabase Features

• Shapefiles
• DBase, FoxPro, HTML Export, and Paradox.
ModelBuilder Warnings and Error Messages

Errors and warnings that are encountered during the ModelBuilder process will be
reported in the ModelBuilder Summary.

Using Modelbuilder
For more information, see:
• “Warnings” on page 6-267

• “Error Messages” on page 6-268
Warnings
Warning messages include:
1. Some rows were ignored due to missing key-field values.

ModelBuilder encountered missing data (e.g., null or blank) in the specified Key/
Label field for rows in your data source table. Without a key, ModelBuilder is
unable to associate this source row with a target element, and must skip these
items. This can commonly occur when using a spreadsheet data source. To deter-
mine where and how often this error occurred, check the Statistics page for the
message <x> row(s) ignored due to missing key-field values.
2. Unable to create pipe <element>; start and/or stop node could not be found.
Pipes can only be created if its start and stop nodes can be established. If you are
using Explicit connectivity, a node element with the referenced start or stop label
could not be found. If you are using implicit connectivity, a node element could
not be located within the specified tolerance. For more information, see “Speci-
fying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder” on page 6-271.
3. Unable to update pipe <element> topology; (start or stop) node could not be
found.
This error occurs when synchronizing an existing model, and indicates that the
pipe connectivity could not be updated. For more information, see warning
message #2 (above).
4. The downstream edge for <element> could not be found.
ModelBuilder was unable to set a Pump direction because a pipe with the refer-
enced label could not be found.
5. Directed Node <element> direction is ambiguous.
ModelBuilder was unable to set the direction of the referenced pump or valve
because direction could not be implied based on the adjacent pipes (e.g. there
should be one incoming and one outgoing pipe).

ModelBuilder Warnings and Error Messages
Error Messages
Note: If you encounter these errors or warnings, we recommend that

you correct the problems in your original data source and re-run
ModelBuilder (when applicable).
Error messages include:
1. Unable to assign <attribute> for element <element>.

Be sure that the data in your source table is compatible with the expected Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition format. For more information, see “Using Model-
builder” on page 6-257.
2. Unable to create <element type> <element>.
This message indicates that an unexpected error occurred when attempting to
create a node element.
3. Unable to create pipe <element> possibly due to start or stop connectivity
constraints.
This message indicates that this pipe could not be created, because the pump or
valve already has an incoming and outgoing pipe. Adding a third pipe to a pump
or valve is not allowed.
4. Unable to update pipe <element> topology; possibly due to start element connec-
tivity constraints.
This error occurs when synchronizing. For more information, see error message
#3 (above).
5. Operation terminated by user.
You pressed the Cancel button during the ModelBuilder process.
6. Unable to create < element>; pipe start and stop must be different.
This message indicates that the start and stop specified for this pipe refer to the
same node element.
7. Unable to update <element> topology; pipe start and stop must be different.
This message indicates that the start and stop specified for this pipe refer to the
same node element.
8. Unable to update the downstream edge for <element>.
An unexpected error occurred attempting to set the downstream edge for this
pump or valve.
9. Nothing to do. Some previously referenced tables may be missing from your data
source.

Using Modelbuilder
This data source has changed since this connection was created. Verify that tables/
feature-classes in your data source have not been renamed or deleted.
10. One or more input features fall outside of the XYDomain.
This error occurs when model elements have been imported into a new geodata-
base that has a different spatial reference from the elements being created.
Elements cannot be created in ArcMAP if they are outside the spatial bounds of
the geodatabase.
The solution is to assign the correct X/Y Domain to the new geodatabase when it
is being created:
a. In the Attach Geodatabase dialog that appears after you initialize the Create
New Project command, click the Change button.
b. In the Spatial Reference Properties dialog that appears, click the Import
button.
c. Browse to the datasource you will be using in ModelBuilder and click Add.
d. Back in the Spatial Reference Properties dialog, click the x/Y Domain tab.
The settings should match those of the datasource.
e. Use ModelBuilder to create the model from the datasource.
ESRI ArcGIS Geodatabase Support

ModelBuilder was built using ArcObjects, and supports the following ESRI ArcGIS
Geodatabase functionality. See your ArcGIS documentation for more information
about ArcObjects. For more information, see:
• “Geodatabase Features” on page 6-270

• “Geometric Networks” on page 6-270
• “ArcGIS Geodatabase Features versus ArcGIS Geometric Network” on page 6-
270
• “Subtypes” on page 6-271
• “SDE (Spatial Database Engine)” on page 6-271

ESRI ArcGIS Geodatabase Support
Geodatabase Features
ModelBuilder provides direct support for working with Geodatabase features. A

feature class is much like a shapefile, but with added functionality (such as subtypes).
The geodatabase stores objects. These objects may represent nonspatial real-world
entities, such as manufacturers, or they may represent spatial objects, such as pipes in
a network. Objects in the geodatabase are stored in feature classes (spatial) and tables
(nonspatial).
The objects stored in a feature class or table can be organized into subtypes and may
have a set of validation rules associated with them. The ArcInfo™ system uses these
validation rules to help you maintain a geodatabase that contains valid objects.
Tables and feature classes store objects of the same type—that is, objects that have the
same behavior and attributes. For example, a feature class called WaterMains may
store pressurized water mains. All water mains have the same behavior and have the
attributes ReferenceID, Depth, Material, GroundSurfaceType, Size, and Pressur-
eRating.
Geometric Networks
ModelBuilder has support for Geometric Networks, and a new network element type
known as Complex Edge. When you specify a Geometric Network data source,
ModelBuilder automatically determines the feature classes that make up the network.
In addition, ModelBuilder can automatically establish model connectivity based on
information in the Geometric Network.
ArcGIS Geodatabase Features versus ArcGIS Geometric Network
Note: See your ArcGIS documentation for more information about

Geometric Networks and Complex Edges.
When working with a Geometric Network, you have two options for constructing your
model—if your model contains Complex Edges, then there is a distinct difference. A
Complex Edge can represent a single feature in the Geodatabase, but multiple
elements in the Geometric Network.
For example, when defining your Geometric Network, you can connect a lateral to a
main without splitting the main line. In this case, the main line will be represented as a
single feature in the Geodatabase but as multiple edges in the Geometric Network.

Using Modelbuilder
Depending on the data source type that you choose, ModelBuilder can see either
representation. If you want to include every element in your system, choose ArcGIS
Geometric Network as your data source type. If you want to leave out laterals and you
want your main lines to be represented by single pipes in the model, choose ArcGIS
Geodatabase Features as your data source type.
Subtypes
Tip: Shapefiles can be converted into Geodatabase Feature Classes

if you would like to make use of Subtypes. See your ArcGIS
documentation for more information.
If multiple types of Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition elements have their data

stored in a single geodatabase table, then each element must be a separate ArcGIS
subtype. For example, in a valve table PRVs may be subtype 1, PSVs may be subtype
2, FCVs may be subtype 3, and so on. With subtypes, it is not necessary to follow the
rule that each GIS/database feature type must be associated with a single type of
GEMS model element. Note that the subtype field must be of the integer type (e.g., 1,
2) and not an alphanumeric field (e.g., PRV). For more information about subtypes,
see ArcGIS Help.
ModelBuilder has built in support for subtypes. After selecting your data source,
feature classes will automatically be categorized by subtype. This gives you the ability
to assign mappings at the subtype level. For example, ModelBuilder allows you to
exclude a particular subtype within a feature class, or associate each subtype with a
different element type.
SDE (Spatial Database Engine)
ModelBuilder lets you specify an SDE Geodatabase as your data source. See your
ESRI documentation for more information about SDE.
Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder

When importing spatial data (ArcGIS Geodatabases or shapefile data contain spatial
geometry data that ModelBuilder can use to establish network connectivity by
connecting pipe ends to nodes, creating nodes at pipe endpoints if none are found.),
ModelBuilder provides two ways to specify network connectivity:

• Explicit connectivity—based on pipe Start node and Stop node (see “Step 3—
Specify Field Mappings for each Table/Feature Class” on page 6-263).
• Implicit connectivity—based on spatial data. When using implicit connectivity,
ModelBuilder allows you to specify a Tolerance, and provides a second option
allowing you to Create nodes if none found (see “Step 2—Specify Spatial
Options” on page 6-262).
The method that you use will vary depending on the quality of your data. The possible
situations include (in order from best case to worst case):
• You have pipe start and stop information—Explicit connectivity is definitely the
preferred option.
• You have some start and stop information—Use a combination of explicit and
implicit connectivity (use the Spatial Data option, and specify pipe Start/Stop
fields). If the start or stop data is missing (blank) for a particular pipe, Model-
Builder will then attempt to use spatial data to establish connectivity.
• You do not have start and stop information—Implicit connectivity is your only
option. If your spatial data is good, then you should reduce your Tolerance
accordingly.
• You do not have start and stop information, and you do not have any node data
(e.g., you have GIS data that defines your pipes, but you do not have data for
nodes)—Use implicit connectivity and specify the Create nodes if none found
option; otherwise, the pipes cannot be created.
Note: If pipes do not have explicit Start/Stop nodes and “Establish

connectivity using spatial data” is not checked, the pipes will not
be connected to the nodes and a valid model will not be
produced.
Other considerations include what happens when the coordinates of the pipe ends do
not match up with the node coordinates. This problem can be one of a few different
varieties:
1. Both nodes and pipe ends have coordinates, and pipes have explicit Start/
Stop nodes—In this case, the node coordinates are used, and the pipe ends are
moved to connect with the nodes.
2. Nodes have coordinates but pipes do not have explicit Start/Stop nodes—The
nodes will be created, and the specified tolerance will be used to connect pipe
ends within this tolerance to the appropriate nodes. If a pipe end does not fall
within any node’s specified tolerance, a new node can be created using the Create
nodes if none found option.
3. Pipe ends have coordinates but there are no junctions—New nodes must be
created using the Create nodes if none found option. Pipe ends are then
connected using the tolerance that is specified.

Using Modelbuilder
Another situation of interest occurs when two pipes cross but aren’t connected. If, at
the point where the pipes cross, there are no pipe ends or nodes within the specified
tolerance, then the pipes will not be connected in the model. If you intend for the pipes
to connect, then pipe ends or junctions must exist within the specified tolerance.
Sample Spreadsheet Data Source
Note: Database formats (such as MS Access) are preferable to simple

spreadsheet data sources. The sample below is intended only to
illustrate the importance of using expected data formats.
Here are two examples of possible data source tables. The first represents data that is
in the correct format for an easy transition into ModelBuilder, with no modification.
The second table will require adjustments before all of the data can be used by Model-
Builder.
Table 6-1: Correct Data Format for ModelBuilder
Label Roughness_C Diam_in Length_ft Material_ID Subtype
P-1 120 6 120 3 2
P-2 110 8 75 2 1
P-3 130 6 356 2 3
P-4 100 10 729 1 1
Table 6-2: Data Format Needs Editing for ModelBuilder
P-1 120 .5 120 PVC Phase2
P-2 110 .66 75 DuctIron Lateral
P-3 130 .5 356 PVC Phase1
P-4 100 .83 729 DuctIron Main
P-5 100 1 1029 DuctIron Main
In “Table 6-2: Data Format Needs Editing for ModelBuilder”on page 6-273, no
column labels have been specified. ModelBuilder will interpret the first row of data in
the table as the column labels, which can make the attribute mapping step of the
ModelBuilder Wizard more difficult unless you are very familiar with your data
source setup.

“Table 6-1: Correct Data Format for ModelBuilder”on page 6-273 is also superior to
“Table 6-2: Data Format Needs Editing for ModelBuilder”on page 6-273 in that it
clearly identifies the units that are used for unitized attribute values, such as length
and diameter. Again, unless you are very familiar with your data source, unspecified
units can lead to errors and confusion.
Finally, “Table 6-2: Data Format Needs Editing for ModelBuilder”on page 6-273 is
storing the Material and Subtype attributes as alphanumeric values, while Model-
Builder uses integer ID values to access this input. This data is unusable by Model-
Builder in alphanumeric format, and must be translated to an integer ID system in
order to read this data.

Chapter
Calculating Your Model 7

Calculation Options Manager
You create calculation profiles in the Calculation Options Manager. The Calculation
Options Manager consists of a list pane that displays all of the calculation profiles
associated with the current project, and a toolbar that contains some common
commands.
To display the Calculation Options Manager, select Analysis > Calculation Options.
The Calculation Options manager allows you to create option profiles that contain
various calculation settings. The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the
option profiles currently contained in the project, along with a toolbar.
New Creates a new calculation profile. Define

the attributes for the profile in the
Property Editor.
Duplicate Creates a copy of the currently selected

calculation option profile.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted option

profile.
Rename Lets you rename the currently

highlighted calculation profile.
Help Displays online help for the Calculation

Options manager.

Creating Calculation Profiles
If the Property Editor is open, highlighting a option profile in the list causes the
settings that make up the profile appear there. If the Property Editor is not open, you
can display the settings that make up the profile by highlighting the desired profile and
clicking the Properties button in the Calculation Options Manager.

Calculation profiles contain attributes that define how your model is calculated in
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition. You create calculation profiles in the Calculation
Options Manager. You can create several calculation profiles with different attributes
depending on the requirements of your project.
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition contains a default calculation profile called “Base

Calculation Options.” If you do not create additional calculation profiles, Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition will use this default profile whenever you calculate your
model.
Creating a Calculation Profile
To create a calculation profile:
1. Open the Calculation Options Manager by selecting Analysis > Calculation

Options.
2. Click the New button. A new profile appears in the list with a default name.
3. Type a new name for the profile.
4. Double-click the new profile to display its attributes in the Property Editor. Edit
the attributes as required.
Editing a Calculation Profile
You edit the attributes of a calculation profile in the Property Editor.
If you select a calculation profile while the Property Editor is open, the attributes for
that profile appear there. If the Property Editor is not open, you can display the
attributes of the calculation profile by double-clicking the profile in the Calculation
Options Manager.

Calculating Your Model
Deleting a Calculation Profile
To delete a calculation profile:

Options.
2. Select the profile you want to delete.
3. Press the Delete key, click the Delete button in the Calculation Options Manager,
or right-click the profile and select Delete from the shortcut menu.
Renaming a Calculation Profile
To rename a calculation profile:

Options.
2. Select the profile you want to rename.
3. Click the Rename button or right-click and select Rename from the shortcut
menu.
4. Type a new name for the profile, then press Enter.
Calculation Profile Attributes
A Calculation Options Profile contains the information described in the following

table.
Table 7-1: Calculation Profile Attributes
General
Label Lets you specify a name for the options profile.
Notes Lets you enter descriptive text to be associated with the

current calculation profile.
Calculation Type Allows you to choose between an Analysis or Design

calculation type.
AASHTO
Bend Angle vs. Opens the Bend Angle vs Bend Loss Curve dialog, allowing
Bend Loss you to modify the default curve.
Curve

Expansion, Ke Adjustment coefficient used in AASHTO equation to account

for expansion of the flow on the exit from incoming pipe.
Contraction, Kc Adjustment coefficient used in the AASHTO equation to

account for contraction of the flow on the entrance in the outlet
pipe.
Shaping Adjustment coefficient used in the AASHTO equation for

Adjustment, Cs junction headloss calculation to account for partial diameter
inlet shaping (equivalent to Half and Full in HEC-22). If inlet
shaping is used then the headloss is decreased by this factor
(50% default).
Non Piped Flow If non-piped flow accounts for 10% or more of the total
Adjustment, Cn structure outflow, a correction factor is applied to the total loss.
By default, this value is a 30% increase in headloss (a factor of
1.3) as documented in the AASHTO manual, but can be
changed by the user.
Analysis
Maximum This is the maximum number of iterations that will be

Network performed to achieve the closest approximation of the desired
Transversals network results.
Flow This value is taken as the maximum relative change in

Convergence discharge occurring at the system outlet between two
Test successive network solutions. In rational hydrology, system
discharge is a function of travel time and hydraulics through
the system. Therefore, it is necessary to iterate until the
system balances, or a maximum number of trials has occurred.

Generic Structure Loss
Governing On this tab, you can change the methodology for selecting the
Upstream Pipe upstream pipe when computing the headloss for a structure
Selection using the Generic Headloss Method. The three methodologies
Method are described below.
• Pipe With Maximum QV – If this item is selected, the
program will use the non-plunging upstream pipe with the
largest flow times velocity to calculate the upstream
velocity head used in the generic headloss equation.
• Pipe With Minimum Bend Angle - If this item is selected,
the program will use the upstream pipe with the smallest
bend angle to calculate the upstream velocity head used in
the generic headloss equation. The methodology should
be used when you want to assume that the upstream pipe
most closely aligned with the downstream pipe is the one
that is the most hydraulically significant.
• Pipe With Maximum Velocity Head – If this item is
selected, the program will use the nonplunging upstream
pipe with the largest velocity head to calculate the
upstream velocity head used in the generic headloss
equation. Note that if this method is used, pipes with very
small flows may be selected as the governing pipe, even
though they are not hydraulically significant.
The methodology that is selected here will be used for all
structures that employ the generic headloss
method.
HEC-22
Elevations The maximum elevation distance that pipes entering a node

Considered can be separated by and still be
Equal Within (m) considered to be at the same elevation.
Consider Non- If this value is set to True, plunging correction factor for non-
Piped Plunging piped flow will be applied during the calculation.
Flowt
Flat Submergedt Benching correction coefficient used for a flat submerged

transition structure.
Flat Benching correction coefficient used for a flat unsubmerged

Unsubmerged transition structure.

Depressed Benching correction coefficient used for a depressed

Submerged submerged transition structure.
Depressed Benching correction coefficient used for a depressed

Unsubmerged unsubmerged transition structure.
Half Bench Benching correction coefficient used for a half bench

Half Bench Benching correction coefficient used for a half bench

Full Bench Benching correction coefficient used for a full bench

Full Bench Benching correction coefficient used for a full bench

Hydraulics
Flow Profile Allows you to chosse between a backwater and capacity

Method analysis flow profile method.
Number of Flow The gradually varied flow profile divides each pipe into internal
Profile Steps segments prior to calculation of the hydraulic grade. The
default value of profile steps is five, and it is recommended that
the value entered here be at least five for accuracy. Increasing
this number will increase the accuracy of the hydraulic grade
calculation, but will increase the calculation time.
Hydraulic Grade The value entered here is taken as the maximum absolute
Convergence change between two successive iterations of hydraulic grade
Test (m) at any junction or inlet in the system. For a given discharge,
the upstream propagation of headlosses through pipes will
continue until two successive calculations change by an
absolute difference of less than this test value.
The Hydraulic Grade Convergence Test value is used in the
standard step gradually varied flow profiling algorithm. The
calculations is assumed to converge to the solution when the
two successive depth iterations are within this absolute test
value.

Average Velocity This section allows you to pick the method used to calculate
Method the average travel time velocity. The following four options are
available:
• Actual Uniform Flow Velocity
• Full Flow Velocity
• Simple Average Velocity
• Weighted Average Velocity
Minimum This section allows you to specify a minimum structure

Structure headloss. If the system calculates a structure headloss that is
Headloss (m) lower then this value, the value specified in the Minimum
Headloss field will be used.
This option applies to all structure headloss methods except
for the Absolute Method. Absolute headlosses will not be
overridden, even if they are less then the value specified in this
option.
Structure Loss Choose either Hydraulic Grade or Energy Grade as the basis
Mode for the hydraulic calculations.
Hydrology
Minimum Time The Minimum Time of Concentration. Time of concentration is

of Concentration defined as the amount of time it takes for water to travel from
(min) the farthest point in the watershed to an inlet.
Inlets
Neglect Side Allows you to choose whether to neglect side flow. If you select
Flow? True for this option, only frontal views will be included in the
inlet calculations.
Active This section gives you the choice of whether to use both curb
Components for and grate openings or the grate or curb opening only for
Combination combination inlets in sag.
Inlets In Sag
Active This section gives you the choice of whether to use both curb
Components for and grate openings or the grate or curb opening only for
Combination combination inlets on grade.
Inlets On Grade

Calculation Executive Summary Dialog Box
Calculation Executive Summary Dialog Box

The Calculation Executive Summary dialog box opens automatically after you
compute a model. This dialog box reports a summary of the calculations performed on
your model. You can also see this report by clicking Analysis > Calculation
Summary.
Click Details... for more information about the calculation (see “Calculation Detailed
Summary Dialog Box” on page 7-282), Messages... to open the User Notifications
dialog to view any calculation warnings or errors (“User Notifications Manager”),
Report to open the report viewer, or Close to close the dialog box.
The Executive Summary dialog box displays the following information:
Label Displays the name of the currently selected

scenario.
Rainfall Alternative Displays the currently selected rainfall alternative.

Label
Global Storm Event Displays the current global storm event.
Return Event Displays the recurrence period of the global storm

event.
Calculation Detailed Summary Dialog Box

The Calculation Detailed Summary dialog box provides a detailed reports of the
calculations performed on your model. You can open this dialog box by calculating
your model and clicking Detailed Summary in the Calculation Executive Summary
dialog box. You can also see this report by clicking Analysis > Calculation
Summary > Details.
Click the tabs in the Calculation Detailed Summary dialog box to review the details of
the report:
• “Calculation Options Tab”

• “Catchment Summary Tab”
• “Conduit Summary Tab”
• “Node Summary Tab”
• “Inlet Summary Tab”

Calculation Options Tab
This tab displays the current settings in the Property Editor for calculation options. To
change this, click Analysis > Calculation Options and change the settings in the
Property Editor.
The Calculation Options tab displays the following information:
Maximum Network This is the maximum number of iterations that will

Transversals be performed to achieve the closest
approximation of the desired network results.
Flow Convergence Test This value is taken as the maximum relative

change in discharge occurring at the system outlet
between two successive network solutions. In
rational hydrology, system discharge is a function
of travel time and hydraulics through the system.
Therefore, it is necessary to iterate until the
system balances, or a maximum number of trials
has occurred.
Neglect Side Flow? Allows you to choose whether to neglect side flow.
If you select True for this option, only frontal views
will be included in the inlet calculations.
Active Components for This section gives you the choice of whether to
Combination Inlets In use both curb and grate openings or the grate or
Sag curb opening only for combination inlets in sag.
Active Components for This section gives you the choice of whether to
Combination Inlets on use both curb and grate openings or the grate or
Grade curb opening only for combination inlets on grade.
Flow Profile Method Allows you to chosse between a backwater and

capacity analysis flow profile method.
Number of Flow The gradually varied flow profile divides each pipe
Profile Steps into internal segments prior to calculation of the
hydraulic grade. The default value of profile steps
is five, and it is recommended that the value
entered here be at least five for accuracy.
Increasing this number will increase the accuracy
of the hydraulic grade calculation, but will increase
the calculation time.

Hydraulic Grade The value entered here is taken as the maximum

Convergence Test absolute change between two successive
iterations of hydraulic grade at any junction or inlet
in the system. For a given discharge, the
upstream propagation of headlosses through
pipes will continue until two successive
calculations change by an absolute difference of
less than this test value.
The Hydraulic Grade Convergence Test value is
used in the standard step gradually varied flow
profiling algorithm. The calculations is assumed to
converge to the solution when the two successive
depth iterations are within this absolute test value.
Average Velocity This section allows you to pick the method used to
Method calculate the average travel time velocity. The
following four options are available:
• Actual Uniform Flow Velocity
Minimum Structure This section allows you to specify a minimum

Headloss structure headloss. If the system calculates a
structure headloss that is lower then this value,
the value specified in the Minimum Headloss field
will be used.
This option applies to all structure headloss
methods except for the Absolute Method.
Absolute headlosses will not be overridden, even
if they are less then the value specified in this
option.
Minimum Time of The Minimum Time of Concentration. Time of

Concentration concentration is defined as the amount of time it
takes for water to travel from the farthest point in
the watershed to an inlet.
Catchment Summary Tab
This tab displays a table of data about catchments in your model. You cannot modify
the table, it is read-only. To edit a catchment, select it in the Drawing Pane and edit its
attributes in the Property Editor.

The Catchment Summary tab displays the following information:
Label Displays the label of each catchment in your

model.
Area Displays the catchment size.
Time of Concentration Displays the time of concentration for the

catchment.
Rational C Displays the rational C value for the catchment.
Catchment CA Displays the CA value for the catchment.
Catchment Intensity Displays the intensity of the rainfall at the

catchment.
Catchment Rational Displays the amount of rational flow at the

Flow catchment.
Conduit Summary Tab
This tab displays a table of calculations for conduits in your model. You cannot
modify the table, it is read-only. To edit a conduit, select it in the Drawing Pane and
edit its attributes in the Property Editor.
The Conduit Summary tab displays the following information:
Label Displays the label of each element in your model.
Conduit Description Displays the Conduit Description. The Conduit

Description field is a special field which can
automatically consolidate several conduit
properties into one field. For more information,
see the “Conduit Description Attribute” topic.
Conduit Shape Displays the shape of the conduit.
Branch ID Branch identifier for the conduit, determined

during engine parsing.
Subnetwork Outfall Most downstream element of the conduit’s

subnetwork outfall.

Flow Total flow through the conduit during the

calculation.
Velocity (Average) The average velocity of flow through the conduit

over the duration of the run.
Hydraulic Grade Line Hydraulic Grade Line at the upstream end of the
(In) conduit.
Hydraulic Grade Line Hydraulic Grade Line at the downstream end of

(Out) the conduit.
Depth (In) Depth at the upstream end of the conduit.
Depth (Out) Depth at the downstream end of the conduit.
Node Summary Tab
This tab displays a table of calculations for nodes in your model. Nodes include catch
basins, manholes, and transitions. You cannot modify the table, it is read-only. To edit
a node, select it in the Drawing Pane and edit its attributes in the Property Editor.
The Node Summary tab displays the following information:
Label Displays the label of each node in your model.
Element Type Displays the kind of node being reported on.
Subnetwork Outfall Most downstream outfall for the node’s gravity

subnetwork.
Flow (Total Surface) Summation of all surface catchment inflows

draining to the inlet.
Flow (Total Out) Sum of flows at the downstream side of the

struture.
Elevation (Ground) Ground elevation for the node.
Elevation (Invert) Invert elevation for the node.
Energy Grade Line Energy grade line at the upstream side of the node.
(In)

Energy Grade Line Energy grade line at the downstream side of the
(Out) node.
Inlet Summary Tab
This tab displays a table of data about inlets in your model. You cannot modify the
table, it is read-only. To edit an inlet, use the Inlets Catalog dialog, accessible from the
Components menu.
The Inlet Summary tab displays the following information:
Label Displays the label of each gutter in your model.
Inlet Type Displays the type of inlet (Maximum Capacity,

Percent Capture, or Catalog Inlet).
Inlet Type (Inlet) Displays which of the inlet catalog types the
associated catalog inlet belongs to.
Inlet Displays the Catalog Inlet label for the inlet.
Flow (Captured) Total amount of flow intercepted by the inlet.
Flow (Total Bypassed) Total amount of flow that bypassed the inlet and
was not captured.
Bypass Target The downstream inlet that bypassed flow is

directed towards.
Capture Efficiency Ratio of captured flow to total flow.
Gutter Depth Depth of water at the inlet.
Gutter Spread Spread of water at the inlet, measured from the

curb.
User Notifications
User notifications are messages about your model. These messages can warn you
about potential issues with your model, such as slopes that might be too steep or
elements that slope in the wrong direction. These messages also point you to errors in
your model that prevent Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition from solving your
model.

User Notifications
To see user notifications:
1. Compute your model.

2. If needed, open the User Notification manager by clicking Analysis >
User Notifications (F8 key).
3. Or, if the calculation fails to compute because of an input error, when your model
is finished computing, Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition prompts you to view
user notifications to validate the input data.
You must fix any errors identified by red circles before Bentley StormCAD V8
XM Edition can compute a result.
Errors identified by orange circles are warnings that do not prevent the computa-
tion of the model.
4. In the User Notifications manager, if a notification pertains to a particular
element, you can double-click the notification to magnify and display the element
in the center of the drawing pane.
5. As needed, use the element label to identify the element that generates the error
and use the user notification message to edit the element’s properties to resolve
the error.
User Notifications Manager
The User Notifications Manager displays warnings and error messages that are turned
up by Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition’s validation routines. If the notification
references a particular element, you can zoom straight to that element by either
double-clicking the notification, or right-clicking it and selecting the Zoom To
command.
• Warnings are denoted by an orange icon and do not prevent the model from
calculating successfully.
• Errors are denoted by a red icon, and the model will not successfully calcu-
late if errors are found.
The User Notifications Manager consists of a toolbar and a tabular view containing a
list of warnings and error messages. The toolbar consists of the following buttons:

Details Displays the User Notification Details

dialog box, which includes information
about any warning or error messages. For
more information, see “User Notification
Details Dialog Box” on page 7-290.
Save Saves the user notifications as a comma-

delimited .csv file. You can open the .csv
file in Microsoft Excel or Notepad.
Report Displays a User Notification Report.
Copy Copies the currently highlighted warning or

error message to the Windows clipboard.
Zoom To If the warning or error message is related to

a specific element in your model, click this
button to center the element in question in
the drawing pane.
Help Displays online help for the User

Notification Manager.
The User Notification Manager displays warnings and error messages in a tabular
view. The table includes the following columns:
Message ID This column displays the message ID associated

with the corresponding message.
Scenario This column displays the scenario associated with

the corresponding message. This column will
display “Base” unless you ran a different scenario.
Element Type This column displays the element type associated

Element ID This column displays the element ID associated

Label If the notification is caused by a specific element,

this column displays the label of the element
associated with the corresponding message.

User Notifications
Message This column displays the description associated

Source This column displays the validation routine that

triggered the corresponding message.
User Notification Details Dialog Box

This dialog lists the elements that are referred to by a time-sensitive user notification
message. In the User Notification dialog, there is a time column that displays the time-
step during which time-sensitive messages occur. These messages will say “during
this time-step” or “for this time-step”, and do not display information about the refer-
enced element or elements. Double-clicking one of these messages in the User Notifi-
cations dialog opens the User Notification Details dialog, which does provide
information about the referenced element(s).
You can double-click messages in the User Notification Details dialog to zoom the
drawing pane view to the referenced element.

Chapter
Using Scenarios and 8

Alternatives
Scenarios and alternatives let you create, analyze, and recall an unlimited number of
variations of your model. In Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition powerful two-level
design, scenarios contain alternatives to give you precise control over changes to the
model.
Understanding Scenarios and Alternatives

Scenario management in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition can dramatically
increase your productivity in the "What If?" areas of modeling, including calibration,
operations analysis, and planning.
If you’ve never used scenarios and alternatives before, we recommend reading all of
the topics in this section to gain a complete understanding of how they work. By
investing a little time now to understand management, you can avoid unnecessary
editing and data duplication. Take advantage of scenario management to get a lot more
out of your model, with much less work and expense.
Topics in this section include:
• “Advantages of Automated Scenario Management” on page 8-292

• “A History of What-If Analyses” on page 8-292
• “The Scenario Cycle” on page 8-294
• “Scenario Attributes and Alternatives” on page 8-296
• “A Familiar Parallel” on page 8-296
• “Inheritance” on page 8-297
• “Local and Inherited Values” on page 8-299
• “Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance” on page 8-299
• “Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance” on page 8-300

Advantages of Automated Scenario Management
In contrast to the old methods of scenario management (editing or copying data), auto-
mated scenario management using inheritance gives you significant advantages:
• A single project file makes it possible to generate an unlimited number of "What

If?" conditions without becoming overwhelmed with numerous modeling files
and separate results.
• Because the software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project, it
can provide you with powerful automated tools for directly comparing scenario
results. Any set of results is immediately available at any time.
• The Scenario / Alternative relationship empowers you to mix and match groups of
data from existing scenarios without having to re-declare any data.
• With inheritance, you do not have to re-enter data if it remains unchanged in a
new alternative or scenario, avoiding redundant copies of the same data. Inherit-
ance also enables you to correct a data input error in a parent scenario and auto-
matically update the corrected attribute in all child scenarios.
These advantages, while obvious, may not seem compelling for small projects. It is as
projects grow to hundreds or thousands of network elements that the advantages of
true scenario inheritance become clear. On a large project, being able to maintain a
collection of base and modified alternatives accurately and efficiently can be the
difference between evaluating optional improvements and being forced to ignore
them.
A History of What-If Analyses
The history of what-if analyses can be divided into two periods:
• “Before Haestad Methods - Distributed Scenarios”

• “With Haestad Methods: Self-Contained Scenarios”
Before Haestad Methods - Distributed Scenarios

Traditionally, there have only been two possible ways of analyzing the effects of
change on a software model:
• Change the model, recalculate, and review the results

• Create a copy of the model, edit that copy, calculate, and review the results

Using Scenarios and Alternatives
Although either of these methods may be adequate for a relatively small system, the
data duplication, editing, and re-editing becomes very time-consuming and error-
prone as the size of the system and the number of possible conditions increase. Also,
comparing conditions requires manual data manipulation, because all output must be
stored in physically separate data files.
Figure 8-1: Before Haestad Methods: Manual Scenarios

With Haestad Methods: Self-Contained Scenarios

Effective scenario management tools need to meet these objectives:
• Minimize the number of project files the modeler needs to maintain (one, ideally).
• Maximize the usefulness of scenarios through easy access to things such as input
and output data, and direct comparisons.
• Maximize the number of scenarios you can simulate by mixing and matching data
from existing scenarios (data reuse)
• Minimize the amount of data that needs to be duplicated to consider conditions
that have a lot in common
The scenario management feature in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition successfully
meets all of these objectives. A single project file enables you to generate an unlimited
number of What If? conditions, edit only the data that needs to be changed, and
quickly generate direct comparisons of input and results for desired scenarios.
The Scenario Cycle
The process of working with scenarios is similar to the process of manually copying
and editing data, but without the disadvantages of data duplication and troublesome
file management. This process lets you cycle through any number of changes to the
model, without fear of overwriting critical data or duplicating important information.
Of course, it is possible to directly change data for any scenario, but an audit trail of
scenarios can be useful for retracing the steps of a calibration series or for under-
standing a group of master plan updates.

Figure 8-2: With Haestad Methods: Self-Contained Scenarios

Scenario Attributes and Alternatives
Before we explore scenario management further, a few key terms should be defined:
• Attribute—An attribute is a fundamental property of an object, and is often a

single numeric quantity. For example, the attributes of a pipe include diameter,
length, and roughness.
• Alternative—An alternative holds a family of related attributes so pieces of data
that you are most likely to change together are grouped for easy referencing and
editing. For example, a physical properties alternative groups physical data for the
network's elements, such as elevations, sizes, and roughness coefficients.
• Scenario—A scenario has a list of referenced alternatives (which hold the
attributes), and combines these alternatives to form an overall set of system condi-
tions that can be analyzed. This referencing of alternatives enables you to easily
generate system conditions that mix and match groups of data that have been
previously created. Note that scenarios do not actually hold any attribute data—
the referenced alternatives do.
A Familiar Parallel
Although the structure of scenarios may seem a bit difficult at first, anyone who has
eaten at a restaurant should be able to relate fairly easily. A meal (scenario) is
comprised of several courses (alternatives), which might include a salad, an entrée,
and a dessert. Each course has its own attributes. For example, the entrée may have a
meat, a vegetable, and a starch. Examining the choices, we could present a menu as in
the following figure:
Figure 8-3: A Restaurant Meal Scenario

The restaurant does not have to create a new recipe for every possible meal (combina-
tion of courses) that could be ordered. They can just assemble any meal based on what
the customer orders for each alternative course. Salad 1, Entrée 1, and Dessert 2 might
then be combined to define a complete meal.
Generalizing this concept, we see that any scenario references one alternative from
each category to create a big picture that can be analyzed. Note that different types of
alternatives may have different numbers and types of attributes, and any category can
have an unlimited number of alternatives to choose from.
Figure 8-4: Generic Scenario Anatomy
Inheritance
The separation of scenarios into distinct alternatives (groups of data) meets one of the
basic goals of scenario management: maximizing the number of scenarios you can
develop by mixing and matching existing alternatives. Two other primary goals have
also been addressed: a single project file is used, and easy access to input data and
calculated results is provided in numerous formats through the intuitive graphical
interface.
But what about the other objective: minimizing the amount of data that needs to be
duplicated to consider conditions that have a lot of common input? Surely an entire set
of pipe diameters should not be re-specified if only one or two change?
The solution is a familiar concept to most people: inheritance.

In the natural world, a child inherits characteristics from a parent. This may include
such traits as eye-color, hair color, and bone structure. There are two significant differ-
ences between the genetic inheritance that most of us know and the way inheritance is
implemented in software:
• “Overriding Inheritance” on page 8-298

• “Dynamic Inheritance” on page 8-298
Overriding Inheritance
Overriding inheritance is the software equivalent of cosmetics. A child can override
inherited characteristics at any time by specifying a new value for that characteristic.
These overriding values do not affect the parent, and are therefore considered local to
the child. Local values can also be removed at any time, reverting the characteristic to
its inherited state. The child has no choice in the value of his inherited attributes, only
in local attributes.
For example, suppose a child has inherited the attribute of blue eyes from his parent.
Now the child puts on a pair of green- tinted contact lenses to hide his natural eye
color. When the contact lenses are on, we say his natural eye color is overridden
locally, and his eye color is green. When the child removes the tinted lenses, his eye
color instantly reverts to blue, as inherited from his parent.
Dynamic Inheritance
Dynamic inheritance does not have a parallel in the genetic world. When a parent's
characteristic is changed, existing children also reflect the change. Using the eye-color
example, this would be the equivalent of the parent changing eye color from blue to
brown, and the children's eyes instantly inheriting the brown color also. Of course, if
the child has already overridden a characteristic locally, as with the green lenses, his
eyes will remain green until the lenses are removed. At this point, his eye color will
revert to the inherited color, now brown.
This dynamic inheritance has remarkable benefits for applying wide-scale changes to
a model, fixing an error, and so on. If rippling changes are not desired, the child can
override all of the parent's values, or a copy of the parent can be made instead of a
child.

Local and Inherited Values
Any changes that are made to the model belong to the currently active scenario and
the alternatives that it references. If the alternatives happen to have children, those
children will also inherit the changes unless they have specifically overridden that
attribute. The following figure demonstrates the effects of a change to a mid-level
alternative. Inherited values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black
text.
Figure 8-5: A Mid-level Hierarchy Alternative Change
Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance
Inheritance has an application every time you hear the phrase, "just like x except for
y." Rather than specifying all of the data from x again to form this new condition, we
can create a child from x and change y appropriately. Now we have both conditions,
with no duplicated effort.
We can even apply this inheritance to our restaurant analogy as follows. Inherited
values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text.
Note: Salad 3 could inherit from Salad 2, if we prefer: "Salad 3 is just

like Salad 2, except for the dressing."
• "Salad 2 is just like Salad 1, except for the dressing."

• "Salad 3 is just like Salad 1, except for the dressing."
Note: If the vegetable of the day changes (say from green beans to
peas), only Entrée 1 needs to be updated, and the other entrées
will automatically inherit the vegetable attribute of "Peas"
instead of "Green Beans."
• "Entrée 2 is just like Entrée 1, except for the meat and the starch."
• "Entrée 3 is just like Entrée 2, except for the meat."
Note: Dessert 3 has nothing in common with the other desserts, so it

can be created as a "root" or base alternative. It does not inherit
its attribute data from any other alternative.
• "Dessert 2 is just like Dessert 1, except for the topping."
Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance
Just as a child alternative can inherit attributes from its parent, a child scenario can
inherit which alternatives it references from its parent. This is essentially still the
phrase just like x except for y, but on a larger scale.
Carrying through on our meal example, consider a situation where you go out to
dinner with three friends. The first friend places his order, and the second friend orders
the same thing except for the dessert. The third friend orders something totally
different, and you order the same meal as hers except for the salad.
The four meal scenarios could then be presented as follows (inherited values are
shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text):
• "Meal 2 is just like Meal 1, except for the dessert." The salad and entrée alterna-
tives are inherited from Meal 1.

• "Meal 3 is nothing like Meal 1 or Meal 2." A totally new base or root is created.
• "Meal 4 is just like Meal 3, except for the salad." The entrée and dessert alterna-
tives are inherited from Meal 3.
Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution

System
Let us consider a fairly simple water distribution system: a single reservoir supplies
water by gravity to three junction nodes.
Figure 8-6: Example Water Distribution System
Although true water distribution scenarios include such alternative categories as initial
settings, operational controls, water quality, and fire flow, we are going to focus on the
two most commonly changed sets of alternatives: demands and physical properties.
Within these alternatives, we are going to concentrate on junction baseline demands
and pipe diameters.

Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution System
Building the Model (Average Day Conditions)
During model construction, probably only one alternative from each category is going
to be considered. This model is built with average demand calculations and prelimi-
nary pipe diameter estimates. At this point we can name our scenario and alternatives,
and the hierarchies look like the following (showing only the items of interest):
Analyzing Different Demands (Maximum Day Conditions)
In our example, the local planning board also requires analysis of maximum day
demands, so a new demand alternative is required. No variation in demand is expected
at J-2, which is an industrial site. As a result, the new demand alternative can inherit J-
2’s demand from Average Day while the other two demands are overridden.
Now we can create a child scenario from Average Day that inherits the physical alter-
native, but overrides the selected demand alternative. As a result, we get the following
scenario hierarchy:

Since no physical data (pipe diameters) have been changed, the physical alternative
hierarchy remains the same as before.
Another Set of Demands (Peak Hour Conditions)
Based on pressure requirements, the system is adequate to supply maximum day

demands. Another local regulation requires analysis of peak hour demands, with
slightly lower allowable pressures. Since the peak hour demands also share the indus-
trial load from the Average Day condition, Peak Hour can be inherited from Average
Day. In this instance, Peak Hour could inherit just as easily from Maximum Day.
Another scenario is also created to reference these new demands, as shown below:
Note again that we did not change any physical data, so the physical alternatives
remain the same.
Correcting an Error
This analysis results in acceptable pressures, until it is discovered that the industrial
demand is not actually 500 gpm—it is 1,500 gpm. Because of the inheritance within
the demand alternatives, however, only the Average Day demand for J-2 needs to be
updated. The changes ripple through to the children. After the single change is made,
the demand hierarchy is as follows:
Notice that no changes need to be made to the scenarios to reflect these corrections.
The three scenarios can now be calculated as a batch to update the results.

Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution System
When these results are reviewed, it is determined that the system does not have the
ability to adequately supply the system as it was originally thought. The pressure at J-
2 is too low under peak hour demand conditions.
Analyzing Improvement Suggestions
To counter the headloss from the increased demand load, two possible improvements
are suggested:
• A much larger diameter is proposed for P-1 (the pipe from the reservoir). This
physical alternative is created as a child of the Preliminary Pipes alternative,
inheriting all the diameters except P-1’s, which is overridden.
• Slightly larger diameters are proposed for all pipes. Since there are no commonal-
ities between this recommendation and either of the other physical alternatives,
this can be created as a base (root) alternative.
These changes are then incorporated to arrive at the following hierarchies:
This time, the demand alternative hierarchy remains the same since no demands were
changed. The two new scenarios (Peak, Big P-1, Peak, All Big Pipes) can be batch run
to provide results for these proposed improvements.
Next, features like Scenario Comparison Annotation (from the Scenario Manager) and
comparison Graphs (for extended period simulations, from the element editor dialog
boxes) can be used to directly determine which proposal results in the most improved
pressures.

Finalizing the Project
It is decided that enlarging P-1 is the optimum solution, so new scenarios are created
to check the results for average day and maximum day demands. Notice that this step
does not require handling any new data. All of the information we want to model is
present in the alternatives we already have!
Also note that it would be equally effective in this case to inherit the Avg. Day, Big P-
1 scenario from Avg. Day (changing the physical alternative) or to inherit from Peak,
Big P-1 (changing the demand alternative). Likewise, Max. Day, Big P-1 could inherit
from either Max. Day or Peak, Big P-1.
Neither the demand nor physical alternative hierarchies were changed in order to run
the last set of scenarios, so they remain as they were.
Summary
In contrast to the old methods of scenario management (editing or copying data), auto-
mated scenario management using inheritance gives you significant advantages:
• A single project file makes it possible to generate an unlimited number of What

If? conditions without becoming overwhelmed with numerous modeling files and
separate results.

Scenarios
• Because the software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project, it
can provide you with powerful automated tools for directly comparing scenario
results. Any set of results is immediately available at any time.
• The Scenario / Alternative relationship empowers you to mix and match groups of
data from existing scenarios without having to re-declare any data.
• With inheritance, you do not have to re-enter data if it remains unchanged in a
new alternative or scenario, avoiding redundant copies of the same data. Inherit-
ance also enables you to correct a data input error in a parent scenario and auto-
matically update the corrected attribute in all child scenarios.
These advantages, while obvious, may not seem compelling for small projects. It is as
projects grow to hundreds or thousands of network elements that the advantages of
true scenario inheritance become clear. On a large project, being able to maintain a
collection of base and modified alternatives accurately and efficiently can be the
difference between evaluating optional improvements and being forced to ignore
them.
To learn more about actually using scenario management in our software, start by
running the scenario management tutorial from the Help menu or from within the
scenario manager itself. Then load one of the SAMPLE projects and explore the
scenarios defined there. For context-sensitive help, press F1 or the Help button any
time there is a screen or field that puzzles you.
Scenarios
A Scenario contains all the input data (in the form of Alternatives), calculation
options, results, and notes associated with a set of calculations. Scenarios let you set
up an unlimited number of “What If?” situations for your model, and then modify,
compute, and review your system under those conditions.
You can create scenarios that reuse or share data in existing alternatives, submit
multiple scenarios for calculation in a batch run, switch between scenarios, and
compare scenario results—all with a few mouse clicks. There is no limit to the number
of scenarios that you can create.

Base and Child Scenarios
Note: The calculation options are not inherited between scenarios, but
are duplicated when the scenario is first created. The
alternatives and data records, however, are inherited. There is a
permanent, dynamic link from a child back to its parent.
There are two types of scenarios:
• Base Scenarios—Contain all of your working data. When you start a new project,
you begin with a default base scenario. As you enter data and calculate your
model, you are working with this default base scenario and the alternatives it
references.
• Child Scenarios—Inherit data from a base scenario, or other child scenarios.
Child scenarios allow you to freely change data for one or more elements in your
system. Child scenarios can reflect some or all of the values contained in their
parent. This is a very powerful concept, giving you the ability to make changes in
a parent scenario that will trickle down through child scenarios, while also giving
you the ability to override values for some or all of the elements in child
scenarios.
Creating Scenarios
You create new scenarios in the Scenario Manager. A new scenario can be a Base
scenario or a Child scenario. For information about the differences between the two
types of scenarios, see “Base and Child Scenarios” on page 8-307.
To create a new scenario:
1. Select Analysis > Scenarios to open the Scenario Manager, or click the Scenario
Manager tab.
2. Click the New button and select whether you want to create a Base scenario or a
Child Scenario. When creating a Child scenario, you must first highlight the
scenario from which the child is derived in the Scenario Manager tree view.
By default, a new scenario comprises the Base Alternatives associated with each
alternative type.
3. Double-click the new scenario to edit its properties in the Property Editor.

Scenarios
Editing Scenarios
You edit scenarios in two places in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition:
• The Scenario Manager lists all of the project’s scenarios in a hierarchical tree
format, and displays the Base/Child relationship between them.
• The Property Editor displays the alternatives that make up the scenario that is
currently highlighted in the Scenario Manager, along with the scenario label, any
notes associated with the scenario, and the calculation options profile that is used
when the scenario is calculated.
To edit a scenario:
1. Select Analysis > Scenarios to open the Scenario Manager, or click the Scenario
Manager tab.
2. Double-click the scenario you want to edit to display its properties in the Property
Editor.
3. Edit any of the following properties as desired:
– Scenario label - This is the same operation as renaming the scenario in the
Scenario Manager.
– Notes - Add any notes or comments in the Notes field
– Alternatives
– Calculation Options
Running Multiple Scenarios at Once (Batch Runs)
Performing a batch run lets you set up and run calculations for multiple scenarios at
once. This is helpful if you want to queue a large number of calculations, or manage a
group of smaller calculations as a set. The list of selected scenarios for the batch run
remain with your project until you change it.
To perform a batch run:
1. Selecting Analysis > Scenarios to open the Scenario Manager, or click the
Scenario Manager tab.
2. Click the Compute Current Scenario button, then select Batch Run from the
shortcut menu.
The Batch Run Editor dialog box appears.
3. Check the scenarios you want to run, then click the Batch button. Each scenario is
calculated. You can cancel the batch run between any scenario calculation. The
selected scenarios run consecutively.

When the batch run is completed, the scenario that was current stays current, even
if it was not calculated.
4. Select a calculated scenario from the Scenario toolbar drop-down list to see the
results throughout the program.
Batch Run Editor Dialog Box

The Batch Run Editor dialog box contains the following controls:
Scenario List Displays a list of all current scenarios. Click the

check box next to the scenarios you want to run in
batch mode.
Batch Starts the batch run of the selected scenarios.
Select Displays a drop-down menu containing the

following commands:
• Select All - Selects all scenarios listed.
• Clear Selection - Clears all selected
scenarios.
Close Closes the Batch Run Editor dialog box.
Help Displays context-sensitive help for the Batch Run

Editor dialog box.
Scenario Manager
The Scenario Manager lets you create, edit, and manage scenarios. There is one built-
in default scenario—the Base scenario. If you wish, you only have to use this one
scenario. However, you can save yourself time by creating additional scenarios that
reference the alternatives needed to perform and recall the results of each of your
calculations. There is no limit to the number of scenarios that you can create.
Note: When you delete a scenario, you are not losing data records
because scenarios never actually hold calculation data records
(alternatives do). The alternatives and data records referenced
by that scenario exist until you explicitly delete them. By
accessing the Alternative Manager, you can delete the
referenced alternatives and data records.
The Scenario Manager consists of a hierarchical tree view and a toolbar.

Scenarios
The tree view displays all of the scenarios in the project. If the Property Editor is open,
highlighting a scenario in the list causes the alternatives that make up the scenario
appear there. If the Property Editor is not open, you can display the alternatives and
scenario information by highlighting the desired scenario and clicking the Properties
button in the Scenario Manager.
New Scenario Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Child Scenario—Lets you create a new
Child scenario from the currently highlighted
Base scenario.
• Base Scenario—Lets you create a new
Base scenario.
Delete Removes the currently selected scenario.
Rename Lets you rename the currently selected scenario.
Compute Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Scenario—Lets you calculate the currently
highlighted scenario.
• Hierarchy—Lets you calculate the entire
currently highlighted branch—the Base
scenario and all Child scenarios currently
associated with it.
• Children—Lets you calculate all of the
Child scenarios associated with the
currently highlighted scenario.
• Batch Run—Lets you run a user-defined
group of scenarios at once.

Make Current Causes the currently selected scenario to

become the active one, and to be displayed in
the drawing pane.
Expand All Displays the full alternative hierarchy.
Collapse All Collapses the alternative hierarchy so that only

the top-level nodes are visible.
Help Displays online help for the Alternative

Manager.
Alternatives
Alternatives are the building blocks behind scenarios (for more information, see
“Scenarios” on page 8-306). They are categorized data sets that create scenarios when
placed together. Alternatives hold the input data in the form of records. A record holds
the data for a particular element in your system.
Scenarios are composed of alternatives, as well as other calculation options (see

“Calculation Options” on page 8-338), allowing you to compute and compare the
results of various changes to your system. Alternatives can vary independently within
scenarios, and can be shared between scenarios.
Scenarios allow you to specify the alternatives you wish to analyze. In combination
with scenarios, you can perform calculations on your system to see what effect each
alternative has. Once you have determined an alternative that works best for your
system, you can permanently merge changes from the preferred alternative to the base
alternative if you wish.
When you first set up your system, the data that you enter is stored in the various base
alternative types. If you wish to see how your system behaves, for example, by
increasing the diameter of a few select pipes, you can create a child alternative to
accomplish that. You can make another child alternative with even larger diameters,
and another with smaller diameters. There is no limit to the number of alternatives that
you can create.

Alternatives
Types of Alternatives
The exact properties of each alternative are discussed in their respective sections. By
breaking up alternatives into these different types, we give you the ability to mix
different alternatives any way that you want within any given scenario.
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition includes these types of alternatives:
• “Active Topology Alternative”

• “Physical Alternatives”
• “Headloss Alternatives”
• “Boundary Condition Alternatives”
• “Rainfall Runoff Alternative”
• “Hydrologic Alternatives”
• “Design Alternative”
• “System Flows Alternatives”
• “User Data Extensions Alternative”
Base and Child Alternatives
There are two kinds of alternatives: Base alternatives and Child alternatives. Base
alternatives contain local data for all elements in your system. Child alternatives
inherit data from base alternatives, or even other child alternatives, and contain data
for one or more elements in your system. The data within an alternative consists of
data inherited from its parent, and the data altered specifically by you (local data).
Remember that all data inherited from the base alternative are changed when the base
alternative changes. Only local data specific to a child alternative remain unchanged.
Creating Alternatives
New alternatives are created in the Alternative Manager dialog box. A new alternative
can be a Base scenario or a Child scenario. Each alternative type contains a Base alter-
native in the Alternative Manager tree view.

Note: For information regarding the differences between the two types
of alternatives, see “Base and Child Alternatives” on page 8-312.
To create a new Alternative:
1. Select Analysis > Alternatives to open the Alternative Manager, or click the Alter-
native Manager tab.
2. To create a new Base alternative, highlight the type of alternative you want to
create, then click the New button.
3. To create a new Child alternative, right-click the Base alternative from which the
child will be derived, then select New > Child Alternative from the submenu.
4. Double-click the new alternative to edit its properties in the Alternative Editor.
Editing Alternatives
You edit the properties of an alternative in its own alternative editor. The first column
in an alternative editor contains check boxes, which indicate the records that have
been changed in this alternative.
• If the box is checked, the record on that line has been modified and the data is
local, or specific, to this alternative.
• If the box is not checked, it means that the record on that line is inherited from its
higher-level parent alternative. Inherited records are dynamic. If the record is
changed in the parent, the change is reflected in the child. The records on these
rows reflect the corresponding values in the alternative’s parent.
To edit an existing alternative, you can use one of two methods:
• Double-click the alternative to be edited in the Alternative Manager.

or
• Highlight the alternative to be edited in the Alternative Manager and click the
Properties button.
In either case, the Alternative Editor dialog box for the specified alternative appears,
allowing you to view and define settings as desired.
Alternative Manager
The Alternative Manager lets you create, view, and edit the alternatives that make up
the project scenarios. The dialog box consists of a pane that displays folders for each
of the alternative types which can be expanded to display all of the alternatives for that
type, and a toolbar.

Alternatives
The toolbar consists of the following buttons:

commands:
• Base Alternative—Creates a new Base
Alternative of the currently highlighted
type.
• Child Alternative—Creates a new
Child Alternative from the currently high-
lighted Base Alternative.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted alternative.
Duplicate Copies the currently highlighted alternative.
Edit Opens the Alternative Editor dialog box for

the currently highlighted alternative.
Merge Alternatives Moves all records from one alternative to

another.

alternative.
Report Lets you generate a report of the currently

highlighted alternative.
Expand All Displays the full alternative hierarchy.
Collapse All Collapses the alternative hierarchy so that

only the top-level nodes are visible.
Help Displays online help for the Alternative

Manager.

Alternative Editor Dialog Box
This dialog box presents in tabular format the data that makes up the alternative being
edited. Depending on the alternative type, the dialog box contains a separate tab for
each element that possesses data contained in the alternative.
Note: Note: As you make changes to records, the check box

automatically becomes checked. If you want to reset a record to
its parent's values, clear the corresponding check box.
Many columns support Global Editing (see Globally Editing

Data), allowing you to change all values in a single column.
Right-click a column header to access the Global Edit option.
The check box column is disabled when you edit a base

alternative.
The Alternative Editor displays all of the records held by a single alternative. These
records contain the values that are active when a scenario referencing this alternative
is active. They allow you to view all of the changes that you have made for a single
alternative. They also allow you to eliminate changes that you no longer need.
There is one editor for each alternative type. Each type of editor works similarly and
allows you to make changes to a different aspect of your system. The first column
contains check boxes, which indicate the records that have been changed in this alter-
native.
If the check box is selected, the record on that line has been modified and the data is
local, or specific, to this alternative.
If the check box is cleared, it means that the record on that line is inherited from its
higher-level parent alternative. Inherited records are dynamic. If the record is changed
in the parent, the change is reflected in the child. The records on these rows reflect the
corresponding values in the alternative's parent.
Active Topology Alternative
The Active Topology Alternative lets you temporarily remove areas of the network
from the current analysis. This is useful for comparing the effect of proposed
construction and to gauge the effectiveness of redundancy that may be present in the
system.
The Active Topology dialog box is divided into tabs for each element type:
• Conduit
• Gutter

Alternatives
• Manhole
• Catch basin
• Transition
• Outfall
• Catchment
For each tab, the same setup applies—the tables are divided into three columns. The
first column displays whether the data is Base or Inherited, the second column is the
element Label, and the third column allows you to choose whether or not the corre-
sponding element is Active in the current alternative.
To make an element Inactive in the current alternative, clear the check box in the Is
Active? field that corresponds to that element’s Label.
Creating an Active Topology Child Alternative

When creating an active topology child alternative, you may notice that the elements
added to the child scenario also appear in your model when the base scenario is the
current scenario.
To create an active topology alternative so that the elements added to the child
scenario do not show up as part of the base scenario:
1. Create a new project.

2. Open the Property Editor.
3. Open the Scenario Manager and make sure the Base scenario is current (active).
4. Create your model by adding elements in the drawing pane.
5. Create a new child scenario and a new child active topology alternative as
described in the following steps:
a. In the Scenario Manager, click the New button and select Child Scenario
from the submenu.
b. In the Property Editor, which should now display the properties for the newly
created scenario, select <New...> in the Active Topology field.
c. In the Create New Alternative dialog box, type the name of the new child
active topology alternative name then click OK.
6. In the Scenario Manager, select the new child scenario then click the Make
Current button to make the child scenario the current (active) scenario.
7. Add new elements to your model. These elements will be active only in the new
child alternative.

8. To verify that this worked as expected:

a. In the Scenario Manager, select the base scenario then click the Make
Current button to make the base scenario the current (active) scenario. The
new elements are shown as inactive (they appear grayed out in the drawing
pane).
b. In the Scenario Manager, select the new child scenario then click the Make
Current button to make the child scenario the current (active) scenario. The
new elements are shown as active.
Note: If you add new elements in the base scenario, they will show up
in the child scenario. This is normal.
Physical Alternatives
Each type of network element has a specific set of physical properties that are stored
in a physical properties alternative, as listed below:
• “Physical Alternative for Conduits”

• “Physical Alternative for Manholes”
• “Physical Alternative for Catch Basins”
• “Physical Alternative for Transitions”
• “Physical Alternative for Outfalls”
Physical Alternative for Conduits

The physical alternative editor for conduits is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of conduits. The following columns are available:
Column Description
ID Displays the unique identifier for each element in

the alternative.
Label Displays the label for each element in the

alternative.
Has User Defined Lets you specify whether the channel has a user-
Length? defined or schematic length.
Length (User Defined) Lets you define the length of each channel in the
alternative that has a user—defined length.

Alternatives
Column Description
Material Lets you enter the name of the material used.

Alternatively, clicking the Ellipsis (…) button
opens the Material Engineering Library, allowing
you to select a pre-defined material. If a pre-
defined material is chosen, the roughness value
will change accordingly.
Manning’s n Lets you define the Manning’s roughness value for

the associated conduits. This attribute is only
available when Manning’s is chosen as the
Hydraulic Analysis Friction Method on the Project
tab of the project Options (Tools > Options).
Darcy-Weisbach e Lets you define the Darcy-Wesibach roughness

value of each gutter in the alternative. This
attribute is only available when Darcy-Wesibach
is chosen as the Hydraulic Analysis Friction
Method on the Project tab of the project Options
(Tools > Options).
Hazen-Williams C Lets you define the Hazen-Williams roughness

value of each gutter in the alternative. This
attribute is only available when Hazen-Williams is
chosen as the Hydraulic Analysis Friction Method
on the Project tab of the project Options (Tools >
Options).
Kutter’s n Lets you define the Kutter’s roughness value of

each gutter in the alternative. This attribute is only
available when Kutters is chosen as the Hydraulic
Analysis Friction Method on the Project tab of the
project Options (Tools > Options).
Set Invert to Lets you automatically set the upstream pipe

Upstream? invert to the elevation of the upstream node.
Invert (Upstream) Lets you define the upstream pipe invert.
Set Invert to Lets you automatically set the upstream pipe

Downstream? invert to the elevation of the downstream node.
Invert (Downstream) Lets you define the downstream pipe invert.

Column Description
Number of Barrels Lets you specify the number of hydraulically

identical conduit barrels that make up the conduit.
Use Local Conduit When this box is checked, you can define your
Description? own conduit description for the associated
conduit. See the “Conduit Description Attribute”
topic for more details.
Conduit Description Displays the Conduit Description. The Conduit

Description field is a special field which can
automatically consolidate several conduit
properties into one field. For more information,
see the “Conduit Description Attribute” topic.
Has User Defined Bend When this box is checked, you can define a bend
Angle? angle for the conduit in the Bend Angle (User
Defined) field.
Bend Angle (User Lets you specify a bend angle for the associated
Defined) conduit. This field is only available when the Has
User Defined Bend Angle? box is checked.
Conduit Type Allows you to specify whether the conduit is a

User Defined or Catalog Conduit. If User Defined
is selected here, any of the conduit shapes will be
available. If Catalog Conduit is selected, only
those shapes defined in the Conduit Catalog will
be available. See “Conduit Catalog Dialog Box”
for more details.
Conduit Shape Allows you to select the shape of the conduit. The
options available here will vary depending on the
Conduit Type you have chosen. Your selection
here will determine which dimension attributes
will be available. Click the ellipsis button to
access the “Conduit Catalog Dialog Box”.
Rise Lets you define the rise (height) of the associated

conduit.
Span Lets you define the span (width) of the associated

conduit.

Alternatives
Column Description
Diameter Lets you define the diameter of the associated

conduits. This column is only available for
circular and virtual conduits.
Section Size Allows you to select from the section sizes that are
available for the selected Conduit Shape. This
field is only available for conduits whose Conduit
Type is Catalog Conduit.
Left Bank Station Allows you to select which of the station points
defined in the Irregular Channel Section dialog
should be defined as the Left bank.
Right Bank Station Allows you to select which of the station points
defined in the Irregular Channel Section dialog
should be defined as the Right bank.
Channel Weighting Allows you to select the weighting roughness

Method method used for the associated open irregular
channel conduit.
Irregular Channel Allows you to access the Irregular Channel dialog,

Section where you can define the cross sectional station
vs. depth points for the associated irregular
channel.
Bottom Width Lets you define the base width of the associated
conduits that have a Trapezoidal or Virtual
Conduit Shape.
Right Side Slope Lets you define the right side slope of the
associated conduits. This column is only available
for conduits that have a Trapezoidal or Virtual
Conduit Shape.
Left Side Slope Lets you define the left side slope of the associated
conduits that have a Trapezoidal or Virtual
Conduit Shape.

Column Description
Is Diversion Link? When this box is checked, the flow into the
associated conduit is determined based on a rating
curve, which is defined in the Diversion Rating
Curve dialog.
Diversion Rating Opens the Diversion Rating Curve dialog,

Curve allowing you to define the rating curve using
Upstream Flow vs. Diverted Flow points. This
field is only available when Is Diversion Link? has
been checked.
Roughness Type Allows you to select the method by which

roughness data is applied to the conduit.
Left Bank Manning’s n Lets you specify the Manning’s roughness value
for the left bank of each conduit in the alternative.
This column is only available for conduits that
have a Trapezoidal Channel, Virtual, or Irregular
Channel Conduit Shape.
Channel Manning’s n Lets you specify the Manning’s roughness value

for the channel of each conduit in the alternative.
Right Bank Manning’s Lets you specify the Manning’s roughness value
n for the right bank of each conduit in the
alternative. This column is only available for
conduits that have a Trapezoidal Channel, Virtual,
or Irregular Channel Conduit Shape.
Left Bank C Lets you specify the Hazen-Williams roughness

value for the left bank of each conduit in the
Channel C Lets you specify the Hazen-Williams roughness

value for the channel of each conduit in the

Alternatives
Column Description
Right Bank C Lets you specify the Hazen-Williams roughness

value for the right bank of each conduit in the
Left Bank e Lets you specify the Darcy-Weisbach roughness

value for the left bank of each conduit in the
Channel e Lets you specify the Darcy-Weisbach roughness

value for the channel of each conduit in the
Right Bank e Lets you specify the Darcy-Weisbach roughness

value for the right bank of each conduit in the
Left Bank Kutter’s n Lets you specify the Kutter’s roughness value for
the left bank of each conduit in the alternative.
Channel Kutter’s n Lets you specify the Kutter’s roughness value for
the channel of each conduit in the alternative. This
column is only available for conduits that have a
Trapezoidal Channel, Virtual, or Irregular Channel
Conduit Shape.
Right Bank Kutter’s n Lets you specify the Kutter’s roughness value for
the right bank of each conduit in the alternative.

Conduit Description Attribute
The Conduit Description field is a special field which can automatically consolidate
several conduit properties into one field. This makes it easy to set up concise reports
that contain conduits with different shapes and properties.
For example, a box shaped conduit with rise and span, as well as a circular shaped
conduit with a diameter. In this example, the single conduit description field can be
used in place of the Conduit Shape, Diameter, Rise, Span and Material fields. To set
the format of the automatically generated Conduit Descriptions, go to Tools >
Options > Project tab and set the options in the Conduit Description Options
section.
You can also enter your own local conduit descriptions for a conduit by checking the
Use Local Conduit Description? attribute.

Alternatives
Physical Alternative for Manholes

The physical alternative editor for manholes is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of manholes. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Bolted Cover Indicates that the associated manhole has a bolted

cover. If the manhole cover is bolted, then the
hydraulic grade line is not reset to the rim
elevation at the downstream end of the upstream
pipes in the case of a flooding situation (the
calculated HGL being higher than the rim
elevation).
Width Displays the width of each box manhole in the

alternative.
Length Displays the length of each box manhole in the

alternative.
Diameter Displays the diameter of each circular manhole in

the alternative.
Structure Type Indicates whether the manhole is circular or box

shaped. Clicking a field displays a list box that
allows you to switch between the two.
Set Rim to Ground Enables or disables a data entry shortcut. If the

Elevation box is checked, the manhole rim elevation is set
equal to the ground elevation automatically.
Elevation (Rim) Lets you define the top elevation of a manhole

structure. This elevation is typically flush with the
ground surface. However in some cases, the rim
elevation may be slightly below the ground
surface elevation (sunk) or slightly above the
ground surface elevation (raised).
Elevation (Invert) Lets you define the elevation at the bottom of the
manhole.

Column Description
Elevation (Ground) Displays the ground elevation for each node in the
alternative.
Physical Alternative for Catch Basins

The physical alternative editor for catch basins is used to create various data sets for
the physical characteristics of catch basins. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Inlet Allows you to choose a predefined inlet from the

Inlets Catalog dialog. Clicking the ellipsis (...)
button opens the Inlets Catalog dialog.
Capture Efficiency The amount of total flow, expressed as a

percentage, that is captured by the catch basin
element.
Maximum Inflow Lets you define the maximum inflow for catch
basins of the Maximum Inflow Inlet Type.
Inlet Type Indicates whether the catch basin is a Percent

Capture, Catalog Inlet, or Maximum Inflow type.
Clicking a field activates a list box allowing you to
switch between the three.
Mannings n (Inlet) Enter the roughness factor for the roadway.
Longitudinal Slope Enter the slope of the roadway in the direction of

(Inlet) flow.
Inlet Location Allows you to specify whether the inlet is located

in sag or on grade.
Slot Length Enter the length of the Slot inlet.

Alternatives
Column Description
Clogging Factor Enter a value to indicate how much of the grate is

clogged. This factor reduces the inlet efficiency by
decreasing the effective area of the grate opening.
Grate Length Enter the length of the inlet grate.
Curb Opening Length Enter the length of the clear opening in the face of
the curb.
Gutter Cross Slope Enter the transverse slope of the gutter.
Depressed Gutter? Check this box if the gutter slope differs from the
road cross slope. If this box is not checked, the
gutter cross slope will be equal to the road cross
slope.
Road Cross Slope Enter the transverse slope of the road.
Side Slope (Ditch) Enter the slope of the ditch sides.
Bottom Width (Ditch) Enter the width at the bottom of the ditch.
Gutter Width Enter the horizontal width of the gutter.
Width Displays the width of each box catch basin in the

alternative.
Length Displays the length of each box catch basin in the

alternative.
Diameter Displays the diameter of each circular catch basin

in the alternative.
Structure Type Indicates whether the catch basin is circular or box

shaped or is a transition node. Clicking a field
activates a list box that allows you to switch
between the three.
Set Rim to Ground Enables or disables a data entry shortcut. If the

Elevation box is checked, the catch basin rim elevation is set
equal to the ground elevation automatically.

Column Description
Elevation (Rim) Lets you define the top elevation of a catch basin
structure. This elevation is typically flush with the
ground surface. In some cases, the rim elevation
may be slightly below the ground surface
elevation (sunk) or slightly above the ground
surface elevation (raised).
Elevation (Ground) Clicking the Ellipsis (…) button in this field opens
the Surface Depth-Area Curve editor, allowing
you to define the surface depth area curve for each
element in the alternative that uses the Surface
Depth-Area Curve Surface Storage Type.
Elevation (Invert) Lets you define the area in which ponding occurs
at the currently selected element. It is available
only when the Surface Storage Type attribute is set
to Ponded Area.
Physical Alternative for Transitions

The physical alternative editor for transitionrs is used to create various data sets for
the physical characteristics of transitions. The following columns are available:
Column Description
ID Displays the unique identifier for each transition

element in the alternative.
Label Displays the label for each transition element in

the alternative.
Set Top to Ground When this box is checked, the Elevation (Top) will
Elevation? be set to the value for the Elevation (Ground).
Transition Length Enter the length of the chamber.
Elevation (Top) Lets you set the top elevation of the transition
element.
Elevation (Ground) Lets you set the ground elevation of the transition
element.
Elevation (Invert) Lets you set the bottom elevation of the transition
element.

Alternatives
Physical Alternative for Outfalls

The physical alternative editor for outfalls is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of outfalls. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Set Rim to Ground Set the rim elevation to be the same as the ground
Elevation? elevation.
Elevation (Rim) Enter the rim elevation for the outfall.
Elevation (Ground) Enter the ground elevation for the outfall.
Elevation (Invert) Enter the invert elevation for the outfall.
Headloss Alternatives
The headloss alternative editor allows you to define headloss properties for manhole,
catch basin, and transition elements. The following columns are available for all three
element types:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Flow-Headloss Curve Specify the previously defined Flow-Headloss

curve to be applied to the node, or create a new
one by choosing the <Select...> option to access
the Flow-Headloss Curves dialog.

Column Description
AASHTO Shaping Select the correction factor for shaping used in the
Method calculation of headloss using the AASHTO
method. This field is only used when the Headloss
Method is set to AASHTO.
Headloss Coefficient Enter the headloss coefficient for the structure.

(Standard) The headloss across the structure will be equal to
this number multiplied by the exit conduit velocity
head. This field is only used when the Headloss
Method is set to Standard.
Headloss Coefficient This field is only used when the Headloss Method
(Upstream) is set to Generic. The Generic method computes
the structure headloss by multiplying the velocity
head of the exit pipe by the user-defined Headloss
(Downstream) value and then subtracting the
velocity head of the governing upstream pipe
multiplied by thevalue entered in this field.
Headloss Coefficient This field is only used when the Headloss Method
(Downstream) is set to Generic. The Generic method computes
the structure headloss by multiplying the velocity
head of the exit pipe by the value entered in this
field and then subtracting the velocity head of the
governing upstream pipe multiplied by the user-
defined Headloss Coefficient (Upstream) value.
HEC-22 Benching Select which correction factor for benching will be

Method used. This field is only used when the Headloss
Method is set to HEC-22 Energy.
Absolute Headloss Enter the desired value for headloss at the

structure. This method ensures that the headloss
across the structure will be equal to the value
entered here regardless of the actual flows or
geometry of the structure. This field is only used
when the Headloss Method is set to Absolute.
Headloss Method Select the method to be used to calculate the

headlosses through the associated structure. The
option chosen here determines which of the
parameter fields will become available.

Alternatives
Boundary Condition Alternatives
The boundary condition alternative allows you to define boundary condition settings
for outfall elements. The following columns are available:
Column Description
ID Displays the unique identifier for each element in the

alternative.
Label Displays the label for each element in the alternative.
Elevation-Flow Curve Displays the label of the Elevation-Flow Curve that

has been assigned to an outfall that is using the
Elevation-Flow curve Boundary Condition Type.
Elevation (Tailwater) Lets you enter the user defined tailwater value. This
column is only available for elements that use the User
Defined Tailwater Boundary Condition Type.
Boundary Condition Lets you specify the type of boundary condition to be

Type used at the associated outfall element. The following
choices are available:
• Free Outfall—For a free outfall control, it is
assumed that the downstream discharge condi-
tions do not directly affect the hydraulic response
of the structure. This is equivalent to assuming that
the downstream TW elevation never rises above
the controlling structure outfall invert of the struc-
ture.
• User Defined Tailwater—This type of boundary
condition allows you to directly enter a tailwater
value.
• Elevation Flow Curve—For this type of boundary
condition, an elevation-flow table is specified to
simulate at the outfall a channel or outlet structure
where flow rate varies over time.
• Crown—This condition should be used when the
pipe discharges to an outlet where the water
surface elevation is equal to the elevation of the
top of the pipe.

Rainfall Runoff Alternative
The rainfall runoff alternative allows you to define runoff data for catchment, pond,
and wet well elements, as listed below:
Rainfall Runoff Alternative for Global Rainfall

The rainfall runoff alternative for global rainfall displays information about global
storm events in your project. The following fields are available:
Field Description
Alternative Displays the label for the alternative that is

currently being edited.
Global Storm Event Lists all of the rainfall curves that have been
defined for the current project in the Storm Events
dialog box, which is accessible by clicking the
Ellipsis (...) button.
Storm Event Source Displays the location of the library file for storm
events that are derived from an engineering library
entry.
Maximum Storm Displays the maximum intensity of the storm as

Intensity defined by the currently selected storm event.
Hydrologic Alternatives
The hydrology alternative allows you to define hydrologic settings for catchments and
catch basins. The following columns are available:
Hydrology Alternative for Catch Basins
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Flow Carryover Flow (CA or related time) from a gutter flowing to

the inlet.

Alternatives
Hydrology Alternative for Catchments
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
Tc Data Collection Clicking the Ellipsis (…) button in this field opens
the Tc Data Collection editor, allowing you to
define the Tc data for each catchment in the
alternative that uses the SCS Unit Hydrograph
Runoff Method.
Rational C Enter the rational coefficient C value.
Time of Concentration Lets you define the time of concentration for each
of the catchments in the alternative that use SCS
Unit Hydrograph Method. This column is only
available for catchments that use the SCS Unit
Hydrograph Runoff Method.
Use Scaled Area? When this box is checked, the catchment area is
dervied from the area of the element in the
drawing view in a schematic drawing. When the
box is unchecked, the area is user-defined.
Area Lets you define the area of the associated

catchments. This column is only available for
catchments using the Unit Hydrograph Runoff
Method.
Outflow Node Lets you specify the element to which flow from
the catchment outfalls.
Rational Catchment Opens the Rational Catchment Collection dialog,

Collection allowing you to define the C values for the
catchment.

Design Alternative
The Design Alternative Editor allows you to edit the pipe, node and inlet constraints
governing the design of the system. It also allows you to specify which gravity
elements you want designed, and the extent to which you want them designed.
For example, you may want to design a particular pipe. However, you may also want
to design the downstream invert elevation to meet a particular velocity, cover, and
slope constraint.
The tabbed dialog for each particular type of element follows the same general format.
The top of the dialog box contains several fields where the design constraints can be
entered. The constraints entered in these fields are applied to every element in the
table on the bottom of the dialog, except the elements that are specified to contain
local values. This system allows you to rapidly enter the values that govern most of
the elements in the table, and then manually override the constraints for those
elements that are exceptions to the majority. The following attributes are available in
this section:
Pipe diameters, invert elevations, node structures, and inlets can be all designed with
the same set of design constraints. You also have the option to adjust these values indi-
vidually for each pipe or structure.
The Default Design Constraints dialog is divided into the three following tabs:
• Gravity Pipe
• Node
• Inlet
Gravity Pipe Tab

The Gravity Pipe tab allows you to enter default constraints to be used for the design
of pipes when performing a calculation run in design mode. The dialog is divided into
the following sections:
• Default Constraints
• Extended Design
Default Constraints Section
In this section, there is a Velocity tab, a Cover tab, and a Slope tab. You can specify
the following default constraints to be used for the design of gravity pipes:
• Velocity Tab: The Velocity tab consists of the following controls:

Alternatives
– Velocity Constraints Type–When Simple is chosen, a single minimum and

maximum Velocity value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Velocity (Minimum) vs Velocity (Maximum) points in
tabular format.
– Velocity (Minimum)–Specify the minimum allowable velocity value. This
– Velocity (Maximum)–Specify the maximum allowable velocity value. This
• Cover Tab: The Cover tab consists of the following controls:

– Cover Constraints Type–When Simple is chosen, a single minimum and
maximum Cover value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Cover (Minimum) vs Cover (Maximum) points in tabular
format.
– Cover (Minimum)–Specify the minimum allowable cover value. This
– Cover (Maximum)–Specify the maximum allowable cover value. This
• Slope Tab: The Slope tab consists of the following controls:

– Slope Constraints Type–When Simple is chosen, a single minimum and
maximum Slope value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Slope (Minimum) vs Slope (Maximum) points in tabular
format.
– Slope (Minimum)–Specify the minimum allowable slope value. This control
– Slope (Maximum)–Specify the maximum allowable slope value. This control
Extended Design Section
This section lets you specify if the following design parameters are to be used. If they
are to be used, you can also specify the associated default value. The Extended Design
section is split into three tabs:
• Part Full Design Tab: The Part Full Design tab consists of the following controls:
– Is Part Full Design?–When checked, allows you to specify the Percent Full
target to be used by the design algorithm.

– Percent Full Constraint Type–Allows you to specify how the Percent Full
constraints are defined. When Simple is chosen, a single Percentage Full
value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify multiple Rise vs
Percent Full points in tabular format.
– Percentage Full–Specify the Percent Full value to be used when the Is Part
Full Design? box is checked. This control is only availble when the Percent
Full Constraint Type is set to Simple.
• Number of Barrels Tab: The Number of Barrels tab consists of the following
controls:
– Allow Multiple Barrels?–When checked, allows the design algorithm to use
more than one identical section in parallel, up to the specified Maximum
Number of Barrels.
– Maximum Number of Barrels–The maximum number of identical sections
allowed to be used in parallel when the Allow Multiple Barrels? box is
checked.
• Section Size Tab: The Section Size tab consists of the following controls:
– Limit Section Size?–When checked, limits the pipe section height to the
specified Maximum Rise value during the design process.
– Maximum Rise–The maximum rise a section height is allowed to be used in
the design when the Limit Section Size? box is checked.
Node Tab
This tab lets you specify the design constraints to be used by default for all gravity
structures when performing calculations in design mode. During an automatic design,
the program will adjust the elevations of the pipes adjacent to the structure according
to the structure’s matching constraints. The two choices for matching are Inverts and
Crowns. Additionally, the downstream pipe can be offset from the upstream pipe(s) by
a specified amount. This value is called the Matchline Offset. Optionally, the program
supports the design of drop structures. In some situations, drop structures can mini-
mize pipe cover depths while maintaining adequate hydraulic performance.
Inlet Tab
This tab lets you specify the design constraints to be used for all inlets when
performing a calculation run in design mode. During an automatic design, the
program will adjust the length of the inlet in order to meet the design constraints.
• For an inlet in sag, the Default In Sag Design Constraints consist of maintaining the
gutter spread and water depth under a given value.
• For an inlet on a grade, the Default on Grade Design Constraints consist of ensuring
that at least a given percentage of the gutter flow is intercepted.

Alternatives
Default In Sag Design Constraints Section
This section lets you specify the design constraints to be used for all inlets located in
sag when performing calculations in design mode. During an automatic design, the
program will adjust the length of the inlet in order to meet both design constraints:
• Maximum Spread in Sag–The maximum allowed spread of water at the inlet,

measured from the curb.
• Maximum Depth in Sag–The maximum depth of water allowed at the inlet.
Default On Grade Design Constraints
This section lets you specify the design constraints to be used for all inlets located on
a grade when performing a calculation run in design mode. During an automatic
design, the program will adjust the length of the inlet in order to meet a minimum inlet
efficiency, or percentage of gutter flow intercepted by the inlet, that you specify.
The lower section of the dialog allows you to specify local data. In order to specify
that an element contain local data, place a check mark in the column labeled Specify
Local Constraints on the same row as the element. When the check mark appears, the
yellow columns that display the global design constraints defined in the top of the
dialog will turn white on the row of the element that is being modified. This means
that you can now change the design constraint values for this particular element. If
you click the check mark again, the opposite happens. The columns containing the
constraints turn yellow and revert to the global values entered in the top of the dialog.
The following tabs are available:
Additional check boxes are available to specify exactly what you want the software to
design:
For Conduits
• Design Conduit?: Check this box if you want the program to design the conduit
based on the constraints you define.
• Design Start Invert?: Check this box if you want the program to design the
upstream invert based on the constraints you define.
• Design Stop Invert?: Specify if the program should design the downstream invert
based on the constraints given in the model.
• Specify Local Pipe Constraint?: If this box is checked, you can enter local
values to replace the default values. If it is not checked, the program will automat-
ically use the default constraints.

For Nodes
• Design Structure Elevation?: Check this box if you want to allow the structure’s
sump elevation to be adjusted during an automatic design. When this box is
checked, the Desired Sump Depth field becomes editable.
• Desired Sump Depth: This field becomes editable when the Design Structure
Elevation? box is checked. The sump depth is the distance below the lowest pipe
invert.
• Local Pipe Matching Constraints?: If this box is checked, you can enter local
For Inlets
• Design Inlet Opening?: Check this box if you want to allow the Inlet Opening to
be adjusted during the automatic design.
• Specify Local Inlet Constraints?: If this box is checked, you can enter local
Note: For inlets in sag, the inlet length selected in an automatic design
will be the smallest length that will generate a spread and a
depth at the curb less than the maximums specified. For inlets
on grade, the inlet length selected is the smallest length that will
generate an inlet efficiency larger than the minimum specified.
System Flows Alternatives
The system flows alternative allows you to specify additional and known flow, along
with other contributing sources of water that are not part of the model. System flows
indicate a final combined result. The following columns are available:
Column Description

the alternative.

alternative.
External Tc The time of concentration for an external source

not included in the model.

Calculation Options
Column Description
External CA The rational contributing area of an external

source not included in the model.
Flow (Known) Used to identify a known flow into the piped

system.
Flow (Additional) Flow added directly to the piping system at the

catch basin.
User Data Extensions Alternative
The User Data Alternative allows you to edit the data defined in the User Data Exten-
sion command for each of the network element types. The User Data Alternative
editor contains a tab for each type of network element.
Calculation Options
Each scenario is associated with a set of calculation options. Calculation options are
stored in a discrete Calculation Options Profile.
For more information on Calculation Options Profiles, see “Creating Calculation

Profiles” on page 7-276 and “Calculation Profile Attributes” on page 7-277.

Chapter
Presenting Your 9
Results
Click one of the following links to learn how to present your network and results
computed by Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition:
• “Using Background Layers”

• “Annotating Your Model”
• “Color Coding Your Model”
• “Using Profiles”
• “Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables”
• “Reporting”
• “Using Named Views”
• “Contours”
• “Chart Options Dialog Box”
• “Print Preview Window”
Using Background Layers

Use background layers to display pictures behind your network. For example, you
might want to display a picture of a neighborhood behind your network, so you can
relate elements in your network to structures and roads depicted in the picture. You
can add, delete, edit and rename background layers in the Background Layers
Manager.
You can add multiple pictures to your project for use as background layers, and turn
off the ones you don't want to show and turn on those you do. Additionally, you can
create groups of pictures in folders, so you can hide or show an entire folder or group
of pictures at once.
To add or delete background layers, open the Background Layers manager: click View
> Background Layers (Ctrl+2).

You can use shapefiles, AutoCAD DXF files, and raster (also called bitmap) pictures
as background images for your model. These raster image formats are supported:
bmp, jpg, jpeg, jpe, jfif, gif, tif, tiff, png, and sid.
Background Layer Manager
Note: When multiple background layers are overlaid, priority is given

to the one that appears highest in the list. In other words, a layer
in the first list position is drawn “on top of” all other layers,
since they are all below it on the list.
The Background Layer manager lets you add, edit, and remove and manage the back-
ground layers that are associated with the project. The dialog box contains a list pane
that displays each of the layers currently contained within the project, along with a
number of button controls.
When a background layer is added, it appears in the Background Layers list pane,
along with an associated check box that is used to control that layer’s visibility.
Selecting the check box next to a layer causes that layer to become visible in the main
drawing pane; clearing it causes it to become invisible. If the layers in the list pane are
contained within one or more folders, clearing the check box next to a folder causes all
of the layers within that folder to become invisible.

commands:
• File—Opens a browse dialog box that
allows you to choose the file to use as a
background layer.
• Folder—Creates a folder in the Back-
ground Layers list pane.
Delete Removes the currently highlighted

background layer.

layer.
Edit Opens the background layer properties

dialog box that corresponds with the
currently highlighted background layer.

Presenting Your Results
Shift Up Moves the currently highlighted object up in

the list pane.
Shift Down Moves the currently highlighted object

down in the list pane.


Help Displays online help for the Background

Layer Manager.
Working with Background Layer Folders
You can create folders in the Background Layers Manager to organize your back-
ground layers and create a group of background layers that can be turned off as one
entity. You can also create folders within folders. When you start a new project,
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition displays an empty folder in the Background
Layers Manager called Background Layers. New background layer files and folders
are added to the Background Layers folder by default.
To add a background layer folder:
1. Click View > Background Layers to open the Background Layers Manager.
2. In the Background Layers Manager, click the New button, then click New Folder
from the shortcut menu.
Or select the default Background Layers folder, then right-click and select New >
Folder from the shortcut menu.
– If you are creating a new folder within an existing folder, select the folder,
then click New > New Folder. Or right-click, then select New > Folder from
the shortcut menu.
3. Right-click the new folder and select Rename from the shortcut menu.
4. Type the name of the folder, then press Enter.

To delete a background layer folder:
2. In the Background Layers Managers, select the folder you want to delete, then
click the Delete button.
– You can also right-click a folder to delete, then select Delete from the shortcut
menu.
To rename a background layer folder:
2. In the Background Layers Managers, select the folder you want to rename, then
click the Rename button.
– You can also right-click a folder to rename, then select Rename from the
shortcut menu.
3. Type the new name of the folder, then press Enter.
– You can also rename a background layer folder by selecting the folder, then
modifying its label in the Properties Editor.
Adding Background Layers
You add background layers to your project using the Background Layers Manager.
When you start a new project, Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition displays an empty
folder in the Background Layers Manager called Background Layers. New back-
ground layer files and folders are added to the Background Layers folder by default.
To add a background layer:
2. In the Background Layers Managers, click the New button, then click New File
Or right-click on the default Background Layers folder and select New > File
– To add a new background layer file to an existing folder in the Background
Layer Manager, select the folder, then click New > New File. Or right-click,
then select New > File from the shortcut menu.
3. Navigate to the file you want to add as a background layer and select it.
– If you select a .dxf file, the DXF Properties dialog box opens. For more infor-
mation, see “DXF Properties Dialog Box”.

– If you select a .shp the ShapeFile Properties dialog box opens. For more infor-
mation, see “Shapefile Properties Dialog Box”.
– If you select a .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jfif, .gif, .tif, .tiff, .png, or .sid file, the
Image Properties dialog box opens. For more information, see “Image Proper-
ties Dialog Box”.
4. After you add the background layer, you might have to use the Pan button to move
the layer within the drawing area; Zoom Extents does not center a background
image.
Deleting Background Layers
To delete a background layer:
Select the background layer you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Or, right-click the background layer, then select Delete from the shortcut menu.
Editing Background Layers
You can edit a background layer in two ways: you can edit its properties or its position
in a list of background layers displayed in the Background Layers Manager.
To edit the properties of a background layer:
1. Select the background layer you want to edit.

2. Click the Edit button. A Properties dialog box opens.
– You can also right-click the background layer, then select Edit from the
shortcut menu.
To change the position of a background layer in the list of background layers:
The order of a background layer determines its Z level and what displays if you use
more than one background layer. Background layers at the top of the list display on
top of the other background layers in the drawing pane; so, background layers that are
lower than the top one in the list might be hidden or partially hidden by layers above
them in the list.
Select the background layer whose position you want to change in the list of Back-
ground Layers Manager, then click the Shift Up or Shift Down buttons to move the
selected background layer up or down in the list.

Renaming Background Layers
To rename a background layer:
Select the background layer you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Or, right-click the background layer that you want to rename, then select Rename
Turning Background Layers On and Off
You can choose to turn your background layers off by clearing the check box next to
the background layer file or folder than contains it in the Background Layers Manager.
Image Properties Dialog Box
This dialog box opens when you are adding or editing a background-layer image other
than a .dxf or .shp. Use the following controls to define the properties of the back-
ground layer:
Image Filter Lets you more clearly display background images

that you resize. Set this to Point, Bilinear, or
Trilinear. These are methods of displaying your
image on-screen.
• Point works well when you are not changing
the size of the image in the display, for
example, when you are displaying a 500 x 500
pixel image at 100% using 500 x 500 pixels
on-screen.
• Bilinear and Trilinear work well when you
display your image on-screen using more or
fewer pixels than your image contains, such
as displaying a 500 x 500 pixel image at by
stretching it to 800 x 800 pixels on-screen.
Trilinear gives you smoother transitions when
you zoom in and out of the image.

Transparency Lets you set the transparency level of the

background layer. Bentley StormCAD V8 XM
Edition lets you add transparency to any image
type you use as a background. Bentley StormCAD
V8 XM Edition ignores any transparency that
exists in the image before you use it as a
background.
Resolution Lets you select the clarity for MrSID® images that
you use as background images. Because using a
higher level of clarity or resolution increases the
time it takes to display a MrSID image, you can
select the resolution that best meets your needs.
For formats other than MrSID, this drop-down list
contains only one selection.
Use Compression This checkbox lets you compress the image in

memory so that it takes up less RAM while it is
being loaded. When you check this option, you
may see slight color distortion in the image.
Note: The way the image is

compressed depends on your
computer’s video card. Not all
video cards support this
feature. If you check this option
but your computer’s video card
does not support image
compression, the request for
compression will simply be
ignored and the image will be
loaded uncompressed.

Image Position Table Lets you position the background layer with
respect to your drawing.
• X/Y Image displays the size of the image you
are using for a background and sets its posi-
tion with respect to the origin of your drawing.
You cannot change this data.
• X/Y Drawing displays where the corners of the
image your are using will be positioned rela-
tive to your drawing. By default, no scaling is
used. However, you can scale the image you
are using by setting different locations for the
corners of the image you are importing. The
locations you set are relative to the origin of
your Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition
drawing.
You can also use BMP and JPG image files. For more information, see “How Do I
Enter the Scale of a Background Image If it is a File Type without an Inherent Scale?”
on page 17-761.
Shapefile Properties Dialog Box
The Shapefile Properties dialog box lets you define a shapefile background layer. Use
the following controls to define the properties of the background layer:
Filename Lists the path and filename of the shapefile to use

as a background layer.
Browse Opens a browse dialog box, letting you select the

file to be used as a background layer.
Label Identifies the background layer.
Unit Lets you select the unit associated with the spatial
data within the shapefile. For example, if the X
and Y coordinates of the shapefile represent feet,
choose ft. from the drop-down list.
Transparency Lets you specify the transparency level of the

background layer, where 0 has the least
transparency and 100 has the most.

Line Color Sets the color of the layer elements. Click the
Ellipsis (...) button to open a Color palette
containing more color choices.
Line Thickness Sets the thickness of the outline of the layer

elements. Use values beginning at 0, where 0 is
the minimum thickness and larger values are
thicker.
Fill Color Sets the fill color of the layer elements. Click the
Fill Figure Lets you show or hide the selected fill color for the
layer elements. Select this check box to display
the selected background color; clear it to turn off
the background color and only the outline
displays.
To access the Shapefile Properties dialog box, click New File in the Background
Layers manager, then select an .shp file.
DXF Properties Dialog Box
The DXF Properties dialog box lets you define a .dxf file as the background layer. Use
the following controls to define the properties of the background layer:
Filename Lists the path and filename of the .dxf file to use
as a background layer.
Browse Opens a browse dialog box, letting you select the

file to be used as a background layer.
Label Identifies the background layer.
Unit Lets you select the unit associated with the spatial
data within the shapefile. For example, if the X
and Y coordinates of the shapefile represent feet,
choose ft. from the drop-down list.
Transparency Lets you specify the transparency level of the

background layer, where 0 has the least
transparency and 100 has the most.

Annotating Your Model
Line Color Sets the color of the layer elements. Click the
Default Color Lets you use the line color included in the .dxf file
or lets you use a custom color that you select in the
Line Color field. Select this check box to use the
default color included in the .dxf file. cleared this
check box if you want to choose a custom color
from the Line Color field.
Symbol Lets you choose the symbol that is displayed for

each point element in the .dxf.
Size Sets the size of the symbol for each point element
in the .dxf.
To access the .dxf properties, click New File In the Background Layers manager, then
select a .dxf file.

You can annotate any of the element types in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition.
To work with annotations, open the Element Symbology manager: click View >
Element Symbology (Ctrl+1).
Element Symbology Manager
The Element Symbology manager allows you to control the way that elements and
their associated labels are displayed. The dialog box contains a pane that lists each
element type along with the following buttons:


commands:
• New Annotation—Opens the Annota-
tion Properties dialog box, allowing you
to define annotation settings for the
• New Color Coding—Opens the Color
Coding Properties dialog box, allowing
you to define annotation settings for the
• Add Folder—Creates a folder under the
currently highlighted element type,
allowing you to manage the various
color coding and annotation settings
that are associated with an element.
You can turn off all of the symbology
settings contained within a folder by
clearing the check box next to the folder.
When a folder is deleted, all of the
symbology settings contained within it
are also deleted.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted Color

Coding or Annotation Definition or folder.

object.
Annotate Opens a shortcut menu containing the

following options:
• Refresh Annotation—If you change an
annotation’s prefix or suffix in the Prop-
erty Editor, or directly in the database,
selecting this command refreshes the
annotation.
• Update Annotation Offset—If you
have adjusted the Initial X or Y offsets,
selecting this command resets all anno-
tation Initial X or Y offsets to their default
location (or new default location).
• Update Annotation Height—If you’ve
adjusted the height multiplier, selecting
this command resets all annotation
height multiplier to their default values.

Shift Up Moves the currently highlighted object up in

the list pane.
Shift Down Moves the currently highlighted object

down in the list pane.
Drawing Style Opens a menu containing the following

commands:
• CAD Style—Displays currently high-
lighted element in CAD Style. Objects
displayed in CAD style will appear
smaller when zoomed out and larger
when zoomed in.
• GIS Style—Displays currently high-
lighted element in GIS style. Objects
displayed in GIS style will appear to
remain the same size regardless of
zoom level.
Expand All Expands each branch in the tree view pane.
Collapse All Collapses each branch in the tree view pane.
Help Displays online help for the Element

Symbology Manager.
Using Folders in the Element Symbology Manager
Use folders in the Element Symbology Manager to create a collection of color coding
and/or annotation that can be turned off as one entity.
Adding Folders
Use element symbology folders to control whether related annotations and/or color
coding displays. To create a folder in the Element Symbology Manager:
1. Click View > Element Symbology.

2. In the Element Symbology Manager, right-click an element and select New >
Folder.

Or, select the element to which you want to add the folder, click the New button,
then select New Folder.
3. Name the folder.
4. You can drag and drop existing annotations and color coding into the folder you
create, and you can create annotations and color coding within the folder by right-
clicking the folder and selecting New > Annotation or New > Color Coding.
5. Use the folder to collectively turn on and off the annotations and color coding
within the folder.
Note: You can refresh the display of all color-codings/annotations

within a folder by right-clicking the folder and selecting the
Refresh Group command.
In the MicroStation version, the Refresh Group command will

override any local modifications made to color or weight
settings applied to individual elements using MicroStation
commands. These elements will revert to the StormCAD
symbology settings after a Refresh Group command is initiated.
Deleting Folders
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology Manager, right-click
the theme folder you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the folder you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Renaming Folders
the theme folder you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the folder you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Adding Annotations
To add an annotation:

Annotation.
Or, select the element to which you want to add the annotation, click the New
button, and select New Annotation.
3. The Annotation Properties dialog box opens. Select the annotation you want in the
Field drop-down list.

If you don’t find the Field you want to use immediately, look carefully through the
list of available field selections from top to bottom to make sure you didn’t miss
the field you want.
4. If needed, set a Prefix or Suffix. Anything you type as a prefix is added directly to
the beginning of the label, and anything you type as a suffix is added to the end
(so, you may want to include spaces as part of your prefix and suffix).
Note: If you add an annotation that uses units, you can type “%u” in
the prefix or suffix field to display the units in the drawing pane.
5. Select the initial X- and Y- offset for the annotation. Offset is measured from the
center of the node or polygon or midpoint of the polyline.
6. If needed, set an initial height multiplier. Use a number greater than 1 to make the
annotation larger, and a number between 0 and 1 to make the annotation smaller.
If you use a negative number, the annotation is flipped (rotated 180 degrees).
7. If you have created selection sets, you can apply your annotation only to a partic-
ular selection set by selecting that set from the Selection Set drop-down list. If you
have not created any selection sets, then the annotation is applied to all elements
of the type you are using.
8. After you finish defining your annotation, click OK to close the Annotation Prop-
erties dialog box and create your annotation, or Cancel to close the dialog box
without creating an annotation.
Deleting Annotations
an annotation you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the annotation you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Editing Annotations
the annotation you want to edit, then select Edit.
Or, select the annotation you want to edit, then click the Edit button.

Note: Changes to annotation settings may not be visible in the

drawing pane immediately. To refresh the drawing view to reflect
any changes that have been made, you can right-click the
annotation that was edited in the Element Symbology Manager
and select the Re-Apply Annotation command from the
submenu that appears.
Renaming Annotations
the annotation you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the annotation you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Annotation Properties Dialog Box
The Annotation Properties dialog box allows you to define annotation settings for
each element type.
This dialog box allows you to define annotation settings for each element type. The
dialog box consists of a list pane on the left and a control section on the right. The
control section in the right side of the dialog allow you to edit the settings for the
annotation that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
The dialog box consists of the following buttons:
New Creates a new annotation in the list pane.
Delete Deletes the annotation that is currently

Rename Lets you rename the annotation that is

currently highlighted in the list pane.
and the following controls:
List Pane
Label Displays the name of the current annotation

definition.

Initial X Offset Displays the initial X-axis offset of the

annotation in feet.
Initial Y Offset Displays the initial Y-axis offset of the

annotation in feet.
Selected Annotation
Field Name Lets you specify the attribute that is displayed

by the annotation definition. You can also create
a free form annotation by selecting Free Form
Annotation from the list and clicking the ellipsis
button next to the Free Form field that becomes
available.
Free Form Opens the Free Form Annotation dialog,

allowing you to create a free form annotation.
Prefix Lets you specify a prefix that is displayed before

the attribute value annotation for each element
to which the definition applies.
Suffix Lets you specify a suffix that is displayed after

the attribute value annotation for each element
to which the definition applies.
Note: If you add an annotation that

uses units, you can type
“%u” in the prefix or suffix
field to display the units in
the drawing pane.
Selection Set Lets you specify a selection set to which the

annotation settings will apply. If the annotation
is to be applied to all elements, select the <All
Elements> option in this field. <All Elements>
is the default setting.
Initial Offset If checked, the values in the X and Y fields will

be applied to all annotations (that are associated
with the current annotation definition) in the
drawing when the Apply button is clicked.
X Sets the initial horizontal offset for an

annotation. Set this at the time you create the
annotation.

Y Sets the initial vertical offset for an annotation.

Set this at the time you create the annotation.
Initial Multiplier If checked, the value in the Height Multiplier

field will be applied to all annotations (that are
associated with the current annotation
definition) in the drawing when the Apply
button is clicked.
Initial Height Multiplier Sets the initial size of the annotation text. Set
this at the time you create the annotation.
Free Form Annotation Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to create free form annotations. To create the free form type the
desired annotation in the text field. You can also add predefined variables and proper-
ties to your free form annotation by clicking the Append button and selecting a vari-
able from the categorized list.
Drawing Style
Elements can be displayed in one of two styles in the Stand-Alone version; GIS style
or CAD style.
Under GIS style, the size of element symbols in the drawing pane will remain the
same regardless of zoom level. Under CAD style, element symbols will appear larger
or smaller depending on zoom level.
There is a default Drawing Style that is set on the Global tab of the Options dialog.
The drawing style chosen there will be used by all elements by default. Changing the
default drawing style will only affect new projects, not existing ones.
You can change the drawing style used by all of the elements in the project, or you can
set each element individually to use either drawing style.

Color Coding Your Model
To change a single element's drawing style
Double-click the element in the Element Symbology manager dialog to open the Prop-
erties manager.
In the Properties manager, change the value in the Display Style field to the desired
setting.
To change the drawing style of all elements
Click the Drawing Style button in the Element Symbology manager and select the
desired drawing style from the submenu that appears.

Use color coding to help you quickly see what's going on in your Bentley StormCAD
V8 XM Edition model. Use color coding to change the color and/or size of elements
based on the value of data that you select, such as flow or element size.
To work with color coding, open the Element Symbology manager: click View >
Element Symbology (Ctrl+1).
Adding Color-Coding
To add color coding, including element sizing:

Color Coding.
Or, select the element to which you want to add the color coding, click the New
button, and select New Color Coding.
3. The Color Coding Properties dialog box opens. Select the properties for which
you want to color code from the Field and Selection Set drop-down lists.
4. In the Options drop-down list, select whether you want to apply color and/or size
to the elements you are coding.
a. Click Calculate Range. This automatically sets the maximum and minimum
values for your coding. If you want, you can set these values manually.
b. Click Initialize. This automatically creates values and colors in the Color
Map. If you want, you can set these values manually.

5. After you finish defining your color coding, click OK to close the Color Coding
Properties dialog box and create your color coding, or Cancel to close the dialog
box without creating a color coding.
6. Click Compute to compute your network.
Deleting Color-Coding
the color coding you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the color coding you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Editing Color-Coding
the color coding you want to edit, then select Edit.
Or, select the color coding you want to edit, then click the Edit button.
Note: Changes to color coding settings may not be visible in the

drawing pane immediately. To refresh the drawing view to reflect
any changes that have been made, you can right-click the
annotation that was edited in the Element Symbology Manager
and select the Refresh Color Coding command from the
submenu that appears.
Renaming Color-Coding
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology manager, right-click
the color coding you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the color coding you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Color-Coding Properties Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to define color coding for each element type. The dialog
box consists of the following controls:
Properties
Field Name Lets you select the attribute by which the color
coding is applied.

Selection Set Lets you apply a color coding to a previously

defined selection set.
Calculate Range Automatically finds the minimum and maximum

values for the selected attribute and enters them in
the appropriate Min. and Max fields.
Min Lets you define the minimum value of the attribute

to be color coded.
Max Lets you define the maximum value of the

attribute to be color coded.
Steps Lets you specify how many rows are created in the
color maps table when you click Initialize. When
you click Initialize, a number of values equal to the
number of Steps are created in the color maps
table. The low and high values are set by the Min
and Max values you set.
Color Map
Options Lets you select whether you want to use color

coding, sizing, or both to code and display your
elements.

Color Maps Table Lets you map colors to value ranges for the
attribute being color coded. The following buttons
are found along the top of the table:
• New—Creates a new row in the Color
Maps table.
• Delete—Deletes the currently high-
lighted row from the Color Maps table.
• Initialize—Finds the range of values for
the specified attribute, divides it into
equal ranges based on the number of
Steps you have set, and assigns a color to
each range.
• Ramp—Generates a gradient range
between two colors that you specify.
Pick the color for the first and last
values in the list, then Bentley StormCAD V8
XM Edition automatically sets intermediate
colors for the other values. For example,
picking red as the first color and blue as the
last color produces varying shades of purple
for the other values.
Above Range Color Displays the color that is applied to elements

whose value for the specified attribute fall outside
the range defined in the color maps table. This
selection is available if you choose Color or Color
and Size from the Options list.
Above Range Size Displays the size that is applied to elements whose
value for the specified attribute fall outside the
range defined in the color maps table. This
selection is available if you choose Size or Color
and Size from the Options list.
Using Profiles
A profile is a graph that plots a particular attribute across a distance, such as ground
elevation along a section of piping. As well as these side or sectional views of the
ground elevation, profiles can be used to show other characteristics, such as hydraulic
grade and energy grade.
You define profiles by selecting a series of adjacent elements. Only conduits, chan-
nels, and gutters can be part of a profile. The profile you create displays the structures
you selected, plus the relative ground and water elevations.

Using Profiles
To create or use a profile, you must first open the Profiles manager. The Profiles
manager is a dockable window that lets you add, delete, rename, edit, and view
profiles. To work with profiles, open the Profile manager: click View > Profiles
(Ctrl+9).
Profiles Manager
The Profiles Manager allows you to create, view, and edit profile views of elements in
the network. The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the profiles
currently contained within the project, along with a toolbar.The toolbar contains the
following buttons:
New Opens the Profile Setup dialog box,

allowing you to create a new profile.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted profile.

profile.
Edit Opens the Profile Setup dialog box,

allowing you to modify the settings of the
currently highlighted profile.
View Opens the Profile Element Viewer, allowing

you to view the currently highlighted
profile.
Help Displays online help for the Profile

Manager.
Viewing Profiles
To view a profile:
1. Click Compute to calculate flows.

2. Click View > Profiles to open the Profile manager.
3. In the Profile manager, select the profile you want to view, then click the View
button (or double-click the profile you want to view).

Note: You can edit your list of profile elements at any time and
compute your network with the Profile Viewer dialog box open,
but you must click Refresh to update the display of that dialog
box if you do make changes.
4. The Profile Viewer dialog box opens. For more information, see “Profile Viewer
Dialog Box” on page 9-364.
5. If necessary, you can click Chart Settings to change the look of the profile, and
use Print Preview and Print to print the profile.
Creating a New Profile
To create a new profile:
1. Click View > Profiles or click the Profiles Manager button on the View toolbar to
open the Profiles manager.
2. Right-click in the Profiles manager and select New, or click the New button.
3. The Profile Setup dialog box opens. For more information, see “Profile Setup
Dialog Box” on page 9-363.
4. Select the Elements you want to use:
a. Click Select from Drawing. The Select dialog box appears:
You must select one path of contiguous elements; you cannot select diverging
paths. You can select upstream and downstream elements, but if you begin at
an upstream element, select downstream, and then make upstream selections
to finish, your profile will be V-shaped, with higher elevations at the begin-
ning and end of the profile than in the middle. Instead, what you might want
to do is select elements beginning at a high elevation and selecting elements at
increasingly lower elevations towards an outfall.
b. To add elements to the profile, click elements in the drawing pane. (By
default, the Add button is active in the Select dialog box.) You can only add
elements to either end of your selection—all selected elements must be
contiguous.

Using Profiles
When there is a plus sign next to the cursor, you can select elements to add to
the profile; elements that you successfully select are highlighted red.
c. To remove elements from the profile, click the Remove button in the Select
dialog box. Thereafter, elements you select in the drawing pane are removed
from the profile. You can only remove elements from either end of your selec-
tion—all selected elements must be contiguous.
When there is a minus sign next to the cursor, you can remove elements from
the profile; unselected elements are not highlighted.
d. When you are finished adding elements to your profile, click the Done button
in the Select dialog box.
5. The Profile Setup dialog box opens and displays a list of the elements you
selected. Use the Select from Drawing or Remove buttons to add or remove
elements from the list.
Note: You can edit your list of profile elements at any time and
compute your network with the Profile Viewer dialog box open,
but you must click Refresh to update the display of that dialog
box if you do make changes.
6. Click Close and Open Profile to close the Profile Setup dialog box and open the
Profile Viewer dialog box.
Editing Profiles
You can edit a profile to change the elements that it uses or the order in which those
elements are used. To edit a profile:
1. Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager.

2. In the Profiles manager, right-click the profile you want to edit, then select Edit.
Or, select the profile you want to edit, then click the Edit button.
3. The Profile Setup dialog box opens. Modify the profile as needed and click OK to
save your changes or Cancel to exit without saving your changes.
Deleting Profiles
Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager. In the Profiles manager, right-
click the profile you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the profile you want to delete, then click the Delete button.

Renaming Profiles
Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager. In the Profiles manager, right-
click the profile you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the profile you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Profile Setup Dialog Box
Setting up a profile is a matter of selecting the adjacent elements on which the profile
is based. The Profile Setup dialog box includes the following options:
Label Displays the list of elements that define the

profile.
Select From Drawing Lets you select and clear elements for the profile.
You can select channels, conduits, and ponds for
inclusion in your profile.
Note: In AutoCAD mode, you cannot

use the shortcut menu, you
must re-open the Profile Setup
dialog box.
Remove All Removes all elements from the profile.
Remove All Previous Removes all elements that appear before the
selected element in the list. If the selected element
is a pipe, the associated node is not removed.
Remove All Following Removes all elements that appear after the
selected element in the list. If the selected element
is a pipe, the associated node is not removed.
Open Profile Closes the Profile Setup dialog box and opens the
Profile Viewer dialog box.
After everything is set up to your satisfaction, click OK to generate the plot of the
profile.

Using Profiles
Profile Viewer Dialog Box
This dialog box displays the profile view of the profile run that is plotted from the
Profile Manager. It consists of the profile display pane and the following controls:
Chart Settings Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Display Annotation Labels: When this option is
checked, annotation labels will be displayed in
the profile view.
• Profile Annotation Table: When this option is
checked, a table containing data for the
elements in the profile is displayed below the
profile plot.
• HGL: When this option is checked, the calcu-
lated HGL will be displayed in the profile view.
• EGL: When this option is checked, the calcu-
lated EGL will be displayed in the profile view.
• Annotation Label Settings: Opens the Annota-
tion Label Settings dialog.
• Axis Options: Opens the Axis Options dialog,
allowing you to modify the scaling of the
profile.
• Chart Settings: Opens the Chart Options
dialog box, letting you view and modify the
display settings for the current profile plot. For
more information, see “Chart Options Dialog
Box” on page 9-395.
Warning! Never delete or rename any

of the series entries on the
Series Tab of the Chart
Options dialog box. These
series were specifically
designed to enable the
display of the Profile Plots.
• Export to DXF: Allows you to export the

current profile view as a dxf drawing file.
Print Prints the current view of the profile to your

default printer. If you want to use a printer other
than your default, use Print Preview to change the
printer and print the profile.

Print Preview Opens a print preview window containing the

current view of the profile. You can use the Print
Preview dialog box to select a printer and preview
the output before you print it.
Note: Do not change the print

preview to grayscale, as doing
so might hide some elements
of the display.
Copy Copies the contents of the Profile Viewer dialog

box as an image to the Windows clipboard, from
where you can paste it into another application,
such as Microsoft® Word® or Adobe®
Photoshop®.
Zoom Extents Magnifies the profile so that the entire graph is

displayed.
Zoom Lets you magnify or reduce the display of a

section of the graph. To zoom or magnify an area,
select the Zoom Window tool, click to the left of
the area you want to magnify, then drag the mouse
to the right, across the area you want to magnify,
so that the area you want to magnify is contained
within the marquee that the Zoom Window tool
draws. After you have selected the area you want
to magnify, release the mouse button to stop
dragging.
To zoom out, or reduce the magnification, drag the
mouse from right to left across the magnified
image.
Axis Options Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the scale of the profile plot. Specify a unit, enter a
value for the Horizontal and vertical axes, and specify whether the direction is
measured from Left to Right or Right to Left.

Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables
Create Profile Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to enter a name for a single-link profile created using the
right-click command Create Profile in the drawing pane.

FlexTables lets you view input data and results for all elements of a specific type in a
tabular format. You can use the standard set of FlexTables or create customized
FlexTables to compare data and create reports.
FlexTables lets you view all elements in the project, all elements of a specific type, or
any subset of elements. Additionally, to ease data input and present output data for
specific elements, FlexTables can be:
• Filtered (see “Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data” on page 9-375)

• Globally edited (see “Globally Editing Data” on page 9-374)
• Sorted (see “Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data” on page 9-375)
If you need to edit a set of properties for all elements of a certain type in your network,
you might consider creating a FlexTable and making your changes there, rather than
editing each element one at a time, in sequence.
FlexTables can also be used to create results reports that you can print, save as a file,
or copy to the Windows clipboard for copying into word processing or spreadsheet
software.
To work with FlexTables, select the FlexTables manager or use View > FlexTables
(Ctrl+7) to open the FlexTables manager if it is closed.
FlexTables Manager
The FlexTables Manager allows you to create, manage, and delete custom tabular
reports. The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the custom FlexTables
currently contained within the project, along with a toolbar.


commands:
• FlexTable—Creates a new tabular
report and opens the FlexTable Setup
dialog box, allowing you to define the
element type that the FlexTable
displays, and the columns that are
contained in the table.
• Folder—Creates a folder in the list
pane, allowing you to group custom
FlexTables.
Delete Deletes the currently highlighted FlexTable.

FlexTable.
Edit Opens the FlexTable Setup dialog box,

allowing you to make changes to the format
of the currently selected table
Open Lets you open the currently highlighted

FlexTable.
Help Displays online help for the FlexTable

Manager.
Working with FlexTable Folders
You can add, delete, and rename folders in the FlexTable Manager to organize your
FlexTables into groups of that can be turned off as one entity. You can also create
folders within folders. When you start a new project, Bentley StormCAD V8 XM
Edition displays two items in the FlexTable Manager: Tables - Project (for project-
level FlexTables) and Tables - Shared (for FlexTables shared by more than one
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition project). You can add new FlexTables and
FlexTable folders to either item or to existing folders.

To add a FlexTable folder:
1. Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables Manager.

2. In the FlexTable Manager, select either Tables - Project or Tables - Shared, then
click the New button.
– If you are creating a new folder within an existing folder, select the folder,
then click the New button.
3. Click New Folder from the shortcut menu.
4. Right-click the new folder and select Rename from the shortcut menu.
5. Type the name of the folder, then press Enter.
To delete a FlexTable folder:

2. In the FlexTables Manager, select the folder you want to delete, then click the
Delete button.
– You can also right-click a folder to delete, then select Delete from the shortcut
menu.
To rename a FlexTable folder:

2. In the FlexTables Manager, select the folder you want to rename, then click the
Rename button.
– You can also right-click a folder to rename, then select Rename from the
shortcut menu.
3. Type the new name of the folder, then press Enter.
– You can also rename a FlexTable folder by selecting the folder, then modi-
fying its label in the Properties Editor.
FlexTable Dialog Box
FlexTables are displayed in the FlexTable dialog box. The dialog box contains a
toolbar, the rows and columns of data in the FlexTable, and a status bar.

Export to File Lets you export the contents of the

FlexTable to a shapefile.
Copy Lets you copy the contents of the selected

table cell, rows, and/or columns for the
purpose of pasting into a different row or
column or into a text editing program such
as Notepad.
Paste Lets you paste the contents of the Windows

clipboard into the selected table cell, row, or
column. Use this with the Copy button.
Report Lets you create and view a report of your

FlexTable.

Edit Opens the FlexTable Setup dialog box,

allowing you to make changes to the format
of the currently selected table
Zoom To Lets you zoom into and center the drawing

pane on the currently selected element in the
FlexTable.
Options Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Create Selection Set—Lets you create
a new static selection set ( a selection
set based on selection) containing the
currently selected elements in the
FlexTable.
• Add to Selection Set—Lets you add
the currently selected elements in the
FlexTable to an existing selection set.
• Remove From Selection Set—Lets you
remove the currently selected elements
from an existing selection set.
• Relabel—Opens the Element Rela-
beling dialog, allowing you to relabel
elements in the FlexTable.
Select In Drawing Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
• Select In Drawing—Selects the currently
highlighted element(s) in the drawing
pane.
• Add to Selection—Adds the currently
highlighted element(s) to the group that
is currently highlighted in the drawing
pane.
• Remove From Current Selection—
Removes the currently highlighted
element(s) from the group that is
currently highlighted in the drawing
pane.
The status bar at the bottom of the FlexTable dialog box contains the following items:
• x of x elements displayed—Number of elements displayed in the FlexTable of

the total possible number of that type of element.

• FILTERED—If you have applied a filter to the FlexTable, this appears in the
status bar. Hold the mouse cursor over this panel to display a tool tip, which lists a
summary of active filters.
• SORTED—If you have sorted the order of any items in the FlexTable, this
appears in the status bar. Hold the mouse cursor over this panel to display a tool
tip, which lists a summary of active sorting.
Opening FlexTables
You open FlexTables from within the FlexTable Manager.
To open FlexTables:
1. Click View > FlexTables or click the FlexTables button on the View toolbar to
– Right-click the FlexTable you want to open, then select Open.
– Select the FlexTable you want to open, then click the Open button.
– Double-click the FlexTable you want to open.
Creating a New FlexTable
You can create project-level or shared FlexTables.
• Project-level FlexTables are available only for the project in which you create
them.
• Shared tables are available in all Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition projects.
To create a new FlexTable:
Project-level and shared FlexTables are created the same way:
2. In the FlexTables Manager, right-click Tables - Project or Tables - Shared, then
select New > FlexTable.
Or, select Tables - Project or Tables - Shared, click the New button, then select
FlexTable.
3. The Table Setup dialog box opens.

4. Select the Table Type you want to create. This lets you filter your table by element
type.
5. Select the items you want in the FlexTable by moving them to the Selected
Columns pane.
6. Click OK.
7. The table displays in the FlexTables Manager; you can type to rename the table or
accept the default name.
Deleting FlexTables
Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables Manager. In the FlexTables manager,
right-click the FlexTable you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the FlexTable you want to delete, then click the Delete button. You cannot
delete predefined FlexTables.
Note: You cannot delete predefined FlexTables.
Naming and Renaming FlexTables
You name and rename FlexTables in the FlexTable Manager.
To rename FlexTables:
– Right-click the FlexTable you want to rename, then select Rename.
– Select the FlexTable you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
– Click the FlexTable you want to rename, to select it, then click the name of
the FlexTable.
Note: You cannot rename predefined FlexTables.

Editing FlexTables
You can edit a FlexTable to change the columns of data it contains or the values in
some of those columns.
Editable columns: Columns that contain data you can edit are displayed
with a white background. You can change these
columns directly in the FlexTable and your changes
are applied to your model when you close the dialog.
The content in the FlexTable columns can be
changed in other areas of Bentley StormCAD V8
XM Edition, such as in a Property Editor or
managers; but, it might be more efficient to make
changes to numerous elements in a FlexTable rather
than the Property Editor or a manager.
If you make a change that affects a FlexTable outside
the FlexTable, the FlexTable is updated automatically
to reflect the change.
Non-editable columns: Columns that contain data you cannot edit are
displayed with a yellow background, and correspond
to model results calculated by the program and
composite values.
The content in these columns can be changed in other
areas of Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition, such as
in a Property Editor and by running a computation.
If you make a change that affects a FlexTable outside
the FlexTable, the FlexTable is updated automatically
to reflect the change.
To edit a FlexTable:
1. Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables Manager, then you can:
– Right-click the FlexTable, then select Edit.
– Double-click the FlexTable to open it, then click Edit.
– Click the FlexTable, to select it, then click the Edit button.
2. The Table dialog box opens. .

3. Use the Table dialog box to include and exclude columns and change the order in
which the columns appear in the table.
4. Close the dialog after you finish making changes to save your changes.

Editing Column-Heading Text
To change the text of a column heading:

2. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to edit.
3. Right-click the column heading and select Edit Column Label.
4. Type the new name for the label and click OK to save those changes and close the
dialog box or Cancel to exit without making any changes.
Changing Units, Format, and Precision in FlexTables
To change the units, format, or precision in a column of a FlexTable:

1. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to edit.
2. Right-click the column heading and select Units and Formatting.
3. Make the changes you want close the dialog to save your changes.
Navigating in Tables
The arrow keys, Ctrl+Home, Ctrl+End, PgUp, PgDn, and Ctrl+arrow keys navigate to
different cells in a table.
Globally Editing Data
Using FlexTables, you can globally edit all of the values in an entire editable column.
Globally editing a FlexTable column can be more efficient for editing properties of an
element than using the Properties Editor or managers to edit each element in your
model individually.
To globally edit the values in a FlexTable column:

2. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to edit and find the
column of data you want to change.
If necessary, you might need to first create a FlexTable or edit an existing one to
make sure it contains the column you want to change.
3. Right-click the column heading and select Global Edit.
4. In the Operation field, select what you want to do to data in the column: Add,
Divide, Multiply, Set, or Subtract.

Note: The Operation field is only available for numeric data.
5. In the Global Edit field, type or select the value you want—for numeric data, you
typically type a new value, for other data you might select from a drop-down list
or select a check box.
Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data
You can sort and filter your FlexTables to focus on specific data or present your data
in one of the following ways:
To sort the order of columns in a FlexTable:
You can sort the order of columns in a FlexTable in two ways:
• Edit the FlexTable (see “Editing FlexTables”), to open the Table dialog box and
change the order of the selected tables using the up and down arrow buttons.
The top-most item in the Selected Columns pane appears furthest to the left in the
resulting FlexTable.
• Open the FlexTable, click the heading of the column you want to move, then click
again and drag the column to the new position. You can only move one column at
a time.
To sort the contents of a FlexTable:
1. Open the FlexTable you want to edit

2. Right-click a column heading to rank the contents of the column.
3. Select either Sort Ascending or Sort Descending.
– Sort Ascending—Sorts alphabetically from A to Z, from top to bottom. Sorts
numerically from negative to positive, from top to bottom. Sorts selected
check boxes to the top and cleared ones to the bottom.
– Sort Descending—Sorts alphabetically from Z to A, from top to bottom.
Sorts numerically from positive to negative, from top to bottom. Sorts cleared
check boxes to the top and selected ones to the bottom.
To filter a FlexTable:
You filter a FlexTable by creating a query.
1. Open the FlexTable you want to filter.

2. Right-click the column heading you want to filter, and select Filter.
The Query Builder dialog box opens.

3. All input and results fields for the selected element type appear in the Fields list
pane, available SQL operators and keywords are represented by buttons, and
available values for the selected field are listed in the Unique Values list pane.
Perform the following steps to construct your query:
a. Double-click the field you wish to include in your query. The database
column name of the selected field appears in the preview pane.
b. Click the desired operator or keyword button. The SQL operator or keyword
is added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
c. Click the Refresh button above the Unique Values list pane to see a list of
unique values available for the selected field. The Refresh button is becomes
disabled after you use it for a particular field.
d. Double-click the unique value you want to add to the query. The value is
added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
e. Click the Validate button above the preview pane to validate your SQL
expression. If the expression is valid, the word “VALIDATED” is displayed in
the lower right corner of the dialog box.
f. Click the Apply button above the preview pane to execute the query. If you
didn’t validate the expression, the Apply button validates it before executing
it.
g. Click OK.

Double-click the Click the desired operator Click the Refresh

desired field to add it or keyword button to add it button to display the
to the preview pane to the SQL expression in list of available
the preview pane unique values
Double-click the
desired unique
value to add it to
the SQL
expression in the
preview pane
Apply button
Preview pane
Validate
button
The FlexTable displays columns of data for all elements returned by the query and
the word “FILTERED” is displayed in the FlexTable status bar.
To reset a filter:
1. Right-click the column heading you want to filter.

2. Select Filter.
3. Click Reset.
The status pane at the bottom of the Table window always shows the number of rows
displayed and the total number of rows available (e.g., 10 of 20 elements displayed).
When a filter is active, this message is highlighted.

Note: Table filtering lets you perform global editing (see “Editing
FlexTables”) on any subset of elements. Only the elements that
appear in the filtered table can be edited.
Custom Sort Dialog Box

You can sort elements in the table based on one or more columns in ascending or
descending order. For example, the following table is given:
Discharge
Slope (ft./ Depth (cfs)
ft.) (ft.)
0.001 1 4.11
0.002 1 5.81
0.003 1 7.12
0.001 2 13.43
0.002 2 19.00
0.003 2 23.27
A custom sort is set up to sort first by Slope, then by Depth, in ascending order. The
resulting table would appear in the following order:
Discharge
ft.) (ft.)
0.001 1 4.11
0.001 2 13.43

Discharge
ft.) (ft.)
0.002 1 5.81
0.002 2 19.00
0.003 1 7.12
0.003 2 23.27
Customizing Your FlexTable
There are several ways to customize tables to meet a variety of output requirements:
• Changing the Report Title—When you print a table, the table name is used as
the title for the printed report. You can change the title that appears on your
printed report by renaming the table. For more information, see “Naming and
Renaming FlexTables” on page 9-372.
• Adding/Removing Columns—You can add, remove, and change the order of
columns from the Table Setup dialog box. For more information, see “Editing
FlexTables” on page 9-373 and “Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data” on page 9-
375.
• Drag/Drop Column Placement—With the Table window open, select the
column heading of the column that you would like to move and drag the column
to its new location. For more information, see “Sorting and Filtering FlexTable
Data” on page 9-375.
• Resizing Columns—With the Table open, click the vertical separator line
between column headings. Notice that the cursor changes shape to indicate that
you can resize the column. Drag the column separator to the left or right to stretch
the column to its new size.
• Changing Column Headings—With the Table window open, right-click the
column heading that you wish to change and select Edit Column Label.

FlexTable Setup Dialog Box
The Table Setup dialog box allows you to customize any table through the following
options:
Table Type Lets you specify the type of elements that appear
in the table. It also provides a filter for the
attributes that appear in the Available Columns
list. When you choose a table type, the available
list only contains attributes that can be used for
that table type. For example, only manhole
attributes are available for a manhole table.
Available Columns Contains all the attributes that are available for
your table design. The Available Columns list is
located on the left side of the Table Setup dialog
box. This list contains all of the attributes that are
available for the type of table you are creating.
The attributes displayed in yellow represent non-
editable attributes, while those displayed in white
represent editable attributes.
Selected Columns Contains attributes that appear in your custom

designed FlexTable. When you open the table, the
selected attributes appear as columns in the table
in the same order that they appear in the list. You
can drag and drop or use the up and down buttons
to change the order of the attributes in the table.
The Selected Columns list is located on the right-
hand side of the Table Setup dialog box. To add
columns to the Selected Columns list, select one
or more attributes in the Available Columns list,
then click the Add button [>] or drag and drop the
highlighted attributes to the Selected Columns list.

Column Manipulation Lets you select or clear columns to be used in the

Buttons table, as well as to arrange the order in which the
columns appear.
The Add and Remove buttons are located in the
center of the Table Setup dialog box.
• [ > ] Adds the selected items from the Avail-
able Columns list to the Selected Columns list.
• [ >> ] Adds all of the items in the Available
Columns list to the Selected Columns list.
• [ < ] Removes the selected items from the
Selected Columns list.
• [ << ] Removes all items from the Selected
Columns list.
Note: You can select multiple

attributes in the Available
Columns list by holding down
the Shift key or the Control key
while clicking with the mouse.
Holding down the Shift key
provides group selection
behavior. Holding down the
Control key provides single
element selection behavior.
To rearrange the order of the attributes in the

Selected Columns list, highlight the item to be
moved, then move it up or down in the list by
dragging or clicking the up or down button located
below the Selected Columns list.

Element Relabeling Dialog Box
This dialog is where you perform global element relabeling operations for the Label
column of the FlexTable.
The element relabeling tool allows you to perform three types of operations on a set of
element labels: Replace, Renumber, and Append. The active relabel operation is
chosen from the list box in the Relabel Operations section of the Relabel Elements
dialog box. The entry fields for entering the information appropriate for the active
relabel operation appear below the Relabel Operations section. The following list
presents a description of the available element relabel operations.
• Replace—This operation allows you to replace all instances of a character or

series of characters in the selected element labels with another piece of text. For
instance, if you selected elements with labels CO-1, CO-2, CO-12, and CO-5, you
could replace all the COs with the word Conduit by entering CO in the Find field,
Conduit in the Replace With field, and clicking the Apply button. The resulting
labels are Conduit-1, Conduit-2, Conduit-12, and Conduit-5. You can also use this
operation to delete portions of a label. Suppose you now want to go back to the
original labels. You can enter Conduit in the Find field and leave the Replace With
field blank to reproduce the labels CO-1, CO-2, CO-12, and CO-5. There is also
the option to match the case of the characters when searching for the characters to
replace. This option can be activated by checking the box next to the Match Case
field.
• Renumber—This operation allows you to generate a new label, including suffix,
prefix, and ID number for each selected element. For example, if you had the
labels CO-1, CO-4, CO-10, and Conduit-12, you could use this feature to
renumber the elements in increments of five, starting at five, with a minimum
number of two digits for the ID number field. You could specify a prefix CO- and
a suffix -Z1 in the Prefix and Suffix fields, respectively. The prefix and suffix are
appended to the front and back of the automatically generated ID number. The

value of the new ID for the first element to be relabeled, 5, is entered in the Next
field. The value by which the numeric base of each consecutive element is in
increments, 5, is entered in the Increment field. The minimum number of digits in
the ID number, 2, is entered in the Digits field. If the number of digits in the ID
number is less then this value, zeros are placed in front of it. Click the Apply
button to produce the following labels: CO-05-Z1, CO-10-Z1, CO-15-Z1, and
CO-20-Z1.
• Append—This operation allows you to append a prefix, suffix, or both to the
selected element labels. Suppose that you have selected the labels 5, 10, 15, and
20, and you wish to signify that these elements are actually conduits in Zone 1 of
your system. You can use the append operation to add an appropriate prefix and
suffix, such as CO- and -Z1, by specifying these values in the Prefix and Suffix
fields and clicking the Apply button. Performing this operation yields the labels
CO-5-Z1, CO-10-Z1, CO-15-Z1 and CO-20-Z1. You can append only a prefix or
suffix by leaving the other entry field empty. However, for the operation to be
valid, one of the entry fields must be filled in.
The Preview field displays an example of the new label using the currently defined
settings.
Copying, Exporting, and Printing FlexTable Data
You can output your FlexTable several ways:
• Copy FlexTable data via the clipboard

• Export FlexTable data as a text file
• Create a FlexTable report
To copy FlexTable data via the clipboard:
You can copy your FlexTable data via the clipboard and paste it into another Windows
application, such as a word-processing application as tab-delimited text.
1. Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables manager.

2. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to use.
3. Click Copy. The contents of the FlexTable are copied to the Windows clipboard.

Caution: Make sure you paste the data you copied before you copy
anything else to the Windows clipboard. If you copy
something else to the clipboard before you paste your
FlexTable data, your FlexTable data will be lost from the
clipboard.
4. Paste (Ctrl+v) the data into other Windows software, such as your word-
processing application.
To export FlexTable data as a text file:
You can export the data in a FlexTable as tab- or comma-delimited ASCII text, for use
in other applications, such as Notepad, spreadsheet, or word processing software.

3. Click File > Export data.
4. Select either Tab Delimited or Comma Delimited.
5. When prompted, set the path and name of the .txt file you want to create.
To create a FlexTable report:
Create a FlexTable Report if you want to print a copy of your FlexTable and its values.

Note: Instead of Print Preview, you can click Print to print the report
without previewing it.
3. Click Report. A print preview of the report displays to show what your report will
look like if printed using your default printer.
Note: You cannot edit the format of the report.
4. Click Print to open the Print dialog box and print the report to a printer that you
select.

Statistics Dialog Box
The Statistics dialog box displays statistics for the elements in a FlexTable. You can
right-click any unitized input or output column and choose the Statistics command to
view the count, maximum value, mean value, minimum value, standard deviation, and
sum for that column.
Using Predefined Tables
Element tables are read-only, predefined FlexTables. There is one predefined table for
every element available in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition. You can access the
element tables by clicking Report > Element Tables or from the FlexTable manager.
Use these tables to review data about the elements in your model.
Reporting
Use reporting to create printable content based on some aspect of your model, such as
element properties or results.
You need to compute your model before you can create reports about results, such as
the movement of water in your network. But, you can create reports about input data
without computing your model, such as conduit diameters. (To compute your model,
after you set up your elements and their properties, click the Compute button.)
You can access reports by:
• Clicking the Report menu

• Right-clicking any element, then selecting Report
Reporting includes:
• “Using Standard Reports” on page 9-386

• “Reporting on Element Data” on page 9-387

Reporting
Using Standard Reports
There are several standard reports available. To access the standard reports, click the
Report menu, then select the report you want.
You can use these standard reports:
• “Creating a Project Inventory Report”

• “Creating a Scenario Summary Report”
• “Creating a Conduit Inventory Report”
• “Creating A DOT Report”
Creating a Project Inventory Report

To create a report that provides an overview of your network, click Report > Project
Inventory. The report dialog box opens and displays your report. You cannot format
the report, but you can print it by clicking the Print button.
Creating a Scenario Summary Report

To create a report that summarizes your scenario, click Report > Scenario Summary.
The report dialog box opens and displays your report. You cannot format the report,
but you can print it by clicking the Print button.
Creating a Conduit Inventory Report

To create a report that lists the total lengths of conduit by diameter and material type,
click Report > Conduit Inventory. The report dialog opens and displays the Conduit
Inventory report.
You can copy rows, columns, or the entire table to the clipboard by highlighting the
desired rows and/or columns and clicking Ctrl+C.

Creating A DOT Report

The DOT report presents data about the conduits in your model. The report displays
the following read-only attributes for each conduit in the model:
• Upstream and Downstream Node

• Upstream Inlet Area
• Upstream Inlet C
• Upstream CA
• Upstream and Downstream Ground Elevation
• Upstream and Downstream HGL
• Section Discharge Capacity
• Length
• Average Velocity
To create a DOT report, click Report > Element Data > DOT Report.
Reporting on Element Data
You can create reports for specific elements in your network by computing the
network, right-clicking the element, then selecting Report. You cannot format the
report, but you can print it by clicking the Print button.

Reporting
Report Options
The Report Options dialog box offers control over how a report is displayed.
Load factory default Changes the display settings

settings to current view used by the current report to
the factory default.
Load global settings to Changes the display settings

current view used by the current report to
the previously saved global
settings.
Save current view settings Saves the display settings

to global settings used by the current report as
the new global settings.
The header and footer can be fully customized and you can edit text to be displayed in
the cells or select a pre-defined dynamic variable from the cell's menu.
• %(Company) - The name specified in the project properties.

• %(DateTime) - The current system date and time.
• %(BentleyInfo) - The standard Bentley company information.
• %(BentleyName) - The standard Bentley company name information.
• %(Pagination) - The report page out of the maximum pages.
• %(ProductInfo) - The current product and its build number.
• %(ProjDirectory) - The directory path where the project file is stored.

• %(ProjEngineer) - The engineer specified in the project properties.

• %(ProjFileName) - The full file path of the current project.
• %(ProjStoreFileName) - The full file path of the project.
• %(ProjTitle) - The name of the project specified in the project properties.
• %(ReportTitle) - The name of the report.
• %(Image) - Opens up the Select Image file window.
• %(ActiveScenarioLabel) - The name of the currently active scenario.
You can also select fonts, text sizes, and customize spacing, as well as change the
default margins in the Default Margins tab.
Filter Dialog Box
The Filter dialog box lets you specify your filtering criteria. Each filter criterion is
made up of three items:
• Attribute—The attribute to filter.

• Operator—The operator to use when comparing the filter value against the data
in the specific column (operators include: =, >, >=, <, <=, < >).
• Value—The comparison value.
Any number of criteria can be added to a filter. Multiple filter criteria are implicitly
joined with a logical AND statement. When multiple filter criteria are defined, only
rows that meet all of the specified criteria will be displayed. A filter will remain active
for the associated table until the filter is reset.
The status pane at the bottom of the report window always shows the number of rows
displayed and the total number of rows available (e.g., 10 of 20 elements displayed).
When a filter is active, this message will be highlighted.
Using Named Views

The Named View dialog box is where you can store the current views X and Y coordi-
nates. When you set a view in the drawing pane and add a named view, the current
view is saved as the named view. You can then center the drawing pane on the named
view with the Go To View command.
Choose View > Named Views to open the Named View dialog box.

Using Named Views

• Named View—Opens a Named View
Properties box to create a new named
view.
• Folder—Opens a Named Views Folder
Properties box to enter a label for the
new folder.
Delete Deletes the named view or folder that is

currently selected.
Rename Rename the currently selected named view

or folder.
Go to View Centers the drawing pane on the named

view.
Shift Up and Shift Moves the selected named view or folder up

Down or down.
Expand All or Expands or collapses the named views and

Collapse All folders.
Help Displays online help for Named Views.
Using Aerial View
The Aerial View is a small navigation window that provides a graphical overview of
your entire drawing. You can toggle the Aerial View window on or off by selecting
View > Aerial View to open the Aerial View window.
A Navigation Rectangle is displayed in the Aerial View window. This Navigation

Rectangle provides a you-are-here indicator showing you current zoom location
respective of the overall drawing. As you pan and zoom around the drawing, the Navi-
gation Rectangle will automatically update to reflect your current location.

You can also use the Aerial View window to navigate around your drawing. To pan,
click the Navigation Rectangle to drag it to a new location. To zoom, click anywhere
in the window to specify the first corner of the Navigation Rectangle, and click again
to specify the second corner.
In AutoCAD mode, see the AutoCAD online help for a detailed explanation.
In Stand-Alone mode, with Aerial View window enabled (by selecting the View >
Aerial View), click and drag to draw a rectangular view box in the aerial view. The
area inside this view box is displayed in the main drawing window. Alternately, any
zooming or panning action performed directly in the main window updates the size
and location of the view box in the Aerial View window.
The Aerial View window contains the following buttons:
Zoom Extents—Display the entire drawing in the Aerial View window.
Zoom In—Decrease the area displayed in the Aerial View window.
Zoom Out—Increase the area displayed in the Aerial View window.
Help—Opens the online help.
To resize the view box directly from the Aerial View window, click to define the new
rectangular view box. To change the location of the view box, hover the mouse cursor
over the current view rectangle and click to drag the view box frame to a new location.
Contours
Using StormCAD you can visually display calculated results for many attributes using
contour plots.
The Contours dialog box is where all of the contour definitions associated with a
project are stored. Choose View > Contours (or Ctrl + 0) to open the Contours dialog
box.

Contours
The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the contours currently contained
within the project, along with a toolbar.
New Opens the Contour Definition dialog box,

allowing you to create a new contour.
Delete Deletes the currently selected contour.
Rename Renames the currently selected contour.
Edit Opens the Contour Definition dialog box,

where you can modify the settings of the
currently selected contour.
Export Clicking this button opens a submenu

containing the following commands:
• Export to Shapefile - Exports the
contour to a shapefile, opening the
Export to File Manager to select the
shapefile.
• Export to DXF - Exports the contour as
a .dxf drawing.
• Export to Native Format - In the stand
alone interface, this opens the DXF
Properties dialog box, allowing you to
create a DXF file which is automatically
added to the Background Layers
Manager as a background layer. In the
AutoCAD interface, this option perma-
nently exports the contour lines to the
current layer of the drawing.
View Opens the Contour Browser dialog,

Contour allowing you to display detailed contour
Browser results for points in the drawing view.

Refresh Regenerates the contour.
Shift Up Moves the currently selected contour up in

the list pane.
Shift Moves the currently selected contour down

Down in the list pane.
Help Displays online help for the Contours.
Contour Definition
The Contour Definition dialog box contains the information required to generate
contours for a calculated network.
Contour
Field Select the attribute to apply the contour.
Selection Set Apply an attribute to a previously defined

selection set or to one of the following predefined
options:
• All Elements - Calculates the contour based
on all elements in the model, including spot
elevations.
• <Selection Set Name> - Calculates the
contour based on all of the elements in the
specified selection set. This option will only be
available if one or more selection sets have
been previously defined.
Minimum Lowest value to be included in the contour map. It

may be desirable to use a minimum that is above
the absolute minimum value in the system to avoid
creating excessive lines near a pump or other high-
differential portions of the system.
Maximum Highest value for which contours will be

generated.

Contours
Increment Step by which the contours increase. The contours

created will be evenly divisible by the increment
and are not directly related to the minimum and
maximum values. For example, a contour set with
10 minimum, 20 maximum, and an increment of 3
would result in the following set: [ 12, 15, 18 ] not
[ 10, 13, 16, 19 ].
Index Increment Value for which contours will be highlighted and

labeled. The index increment should be an even
multiple of the standard increment.
Smooth Contours The Contour Smoothing option displays the results

of a contour map specification as smooth, curved
contours.
Line Weight The thickness of contour lines in the drawing view.
Color by Range Contours are colored based on attribute ranges.

Use the Initialize button to create five evenly
spaced ranges and associated colors.
Initialize—This button, located to the right of the

Contour section, will initialize the Minimum,
Maximum, Increment, and Index Increment values
based on the actual values observed for the
elements in the selection set.
Tip: Initialization can be

accomplished by clicking the
Initialize button to automatically
generate values for the
minimum, maximum,
increment, and index increment
to create an evenly spaced
contour set.
Ramp—Automatically generate a gradient range

between two colors that you specify. Pick the color
for the first and last values in the list and the
program will select colors for the other values.
Color by Index The standard contours and index contours have

separately controlled colors that you can make the
contours more apparent.

Contour Plot
The Contour Plot window displays the results of a contour map specification as accu-
rate, straight-line contours.
The plot can be printed or exported as a .DXF file. Choose File > Export > DXF to
export the plot.
Tip: Although the straight-line contours generated by this program

are accurate, smooth contours are often more desirable for
presentation purposes. You can smooth the contours by clicking
Options and selecting Smooth Contours.
Note: Contour line index labels can be manually repositioned in this

view before sending the plot to the printer. The Contour Plot
Status pane displays the Z coordinate at the mouse cursor.
Contour Browser Dialog Box
The Contour Browser dialog box displays the X and Y coordinates and the calculated
value for the contour attribute at the location of the mouse cursor in the drawing view.
Chart Options Dialog Box

Use the Chart Options dialog box to format a profile plot.
Note: Changes you make to settings are not retained for use with other
profiles.
Chart Options Dialog Box - Chart Tab
The Chart tab lets you define overall chart display parameters. This tab is subdivided
into second-level sub-tabs:
• “Series Tab”
• “Panel Tab”
• “Axes Tab”
• “General Tab”
• “Titles Tab”
• “Walls Tab”
• “Paging Tab”

• “Legend Tab”
• “3D Tab”
Series Tab
Use the Series tab to display the series that are associated with the current graph. To
show a series, select the check box next to the series’ name. To hide a series, clear its
check box. The Series tab contains the following controls:
Up/Down arrows Lets you change a series place in the list, changing
the display priority.
Add Adds a new series to the current graph. The

TeeChart Gallery opens, see “TeeChart Gallery
Dialog Box”.
Delete Lets you remove the currently selected series.
Title Lets you rename the currently selected series.
Clone Creates a duplicate of the currently selected series.
Change Lets you edit the currently selected series. The

TeeChart Gallery opens, see “TeeChart Gallery
Dialog Box”.
Panel Tab
Use the Panel tab to set how your graph appears in the Graph dialog box. The Panel
tab includes the following sub-tabs:
Borders Tab
Use the Borders tab to set up a border around your graph. The Borders tab contains the
following controls:
Border Lets you set the border of the graph. The Border
Editor opens, see “Border Editor Dialog Box”.
Bevel Outer Lets you set a raised or lowered bevel effect, or no

bevel effect, for the outside of the chart border.
Color Lets you set the color for the bevel effect that you
use; inner and outer bevels can use different color
values.

Bevel Inner Lets you set a raised or lowered bevel effect, or no

bevel effect, for the inside of the chart border.
Size Lets you set a thickness for the bevel effect that
you use; inner and outer bevels use the same size
value.
Background Tab
Use the Background tab to set a color or image background for your graph. The Back-
ground tab contains the following controls:
Color Lets you set a color for the background of your

graph. The Color Editor opens, see “Color Editor
Dialog Box”.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the background of your

graph. The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch
Brush Editor Dialog Box”.
Transparent Makes the background of the graph transparent.
Background Image Lets you set an existing image as the background

of the graph. Click Browse, then select the image
(including .bmp, .tif, .jpg, .png,. and .gif). After
you have set a background image, you can remove
the image from the graph by clicking Clear.
You can control the Style of the background
image:
• Stretch—Resizes the background image to fill
the entire background of the graph.
• Tile—Repeats the background image as
many times as needed to fill the entire back-
ground of the graph.
• Center—Puts the background image in the
horizontal and vertical center of the graph.
• Normal—Puts the background image in the
top-left corner of the graph.

Gradient Tab
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your graph. The
Gradient tab contains the following subtabs and controls:
Format Tab
Visible Determines whether a gradient displays or not.

Select this check box to display a gradient you
have set up, clear this check box to hide the
gradient.
Direction Sets the direction of the gradient. Vertical causes

the gradient to display from top to bottom,
Horizontal displays a gradient from right to left,
and Backward/Forward diagonal display gradients
from the left and right bottom corners to the
opposite corner.
Angle Lets you customize the direction of the gradient

beyond the Direction selections.
Colors Tab
Start Lets you set the starting color for your gradient.
Opens the Color Editor dialog box.
Middle Lets you select a middle color for your gradient.

The Color Editor opens. Select the No Middle
Color check box if you want a two-color gradient.
End Lets you select the final color for your gradient.
Gamma Correction Lets you control the brightness with which the
background displays to your screen; select or clear
this check box to change the brightness of the
background on-screen. This does not affect printed
output.
Transparency Lets you set transparency for your gradient, where

100 is completely transparent and 0 is completely
opaque.

Options Tab
Sigma Lets you set the location on the chart background

of the gradient’s end color.
Sigma Focus Lets you use the options controls. Select this
check box to use the controls in the Options tab.
Sigma Scale Lets you control how much of the gradient’s end
color is used by the gradient background.
Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for your graph. The Shadow tab contains the
following controls:
Visible Lets you display a shadow for your graph. Select

this check box to display the shadow, clear this
check box to turn off the shadow effect.
Size Set the size of the shadow by increasing or

decreasing the numbers for Horizontal and/or
Vertical Size.
Color Lets you set a color for the shadow of your graph.
You might set this to gray but can set it to any
other color.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the shadow of your

graph. The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch
Transparency Lets you set transparency for your shadow, where

opaque.
Axes Tab
Use the Axes tab set how your axes display. It includes the following controls and
subtabs:
Visible When checked, displays all of your graph’s axes;

clear it to hide all of the graph’s axes.

Behind When checked, displays all of your graph’s axes

behind the series display; clear it to display the
axes in front of the series display.
Axes Select the axis you want to edit. The Scales,

Labels, Ticks, Title, Minor, and Position tabs and
their controls pertain only to the selected axis.
Caution: Do not delete the axes called Custom 0 and Custom 1, as

these are reserved axes that are needed by Bentley
Scales Tab
Use the Scales tab to define your axes scales. The Scales tab contains the following
controls:
Automatic Lets you automatically or manually set the

minimum and maximum axis values. Select this
check box if you want TeeChart to automatically
set both minimum and maximum, or clear this
check box if you want to manually set either or
both.
Visible Displays the axis if selected, hides the axis if

cleared.
Inverted Reverses the order in which the axis scale

increments. If the minimum value is at the origin,
then selecting Inverted puts the maximum value at
the origin.
Change Lets you change the increment of the axis.
Increment Displays the increment value you set for the axis.
Logarithmic Lets you use a logarithmic scale for the axis.
Log Base If you select a logarithmic scale, set the base you
want to use in the text box.
Minimum Tab
Auto Lets you automatically or manually set the

minimum axis value.

Change Lets you enter a value for the axis minimum.
Offset Lets you adjust the axis scale to change the

location of the minimum or maximum axis value
with respect to the origin.
Maximum Tab
Auto Lets you automatically or manually set the

maximum axis value.
Change Lets you enter a value for the axis maximum.
Offset Lets you adjust the axis scale to change the

location of the minimum or maximum axis value
with respect to the origin.
Labels Tab
Use the Labels tab to define your axes text. The Labels tab contains the following
subtabs and controls:
Style Tab
Visible Lets you show or hide the axis text.
Multi-line Lets you split labels or values into more than one
line if the text contains a space. Select this check
box to enable multi-line text.
Round first Controls whether axis labels are automatically

rounded to the nearest magnitude.
Label on axis Controls whether Labels just at Axis Minimum

and Maximum positions are shown. This applies
only if the maximum value for the axis matches
the label for extreme value on the chart.
Size Determines distance between the margin of the

graph and the placement of the labels.
Angle Sets the angle of the axis labels. In addition to

using the up and down arrows to set the angle in
90° increments, you can type an angle you want to
use.

Min. Separation % Sets the minimum distance between axis labels.
Style Lets you set the label style.

• Auto—Lets TeeChart automatically set the
label style.
• Value—Sets axis labeling based on minimum
and maximum axis values.
• Text—Uses text for labels. Since Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition uses numeric
values, this is not implemented; don’t use it.
• None—Turns off axis labels.
• Mark—Uses SeriesMarks style for labels.
Since Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition uses
numeric values, this is not implemented; don’t
use it.
Format Tab
Exponential Displays the axis label using an exponent, if

appropriate.
Values Format Lets you set the numbering format for the axis
labels.
Default Alignment Lets you select and clear the default TeeChart
alignment for the right or left axes only.
Text Tab
Font Lets you set the font properties for axis labels.
This opens the Windows Font dialog box.
Color Lets you select the color for the axis label font.
Double-click the colored square between Font and
Fill to open the Color Editor dialog box (see
“Color Editor Dialog Box”).
Fill Lets you set a pattern the axis label font. The
Hatch Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch Brush
Editor Dialog Box”.

Shadow —Lets you set a shadow for the axis labels.

• Visible—Lets you display a shadow for the
axis labels. Select this check box to display
the axis label shadow.
• Size—Lets you set the location of the shadow.
Use larger numbers to offset the shadow by a
large amount.
• Color—Lets you set a color for the shadow.
other color. The Color Editor opens.
• Pattern—Lets you set a pattern for the
shadow. The Hatch Brush Editor opens.
• Transparency—Lets you set transparency for
your shadow, where 100 is completely trans-
parent and 0 is completely opaque.
Ticks Tab
Use the Ticks tab to define the major ticks and their grid lines. The Ticks tab contains
Axis Lets you set the properties of the selected axis.

Opens the Border Editor dialog box.
Grid Lets you set the properties of the graph’s grid lines
that intersect the selected axis. Opens the Border
Editor dialog box.
Ticks Lets you set the properties of the tick marks that
are next to the labels on the label-side of the
selected axis. Opens the Border Editor dialog box.
Len Sets the length of the Ticks or Inner ticks.
Inner Lets you set the properties of the tick marks that
are next to the labels on the graph-side of the
selected axis. Opens the Border Editor dialog box.
Centered Lets you align between the grid labels the graph’s
grid lines that intersect the selected axis.
At Labels Only Sets the axis ticks and axis grid to be drawn at
labels only. Otherwise, they are drawn at all axis
increment positions.

Title Tab
Use the Title tab to set the axis titles. The Title tab contains the following subtabs and
controls:
Style Tab
Title Lets you type a new axis title.
Angle Sets the angle of the axis title. In addition to using

the up and down arrows to set the angle in 90°
increments, you can type an angle you want to use.
Size Determines distance between the margin of the

graph and the placement of the labels.
Visible Check box that lets you display or hide the axis
title.
Text Tab
Font Lets you set the font properties for axis title. This
opens the Windows Font dialog box.
Color Lets you select the color for the axis title font.
Double-click the colored square between Font and
Fill to open the Color Editor dialog box (see
“Color Editor Dialog Box”).
Fill Lets you set a pattern the axis title font. The Hatch
Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch Brush Editor
Dialog Box”

Shadow Lets you set a shadow for the axis title.

axis title. Select this check box to display the
axis label shadow.
large amount.
Minor Tab
Use the Minor tab to define those graph ticks that are neither major ticks. The Minor
tab contains the following controls and tabs:
Ticks Lets you set the properties of the minor tick

marks. The Border Editor opens, see “Border
Length Sets the length of the minor tick marks.
Grid Lets you set the properties of grid lines that align
with the minor ticks. The Border Editor opens, see
“Border Editor Dialog Box”.
Count Sets the number of minor tick marks.
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to set the axes position for your graph. The Position tab contains
Position % Sets the position of the axis on the graph in pixels

or as a percentage of the graph’s dimensions.

Start % Sets the start of the axis as percentage of width

(horizontal axis) and height (vertical axis) of the
graph. The original axis scale is fitted to new axis
height/width.
End % Sets the end of the axis as percentage of width

(horizontal axis) and height (vertical axis) of the
graph. The original axis scale is fitted to new axis
height/width.
Units Lets you select pixels or percentage as the unit for

the axis position.
Z% Sets the Z dimension as a percentage of the

graph’s dimensions. This is unused by Bentley
General Tab
Use the General tab to preview a graph before you print it and set up scrolling and
zooming for a graph. It includes the following controls:
Print Preview Lets you see the current view of the document as it
will be printed and lets you define the print
settings, such as selecting a printer to use. Opens
the Print Preview dialog box.
Margins Lets you specify margins for your graph. There are
four boxes, each corresponding with the top,
bottom, left, and right margins, into which you
enter a value that you want to use for a margin.
Units Lets you set pixels or percentage as the units for

your margins. Percentage is a percentage of the
original graph size.
Cursor Lets you specify what your cursor looks like.

Select a cursor type from the drop-down list, then
click Close to close the TeeChart editor, and the
new cursor style displays when the cursor is over
the graph.

Zoom Tab
Use the Zoom tab to set up zooming on, magnifying, and reducing the display of a
graph. The Zoom tab contains the following controls:
Allow Lets you magnify the graph by clicking and

dragging with the mouse.
Animated Lets you set a stepped series of zooms.
Steps Lets you set the number of steps used for

successive zooms if you selected the Animated
check box.
Pen Lets you set the thickness of the border for the
zoom window that surrounds the magnified area
when you click and drag. The Border Editor
opens, see “Border Editor Dialog Box”.
Pattern The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch Brush

Minimum pixels Lets you set the number of pixels that you have to
click and drag before the zoom feature is
activated.
Direction Lets you zoom in the vertical or horizontal planes

only, as well as both planes.
Mouse Button Lets you set the mouse button that you use to click
and drag when activating the zoom feature.
Scroll Tab
Use the Scroll tab to set up scrolling and panning across a graph. The Scroll tab
Allow Scroll Lets you scroll and pan over the graph. Select this
check box to turn on scrolling, clear the check box
to turn it off.
Mouse Button Lets you set the mouse button that you click to use
the scroll feature.

Titles Tab
The Titles tab lets you define titles to use for your graph. It includes the following
controls and tabs:
Title Lets you set the location of the titles you want to
use. The Titles sub tabs apply to the Title that is
currently selected in the Title drop-down list.
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to display and create a selected title. Type the text of the title in the
text box on the Style tab. The Style tab contains the following controls:
Visible Lets you display the selected title.
Adjust Frame Lets you wrap the frame behind the selected title
to the size of the title text.
Each title can have a frame behind it (see “Format
Tab”). By default, this frame is transparent. If you
turn off transparency to see the frame, the frame
can be sized to the width of the graph or set to
snap to the width of the title text.
Select the Adjust Frame check box to set the
width of the frame to the width of the title text;
clear this check box to set the width of the frame
to the width of the graph.
Alignment Lets you set the alignment of the selected title.
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to set the placement of the selected title. The Position tab contains
Custom Lets you set a custom position for the selected

title. Select this check box to set a custom
position.
Left/Top Lets you set the location of the selected title

relative to the left and top of the graph. If you
select the Custom check box, use these settings to
position the selected title.

Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format a background shape behind the selected title. The
Format tab contains the following controls:
Color Lets you set a color for the fill of the shape you
create behind the selected title. The Color Editor
opens, see “Color Editor Dialog Box”.
Frame Lets you define the outline of the shape you create
behind the selected title. The Border Editor opens,
see “Border Editor Dialog Box”.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the shape you
create behind the selected title. The Hatch Brush
Editor opens, see “Hatch Brush Editor Dialog
Box”.
Round Frame Lets you round the corners of the rectangular

shape you create behind the selected title. Select
this check box to round the corners of the shape.
Transparent Lets you set the fill of the shape you create behind
the selected title as transparent. If the shape is
completely transparent, you cannot see it, so clear
this check box if you cannot see a shape that you
expect to see.
Transparency Lets you set transparency for the shape, where 100
is completely transparent and 0 is completely
opaque.
Text Tab
Use the Text tab to format the text used in the selected title. The Text tab contains the
following controls:
Font Lets you set the font properties for the text. This
Color Lets you select the color for the text. Double-click
the colored square between Font and Fill to open
the Color Editor dialog box (see “Color Editor
Dialog Box”).

Fill Lets you set a pattern for the text. The Hatch
Dialog Box”.
Shadow Lets you set a shadow for the text.

text. Select this check box to display the axis
label shadow.
large amount.
Gradient Tab
Note: To use the Gradient tab, clear the Transparent check box in the
Chart > Titles > Format tab.
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your axis title. The
Gradient tab contains the following controls:
Format Tab
Visible Sets whether a gradient displays or not. Select this

check box to display a gradient you have set up,
clear this check box to hide the gradient.

opposite corner.


Colors Tab

output.

opaque.
Options Tab
Sigma Lets you use the options controls. Select this

Sigma Focus Lets you set the location on the chart background
Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the background for the selected title. The
Shadow tab contains the following controls:
Visible Lets you display a shadow. Select this check box

to display the shadow, clear this check box to turn
off the shadow effect.

Vertical Size.

Color Lets you set a color for the shadow. You might set
this to gray but can set it to any other color. The
Color Editor opens, see “Color Editor Dialog
Box”.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the shadow. The Hatch
Dialog Box”.

opaque.
Bevels Tab
Note: To use the Gradient tab, clear the Transparent check box in the
Chart > Titles > Format tab.
Use the Bevels tab to create rounded effects for the background for the selected title.
The Bevels tab contains the following controls:

bevel effect, for the background for the selected
title.
values.

bevel effect, for the inside of the background for
the selected title.
value.
Walls Tab
Use the Walls tab to set and format the edges of your graph. The Walls tab contains the
following subtabs:

Left/Right/Back/Bottom Tabs
Use the Left, Right, Back, and Bottom tabs to select the walls that you want to edit.
You might have to turn off the axes lines to see the effects (see “Axes Tab” on page 9-
399) for the back wall and turn on 3D display to see the effects for the left, right, and
bottom walls (see “3D Tab” on page 9-420).
The Left, Right, Back, and Bottom tabs contain the following controls:
Color The Color Editor opens, see “Color Editor Dialog

Box”.
Border The Border Editor opens, see “Border Editor

Dialog Box”.
Pattern The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch Brush

Gradient Lets you set a color gradient for your walls. The
Gradient Editor opens, see “Gradient Editor
Dialog Box”.
Visible Lets you display the walls you set up.
Dark 3D Lets you automatically darken the depth

dimension for visual effect. Select a Size 3D larger
than 0 to enable this check box.
Size 3D Lets you increase the size of the wall in the

direction perpendicular to it’s length (the graph
resizes automatically as a result).
Transparent Lets you set transparency for your background,

where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is
completely opaque.
Paging Tab
Use the Paging tab to display your graph over several pages. The Paging tab contains
Points per Page Lets you scale the graph to fit on one or many
pages. Set the number of points you want to
display on a single page of the graph, up to a
maximum of 100.

Scale Last Page Scales the end of the graph to fit the last page.
Current Page Legend Shows only the current page items when the chart
is divided into multiple pages.
Show Page Number Lets you display the current page number on the
graph.
Arrows Lets you navigate through a multi-page graph.

Click the single arrows to navigate one page at a
time. Click the double arrows to navigate directly
to the last or first pages of the graph.
Legend Tab
Use the Legend tab to display and format a legend for your graph. The Legend tab
includes the following controls:
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to set up and display a legend for your graph. The Style tab contains
Visible Lets you show or hide the legend for your graph.
Inverted Lets you draw legend items in the reverse

direction. Legend strings are displayed starting at
top for Left and Right Alignment and starting at
left for Top and Bottom Legend orientations.
Check boxes Activates/deactivates check boxes associated with

each series in the Legend. When these boxes are
unchecked in the legend, the associated series are
invisible.
Font Series Color Sets text in the legend to the same color as the
graph element to which it applies.
Legend Style Lets you select what appears in the legend.
Text Style Lets you select how the text in the legend is
aligned and what data it contains.
Vert. Spacing Controls the space between rows in the legend.

Dividing Lines Lets you use and define lines that separate
columns in the legend. The Border Editor opens,
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to control the placement of the legend. The Position tab contains
Position Lets you place the legend on the left, top, right, or
bottom of the chart.
Resize Chart Lets you resize your graph to accommodate the

legend. If you do not select this check box, the
graph and legend might overlap.
Margin Lets you set the amount of space between the

graph and the legend.
Position Offset % Determines the vertical size of the Legend. Lower

values place the Legend higher up in the display
Custom Lets you use the Left and Top settings to control
the placement of the legend.
Left/Top Lets you enter a value for custom placement of the

legend.
Symbols Tab
Use the Symbols tab to add to the legend symbols that represent the series in the
graph. The Symbols tab contains the following controls:
Visible Lets you display the series symbol next to the text
in the legend.
Width Lets you resize the symbol that displays in the

legend. You must clear Squared to use this
control.
Width Units Lets you set the units that are used to size the
width of the symbol.

Default border Lets you use the default TeeChart format for the
symbol. If you clear this check box, you can set a
custom border using the Border button.
Border Lets you set a custom border for the symbols. You
must clear Default Border to use this option. The
Border Editor opens, see “Border Editor Dialog
Box”.
Position Lets you put the symbol to the left or right of its
text.
Continuous Lets you attach or detach legend symbols. If you

select this check box, the color rectangles of the
different items are attached to each other with no
vertical spacing. If you clear this check box, the
legend symbols are drawn as separate rectangles.
Squared Lets you override the width of the symbol, so you

can make the symbol square shaped.
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format the box that contains the legend. The Format tab
Color Lets you set a color for the fill of the legend’s box.
The Color Editor opens, see “Color Editor Dialog
Box”.
Frame Lets you define the outline of the legend’s box.

The Border Editor opens, see “Border Editor
Dialog Box”.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the legend’s
box. The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch
Round Frame Lets you round the corners of the legend’s box.
Select this check box to round the corners of the
shape.
Transparent Lets you set the fill of the legend’s box as

transparent. If the shape is completely transparent,
you cannot see it, so clear this check box if you
cannot see a shape that you expect to see.

Transparency Lets you set transparency for the legend’s box,

where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is
completely opaque.
Text Tab
Use the Text tab to format the text used in the legend. The Text tab contains the
following controls:
Dialog Box”).
Dialog Box”.

label shadow.
large amount.
Gradient Tab
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your legend. The
Gradient tab contains the following controls:
Format Tab



opposite corner.

Colors Tab

output.

opaque.
Options Tab


Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the legend. The Shadow tab contains the
following controls:


Vertical Size.
Box”.
Dialog Box”.

opaque.
Bevels Tab
Use the Bevels tab to create a rounded effects for the legend. The Bevels tab contains

title.
values.

the selected title.
value.

3D Tab
Use the 3D tab to add a three-dimensional effect to your graph. The 3D tab contains
3 Dimensions Lets you display the chart in three dimensions.

Select this check box to turn on three-dimensional
display.
3D % Lets you increase or decrease the three-

dimensional effect. Set a larger percentage for
more three-dimensional effect, or a smaller
percentage for less effect.
Orthogonal Lets you fix the graph in the two-dimensional

work plane or, if you clear this check box, lets you
use the Rotation and Elevation controls to rotate
the graph freely.
Zoom Text Lets you magnify and reduce the size of the text in
a graph when using the zoom tool. clear this check
box if you want text, such as labels, to remain the
same size when you use the zoom tool.
Quality Lets you select how the graph displays as you

manipulate and zoom on it.
Clip Points Trims the view of a series to the walls of your

graph’s boundaries, to enhance the three-
dimensional effect. Turn this on to trim the graph.
You only see this effect when the graph is in
certain rotated positions.
Zoom Lets you magnify and reduce the display of the

graph in the Graph dialog box.
Rotation Lets you rotate the graph. You must clear

Orthogonal to use this control.
Elevation Lets you rotate the graph. You must clear

Horiz. Offset Lets you adjust the left-right position of the graph.
Vert. Offset Lets you adjust the up-down position of the graph.

Perspective Lets you rotate the graph. You must clear

Chart Options Dialog Box - Series Tab
Use the Series tab to set up how the series in your graph display. Select the series you
want to edit from the drop-down list at the top of the Series tab.
The Series tab is organized into second-level sub-tabs:
• “Format Tab”
• “Point Tab”
• “General Tab”
• “Data Source Tab”
• “Marks Tab”
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set up how the selected series appears. The Format tab contains
Border Lets you format the graph of the selected series.

The Border Editor opens, see “Border Editor
Dialog Box”.
Color Lets you set a color for the graph of the selected
series. The Color Editor opens, see “Color Editor
Dialog Box”.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the graph of the selected
series. This might only be visible on a three-
dimensional graph (see “3D Tab”). The Hatch
Dialog Box”.

dimension for visual effect.
Color Each Assigns a different color to each series indicator.
Clickable This is unused by Bentley StormCAD V8 XM

Edition.

Color Each line Lets you enable or disable the coloring of

connecting lines in a series. This is unused by
Height 3D Lets you set a thickness for the three-dimensional

effect in three-dimensional graphs.
Stack Lets you control how multiple series display in the

Graph dialog box.
• None—Draws the series one behind the
other.
• Overlap—Arranges multiple series with the
same origin using the same space on the
graph such that they might overlap several
times.
• Stack—Lets you arrange multiple series so
that they are additive.
• Stack 100%—Lets you review the area under
the graph curves.
Transparency Lets you set transparency for your series, where

opaque.
Stairs Lets you display a step effect between points on

your graph.
Inverted Inverts the direction of the stairs effect
Outline Displays an outline around the selected series. The

Border Editor opens.
Point Tab
Use the Point tab to set up how the points that make up the selected series appear. The
Point tab contains the following controls:
Visible Lets you display the points used to create your

graph.
3D Lets you display the points in three dimensions.


Inflate Margins Adjusts the margins of the points to display points

that are close to the edge of the graph. If you clear
this option, points near the edge of the graph
might only partly display.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the points in your series.
The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch Brush
Editor Dialog Box”. You must clear Default to use
this option.
Default Lets you select the default format for the points in
your series. This overrides any pattern selection.
Color Each Assigns a different color to each series indicator.
Style Lets you select the shape used to represent the

points in the selected series.
Width/Height Lets you set a size for the points in the selected
series.
Border Lets you set the outline of the shapes that

represent the points in the selected series. The
Box”.
Transparency Lets you set transparency for the points in the

selected series, where 100 is completely
transparent and 0 is completely opaque.
General Tab
Use the General tab to modify basic formatting and relationships with axes for series
in a graph. The General tab contains the following controls:
Show in Legend Lets you show the series title in the legend. To use
this feature, the legend style has to be Series or
LastValues (see “Style Tab”).
Cursor Lets you specify what your cursor looks like.

Select a cursor type from the drop-down list, then
click Close to close the TeeChart editor, and the
new cursor style displays when the cursor is over
the graph.

Depth Lets you set the depth of the three-dimensional

effect (see “3D Tab”).
Auto Lets you automatically size the three-dimensional

effect. clear and then select this check box to reset
the depth of the three-dimensional effect.
Values Controls the format of the values displayed when

marks are on and they contain actual numeric
values
Percents Controls the format of the values displayed when

marks are on and they contain actual numeric
values.
Horizontal Axis Lets you define which axis belongs to a given

series, since you can have multiple axes in a chart.
Vertical Axis Lets you define which axis belongs to a given

series, since you can have multiple axes in a chart.
Date Time This is unused by Bentley StormCAD V8 XM

Edition.
Sort Sorts the points in the series using the labels list.
Data Source Tab

Use this tab to connect a TeeChart series to another chart, table, query, dataset, or
Delphi database dataset.
This lets you set the number of random points to generate and overrides the points
passed by Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition to the chart control. The Data Source
feature can be useful in letting you set its sources as functions and do calculations
between the series created by Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition.
Marks Tab
Use the Marks tab to display labels for points in the selected series. Series-point labels
are called marks. The Marks tab contains the following tabs and controls:

Style Tab
Use the Style tab to set how the marks display. The Style tab contains the following
controls:
Visible Lets you display marks.
Clipped Lets you display marks outside the graph border.

clear this check box to let marks display outside
the graph border, or select it to clip the marks to
the graph border.
Multi-line Lets you display marks on more than one line.

Select this check box to enable multi-line marks.
All Series Visible Lets you display marks for all series.
Style Lets you set the content of the marks.
Draw every Sets the interval of the marks that are displayed.
Selecting 2 would display every second mark, and
3 would display every third, etc.
Angle Lets you rotate the marks for the selected series.
Arrow Tab
Use the Arrow tab to display a leader line on the series graph to indicate where the
mark applies. The Arrow tab contains the following controls:
Border Lets you set up the leader line. The Border Editor
Pointer Lets you set up the arrow head (if any) used by the
leader line. The Pointer dialog box opens, see
“Pointer Dialog Box”.
Arrow head Lets you select the kind of arrow head you want to
add to the leader line.
Size Lets you set the size of the arrow head.
Length Lets you set the size of the leader line and arrow
head, or just the leader line if there is no arrow
head.

Distance Lets you set the distance between the leader line
and the graph of the selected series.
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format the boxes that contains the marks. The Format
tab contains the following controls:
Color Lets you set a color for the fill of the boxes. The
Box”.
Frame Lets you define the outline of the boxes. The

Box”.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the boxes. The
Round Frame Lets you round the corners of the boxes. Select
Transparent Lets you set the fill of the boxes as transparent. If

the shape is completely transparent, you cannot
see it, so clear this check box if you cannot see a
shape that you expect to see.
Transparency Lets you set transparency for the boxes, where 100
opaque.
Text Tab
Use the Text tab to format the text used in the marks. The Text tab contains the
following controls:
Dialog Box”).

Dialog Box”.

label shadow.
large amount.
Gradient Tab
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your marks. The
Gradient tab contains the following subtabs and controls:
Format Tab


opposite corner.

Colors Tab


output.

opaque.
Options Tab

Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the marks. The Shadow tab contains the
following controls:


Vertical Size.
Box”.

Dialog Box”.

opaque.
Bevels Tab
Use the Bevels tab to create a rounded effects for your marks. The Bevels tab contains

title.
values.

the selected title.
value.
Chart Options Dialog Box - Tools Tab
Use the Tools tab to add special figures in order to highlight particular facts on a given
chart. For more information, see “Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box” on page 9-440.
The Tools tab contains the following controls:
Add Lets you add a tool from the Chart Tools Gallery.
To be usable in the current graph, a tool needs to
be added and set to Active.
Delete Deletes the selected tool from the list of those

available in the current graph.

Active Activates a selected tool for the current graph. To

be usable in the current graph, a tool needs to be
added and set to Active.
Up/Down arrow These are unused by Bentley StormCAD V8 XM

Edition.
Note: Each tool has its own parameters, see “Chart Tools Gallery Dialog
Box”.
Chart Options Dialog Box - Export Tab
Use the Export tab to save your graph for use in another application. The Export tab
Copy Lets you copy the contents of the graph to the

Windows clipboard, so you can paste it into
another application. You must consider the type of
data you have copied when choosing where to
paste it. For example, if you copy a picture, you
cannot paste it into a text editor, you must paste it
into a photo editor or a word processor that
accepts pictures. Similarly, if you copy data, you
cannot paste it into an image editor, you must
paste it into a text editor or word processor.
Save Lets you create a new file from the contents of the
graph.
Picture Tab
Use the Picture tab to save your graph as a raster image or to copy the graph as an
image to the clipboard. The Picture tab contains the following controls and subtabs:
Format Lets you select the format of the picture you want
to save. GIF, PNG, and JPEG are supported by the
Worldwide Web, a metafile is a more easily
scalable format. A Bitmap is a Microsoft BMP file
that is widely supported on Windows operating
systems, whereas TIFF pictures are supported on a
variety of Microsoft and non-Microsoft operating
systems.
Options Tab

Colors Lets you use the default colors used by your graph
or to convert the picture to use grayscale. This
feature is used when you save the picture as a file,
not by the copy option.
Size Tab
Width/Height Lets you change the width and height of the

picture. These values are measured in pixels and
are used by both the Save and Copy options
Keep aspect ratio Lets you keep the relationship between the height
and width of the picture the same when you
change the image size. If you clear this check box,
you can distort the picture by setting height or
width sizes that are not proportional to the original
graph.
Note: Changing the size of a graph using these controls might cause
some loss of quality in the image. Instead, try saving the graph
as a metafile and resizing the metafile after you paste or insert it
into its destination.
Native Tab
The Native tab contains the following controls:
Include Series Data This is unused by Bentley StormCAD V8 XM

Edition.
File Size Displays the size of an ASCII file containing the

data from the current graph.
Data Tab
The Data tab contains the following controls:
Series Lets you select the series from which you copy
data.
Format Lets you select a file type to which you can save
the data. This is not used by the Copy function.
Include Select the data you want to copy.

Text separator Lets you specify how you want rows of data
separated. This is supported by the Save function
and only by the Copy function if you first saved
using the text separator you have selected, before
you copy.
Chart Options Dialog Box - Print Tab
Use the Print tab to preview and print your graph. The Print tab contains the following
controls and subtabs:
Printer Lets you select the printer you want to use.
Setup Lets you configure the printer you want to use. For
example, if the selected printer supports printing
on both sides of a page, you might want to turn on
this feature.
Print Prints the displayed graph to the selected printer.
Page Tab
Orientation Lets you set up the horizontal and vertical axes of

the graph. Many graphs print better in Landscape
orientation because of their width:height ratio.
Zoom Lets you magnify the graph as displayed in the

print preview window. Use the scrollbars to
inspect the graph if it doesn’t fit within the
preview window after you zoom. Changing the
zoom does not affect the size of the printed output.
Margins Lets you set up top, bottom, left, and right margins
that are used when you print.
Margin Units Lets you set the units used by the Margins
controls: percent or hundredths of an inch.
Format Tab
Print Background When checked, prints the background of the

graph.

Quality You do not need to change this setting. The box is

cleared by default.
Proportional Lets you change the graph from proportional to

non-proportional. When you change this setting,
the preview pane is automatically updated to
reflect the change. This box is checked by default.
Grayscale Prints the graph in grayscale, converting colors

into shades of gray.
Detail Resolution Lets you adjust the detail resolution of the

printout. Move the slider to adjust the resolution.
Preview Pane Displays a small preview of the graph printout.
Border Editor Dialog Box
The Border Editor dialog box lets you define border properties for your graph. The
Border Editor dialog box contains the following controls:
Visible Displays or hides the border. Select this check box

to display the border.
Color Lets you select a color for the border. The Color
Editor dialog box opens, see “Color Editor Dialog
Box”.
Ending Lets you set the ending style of the border.
Dash Lets you select the dash style, if you have a

selection other than Solid set for the border style.
Width Lets you set the width of the border.
Style Lets you set the style for the border. Solid is an
uninterrupted line.
Transparency Lets you set transparency for your border, where

opaque.

Gradient Editor Dialog Box
Use the Gradient Editor dialog box to set a blend of two or three colors as the fill.
Click OK to apply the selection. The Gradient Editor contains the following controls
and tabs:
Format Tab


opposite corner.

Colors Tab

output.

opaque.
Options Tab


To access the Gradient Editor dialog box, click Chart Settings in the Graph dialog box,
then click the Tools tab. Select the Axis tab and Color Band tool, then click the
Gradient button.
Color Editor Dialog Box
Use the Color Editor dialog box to select a color. Click the basic color you want to use
then click OK to apply the selection. The Color Editor dialog box contains the
following controls:
Transparency Lets you set transparency for your color, where

opaque.
Custom Lets you define a custom color to use. The Color

dialog box opens, see “Color Dialog Box”.
OK/Cancel Click OK to use the selection. Click Cancel to

close the dialog box without making a selection.
To access the Color Editor dialog box, click a Color button in the Chart Options dialog
box.
Color Dialog Box
Use the Color dialog box to select a basic color or to define a custom color. After you
select the color you want to use, click OK to apply the selection.
Basic colors Lets you click a color to select it.
Custom colors Displays colors you have created and selected for
use.
Color matrix Lets you use the mouse to select a color from a
range of colors displayed.
Color|Solid Displays the currently defined custom color.

Hue/Sat/Lum Lets you define a color by entering values for hue,

saturation, and luminosity.
Red/Green/Blue Lets you define a color by entering values of red,

green, and blue colors.
Add to Custom Colors Adds the current custom color to the Custom
colors area.
To access the Color dialog box, click the Custom button in the Color Editor dialog
box.
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box
Use the Hatch Brush Editor dialog box to set a fill. The Hatch Brush Editor dialog box
contains the following controls and tabs:
Visible Displays or hides the pattern. Select this check

box to display the selected pattern.
• “Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Solid Tab”

• “Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Hatch Tab”
• “Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Gradient Tab”
• “Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Image Tab”
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Solid Tab

Use the Solid tab to set a solid color as the fill. The Solid tab contains the following
controls:

opaque.
Custom Lets you define a custom color to use. The Color

dialog box opens, see “Color Dialog Box”.
OK/Cancel Click OK to use the selection. Click Cancel to

close the dialog box without making a selection.

Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Hatch Tab

Use the Hatch tab to set a pattern as the fill. Click OK to apply the selection. The
Hatch tab contains the following controls:
Hatch Style Select the pattern you want to use. These display
using the currently selected background and
foreground colors.
Background/ Select the color you want to use for the

Foreground background and foreground of the pattern. This
opens the Color Editor, see “Color Editor Dialog
Box”.
% Lets you set transparency for your color, where

opaque.
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Gradient Tab

Use the Gradient tab to set a blend of two or three colors as the fill. Click OK to apply
the selection. The Gradient tab contains the following controls:
Format Tab


opposite corner.

Colors Tab


output.

opaque.
Options Tab

Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Image Tab

Use the Image tab to select an existing graphic file or picture to use as the fill. Click
OK to apply the selection. The Image tab contains the following controls:
Browse Lets you navigate to then select the graphic file

you want to use. When selected, the graphic
displays in the tab.
Style Lets you define how the graphic is used in the fill.
• Stretch—Resizes the image to fill the usable
space.
• Tile—Repeats the image to fill the usable
space.
• Center—Puts the image in the horizontal and
vertical center.
• Normal—Puts the image in the top-left corner

Pointer Dialog Box
Use the Pointer dialog box to set up a pointers for use with leader lines. The Pointer
dialog box contains the following controls:
Visible Sets whether a pointer displays or not.
3D Lets you display the pointer in three dimensions.

Inflate Margins Adjusts the margins of the pointers to display

pointers that are close to the edge of the graph. If
you clear this option, pointers near the edge of the
graph might only partly display.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the pointers. The Hatch
Dialog Box”. You must clear Default to use this
option.
Default Lets you select the default format for the pointers.
This overrides any pattern selection.
Color Each Assigns a different color to each pointer.
Style Lets you select the shape used to represent the

pointers.
Width/Height Lets you set a size for the pointers.
Border Lets you set the outline of the shapes that

represent the pointers. The Border Editor opens,
Transparency Lets you set transparency for the pointers, where

opaque.
To access the Pointer dialog box, click Chart Settings in the Graph dialog box, then
click Series > Marks > Arrow.

Change Series Title Dialog Box
Use the Change Series Title dialog box to change the title of a selected series. Type the
new series title, then click OK to apply the new name or Cancel to close the dialog
box without making a change.
To access the Change Series title dialog box, click Chart Settings in the Graph dialog
box, then click the Series tab, then the Title button.
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box
Use the Chart Tools Gallery dialog box to add tools to your graph. For more informa-
tion, see “Chart Options Dialog Box - Tools Tab” on page 9-429.
Click one of the following links to learn more about the Chart Tools Gallery dialog
box:
• “Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Series Tab”

• “Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Axis Tab”
• “Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Other Tab”
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Series Tab

Use the Series tab to add tools related to the series in your chart. The Series tab
contains the following tools:
Cursor
Displays a draggable cursor line on top of the series. After you have added the Cursor
tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:
Series Lets you select the series to which you want to

apply the tool.
Style Lets you select a horizontal line, vertical line, or

both as the format of the tool.
Snap Causes the cursor tool to adhere to the selected

series.
Follow Mouse Causes the cursor tool to follow your movements

of the mouse.

Pen Lets you define the cursor tool. The Border Editor
Drag Marks
Lets you drag series marks. To use this tool, you must display the marks for a selected
series, see “Marks Tab”. After you have added the Drag Marks tool to your graph, you
can modify the following settings:

apply the tool.
Reset Positions Moves any marks you have dragged back to their
original position.
Drag Point
Lets you drag a series point. After you have added the Drag Point tool to your graph,
you can modify the following settings:

apply the tool.
Style Lets you constrain the movement of the series

point to one axis or both (no constraint).
Mouse Button Lets you select the mouse button you click to drag.
Cursor Lets you select the appearance of the cursor when

using the tool.
Draw Line
Lets you draw a line on the graph by dragging. After you have added the Draw Line
tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:

apply the tool.
Pen Lets you define the line. The Border Editor opens,
Button Lets you select the mouse button you click to drag.

Enable Draw Enables the Draw Line tool. Select this check box
to let you draw lines, clear it to prevent you from
drawing lines.
Enable Select Lets you select and move lines that you have
drawn. Select this check box, then click and drag
the line you want to move. clear this check box if
you want to prevent lines from being moved.
Remove All Removes all lines you have drawn.
Gantt Drag
Lets you move and resize Gantt bars by dragging. This is unused by Bentley
Image
Displays a picture using the selected series axes as boundaries. After you have added
the Image tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:

apply the tool.
Browse Lets you navigate to and select the image you

want to use. Browse is unavailable when there is a
selected image. To select a new image, first clear
the existing one.
Clear Lets you remove a selected image. Clear is

unavailable when there is no selected image.
Mode Lets you set up the image you select.

• Normal—Puts the background image in the
top-left corner of the graph.
• Stretch—Resizes the background image to fill
the entire background of the graph. The image
you select conforms to the series to which you
apply it.
• Center—Puts the background image in the
horizontal and vertical center of the graph.
• Tile—Repeats the background image as
many times as needed to fill the entire back-
ground of the graph.

Mark Tips
Displays data in tooltips when you move the cursor over the graph. After you have
added the Mark Tips tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:

apply the tool
Style Lets you select what data the tooltips display.
Action Sets when the tooltips display. Select Click if you

want the tooltips to display when you click, or
select Move if you want the tooltips to display
when you move the mouse.
Delay Lets you delay how quickly the tooltip displays.
Nearest Point
Lets you define and display an indicator when you are near a point in the selected
series. After you have added the Nearest Point tool to your graph, you can modify the
following settings:

apply the tool.
Fill Lets you set the fill for the nearest-point indicator.
The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see “Hatch Brush
Border Lets you set the outline of the nearest-point

indicator. The Border Editor opens, see “Border
Draw Line Creates a line from the tip of the cursor to the
series point.
Style Sets the shape for the indicator
Size Sizes the indicator.
Pie Slices
Outlines or expands slices of pie charts when you move the cursor or click them. This
is unused by Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition.

Series Animation
Animates series points. After you have added the Series Animation tool to your graph,
you can modify the following settings:xxxx seems broken.

apply the tool.
Steps Lets you select the steps used in the animation. Set
this control towards 100 for smoother animation
and away from 100 for quicker, but less smooth
animation.
Start at min. value Lets you start the animation at the series’
minimum value. clear this check box to set your
own start value.
Start value Sets the value at which the animation starts. To use
this control, you must clear Start at min. value.
Execute! Starts the animation.
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Axis Tab

Use the Axis tab to add tools related to the axes in your chart. The Axis tab contains
the following tools:
Axis Arrows
Lets you add arrows to the axes. The arrows permit you to scroll along the axes. After
you have added the Axis Arrows tool to your graph, you can modify the following
settings:
Axis Select the axis to which you want to add arrows.
Border Lets you set the outline of the arrows. The Border
Editor opens, see “Border Editor Dialog Box”.
Fill Lets you set the fill for the arrows. The Hatch
Dialog Box”.
Length Lets you set the length of the arrows.
Inverted Scroll Lets you change the direction in which the arrows
let you scroll.

Scroll Changes the magnitude of the scroll. Set a smaller

percentage to reduce the amount of scroll caused
by one click of an axis arrow, or set a larger
percentage to increase the amount of scroll caused
by a click.
Position Lets you set an axis arrow at the start, end, or both
positions of the axis.
Color Band
Lets you apply a color band to your graph for a range of values you select from an
axis. After you have added the Color Band tool to your graph, you can modify the
following settings:
Axis Select the axis that you want to use to define the
range for the color band.
Border Lets you set the outline of the color band. The
Box”.
Pattern Lets you set the fill of the color band. The Hatch
Dialog Box”.
Gradient Lets you set a gradient for the color band. A

gradient overrides any solid color fill you might
have set. The Gradient Editor opens, see “Gradient
Color Lets you set a solid color for the color band. The
Box”.
Start Value Sets where the color band begins. Specify a value
on the selected axis.
End Value Sets where the color band ends. Specify a vale on
the selected axis.

opaque.

Draw Behind Lets you position the color band behind the
graphs. If you clear this check box, the color band
appears in front of your graphs and hides them,
unless you have transparency set.
Color Line
Lets you apply a color line, or plane in three dimensions, at a point you set at a value
on an axis. After you have added the Color Line tool to your graph, you can modify
the following settings:
Axis Select the axis that you want to use to define the
location for the line.
Border Lets you set the outline of the color line. The
Box”.
Value Sets where the color line is. Specify a value on the
selected axis.
Allow Drag Lets you drag the line or lock the line in place.
Select this check box if you want to permit
dragging. clear this check box if you want the line
to be fixed in one location.
Drag Repaint Lets you smooth the appearance of the line as you
drag it.
No Limit Drag Lets you drag the line beyond the axes of the
graph, or constrain the line to boundaries defined
by those axes. Select this check box to permit
unconstrained dragging.
Draw Behind Lets you position the color line behind the graphs.
If you clear this check box, the color band appears
in front of your graphs. This is more noticeable in
3D graphs.
Draw 3D Lets you display the line as a 2D image in a 3D

chart. If you have a 3D chart (see “3D Tab”), clear
this check box to display the line as a line rather
than a plane.

Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Other Tab

Use the Other tab to add tools to your chart, including annotations. The Other tab
contains the following tools:
3D Grid Transpose
Swaps the X and Z coordinates to rotate the series through 90 degrees. This is unused
by Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition.
Annotation
Lets you add text to the chart. After you have added the Annotation tool to your graph,
you can modify the following settings:
Options Tab
Text Lets you enter the text you want for your
annotation.
Text alignment Sets the alignment of the text inside the annotation
box.
Cursor Lets you set the style of the cursor when you move
it over the annotation.
Position Tab
Auto Lets you select a standard annotation position.
Custom Lets you select a custom position for the

annotation. Select this check box to override the
Auto setting and enable the Left and Top controls.
Left/Top Lets you set a position from the Left and Top
edges of the graph tab for the annotation.
Callout Tab
Border Lets you set up the leader line. The Border Editor
Pointer Lets you set up the arrow head (if any) used by the
leader line. The Pointer dialog box opens, see
“Pointer Dialog Box”.
Position Sets the position of the callout.

Distance Lets you set the distance between the leader line
and the graph of the selected series.
Arrow head Lets you select the kind of arrow head you want to
add to the leader line.
Size Lets you set the size of the arrow head.
Format Tab
Color Lets you set a color for the fill of the boxes. The
Box”.
Frame Lets you define the outline of the boxes. The

Border Editor opens.
Pattern Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the boxes. The
Round Frame Lets you round the corners of the boxes. Select
Transparent Lets you set the fill of the boxes as transparent. If

the shape is completely transparent, you cannot
see it, so clear this check box if you cannot see a
shape that you expect to see
Transparency Lets you set transparency for the boxes, where 100
opaque.
Text Tab
Font Lets you set the font properties for text. This
Color Lets you select the color for the text font. Double-
click the colored square between Font and Fill to
open the Color Editor dialog box.
Fill Lets you set a pattern for the text font. The Hatch
Brush Editor opens.


text. Select this check box to display the
shadow.
large amount.
Gradient Tab
Format Format—Lets you set up the gradient’s

properties.
• Visible—Sets whether a gradient displays or
not. Select this check box to display a gradient
you have set up, clear this check box to hide
the gradient.
• Direction—Sets the direction of the gradient.
Vertical causes the gradient to display from
top to bottom, Horizontal displays a gradient
from right to left, and Backward/Forward diag-
onal display gradients from the left and right
bottom corners to the opposite corner.
• Angle—Lets you customize the direction of
the gradient beyond the Direction selections.

Colors Lets you set the colors used for your gradients.
The Start, Middle, and End selections open the
Color Editor, see “Color Editor Dialog Box”.
• Start—Lets you set the starting color for your
gradient.
• Middle—Lets you select a middle color for
your gradient. The Color Editor opens. Select
the No Middle Color check box if you want a
two-color gradient.
• End—Lets you select the final color for your
gradient.
• Gamma Correction—Lets you control the
brightness with which the background
displays to your screen; select or clear this
check box to change the brightness of the
background on-screen. This does not affect
printed output.
your gradient, where 100 is completely trans-
Options Lets you control the affect of the start and end
colors on the gradient, the middle color is not
used.
• Sigma—Lets you use the options controls.
Select this check box to use the controls in the
Options tab.
• Sigma Focus—Lets you set the location on
the chart background of the gradient’s end
color.
• Sigma Scale—Lets you control how much of
the gradient’s end color is used by the
gradient background.
Shadow Tab


Vertical Size.

Color Editor opens.
Brush Editor opens.

opaque.
Bevels Tab

bevel effect, for the outside of the legend.
values.

bevel effect, for the inside of the legend.
value.
Page Number
Lets you add a page number annotation. For more information, see “Annotation”.
Rotate
Lets you rotate the chart by dragging. After you have added the Rotate tool to your
graph, you can modify the following settings:
Inverted Reverses the direction of the rotation with respect

to the direction you move the mouse.
Style Lets you rotate horizontally, vertically, or both.

Rotation is horizontal rotation about a vertical
axis, whereas elevation is vertical rotation about a
horizontal axis.
Outline Lets you set the outline. The Border Editor opens,

Print Preview Window
TeeChart Gallery Dialog Box
Use the TeeChart Gallery dialog box to change the appearance of a series.
Series
The available series chart designs include:
• Standard
• Stats
• Financial
• Extended
• 3D
• Other
• View 3D—Lets you view the chart design in two or three dimensions. Select this
check box to view the charts in 3D, clear it to view them in 2D.
• Smooth—Smooths the display of the charts. Select this check box to smooth the
display, clear it to turn off smoothing.
Functions
The available function chart designs include:
• Standard
• Financial
• Stats
• Extended
• View 3D—Lets you view the chart design in two or three dimensions. Select this
check box to view the charts in 3D, clear it to view them in 2D.
• Smooth—Smooths the display of the charts. Select this check box to smooth the
display, clear it to turn off smoothing.

The Print Preview window can be used to print documents from Bentley StormCAD
V8 XM Edition, such as reports and graphs. This window lets you see the current view
of the document as it will be printed and lets you define the print settings, such as
selecting a printer to use.

The following controls are available in the Print Preview window:
Contents Displays a table of contents for the document, if

one is created.
Print Opens the Print dialog box and lets you print the
document as it appears in the preview pane. You
can change printers in the Print dialog box, if you
want.
Copy Copies the document to the Windows clipboard,

so you can paste it into other applications.
Find Lets you search for words in the document. To

find a word, click Find, in the Find dialog box,
type the word you want to find, then click Find
Next. Words that are found are highlighted in the
print preview; click Find Next to continue
searching the document.
Single/Multiple Page Displays the document as a single page or multiple

View pages in the preview pane.
Zoom In/Out Enlarges or reduces the display of the document in

the print preview.
Note: Changing the zoom only affects

how the document displays on-
screen, it does not affect how
the document prints.
Zoom Combo Lets you select or type the amount of zoom used to
display the document, where 100% is full size.
Previous Page Displays to the previous page in the document.
Next Page Displays the next page in the document.
Page Displays the current page number and the total

pages in the current chart. You can type the page
number you want to display, and press Enter to
display it.

Backward/Forward Displays the page that was previously displayed.

Backward and Forward are based on your
navigation in the document and not on the page
order of the document. For example, if you
navigated from page 2 directly to page 6, clicking
Backward would display page 2 again; if you
then clicked Forward, page 6 would display
again.

Chapter
Theory 10
This appendix provides an overview of the methods that StormCAD uses to perform
the hydrologic and hydraulic computation within the program.
The basic process of computation for StormCAD proceeds as follows:
• Surface loads are generated and gutter/inlet computations are performed.

• Intercepted loads are routed downstream through the piping network.
• Headlosses are computed upstream through the piping network.
There is a strong inter-dependency between load routing and hydraulic grade compu-
tation. The pipe profiles have an effect on travel times (which affect rational loads),
and the loads have a direct effect on the pipes' hydraulic characteristics. Because of
this close relationship, the calculation process is an iterative procedure, repeating
until convergence is achieved or until the maximum number of iterations has been
exhausted.
Note: All or portions of a storm system may be selected for automatic

design. This preliminary design can be used to set pipe and
structure elevations, as well as to size the pipes and
inletlengths.
Hydrologic Principles
StormCAD offers several ways to enter and compute flows, and even has the flexi-
bility to model flows that do not necessarily originate from a rainfall event. The three
basic types of loading that can be modeled by StormCAD are:
• Rational Loading
• Additional Loading
• Known Loading

Each of these loads are combined to give the total flow at any point within the storm
sewer system, thus making it possible to easily combine loads from different sources,
such as rational loading from a parking lot combined with additional loading from an
industrial discharge.
QT = QR + QA + QK
Where:
• QT = Total Load (cubic meters/second, cubic feet/second)
• QR = Rational Load (cubic meters/second, cubic feet/second)
• QA = Additional Load (cubic meters/second, cubic feet/second)
• QK = Known Load ((cubic meters/second, cubic feet/second)
Rational Loading
The analysis of storm sewers is usually based on testing the ability of the piping
system to appropriately handle peak flows without flooding roadways or scouring
the pipes. The rational method is a popular method for estimating peak flows, based
on the size and runoff coefficient of a watershed, and the intensity of the storm event.
The fundamental rational formula is:
Other forms of the rational method are commonly used which incorporate values in
different units to make the order of magnitude of parameters more suitable for hand
calculations. For example, the rational formula is often used with watershed area in
acres and rainfall intensity in inches per hour. However, using this formula as-is can
result in common mistakes, such as omitting the required unit conversion from acre-
inches per hour to cubic feet per second (1.008). Conversions such as these are auto-
matically performed within StormCAD to give you the most accurate results possible.

Theory
Catchment Areas
A catchment is the geographical area that "catches" the rainfall and directs it towards a
common discharge point within the storm collection network.
Rational Coefficient
The rational C coefficient is the parameter that is the most open to engineering judg-
ment. It is a unitless number between 0.0 and 1.0 that relates the rate of rainfall over a
catchment to the rate of discharge from that catchment. A value of 0.0 implies that
none of the rainfall is discharged from the catchment, while a value of 1.0 implies that
all of the rainfall is immediately discharged from the catchment.
The coefficient is highly dependent on land use and slope approaching 1.0 for imper-
vious ground covers, such as pavement. For some common C values for various
types of land cover and slope, see the Engineer's Reference section at the end of this
appendix.
Composite Catchments
Most catchments are comprised of more than one type of ground cover. For example,
a roadside drainage inlet may accept flow from the paved roadway, the curbside grass,
and a nearby wooded area. To account for the effects of each of these areas,
multiply each corresponding sub-catchment area and rational coefficient, then add
the values to obtain the total CA (C·A) for the entire catchment.

Note: Since the rational coefficient is unitless, CA values have units of

area. A weighted value for the rational coefficient can be
determined by dividing the catchment's total CA by the total
catchment area. Rather than tracking area and weighted
rational coefficients separately, rational loads are often
described solely by using the total CA value. Since the C
coefficient and area are multiplied together in the rational
formula anyway, there is no adverse effect of this simplification
on flow determination.
Time of Concentration
Some locations within a catchment are hydraulically closer to the discharge point
than others. In other words, it may start raining right now, but it could be several
minutes (or even hours) before the water that lands on some parts of the catchment
arrive at the discharge point. Rational method hydrology is based on contributing
flow from the entire catchment area. The time that it takes for water to go from the
most hydraulically remote area to reach the discharge point is the governing time to
be used in the Rational Method. This is called the time of concentration.
Note: There are numerous methods for calculating the time of

concentration, based on various federal and local regulations,
as well as scientific publications. Although calculation
methods vary significantly, they are all based on similar factors
such as ground cover, ground slope, and travel distance.
System Time / Controlling Time / Duration

Similar to a time of concentration, a system time (or controlling time) is the amount of
time it takes for all contributing parts of the storm sewer to reach a given location.
This includes a catchment's time of concentration, and pipe travel times. When
combining rational loads, the controlling time is the greatest of the individual loads'
system times. This system time is used as the duration of the storm when determining
peak intensity, and therefore peak flow.
To avoid unreasonably low storm durations and unreasonably high rainfall intensi-
ties, many regulatory agencies impose minimum storm durations, typically 5 or 10
minutes. StormCAD allows you to specify a minimum storm duration and uses this as
the controlling time when the computed time is too low. In these cases, StormCAD
carries the computed system time throughout the system, but continues to calculate
intensity based on the minimum allowed time (until the system time rises above the
minimum).

Theory
For example, consider a catchment at I-1 with a time of concentration of 4 minutes,

and a minimum allowable duration of 5 minutes:
I-1 Catchment time of concentration: 4.0 minutes
StormCAD computes flow based on: 5.0 minutes
P-1 Pipe travel time: 0.5 minutes
J-1 System time (4.0 + 0.5): 4.5 minutes
P-2 Pipe travel time: 1.0 minutes
O-1 System time (4.5 + 1.0): 5.5 minutes
This 5.5 minutes is used as the duration in the intensity vs. duration equation used to
calculate i in determining the flow using:
Q = iΣ ( CA )
See “Flow Balance at Junctions” for more information.
Rainfall Intensity
Rainfall intensity is the measure of how "hard" it is raining. The harder it rains, the
higher the intensity. Intensity is defined as the volume of rainfall that falls for a given
time period divided by that time. For any given rainfall storm event, on average the
longer the storm lasts, the lower the overall intensity will be.
This is consistent with what we would intuitively expect. Any given storm may rain
hard for a short period of time, but it builds to that intensity and falls from that inten-
sity over a period of time.

Return Period and Frequency

The return period and frequency are statistical descriptors of the severity of a storm
event. The return period is the expected length of time between two rainfall
events that exceed a specific magnitude. Frequency, or exceedance probability, is
the inverse of the return period. As you might expect, the higher the return period, the
more infrequent the storm event, and the higher the intensity of the rainfall.
For example, a storm with a 5-year return period represents an event that is expected
to be exceeded once every five years (on average). The frequency is 1/5, which means
that there is a 20% probability of a storm exceeding that magnitude occurring in any
given year. Note that the return period does not mean that two storm events exceeding
a given magnitude will not occur in the same year, nor does it guarantee that a storm
event exceeding this magnitude will occur within any given five year span. It just
means that these storms will occur at an average rate of once every five years.
Intensity Durations Frequency Data

The intensity of a rainfall event is directly related to the duration and return period of
the storm. Often this data is presented in the form of Intensity-Duration-Frequency
(IDF) curves, as in the example graph below:
StormCAD applies rainfall data in one of two other forms:
• Rainfall Tables
• Rainfall Equations

Theory
Rainfall Tables
Creating rainfall tables is a simple matter of picking values from a set of rainfall
curves, and entering them into the table. For duration values that do not correspond
directly to values entered in the table, intensities are linearly interpolated or extrapo-
lated.
Rainfall Equations Theory

IDF curves can generally be fit to equations with good accuracy. If you do not have
an appropriate equation from your local regulating agency, a rainfall table may be
more suitable.
The most common form of these equations is:
a
i = --------------------- (10.1)
n
(b + D)
Where i = rainfall intensity (in/hr.)

D = rainfall duration (min.)
a, b, n = rainfall equation coefficients
Basic Assumptions about the Rational Method

There are several assumptions that form the basis for rational method hydrology:
• Drainage areas are smaller than 300 acres (120 hectares).

• Peak flow occurs when the entire catchment is contributing.
• Rainfall intensity is uniform over a duration of time equal to or greater than the
time of concentration.
• Rational coefficients are independent of the intensity of the rainfall.
Additional Flow Loading
Additional flows are fixed loads that are not subject to peaking or other fluctuations
like rational loads. Additional flows are propagated directly downstream, and
combine as the simple sum of the individual additional loads, including additional
loads specified at an inlet.

Tip: Negative additional loads are permissible and behave just as

any positive additional load. They lower the total load by the
fixed amount. The one exception to this occurs when the total
load drops below zero. If the total load does drop below zero, an
"empty" load is propagated downstream (a load with a rational
CA of zero, a known flow of zero, etc.).
Known Flow Loading
Known flows are a special type of fixed load. Known flows remain constant as they
progress downstream, and combine directly as a simple sum similar to additional
loads. The overwrite behavior of known loads is special. When another known load
is specified at a downstream inlet, the local known load replaces the upstream known
load, rather than the local known load adding directly to the upstream known load. If
the local known flow is left equal to 0, the upstream flow is propagated downstream
without being overwritten. A non-zero flow input at any inlet will be used regardless
of the magnitude of the combined incoming known flow loads.
Known Flows Prior to StormCAD v3

The additive behavior of known flows at the confluence of two or more storm sewer
branches was changed in Version 3.0 of StormCAD. Prior to Version 3.0, the program
would add the incoming known flows at an inlet and then compare these loads against
the user input known flow loading at the confluence, using the greater of the two
values. In other words, it was possible for a user to input a known flow at a conflu-
ence inlet, but the input flow would be overridden if it was lower than the sum of the
incoming upstream known flows.
This implementation was revisited during development of version 3.0 and it was
decided that the most useful and expected behavior is to use the input known flow in
all cases.
Note: This change should not impact the computational results of files
created prior to V3 that employ known flow loads to model flows
computed by external methods. StormCAD v3 and up will still
use the known flow quantities as propagated during the
calculation with prior versions.
Location of Flows
Although the type of flow is indicative of its origin (for example a rational flow prob-
ably comes from a catchment area), StormCAD allows flow to be added from several
source locations. StormCAD also tracks flows and flow types as they progress
through the system, making it easy to control and observe storm sewer flows.

Theory
Flow (and related) results are broken down into different groups in StormCAD. The
groups are:
• System Flows - total flows in the subsurface (conduit) network, on the down-
stream side of a catch basin, manhole or transition node. The system flows are
equal to the sum of the Local and Upstream flows.
• Local Flows - flows that occur at the catch basin where the result is reported. For
example the Local Rational Flow at catch basin is the 'rational flow' (i.e. catch-
ment runoff computed using the Rational Method) generated by catchments that
discharge directly to that catch basin.
• Upstream Flows - total flows in the subsurface (conduit) network, on the
upstream side of a catch basin, manhole or transition node.
• Intercepted Flows - flows that are intercepted or captured by the inlet at a catch
basin node.
• Bypass Flows - flows that are not intercepted by the inlet at a catch basin node,
and continue on downstream via a gutter element
• Carryover Flows - flows at an inlet that were bypassed, via a gutter, from the
inlet upstream.
• Total Inlet Flows - the sum of the Local and Carryover flows that reach an inlet
via the surface network. In other words, the total flow that reaches an inlet.
In addition, StormCAD breaks flows down into different flow types. The types are:
• Rational Flow - catchment runoff computed using the Rational Method

• Additional Subsurface Flow - flow added directly to the subsurface (conduit)
network. This can represent a fixed inflow from a know source, such as an indus-
trial discharge
• Additional Carryover Flow - additional flow in the surface (gutter) network.
This can represent gutter flow that bypassed an upstream inlet, where that
upstream inlet is not included in the current StormCAD model
• Additional Flow - the sum of Additional Subsurface and Additional Carryover
flows after they have mixed together in the subsurface (conduit) network
• Known Flow - a flow where the total flow rate is know at various points in the
system. A known flow downstream will overwrite (not add to) a known flow
upstream. This can be used to represent flows derived from flow monitoring
results.

• Fixed Flow - the sum of Additional and Known flows

Theory
The major locations of load input and reporting are as follows:
• Surface Catchment Loads

• Surface Carryover Loads
• Inlet Approach Loads
• Inlet Captured (Intercepted) Loads
• Inlet Bypassed Loads
• Subsurface Piped Loads
• Subsurface External Loads
• Subsurface Total Piped Loads
Although input flow loads such as surface catchment loads and subsurface external
loads are only editable for inlets, calculated loads, such as subsurface total piped load,
are computed for all nodes.
Note: See also: “Flow Balance at Junctions”.
Surface Catchment Loads

The surface catchment load includes rational loading (areas, rational coeffi-
cients, and time of concentration) from the local catchment.

Tip: This load may also include an additional load representing a

fixed flow that contributes to the gutter flow approaching the
inlet (similar to subsurface external loads). Note that
supplementary rational gutter loads that are not part of the
StormCAD system can be accounted for simply as another sub-
catchment area and C coefficient.
Surface Carryover Loads

Surface carryover loads are loads that have been bypassed from upstream gutter inlets.
Note that the term "upstream" in this case refers to the directionality of the gutter
network, which does not necessarily correspond to the directionality of the subsurface
piped network. In fact, carryover loads may even come from inlets that are part of a
separate pipe network. Note that carryover loads are assumed to have the same time
of concentration as the surface catchment load. The times of concentration from their
original catchments are not considered.
Inlet Approach Loads

The inlet approach load is the sum of the surface catchment load and the surface carry-
over loads. This represents the total flow that is in the gutter or ditch immediately
before it is captured or bypassed.
Inlet Captured (Intercepted) Loads

The load intercepted by a surface inlet is calculated based on the HEC-22 method-
ology, the inlet maximum capacity curve, or capture curve, depending on which type
of inlet is used. This represents the load that is actually captured by the inlet and
enters the subsurface structure. The captured load is assumed to have the same
proportions of load (rational and additional) as the approach load. Inlet captured loads
are represented as a percentage of the inlet approach load.
Inlet Bypassed Loads

An inlet's bypassed load is the part of the approach load that is not intercepted by the
surface inlet. This load is assumed to have the same proportion of load (rational and
additional) as the approach load. Bypassed loads may be directed to any other inlet in
any pipe network, or may be lost. Lost flows are accumulated and accounted for at
outlets, but never contribute to subsurface piped flow.
Subsurface Piped Loads

Subsurface piped loads are those that enter a subsurface structure from upstream
pipes. These loads combine in accordance with each load component's behavior.
This means that rational loads are normalized to a common time, additional loads
are summed directly, and so on. Because of rational load normalization, a node's total
upstream flow may be less than the sum of each pipe's total flow.

Theory
Subsurface External Loads

Subsurface external loads are user-entered loads that represent flows entering the
pipe network at and below an inlet, such as a roof or footing drain or another storm
sewer branch. These loads are not used to analyze or design the inlet structure, but are
used in analyzing or designing the pipe network.
Subsurface Total Piped Load

The total piped load is the total load leaving a node, and is calculated by summing all
of the contributing loads: intercepted surface load, subsurface piped loads, and subsur-
face external loads. For nodes where there are no surface loads or external loads
entering, the total piped load is equal to the sum of subsurface piped loads (upstream).
Note: The rational component of the total piped load will be based on
the overall controlling time, which is the largest of the upstream
system time, the intercepted load time of concentration, or the
external load time of concentration.
The Energy Principle
The first law of thermodynamics states that for any given system, the change in energy
is equal to the difference between the heat transferred to the system and the work done
by the system on its surroundings during a given time interval.
The energy referred to in this principle represents the total energy of the system minus
the sum of the potential, kinetic, and internal (molecular) forms of energy, such as
electrical and chemical energy. The internal energy changes are commonly disre-
garded in water distribution analysis because of their relatively small magnitude.
In hydraulic applications, energy is often represented as energy per unit weight,

resulting in units of length. Using these length equivalents gives engineers a better feel
for the resulting behavior of the system. When using these length equivalents, the state
of the system is expressed in terms of head. The energy at any point within a hydraulic
system is often represented in three parts:
Pressure head: p/γ (10.2)
Elevation head: z (10.3)
Velocity head: V2/2g (10.4)

Where p = Pressure (N/m2, lb/ft2 )

γ = Specific weight (N/m3, lb/ft3 )
z = Elevation (m, ft)
V = Velocity (m/sec., ft/sec.)
g = Gravitational acceleration (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2)
These quantities can be used to express the headloss or head gain between two loca-
tions using the energy equation.
The Energy Equation

In addition to pressure head, elevation head, and velocity head, there may also be head
added to the system, by a pump for instance, and head removed from the system due
to friction. These changes in head are referred to as head gains and headlosses, respec-
tively. Balancing the energy across two points in the system, we then obtain the energy
equation:
p1 V12 p2 V22
+ z1 + + hp = + z2 + + HL
γ 2g γ 2g (10.5)
Where p = Pressure (N/m2, lb/ft2 )

γ = Specific weight (N/m3, lb/ft3 )
z = Elevation at the centroid (m, ft)
V = Velocity (m/sec., ft/sec.)
g = Gravitational acceleration (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2)
hp = Head gain from pump (m, ft)
HL = Combined headloss (m, ft)
The components of the energy equation can be combined to express two useful quanti-
ties, which are the hydraulic grade and the energy grade.

Theory
Hydraulic Grade
The hydraulic grade is the sum of the pressure head (p/γ) and elevation head (z). The
hydraulic head represents the height to which a water column would rise in a piezom-
eter. The plot of the hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the hydraulic
grade line, or HGL.
Energy Grade
The energy grade is the sum of the hydraulic grade and the velocity head ( V2/2g ).
This is the height to which a column of water would rise in a pitot tube. The plot of the
hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the energy grade line, or EGL. At a
lake or reservoir, where the velocity is essentially zero, the EGL is equal to the HGL,
as can be seen in the following figure.
Figure 10-1: Plot of EGL and HGL
HGL Convergence Test

In full network calculation this value is taken as the maximum absolute change
between two successive solves of hydraulic grade at any junction or inlet in the
system. This test is used to optimize the performance of system solutions. It mini-
mizes the number and extent of hydraulic grade line computations in the upstream
direction. For a given discharge, the upstream propagation of headlosses through pipes
will continue until two successive calculations change by an absolute difference of
less than this test value.
The HGL Convergence Test value is also used in the standard step gradually varied
flow profiling algorithm. If two successive depth iterations are within this absolute
test value, the step is solved.

Friction Loss Methods
There are many equations that approximate friction losses associated with the flow of
liquid through a given section. Commonly used friction methods include:
• Chezy's Equation
• Kutter's Equation
• Manning's Equation
• Darcy-Weisbach Equation
• Colebrook-White Equation
• Hazen-Williams Equation
Friction losses are generally based on the relationships between fluid velocity, section
roughness, depth of flow, and the friction slope (headloss per unit length of conduit).
Chézy’s Equation
Chézy’s equation is rarely used directly, but it is the basis for several other methods,
including Manning’s equation and Kutter’s equation. Chézy’s equation is:
Q = C ⋅ A⋅ R ⋅ S (10.6)
Where Q = Discharge in the section (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

C = Chézy’s roughness coefficient (m1/2/sec., ft1/2/
sec.)
A = Flow area (m2, ft2 )
R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft)
S = Friction slope (m/m, ft/ft)
Kutter’s Equation
Kutter’s equation can be used to determine the roughness coefficient in Chézy’s
formula, and is most commonly used for sanitary sewer analysis. Kutter’s equation is
as follows:

Theory
Note: Kutter’s roughness coefficients are the same as Manning’s

roughness coefficients.
k 2 k3
k1 +
+
C= S n
n  k2 
1+ ⋅ k + 
R 1 S 
(10.7)
Where C = Chézy’s roughness coefficient (m1/2/sec., ft1/2/

sec.)
R = Hydraulic roughness (unitless)
n = Kutter’s roughness (unitless)
k1 = Constant (23.0 SI, 41.65 U.S. customary)
Manning’s Equation
Manning's equation is one of the most popular methods in use today for free surface
flow (and, like Kutter’s equation, is based on Chézy’s equation). For Manning’s equa-
tion, the roughness coefficient in Chézy’s equation is calculated as:
R1/ 6
C=k⋅
n (10.8)
Where C = Chézy’s roughness coefficient (m1/2/sec., ft1/2/

sec.)
n = Manning’s roughness (sec./m1/3 )
k = Constant (1.00m1/3/m1/3 SI, 1.49 ft1/3/ft1/3 U.S.
customary)

Substituting this roughness into Chézy’s equation, we obtain the well-known

Manning’s equation:
Note: Manning’s roughness coefficients are the same as the

roughness coefficients used in Kutter’s equation.
k
Q = ⋅ A ⋅ R 2 / 3 ⋅ S 1/ 2
n (10.9)
Where Q = Discharge (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

k = Constant (1.00m1/3/m1/3 SI, 1.49ft1/3/ft1/3 U.S.
customary)
n = Manning’s coefficient (unitless)
A = Flow area (m2, ft2 )
Darcy-Weisbach Equation
Because of non-empirical origins, the Darcy-Weisbach equation is viewed by many
engineers as the most accurate method for modeling friction losses. It most commonly
takes the following form:
L V2
hf = f ⋅
D 2g (10.10)
Where hf = Headloss (m, ft)
f = Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (unitless)

D = Pipe diameter (m, ft)
L = Pipe length (m, ft)
V = Flow velocity (m/sec., ft/sec.)
g = Gravitational acceleration (m/sec.2, ft/sec.2 )

Theory
For section geometries that are not circular, this equation is adapted by relating a
circular section’s full flow hydraulic radius to its diameter:
A3 Q 2
=
T g (10.11)
Where A = Area of flow (m2, ft2 )

T = Top width of flow (m, ft)
Q = Section discharge (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
This can then be rearranged to the form:
R⋅S
Q = A ⋅ 8g ⋅
f
(10.12)
Where Q = Section discharge (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

A = Area of flow (m2, ft2 )
f = Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (unitless)
The Swamee and Jain equation can then be used to calculate the friction factor.
Swamee and Jain Equation
Note: The Kinematic Viscosity is used in determining the friction

coefficient in the Darcy-Weisbach Friction Method. The default
units are initially set by Haestad Methods.
The friction factor is dependent on the Reynolds number of the flow, which is depen-
dent on the flow velocity, which is dependent on the discharge. As you can see, this
process requires the iterative selection of a friction factor until the calculated
discharge agrees with the chosen friction factor.

1.325
f=
 
2
 k + 5 .74
0.9 


ln 

 3.7 D R
 e  (10.13)
Where f = Friction factor (unitless)

k = Roughness height (m, ft)
D = Pipe diameter (m, ft)
Re = Reynolds number (unitless)
Colebrook-White Equation
The Colebrook-White equation is used to iteratively calculate for the Darcy-Weisbach
friction Factor:
 k 
= −2 log 
1 2.51 

 +
f 
14.8 R Re f 
Free Surface (10.14)
 k 
= −2 log 
1 2.51
 + 

 
f 12.0 R Re f Full Flow (Closed Conduit) (10.15)
Where Re = Reynolds number (unitless)
k = Darcy-Weisbach roughness height (m, ft)

f = Friction factor (unitless)
Hazen-Williams Equation
The Hazen-Williams Formula is frequently used in the analysis of pressure pipe
systems (such as water distribution networks and sewer force mains). The formula is
as follows:
Q = k ⋅ C ⋅ A ⋅ R 0.63 ⋅ S 0.54
(10.16)

Theory
Where Q = Section discharge (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

C Hazen-Williams roughness coefficient (unitless)
A = Area of flow (m2, ft2 )
k = Constant (0.85 SI, 1.32 U.S. customary)
Flow Regime
Note: Based on the gradually varied flow analysis, different portions of

any given pipe may be under different flow regimes.
The hydraulic grade in a flow section depends heavily on the tailwater conditions,
pipe slope, discharge, and other conditions. The basic flow regimes that a pipe may
experience include:
• Pressure Flow
• Uniform (Normal) Flow
• Critical Flow
• Subcritical Flow
• Supercritical Flow
Pressure Flow
When a pipe is surcharged, headlosses are based on the full barrel area and wetted
perimeter. Because these characteristics are all functions of the section shape and size,
friction loss calculations are greatly simplified by pressurized conditions.
Uniform Flow and Normal Depth

Uniform flow refers to a hydraulic condition where the discharge and cross-sectional
area, and therefore the velocity, are constant throughout the length of the channel or
pipe. For a pipe flowing full, all that this requires is that the pipe be straight and have
no contractions or expansions. For a non-full section, however, there are a few addi-
tional points of interest:

• In order for the cross-sectional area to remain the same, the depth of flow must be
constant throughout the length of the channel. This requires that the friction slope
equal the constructed slope. This depth is called normal depth.
• Since the hydraulic grade line parallels the invert of the section and the velocity
does not change, the energy grade line is parallel to both the hydraulic grade line
and the section invert under uniform flow conditions.
In prismatic channels, flow conditions will typically approach normal depth if the
channel is sufficiently long.
Critical Flow, Critical Depth, and Critical Slope

Critical flow occurs when the specific energy of the section is at a minimum. This
condition is defined by the situation where:
A3 Q 2
=
T g (10.17)
Where A = Area of flow (m2, ft2 )

T = Top width of flow (m, ft)
Q = Section discharge (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
This is a relatively simple computation for simple geometric shapes, but can require
iterative calculation for more complex shapes (such as arches). Some sections may
even have several valid critical depths, making numerical convergence more difficult.
Critical depth refers to the depth of water in a channel for which the specific energy is
at its minimum.
Critical slope refers to the slope at which the critical depth of a pipe would be equal to
the normal depth.
Subcritical Flow
Subcritical flow refers to any flow condition where the Froude number is less than 1.0.
For this condition, the depth is above critical depth, and the velocity is below the crit-
ical depth velocity.

Theory
Supercritical Flow
Supercritical flow refers to any condition where the Froude number, or the ratio of
internal forces to gravity forces, is greater than 1.0. For this condition, the depth is
below critical depth, and the velocity is above the critical depth velocity.
Gradually Varied Flow Analysis
For free surface flow, depth rarely remains the same throughout the length of a
channel or pipe. Starting from a boundary control depth, the depth changes gradually,
increasing or decreasing until normal depth is achieved (if the conduit is sufficiently
long). The determination of a boundary control depth depends on both the tailwater
condition and the hydraulic characteristics of the conduit. The areas of classification
for gradually varied flow analysis are:
• Slope Classification
• Zone Classification
• Profile Classification
Slope Classification
The constructed slope of a conduit is a very important factor in determining the type
of gradually varied flow profile that exists. Slopes fall into one of three types, all of
which are handled by the program:
• Hydraulically Mild Slope

• Critical Slope
• Hydraulically Steep Slope
Any pipe can qualify as only one of these slope types for a given discharge. For
differing flows, though, a pipe may change between qualifying as a mild, critical, and
steep slope. These slopes do not relate to just the constructed slope, but to the
constructed slope relative to the critical slope for the given discharge.
Hydraulically Steep Slope
A hydraulically steep slope is a condition where the constructed slope is greater than
the critical slope. For this condition, the section’s normal depth is below critical depth,
and the flow regime is usually supercritical. However, high tailwater conditions may
cause flow to be subcritical.

Critical Slope
A pipe or channel may have exactly the same slope as the critical slope for the
discharge it carries. This is a very uncommon occurrence, but it is possible and the
program does calculate it appropriately. Critical depth is an inherently unstable
surface, so flow is most likely to be subcritical for these slopes.
Hydraulically Mild Slope
A hydraulically mild slope is a condition where the constructed slope is less than the
critical slope. For this condition, the section’s normal depth is above critical depth,
and the flow regime is usually subcritical.
Zone Classification
There are three zones that are typically used to classify gradually varied flow:
• Zone 1 is where actual flow depth is above both normal depth and critical depth.
• Zone 2 is where actual flow depth is between normal depth and critical depth.
• Zone 3 is where actual flow depth is below both normal depth and critical depth.
Profile Classification
The gradually varied flow profile classification is a combination of the slope classifi-
cation and the zone classification. For example, a pipe with a hydraulically mild slope
and flow in zone 1 would be considered a mild-1 profile (M1 for short). The program
will analyze most profile types, but will not analyze certain flow profile types that
occur rarely in conventional sewer system such as H3, M3, and S3.
The following diagrams describe the various profile classifications.

Theory
Zone 1 Profiles
y > yn; y > yc
M1 Unsealing Conjugate Conjugate
Mild Type I
Q < Qfull
yn' yn'
yn
yn yn
yc yc yc
M1 Slug Slug Sealing Conj.

full
Mild Type II
Q Q
yc yc
yn' yn'
yn yn
max
Q
C1
Critical Slope
yc,n
yn= yc
S1 Unsealing Conjugate
Steep Slope
yn'
yn< yc
yc
yc
yn yn
Horizontal Slope
H1 None H2 H3
yc yc yc
A1 None A2 A3
Adverse Slope
yc yc yc

Zone 2 Profiles Zone 3 Profiles

yn y y c; y n y c y y < yn; y < yc
M2 M3
yn yn
Mild Type I
Mild Type I
Q < Qfull
Q < Qfull
yc yc
M2 Slug Conjugate M3 Slug
full
full
Mild Type II
Mild Type II
Q Q
Q Q
yc yc
yn' yn'
yn yn
max
max
Q
Q
C2 Unstable C3
Critical Slope
Critical Slope
yc,n yc,n
yn= yc
yn= yc
S2 Slug Conjugate S2 S3
yc
Steep Slope
yc
Steep Slope
yn'
yn< yc
yn< yc
yn yn
yc
yn
Horizontal Slope
Horizontal Slope
H2 H2 H3
yc yc yc
A2 A2 A3
Adverse Slope
Adverse Slope
yc yc yc
Figure 10-2: Profile Classification

Theory
Energy Balance
Even for gradually varied flow, the solution is still a matter of balancing the energy
between the two ends of a pipe segment. The energy equation as it relates to each end
of a segment is as follows (note that the pressures for both ends are zero, since it is
free surface flow):
V12 V22
Z1 + = Z2 + + HL
2g 2g (10.18)
Where Z1 = Hydraulic grade at upstream end of segment (m,

ft)
V1 = Velocity at upstream end (m/sec., ft/sec.)
Z2 = Hydraulic grade at downstream end of segment

(m, ft)
V2 = Velocity at downstream end (m/sec., ft/sec.)
HL = Loss due to friction—other losses assumed to be

zero (m, ft)
The friction loss is computed based on the average rate of friction loss along the
segment and the length of the segment. This relationship is as follows:
S1 + S2
H L = S Avg ⋅ ∆ x = ∆x
2 (10.19)
Where HL = Loss across segment (m, ft)
SAVG = Average friction slope (m/m, ft/ft)
S1 = Friction slope at upstream end of segment (m/m,

ft/ft)
S2 = Friction slope at downstream end of segment (m/
m, ft/ft)
∆x = Length of segment being analyzed (m, ft)

The conditions at one end of the segment are known through assumption or from a
previous calculation step. Since the friction slope is a function of velocity, which is a
function of depth, the depth at the other end of the segment can be found through iter-
ation. There are two primary methods for this iterative solution, the Standard Step
method and the Direct Step method.
Standard Step Method

The standard step method of gradually varied flow energy balance involves dividing
the channel into segments of known length and solving for the unknown depth at one
end of the segment, starting with a known or assumed depth at the other end. The stan-
dard step method is the most popular method of determining the flow profile because
it can be applied to any channel, not just prismatic channels.
Direct Step Method

The direct step method is based on the same basic energy principles as the standard
step method, but takes a slightly different approach towards the solution. Instead of
assuming a segment length and solving for the depth at the end of the segment, the
direct step method assumes a depth and then solves for the segment length.
Mixed Flow Profiles
Although the hydraulic slope of a pipe will be the same throughout its length, a pipe
may contain several different profile types. The transitions that may be encountered
include:
• Sealing (Surcharging) Condition

• Rapidly Varied Flow
Sealing (Surcharging) Conditions

There may be conditions such that part of the section is flowing full, while part of the
flow remains open. These conditions are called sealing conditions, and the sections
are analyzed in separate parts. For sealing conditions, the portion of the section
flowing full is analyzed as pressure flow, and the remaining portion is analyzed with
gradually varied flow techniques.
Rapidly Varied Flow

Rapidly varied flow is turbulent flow resulting from the abrupt and pronounced curva-
ture of flow streamlines into or out of a hydraulic control structure. Examples of
rapidly varied flow include hydraulic jumps, bends, and bridge contractions.

Theory
The hydraulic phenomenon that occurs when the flow passes rapidly from supercrit-
ical to subcritical flow is called a hydraulic jump. The most common occurrence of
this within a gravity flow network occurs when there is a steep pipe discharging into a
particularly high tailwater, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 10-3: Hydraulic Jump
There are significant losses associated with hydraulic jumps, due to the amount of
mixing and hydraulic turbulence that occurs. These forces are also highly erosive, so
engineers typically try to prevent jumps from occurring in gravity flow systems, or at
least try to predict the location of these jumps in order to provide adequate channel,
pipe, or structure protection. The program does not perform any specific force anal-
yses that seek to precisely locate the hydraulic jump, nor does it identify the occur-
rence of jumps that might happen as flows leave a steep pipe and enter a mild pipe.
Rather it performs analyses sufficient to compute grades at structures.
Backwater Analysis
The classic solution of gravity flow hydraulics is via a backwater analysis. This type
of analysis starts at the network outlet under free discharge, submerged, or tailwater
control, and proceeds in an upstream direction.
Steep pipes tend to interrupt the backwater analysis, and reset the hydraulic control to
critical depth at the upstream end of the steep pipe. A frontwater analysis may be
needed for a steep profile (such as an S2), with the backwater analysis recommencing
from the upstream structure.
Free Outfall
This program lets you define the tailwater condition at the outlet as either Free Outfall,
Crown Elevation or User-Specified.

For a pipe with a hydraulically steep slope, the Free Outfall condition will yield a
starting depth equal to normal depth in the pipe. For a pipe with a hydraulically mild
slope, the Free Outfall condition will yield a starting depth equal to critical depth.
When an outlet has multiple incoming pipes, the Free Outfall condition yields a
starting elevation equal to the lowest of the individual computed elevations.
The Crown condition should be used when the pipe discharges to an outlet where the
water surface elevation is equal to the elevation of the top of the pipe.
Structure Flooding
Flooding at manholes in SewerCAD and inlets in StormCAD occurs whenever the
elevation of water is above the structure rim elevation. When this occurs, the back-
water analysis will continue by resetting the hydraulic grade to the structure rim eleva-
tion or ground elevation, whichever is higher. However, if a structure is defined with
a bolted cover, the hydraulic grade is not reset to the rim elevation.
In actual flooding situations, flows may be diverted away from the junction structure
and out of the system, or attenuated due to surcharged storage. In this program, even
though the governing downstream boundary for the next conduit is artificially lowered
to prevent the propagation of an incorrect backwater, the peak discharges at the struc-
ture are conserved and are not reduced by the occurrence of flooding at a junction.
Frontwater Analysis
The program will perform a frontwater analysis in a steep pipe operating under super-
critical flow, since these pipes are typically entrance controlled. The hydraulic control
is at the upstream end of the conduit, and the gradually varied flow analysis will
proceed in a downstream direction until either the normal depth is achieved, a
hydraulic jump occurs, or the end of the pipe is encountered.

Theory
Note: The program’s algorithm is fundamentally based on backwater

analysis. As a result, a continuous frontwater analysis is not
performed through two or more consecutive steep pipes. This is
a performance trade-off that has little impact in evaluating
performance of the collection system in most situations. The
assumption of critical depth at the upstream end results in a
conservative depth in all cases, and is exactly correct at the
point of the steep run furthest upstream.
Pipe Average Velocity and Travel Time
The travel time though each pipe can be an important value, especially when dealing
with rational loads, which are highly dependent on the duration time of the storm.
Travel time is computed as:
Several common methods of computing the pipe's average velocity include:
• Uniform Flow Velocity

Uniform Flow Velocity

The uniform flow velocity of a pipe is obtained by calculating the velocity in the pipe
at normal depth. If the normal depth corresponds to a surcharged condition, the full
flow velocity is used instead.
Full Flow Velocity

The full flow velocity corresponds to the velocity when the pipe is flowing full. The
flow area is equal to the entire cross-sectional area of the pipe.

Simple Average Velocity

The simple average velocity is computed by:
Note: The Simple Average Velocity method does not account for any
depth changes between the two ends of the pipe as the weighted
average velocity method does.
Weighted Average Velocity

To compute the weighted average velocity, the simple average velocity of each
profile segment is considered and given a weight based on its length:
Capacity Analysis
Traditionally, gravity pipe analyses and designs have not included the calcula-
tion-intense process of estimating a gradually varied flow profile.With this
program, you have the option of determining discharge using gradually varied
flow, or using the more traditional Capacity Analysis option. Capacity analysis still
uses a backwater approach, with the profile type for a pipe being primarily dependent
on the pipe's full flow capacity and downstream hydraulic grade.

Theory
The capacity analysis is advantageous over the gradually varied flow analysis in terms
of processing time. If you are dealing with a relatively large network and you
wish to arrive quickly at reasonable approximation then the capacity analysis is the
way to go. The gradually varied flow algorithms are more rigorous and generate solu-
tions that more closely reflect reality.
Capacity analysis calculates the full conduit flow capacity based on the selected fric-
tion method. It compares it with modeled flow in that conduit. There are two basic
approximate profile cases: the Full Capacity Profile and the Excess Capacity Profile.
Model flow < Capacity, use Excess Capacity Profile calculations.
Model flow > Capacity, use Full Capacity Profile calculations.
See “Full Capacity Profiles” and “Excess Capacity Profiles” for details. The type of
profile for a given conduit is listed under Results (Profile-Summary).
Full Capacity Profiles

Full capacity profiles occur when the pipe's actual discharge is greater than or equal to
the pipe's full flow capacity. In these cases, the downstream depth is taken as the
greater of the actual downstream hydraulic grade or the free discharge tailwater
elevation. The free discharge tailwater depth is commonly approximated as
halfway between the crown of the pipe and the pipe's critical depth (in accordance
with the U.S. Federal Highway Administration's HDS-5).
Starting from the tailwater elevation, the pipe's full flow friction slope is used to deter-
mine the hydraulic grade at the upstream end of the profile.
Excess Capacity Profiles

Excess capacity profiles occur when the full flow capacity of the pipe is greater than
the actual flow in the pipe. For these profiles, there are three basic tailwater condi-
tions:
• Case 1 - Hydraulic grade downstream less than or equal to normal depth.

• Case 2 - Hydraulic grade downstream greater than normal depth, and less than or
equal to pipe crown.
• Case 3 - Hydraulic grade downstream greater than or equal to pipe crown.

Excess Capacity Profile, Case 1 (Hydraulic Grade <= Normal Depth):
If the downstream depth in the pipe is at or below the pipe's normal depth, normal
depth is assumed for the pipe's entire length.
Excess Capacity Profile, Case 2 (Normal Depth < Hydraulic Grade <=
Pipe Crown)
When the hydraulic grade is above the pipe's normal depth but below the top of the
pipe, a friction slope of zero is assumed until it either intersects the pipe's normal
depth or reaches the end of the pipe.
Excess Capacity Profile, Case 3 (Hydraulic Grade >= Pipe Crown)
If the hydraulic grade is above the pipe crown, the hydraulic grade continues upstream
following the pipe's full flow friction slope. This slope will continue until it either
intersects the pipe crown or reaches the end of the pipe.

Theory
Note: If the full friction slope intersects the crown of the pipe, the
profile will continue with a Case 2 profile analysis.
Composite Excess Capacity Profiles
An excess capacity profile may actually be a composite of two more simple profiles.
Consider the case below, where the tailwater is above the crown of the pipe. In this
case, the profile begins as a Case 3 profile. Where the full flow friction slope inter-
sects the crown of the pipe, the profile changes to a Case 2 profile, following a flat
slope until it reaches normal depth. Where normal depth is intersected, a Case 1
profile begins, extending all the way to the upstream end of the pipe.
Conduit Shapes
The supported conduit shapes are shown in the figures below. Each shape is parame-
terized by one, two, or more characteristic dimensions as shown in the reference
figure. In this model, a conduit is taken to be a prismatic (constant-shaped) convey-
ance segment that is defined by a single shape. Conduits do not have to be closed
sections, so prismatic design channels can be modeled using conduit elements.
The allowable conduit shapes include:
• “Circular Channel”
• “Trapezoidal Channel”
• “Ellipse”
• “Pipe-Arch”

• “Triangle”
• “Rectangular Channel”
• “Irregular Open Channel”
Circular Channel
Figure 10-4: Circular Channel Shape
Trapezoidal Channel
Figure 10-5: Trapezoidal Channel Shape

Theory
Ellipse
Figure 10-6: Ellipse Shape

Pipe-Arch
RB
RT
Rise
RC
Span
Figure 10-7: Pipe-Arch Shape

Theory
Triangle
Figure 10-8: Triangle Shape
Rectangular Channel
Figure 10-9: Rectangular Channel Shape

Irregular Open Channel
Figure 10-10: Irregular Open Channel Shape
Junction Headlosses
Structure Headloss
When water flows through a junction structure, there are headlosses associated with
mixing, change of direction, and so forth. This section deals with the computation of
these losses based on the following popular methods:
• Absolute
• Standard
• HEC-22 Energy
• AASHTO
• Generic
Structure headlosses are used to determine the hydraulic grade to use as the
tailwater condition for upstream pipes during the backwater analysis. With the
exception of the HEC-22 Energy method, the headloss through the structure is
assumed to be the same for each incoming pipe.
Headloss - Absolute Method
The absolute method is the simplest of the headloss methods. The structure headloss
becomes an editable value, which is then used during calculations. No computations
relating to velocity, confluence angle, or other factors are needed.

Theory
Headloss - Standard Method
The standard method calculates structure headloss based on the exit pipe's velocity.
The exit velocity head is multiplied by a user-entered coefficient to determine the loss:
For suggested coefficient values for various structure configurations, see the Typical
Headloss Coefficient table at the end of this chapter.
Headloss - Generic Method
The generic method computes the structure headloss by multiplying the velocity head
of the exit pipe by the user-entered downstream coefficient and then subtracting the
velocity head of the governing upstream pipe multiplied by the user-entered upstream
coefficient.
If there are multiple upstream pipes entering the junction then the program must
choose one of the pipes to use in the calculation. The pipe that is chosen is considered
the governing upstream pipe. The governing upstream pipe is selected based on one of
the following methodologies:

• The upstream pipe with the maximum flow times velocity

• The upstream pipe with the maximum velocity head
• The upstream pipe with the minimum bend angle
The default method for selecting the governing upstream pipe is to choose the pipe
with the maximum flow times velocity. However, the user can select one of the other
options through the generic structure loss options.
Headloss - HEC-22 Energy Method
Similar to the standard method, the HEC-22 Energy method (from the FHWA's Urban
Drainage Design Manual, Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 22) correlates structure
headloss to the velocity head in the outlet pipe using a coefficient. Experimental
studies have determined that this coefficient can be approximated by:
Special Assumptions
The HEC-22 Energy method documentation is written with a limited range of applica-
bility. Many of the equations are written on the basis of pipe diameter, structure diam-
eter, and so on. Since StormCAD and SewerCAD offer non-circular pipes and non-
circular structures, this creates the need for some interpretation of the term "diam-
eter."
In some cases, the intent of the methodology is to compare the size of one pipe to
another pipe, or to the size of a structure. In these cases an equivalent diameter is
used, which is computed from the full area of the pipe or structure. Equivalent diam-
eter is the diameter of a circle with the area equal to the area of the examined pipe or
structure.

Theory
In other cases, the intent of the methodology is to compare depths within the structure.
For these cases, the rise (height) of the pipes is used in place of "diameter."
Pressure Flow, Free Surface Flow, and Transitional Flow

Throughout the documentation for HEC-22 Energy losses, you will see references to
"pressure flow", "free surface flow", and "transitional flow".
Pressure flow (submerged flow) is assumed to be any condition for which the depth of
water above the outlet pipe invert is greater than 3.2 times the height of the outlet pipe.
Free surface flow (unsubmerged flow) is assumed to be any condition for which the
depth of water above the outlet pipe invert is less than the height of the pipe.
Transitional flow is any condition between pressure flow and free surface flow.
Initial Headloss Coefficient

The initial headloss coefficient, which is based on relative junction size, is calculated
as:
Note: The angle used in this equation is a deflection angle, so a

straight run has a deflection angle of 180°. The bend angle in
this case is 0°.
Correction for Pipe Diameter

The correction factor due to differences in pipe size is calculated only for pressure
flow situations. For non-pressure situations, a value of 1.0 is used.

Correction for Flow Depth

The correction factor for flow depth is used only in cases of free surface flow or tran-
sitional flow. For pressure flow, a value of 1.0 is used.
Correction for Relative Flow

The correction factor for relative flow is calculated only when the invert elevation for
the pipe in question is approximately equal to the invert elevation of the outlet pipe
and at least one other pipe. Otherwise, a value of 1.0 is used.

Theory
Note: The term "approximately equal" is quite a vague definition for

when to use relative flow corrections. StormCAD and SewerCAD
enable you to change the tolerance for "approximately equal"
elevations so that you can use your judgment to fine-tune the
HEC-22 methodology.
Correction for Plunging Flow

The correction factor for plunging flow accounts for the effect that flow plunging
into a junction from another inflow pipe has on the inflow pipe for which the headloss
is calculated. It is calculated only when vertical distance from the invert of the plunge
pipe to the center of the outflow pipe is greater than the depth in the structure relative
to the outlet pipe invert. Otherwise a value of 1.0 is used.
Correction for Benching

The correction factor for structure benching is similar to the shaping correction factor
used in the AASHTO structure loss method. The correction accounts for smoother
transitions from the inflow pipe to the outflow pipe based on the presence (or lack) of
shaping in the bottom of the structure.

The following figure represents the four types of benching:
By default, the program uses the values documented in HEC-22 (and presented in the
following table) for pressure and free surface flow, but the user can change these
values. For transitional flow, the program interpolates from the table linearly, based
on the actual ratio of depth in the access hole to the height of the outflow pipe.

Theory
Headloss - AASHTO Method
The AASHTO method (as defined in the AASHTO Model Drainage Manual) for
structure headloss is based on power-loss methodologies. This method can be
summarized by the following equation:
AASHTO Contraction Loss

The contraction loss is due to flow transitioning from large-area, low-velocity flow to
small-area, high- velocity flow, such as flow exiting a structure and entering a
downstream pipe. This loss is calculated based on the exit pipe's velocity and a
contraction coefficient, as follows:
The contraction coefficient defaults to the AASHTO documented value of 0.25, but
can be changed by the user.

AASHTO Bend Loss
Note: The previous equation is a generalized version of the

equation as it appears in the AASHTO manual.
The program automatically computes a bend factor based on the angles at which the
pipes come together. The program's default bend factors are based on Figure 13-12 of
the AASHTO manual, but these values, as with other AASHTO coefficients and
corrections, can be changed by the user.
AASHTO Bend Loss Original Equation
The structure bend loss is computed for each incoming pipe using the following
equation from the AASHTO manual. Losses are computed for each incoming pipe,
and the greatest value is used.

Theory
The AASHTO manual also documents another bend loss method shown in the
following equation. The authors of the AASHTO manual agree that either equation
is acceptable. Because of the following equation's tendency to compute negative bend
losses in certain cases, we decided to use the above equation exclusively within this
program.
AASHTO Expansion Loss

Expansion losses are encountered when small-area, high-velocity flow meets a
large-area, low-velocity flow, such as a pipe discharging into a structure. To compute
this loss, the following equation is used:

The most significant pipe is the pipe that has the greatest product of velocity and
discharge, omitting any pipes that have a discharge less than 10% of the structure's
outflow. The expansion coefficient defaults to the AASHTO documented value of
0.35, but can be changed by the user.
AASHTO Correction For Non-Piped Flow

If non-piped flow accounts for 10% or more of the total structure outflow, a correction
factor is applied to the total loss. By default, this value is a 30% increase in headloss
(a factor of 1.3) as documented in the AASHTO manual, but can be changed by the
user.
AASHTO Correction for Shaping

If the bottom of the structure is shaped to facilitate smoother transitions from inflow
pipes to the discharge pipe, a correction factor can be applied to the total loss. By
default, this value is a 50% reduction (a factor of 0.5) as documented in the AASHTO
manual, but can be changed by the user.
Channel Weighting Methods
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition uses the following weighting methods:
• Pavlovskii’s Method—The Pavlovskii method may be used for open channel as

well as closed top irregular channels.
N
 ( PN nN2 )
1 1 + P2 n2 + .... + PN nN
2 2 2
Pn
n= 1
=
P P (10.20)
Where n = Roughness coefficient

P = Weighted perimeter
Subscripts represents subdivisions of one given
section
• Horton’s Method—The Horton composite roughness equation is normally used

for solving closed top irregular channels such as custom arches or cunnette
conduit sections. This equation is also applied in certain specific situations to
open channels where steep banks or wide flat floodplains are encountered.

Theory
2
 N 1.5 
 3




 ( PN n N ) 
 ( Pn
1 1 + P2 n2 + .... + PN nN )
1.5 1.5 1.5
2
3
n =

1
 =

 P  P
2
3

 
 
(10.21)

P = Wetted perimeter
section
• Colebatch Method—The Colebatch equation is normally used for open, irregular

channels such as natural floodplains.
2
 N 1.5 
 3




 ( AN n N ) 
 ( A1n11.5 + A2n12.5 + .... + AN n1N.5 )
2
3
n =

1
 =

 A  A
2
3

 
 
(10.22)

A = Flow area
section
• Cox Method—The Cox equation is normally used for open, irregular channels
such as natural floodplains.
N
 ( AN nN ) A1n1 + A2 n2 + .... + AN nN
n= 1
=
A A (10.23)

A = Flow area
section

• Lotter Method—The Lotter equation is normally used for open, irregular chan-
nels such as natural floodplains.
5 5
PR 3 PR 3
n= =
 5  5 5 5
N

 PN RN 3  P1R1 3 P2 R2 3 PN RN 3
 

 n

 n1
+
n2
+ .....+
nN
1  N 
(10.24)

P = Wetted perimeter
R = Hydraulic radius
section
• Improved Lotter Method—This method uses a combination of the Horton and

Lotter equations. Because both methods are based on Manning’s conveyance
equations, it is recommended that you use Manning’s friction method for irregular
channels.
Improved Lotter Method uses a weighted roughness method for solving uniform
flow equations unlike most standard step backwater programs (HEC-2, WSP-2,
and WSPRO), which use a segmented conveyance method. Improved Lotter
weighted roughness method is more general and, unlike the step backwater
programs, can be used for both open channel sections and closed sections.
Improved Lotter Method will produce results similar to the segmented convey-
ance method (HEC-2, WSP-2, WSPRO) except for the following two cases:
Sections containing steep vertical segments or flat shallow submerged overbanks
intersected by water surface. The segmented conveyance method (HEC-2, WSP-
2, and WSPRO) tends to underestimate effective roughness, and in many
instances the effective weighted roughness will be actually lower than any of the
input segment roughnesses. Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition's weighted
roughness method avoids underestimating effective roughness by combining adja-
cent segments using Horton's equation in a manner similar to the method applied
for subdivided main channels with banks steeper than 5H:1V as documented in
Section 2.3 of the HEC-2 User's Manual (September, 1990). Unlike HEC-2,
Improved Lotter Method does not confine this correction to the main channel, but
will make this adjustment at any location in the section. Improved Lotter Method
also dynamically adjusts its flatness and steepness checks ensuring that computed
roughness values will always be higher than the minimum input value encoun-
tered over the wetter flow area. For these situations, Improved Lotter Method
yields a higher effective weighted roughness for the total section than the
segmented conveyance method.

Theory
Inlet Hydraulics
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition considers the following inlet hydraulic principles:
• “HEC-22 Inlet Comparison”

• “Flows in Gutters on Grade”
• “Flow in Ditch or Median Section on Grade”
• “Inlet Analysis”
• “Grate Inlet on Grade”
• “Curb Inlet on Grade”
• “Slot Inlet on Grade”
• “Combination Inlet on Grade”
• “Grate Inlet in Sag”
• “Curb Inlet in Sag”
• “Slot Inlet in Sag”
• “Combination Inlet in Sag”

Inlet Hydraulics
HEC-22 Inlet Comparison
Note: Pavement drainage requires consideration of gutter flow and

inlet capacity. The design of these elements is dependent on
storm frequency and the allowable spread of storm water on the
pavement surface.
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition performs hydraulic

computations for analyzing or sizing one inlet at a time. For
analyzing or designing an entire storm sewer network, Haestad
Methods offers StormCAD, which also follows the HEC-22
methodology for inlet computations.
The methodology used by Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition to perform pavement

drainage and inlet computations is described in Chapter 4 of the HEC-22 manual:
Urban Drainage Design Manual, 1996. Related charts can be found in “Engineer’s
Reference”. Most of the information presented in HEC-22 Chapter 4 was originally
published in the 2nd edition, August 2001 Pub No FHWA-NHI-01-021FHWA, and
AASHTO’s Model Drainage Manual, 1991.
This section presents an overview of the HEC-22 methodology used by Bentley

Depth Calculation in StormCAD
StormCAD uses HEC-22 for its Gutter Depth calculations as well as the gutter spread
calculations. However, in order to compensate for definition discrepancies StormCAD
uses the HEC-22 calculations for Depth and then adds the Depressed Gutter Depth for
the final Depth value, as illustrated in the following figure.

Theory
Flows in Gutters on Grade
Flows in gutters on grade includes:
• “Uniform Gutter Cross Slope” on page 10-509

• “Composite Gutter Section” on page 10-510
Uniform Gutter Cross Slope

In the case of a uniform cross-slope (gutter slope Sw equal to pavement slope Sx), the
relationship between the gutter flow Q and the flow spread T is obtained by applying
the Manning’s equation, assuming normal flow:
K c 1.67 0.5 2.67

Q= Sx SL T
n (10.25)
Where Q = Flow rate (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

Kc = 0.376 SI, 0.56 U.S. customary
n = Manning’s coefficient
Sx = Pavement cross-slope (m/m, ft/ft)
SL = Longitudinal pavement slope (m/m, ft/ft)
T = Width of flow—spread (m, ft)
T
Wg Ts
Qs
Qw Sx
Sw
Figure 10-11: Uniform Gutter Cross Slope
The flow depth along the curb is:

Inlet Hydraulics
d = TSx (10.26)
Where d = Depth of flow at curb (m, ft)
The coefficient E, as well as the variables Qw and Qs, are introduced as:
Qw = E0Q (10.27)
Qs = Q – Qw = (1 – E0)Q (10.28)
E0 = 1 – (1 – Wg/T)2.67 (10.29)
Where Q = Total pavement flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

Qw = Frontal flow—portion of the flow over the grate
width (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
E0 = Ratio of flow above the grate to total flow
Qs = Side flow—flow outside the grate width (m3/sec.,

ft3/sec.)
Wg = Grate width (m, ft)
Composite Gutter Section
T
W Ts
Qs
Qw Sx
Sw
Figure 10-12: Composite Gutter Section

Theory
In the case of a composite gutter section, the coefficient E0, as well as the variables Qw
and Qs, are defined as:
Qw = E0Q (10.30)
Qs = Q – Qw = (1 – E0)Q (10.31)
Where Q = Total pavement flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

Qw = Frontal flow—portion of the flow in the depressed
gutter (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
E0 = Ratio of flow in the depressed gutter to total flow
Qs = Side flow—flow outside the depressed gutter (m3/

sec., ft3/sec.)
E0 can then be derived from Manning’s equation as:
   −1
  2.67
 
1 + w x  −1 
S S S
E0 = 1 / 1 + w 

 Sx  
 (T W ) −1  
   
(10.32)
Where Sw = Gutter cross-slope (m/m, ft/ft)
W = Width of depressed gutter—or grate, if it is

smaller (m, ft)
The continuously depressed gutter is also sometimes defined by a gutter depression, a,

defined as:
a
Sw = S x +
1000W SI Units (10.33)
a
Sw = S x +
12W U.S. Customary Units (10.34)
Where a = Gutter depression (mm, in)

Inlet Hydraulics
Gutter depression is the depression of the gutter relative to the street cross-slope
projection. It is also identified as a continuously depressed gutter because the gutter is
depressed along its full length.
Flow in Ditch or Median Section on Grade
1 1
Z1 d Z2
W
B
Figure 10-13: Ditch Cross Section
The discharge Q in a ditch or median section is expressed as:
 z1 + z2 2 
1.67
Kc Bd + d  S L0.5

 2 
Q=

n


(
B + d 1 + z12 + 1 + z22 

 ) (10.35)
Where Q = Discharge rate (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)

n = Manning’s coefficient
B = Ditch width (m, ft)
d = Water depth (m, ft)
z1, z2 = Ratio H:V for ditch side slopes (m/m, ft/ft)
SL = Ditch longitudinal slope (m/m, ft/ft)
The ratio E0 of frontal flow (over the grate) to total flow is:

Theory
W
E0 =
 z1 + z2 
B+d
 
 2 

(10.36)
Where W = Grate width (m, ft)
Inlet Analysis
Inlets are divided into 4 categories, as illustrated in the following figure:
L
h
W L W
a. Grate Inlet b. Curb Opening Inlet
L
h
c. Combination Inlet d. Slotted Drain Inlet
Figure 10-14: Inlet Types
For details on each type of inlet, refer to the HEC-22 Manual.

Inlet Hydraulics
Note: Do not confuse gutter depression and local depression:
The gutter depression is the depression of the gutter relative to

the pavement normal cross-slope named a on the figure below,
which shows a gutter and inlet cross section. It is also referred
to as a continuously depressed gutter.
The local depression is the depression at the location of the inlet

(a’ in the figure below). It does not exist in the gutter upstream or
downstream of the inlet. It is measured from the gutter slope.
Sx
Q Sw
Q total
Q' S'w
Figure 10-15: Continuous Gutter Depression and Local Depression
Figure 6.6 illustrates (xxxx check figure reference) the concept of local depression
versus gutter depression used by HEC-22, with:
atotal = a + a' (10.37)
Where a = Gutter depression (mm, in)

a' = Local depression (mm, in)
atotal = Total depression at location of inlet (mm, in)

Theory

Inlet Hydraulics
Inlets on Grade
Inlets located on a grade (SL > 0) are characterized by an efficiency, E, for a given set
of conditions:
Qi
E=
Q (10.38)
Where E = Inlet efficiency (unitless)

Q = Total gutter flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
Qi = Intercepted flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
The flow that is not intercepted is called carryover or bypass flow. It is defined as
follows:
Qb = Q – Qi (10.39)

Theory
Where Qb = Bypass low (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
Grate Inlet on Grade
W L
Figure 10-16: Grate Inlet
As previously defined, the total gutter flow, Q, is composed of a frontal flow Qw and a
side flow Qs.
The ratio Rf of frontal flow intercepted to total frontal flow is expressed as:
Rf = 1 – Kcf (V – V0) (10.40)
Where Kcf = 0.295 SI, 0.090 U.S. customary
V = Average velocity in gutter (m/sec., ft/sec.)

V0 = Gutter velocity at which splash-over first happens
(m/sec., ft/sec.)
Note: If V < V0, then Rf = 1 (all the frontal flow is intercepted).
Also, Rf cannot exceed 1.0. The splash-over velocity, V0 is a

function of the grate type and the grate length, L.
The frontal flow intercepted, Qwi, is:
Qwi = RfQw
The ratio Rs of side flow intercepted to side flow is expressed as:

Inlet Hydraulics
 K csV 1.8 
Rs = 1 / 

 1 + 2.3 

 S x L 

(10.41)
Where Kcs = 0.0828 SI, 0.15 U.S. customary
L = Grate length (m, ft)
The side flow intercepted, Qsi, is therefore:
Qsi = RsQs (10.42)
The total flow intercepted is:
Qi = Qwi + Qsi (10.43)
Where Qi = Total flow intercepted (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
The bypass flow is then:
Qb = Q – Qi (10.44)
Where Qb = Bypass flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
The efficiency of the grate is expressed as:
E = RfE0 + Rs(1 – E0) (10.45)
Or,
E = Qi /Q (10.46)

Theory
Curb Inlet on Grade
L
h
Figure 10-17: Curb Inlet
The curb opening length Lr that would be required to intercept 100% of a flow Q on a
pavement with a uniform cross slope is computed as:
 1 0.6
LT = K C Q 0.42
S L0.3 



nS x 

(10.47)
Where LT = Curb opening length required to intercept 100% of

gutter flow
In order to account for a locally or continually depressed gutter, an equivalent cross

slope, Se, is computed.
Sx
Q total Sw
S'w
Figure 10-18: Composite Gutter Section
S'w is calculated as:

Inlet Hydraulics
atotal
S ’w =
1000W SI Units (10.48)
atotal
S ’w =
12W U.S. Customary Units (10.49)
Where S'w = Gutter cross-slope at inlet location—measured

from pavement cross-slope (m/m, ft/ft)
Sw = Gutter cross-slope upstream of inlet—does not
account for local depression (m/m, ft/ft)
atotal = Total depression at inlet location—includes local
and continuous gutter depression (mm, in)
W = Larger of the gutter width and local-depression
width (m, ft)
The curb opening length LT that would be required to intercept 100% of a flow Q on a
pavement with a composite cross slope at the location of the inlet is:
 1 0.6
LT = KT Q 0.42
S L0.3 



nSe 

(10.50)
The efficiency E of a curb opening shorter than the required length for total intercep-
tion is:
 L 1.8
E = 1− 
 1− 

 L T 

(10.51)
Where L = Curb opening length (m, ft)

Theory
Slot Inlet on Grade
Figure 10-19: Slot Inlet
The efficiency of a Slotted Inlet on Grade with an opening width greater than or equal
to 45 mm (1.75 in) is calculated using the same equations as for a curb opening inlet of
the same length.
Combination Inlet on Grade
L
h
Figure 10-20: Combination Inlet
HEC-22 distinguishes two cases:
• The grate and the curb opening are placed side by side. In this case, the flow inter-
ception by the curb opening is negligible, and the capacity of the combination
inlet is identical to that of the grate alone.
• The curb opening is extended upstream of the grate in order to intercept debris
that could otherwise clog the grate inlet. The flow intercepted by the combination
inlet is calculated as the flow intercepted by the curb opening upstream of the
grate inlet, plus the portion of the remaining flow intercepted by the grate.

Inlet Hydraulics
Inlets in Sag
Note: Inlets in sag location operate as weirs at low water depth and as
orifices at higher depth.
Grate inlets alone are not recommended, as clogging of the

grate is likely to occur.
In contrast with inlets on grade, the efficiency of an inlet located in sag is always
assumed to be 1.0 (or 100%).
Grate Inlet in Sag
W L
Figure 10-21: Grate Inlet
The flow Qiw intercepted by a grate inlet operating as a weir is:
Qw = Cw 2Wd11.5 + Cw Ld 21.5
(10.52)
Where W = Width of the grate (m, ft)

CW = 1.66 SI, 3.0 U.S. customary
d1 = Flow depth at middle of grate(m, ft)

d2 = Flow depth at side of grate opposite the curb (m,
ft)
The flow Qio intercepted by a grate inlet operating as an orifice is:
Q =0.67AgP(2gd)1/2 (10.53)

Theory
Where Q = Capacity of the grate operating as an orifice (cfs,

m3/s)
Ag = Clear opening area of grate (ft2, m2)
d = Acceleration due to gravity (ft/s2, m/s2)
The intercepted flow Qi is conservatively calculated at any flow depth by using the
lesser of the intercepted flows computed using the weir or orifice equation:
Qi = min(Qiw , Qio )
(10.54)
This accounts for the three stages: weir flow, orifice flow and transitional flow.
Curb Inlet in Sag
L
h
Figure 10-22: Curb Inlet
Curb inlets are divided into 3 categories, based on their throat geometry: horizontal
(most common), vertical, and inclined, as defined in the figure below.

Inlet Hydraulics
do do
di
h
do = di
d o = d i -(h/2)
h
a. Horizontal Throat c. Vertical Throat
do
0
h
d o = d i -(h/2)Sin 0
b. Inclined Throat
Figure 10-23: Curb Inlet Throat Types
Where h = Height of curb-opening inlet (m, ft)

di = Water depth at lip of curb (m, ft)
do = Effective head, measured from center of orifice

throat (m, ft)
Θ = Throat angle for inclined-throat inlets
Weir Flow
A curb inlet in a sag, without a locally or continuously depressed gutter, operates as a

weir for depths at curb (measured from the normal cross slope) that are less than or
equal to the curb opening height.
This condition can be expressed as:
d≤h (10.55)
Where d = Depth at curb—i.e., d = TSx (m, ft)
In the case of a depressed curb opening (local depression) or a continuously depressed

gutter, the previous condition becomes:

Theory
atotal
d+ ≤h
1000 U.S. Customary SI Units (10.56)
Where d = Total depression, measured at inlet (mm, in)

D = Depth at curb, measured from normal cross-slope
(m, ft)
The intercepted flow Qiw by a curb-opening inlet operating as a weir, with a locally or
continuously depressed gutter, is:
Qiw = Cw1(L + 1.8W)d1.5 (10.57)
Where Cw1 = Weir coefficient (1.25 SI, 2.3 U.S. customary)
L = Curb-opening length (m, ft)

W = Lateral width of depression (m, ft)
However, if L is greater than or equal to 3.6 m (12 ft), then the following equation is
used, which is the same as the equation for curb-opening inlets without depression:
Qiw = Cw2Ld1.5 (10.58)
Where Cw2 = Weir coefficient (1.6 SI, 3.0 U.S. customary)
Orifice Flow
A curb inlet in a sump operates as an orifice for depths at the lip of a curb opening that
are greater than 1.4 times the curb opening height:
di ≥ 1.4h (10.59)
The intercepted flow Qio by a curb-opening inlet (depressed or undepressed) operating

as an orifice is:
Qio = CohL(2gdo)0.5 (10.60)
which is also expressed as:

Inlet Hydraulics
  h 
0.5
 
Qio = Co hL 2 g 
d − sin Θ 
 i 2 
  (10.61)
Where Θ = 90° for horizontal-throat inlets, 0° for vertical-

throat inlets
Transition Flow
At depths between 1.0 and 1.4 times the opening height, the flow is in a transition
stage.
This intercepted flow Qi is calculated conservatively in this depth range as:
Qi = min(Qiw, Qio) (10.62)
Slot Inlet in Sag
Weir Flow
Slotted inlets located in sag operate as weirs to water depths, d (measured at the curb
from the normal cross slope), of about 0.06 m (0.2ft).
The intercepted flow Qiw is expressed as:
Qiw = CwLd1.5 (10.63)
Where Cw = Weir coefficient—varies with flow depth and slot

length (typically 1.4 SI, 2.48 U.S. customary)
d = Water depth at curb, measured from normal cross
slope (m, ft)
L = Slot length (m, ft)
Orifice Flow
At water depths (measured at the curb) greater than about 0.12 m (0.4 ft), slotted inlets
perform as orifices.
The intercepted flow Qio is expressed as:
Qio = 0.8LW(2gd)0.5 (10.64)

Theory
Where W = Slot width (m, ft)

d = Water depth at slot (m, ft)
Transitional Flow
At depths between 0.06 m (measured at the slot from the normal cross slope) and 0.12
m, the flow is in a transition stage.
The intercepted flow Qi is conservatively calculated in this depth range as:
Qi = min(Qiw, Qio) (10.65)
Combination Inlet in Sag
According to HEC-22, combination inlets are considered advisable for use in sags
where hazardous ponding occurs.
Equal Length Inlets
Equal length inlets refer to a grate inlet placed along the side of a curb-opening inlet of
identical length. At lower flow depths, the grate inlet is operating as a weir and the
interception capacity of the curb is negligible (unless the grate is clogged, in which
case the curb is intercepting some flow). The flow Qiw intercepted by the combination
is then:
Qiw = CwPd1.5 (10.66)
Where Cw = Weir coefficient (typically 1.66 SI, 3.0 U.S.

customary)
P = Perimeter of grate, disregarding side along curb
(m, ft)
d = Flow depth at curb (m, ft)
At higher flow depths, both the grate inlet and the curb-opening inlet are operating as
orifices.
Note: The clear opening area of the grate depends on the opening ratio
of the grate (HEC-22 defines an opening ratio for each grate
type), as well as the clogging factor you specify.
The flow Qio intercepted by the combination inlet operating as an orifice is:

Inlet Hydraulics
Qio = CoAg(2gd)0.5 + CohL(2gdo)0.5 (10.67)
Where Co = Orifice coefficient (Co = 0.67)
Ag = Clear opening of grate (m2, ft2 )

g = Gravitational acceleration (9.81 m/sec.2, 32.16 ft/
sec.2 )
h = Height of curb-opening inlet (m, ft)
do = Head, measured from the center of the orifice
throat (m, ft)
Time of Concentration
The time of concentration (Tc) is found by summing the time for each individual flow
segment within the drainage area. Both single and multiple flow segments are
modeled with the Tc calculator.
Figure 10-24: The General Equation for Tc

Theory
i=1
Tc = ∑ Ti
n (10.68)
Where Tc = Total time of concentration
Ti = Flow travel time through segment i
Li
Ti = -
----
Vi
(10.69)
Where Li = Length of flow segment i
Vi = Average velocity through segment i
The Tc equations provided in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition can be categorized

into two broad categories:
• Equations that solve for velocity, then use velocity to solve for the travel time
through a flow segment
• Equations that directly solve for the travel time through a flow segment—in these
cases, Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition back solves for velocity and includes it
in the output report
Note: Some types of Tc equations can apply to flow segments within a

multiple-segment Tc calculation (see preceding diagram). Other
Tc methods are equations intended to model the entire average
subarea flow distance and slope in one single flow segment.
When combining multiple flow segments to compute Tc, it is up
to you to only combine Tc methods that can be modeled in
combination with multiple flow segments.
There are 13 different methods for computing the time for an individual flow segment.
Each of the 13 methods has different data input requirements:
• “User-Defined”
• “Carter”

Inlet Hydraulics
• “Eagleson”
• “Espey/Winslow”
• “Federal Aviation Agency”
• “Kerby/Hathaway”
• “Kirpich (PA)”
• “Kirpich (TN)”
• “Length and Velocity”
• “SCS Lag”
• “TR-55 Sheet Flow”
• “TR-55 Shallow Concentrated Flow”
• “TR-55 Channel Flow”
Minimum Time of Concentration

Certain hydrologic methods for computing runoff hydrographs require the time of
concentration to be greater than some minimum value. For example the TR-55 meth-
odology dictates that the minimum Tc to be used is 0.1 hr.
The minimum Tc is used in lieu of the calculated Tc whenever the calculated Tc is

smaller than the minimum.
User-Defined
The user-defined time of concentration (Tc) is a method that allows the direct input of
the Tc rather than using an equation to calculate it. This method would be used when
the Tc needs to be calculated using a methodology that is not supported by Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition, or when a quick estimate of Tc is sufficient for the anal-
ysis.
Carter
0.6 ∠ 0.3
T c = 1.7L m S m
(10.70)
Where Tc = Time of concentration (hr.)
Lm = Flow length (mi)
Sm = Slope (ft/mi)

Theory
Eagleson
∠2 ⁄ 3 ∠1 ⁄ 2
T c = 0.0001852L f nR Sf
(10.71)
Lf = Flow length (ft)
n = Manning’s n
R = Hydraulic radius (ft)
Sf = Slope (ft/ft)
Espey/Winslow
0.29 ∠ 0.145 ∠ 0.6

T c = 0.52ΦL f Sf Ip
(10.72)
φ = Espey Channelization factor

Sf = Slope (ft/ft)
Ip = Impervious area (%)
Federal Aviation Agency
0.5 ∠ 0.333
T c = 0.03 ( 1.1 ∠ C )L S
(10.73)
C = Rational C coefficient
L = Length of overland pipe flow (ft)
S = Slope (%)

Inlet Hydraulics
Kerby/Hathaway
0.47 0.47 ∠ 0.235

T c = 0.01377L f n Sf
(10.74)
n = Manning’s n
Sf = Slope (ft/ft)
Kirpich (PA)
0.77 ∠ 0.5
T c = 0.00002167L f Sf Mt
(10.75)
Sf = Slope (ft/ft)
Mt = Tc Multiplier (Tc adjustment)
Kirpich (TN)
0.77 ∠ 0.385
T c = 0.00013L f Sf Mt
(10.76)
Sf = Slope (ft/ft)
Mt = Tc Multiplier (Tc adjustment)

Theory
Length and Velocity
Lf
T c =  ------  ---------------------
1hr.
 V   3600sec.
(10.77)
V = Velocity (ft/sec.)
SCS Lag
Note: There is a factor of 0.6 built into this equation (in the constant
0.0000877) to convert this equation from a lag time to a time of
concentration.
0.7 ∠ 0.5
T c = 0.0000877L f  ------------ ∠ 9 S f
0.8 1000
 CN 
(10.78)
n = Manning’s n
Sf = Slope (ft/ft)
TR-55 Sheet Flow

This number represents the sheet flow time computed for each column of sheet flow
data. Flow time for sheet flow is computed as:
0.8
0.007 ( nL )
T = --------------------------------
0.5 0.4
( P2 ) Sf
(10.79)

Inlet Hydraulics
Where T = Sheet flow time (hr.)

n = Manning’s roughness coefficient from TR-55
table
L = Flow length (ft)
P2 = Two-year, 24-hour rainfall (in)
Sf = Slope (ft/ft)
TR-55 Shallow Concentrated Flow

This number represents the sheet flow time computed for each column of shallow
concentrated flow data. Flow velocity for this flow time is computed as:
Unpaved Surfaces Paved Surfaces
0.5 0.5
V = 16.1345S f (10.80) V = 20.3282S f (10.81)
Where V = Average velocity (ft/sec.)

Sf = Slope of hydraulic grade line (ft/ft)
Lf
T c = -------  ---------------------
 1hr.
 V   3600sec.
(10.82)
V = Average velocity (ft/sec.)

Theory
TR-55 Channel Flow

This number represents the channel flow time computed for each column of channel
flow data. Flow velocity for this flow time is computed as:
Lf
T c =  -------  --------------------
1hr. 
-
 V  3600sec.
(10.83)
where
2⁄3 1⁄2
1.49R Sf
V = -----------------------------------
n (10.84)
V = Average velocity (ft/sec.)

R = Hydraulic radius (ft)
Sf = Average slope (ft/ft)
n = Manning’s roughness value
Constraint Based Automatic Design

The Constraint Based Automatic Design section consists of the following topics:
• “Subsurface Design”
• “Inlet Design”
Subsurface Design
The Subsurface Design section consists of the following topics:
• “Pipe and Subsurface Node Structure Design”

• “Part Full Design”
• “Limit Section Size”
• “Pipe Matching”

• “Offset Matching”
• “Drop Structures”
• “Structure Sump Elevations”
• “Design Priorities”
Pipe and Subsurface Node Structure Design

This program allows you to design many parts of the sewer network, including gravity
piping and structures. The design is flexible enough to allow you to specify the
elements to be designed, from a single pipe size to the entire system.
Pipes and structures are designed to consider several constraints, such as allowable
ranges of slope, velocity, and cover. In general, the design algorithm attempts to mini-
mize excavation, which is typically the most expensive part of installing sewer piping
and structures.
Some of the other constraints that are considered include:
• Pipe Matching
• Offset Matching
• Drop Structures
• Structure Sump Elevations
The designed pipe will be the smallest available section size that meets the constraints
and has a full-flow capacity greater than its discharge when designing for 100% full.
In a situation where there are no pipe sizes with adequate capacity, the largest avail-
able size will be used.
Part Full Design

Pipes are designed such that the capacity is greater than the calculated discharge. For
standard designs, this capacity is based on full pipe, normal depth - that is, the flow in
the pipe when the depth is 100% of the pipe rise.
With partially full design, the designed capacity of the pipe is for a design depth that is
only a portion of the pipe rise. In other words, a pipe that is designed for 50% full will
be selected based on a depth of half of the pipe's rise.
For example, consider a circular pipe with the following characteristics:
• Slope = 0.01 m/m

• Roughness n = 0.013
• Required flow = 100 l/s

Theory
The following table presents several typical section sizes, with their capacities at
various depths.
Table 10-1: Design with Multiple Sections
1 Barrel 2 Barrels 3 Barrels
Circular Section Capacity (l/s) Meets Capacity (l/s) Meets Capacity (l/s) Meets
Size Nominal Flow? Flow? Flow?
Diameter
300 mm 101 No 202 No 203 No
375 mm 183 No 366 No 549 No
450 mm 297 No 595 No 892 Yes
525 mm 449 No 897 Yes 1346 Yes
600mm 641 No 1281 Yes 1922 Yes
For these conditions, the selected design would use two 525 mm barrels - the smallest
section size within the least number of barrels to meet the capacity criteria.
Limit Section Size

There may be situations in design where it is desired to limit the size of the designed
pipe. This may be done to avoid conflicts with obstructions or other utilities, for
example. For these situations, The program enables you to limit the maximum section
rise that will be selected. A smaller size will be used if possible.
If none of the available design sections have a small enough rise, the smallest one will
be used.
Pipe Matching
When pipes meet at a structure, it is often desirable to have the pipes at approximately
the same elevation.
To do this, the program allows you to design your pipes to match inverts or crowns.
This means that when the design is done (if a valid design was found), all of the
designed pipes entering a structure will have the same invert elevation or crown eleva-
tion.

Offset Matching
If an offset value is specified, it represents the desired drop across the structure. The
design incorporates this offset, resulting in upstream pipes that are higher than the
downstream pipe by the specified offset. Note that all designed upstream pipes will
have the same invert or crown elevation.
For example, an offset of 0.1 meter could result in a downstream pipe with an invert of
100.0 meters, and several upstream pipes with invert elevations at 100.1 meters.
Drop Structures
Drop structures are structures at which the incoming pipes are not all at the same
elevation, nor do any of them necessarily match the downstream pipe. Including these
structures may help to reduce excavation, since the entire upstream system does not
need to be as deep.
The program will only use drop structures if you have chosen to allow them, and if a
pipe’s maximum slope constraint cannot be met. Otherwise, the upstream system will
be designed as needed to maintain the desired slope and velocity constraints, which
may require significantly lower pipe elevations.
Structure Sump Elevations

The program can adjust structure sump elevations to account for the invert elevations
of newly designed pipes, and any desired additional sump depth.
For example, if a structure is to be adjusted with a sump depth of 0.5 meters and the
lowest pipe invert is 100.0 meters, the structure sump elevation would be set to 99.5
meters.
Design Priorities
Unfortunately, it is not always possible to automate a design that meets all desired
constraints. With this in mind, there are certain priorities that are considered when the
automated design is performed. These priorities are in place to try to minimize the
effect on existing portions of the system while providing appropriate capacity in the
designed pipes.
While this sequence does not go into complete detail regarding the design process, it
does indicate the general priorities for the automated design. The priorities, of course,
only deal with elements that are being designed. If a pipe has fixed inverts or is not to
be designed at all, some or all of these criteria obviously do not apply.

Theory
A Designed Pipe Should Fit within Adjacent Existing Structures
If a pipe connects to an existing structure, the pipe rise should be completely within
the existing structure. The only time this may be violated is if there are no available
section sizes that would not violate that condition (i.e., the existing structure height is
so small that all available pipes have rises too big). In this very unlikely condition, the
smallest available section size will be selected, with the invert elevation placed at the
bottom of the structure.
A Designed Pipe Should Not Have a Crown Above an Adjacent Designed

Structure
Where pipe inverts are fixed, it is possible that the required section size would cause
the pipe crown to be higher than the top elevation of an adjacent designed structure. If
all available pipe section rises are greater than the depth of the pipe invert, the smallest
pipe size will be chosen.
Note: This situation will only be encountered in situations where the

structure's top elevation is set equal to the ground elevation -
otherwise, the structure will be designed with a higher top
elevation.
Pipe Capacity Should Be Greater Than the Discharge
If the pipe is not limited by adjacent structures, the pipe should be sized such that the
design capacity is greater than the calculated discharge in the pipe. The design
capacity may be based on one or more pipes, flowing full or part-full, depending on
user-set design options. If site restrictions or available section limitations result in a
situation where no sections meet the required capacity, the largest available size and
number of barrels will be chosen.

Downstream Pipes Should Be at Least as Large as Upstream Pipes
Designs typically avoid sizing downstream pipes smaller than upstream pipes, regard-
less of differing slope and velocity requirements. One of the primary reasons for this is
debris that passes through the upstream pipe could become caught in the connecting
structure, clogging the sewer.
Pipe Matching Criteria Downstream Should Be Met
Whenever possible, the designed pipe should have its downstream invert set such that
the pipe meets the matching criteria, such as matching inverts or crowns. Note that
because of higher design priorities, such as the pipe fitting within existing structures,
the matching criteria may not always be met.
Minimum Cover Constraint Should Be Met
Pipe inverts should be set such that the upstream and downstream crowns of the pipe
are below the ground elevation by at least the amount of the minimum cover. Note that
higher design priorities, such as existing structure locations and matching criteria,
may prevent the minimum cover constraint from being met.

Theory
Pipe Matching Criteria Upstream Should Be Met
The upstream invert of the designed pipe should be set to meet the matching criteria of
the upstream structure. Higher design priorities, such as minimum cover constraints,
may result in a pipe that does not match upstream as desired.
Maximum Slope Constraint Should Be Met
Wherever possible, the designed pipe should not exceed the desired maximum slope.
In some situations, elevation differences across the system may result in a case where
a drop structure can be used to offset pipes. This is used instead of a pipe that is too
steep, or instead of upstream piping that would require much more excavation. Note
that the maximum slope constraint may be violated if higher priority design consider-
ations, such as existing structure location or pipe matching criteria, governs.
Other Constraints and Considerations
There are many degrees of freedom when designing a piping system. Several
constraints that are not mentioned above, such as minimum velocity constraints and
minimum slope constraints, may also result in adjustments to the designed pipe. Other
constraints may be too limiting, such as maximum cover constraint and maximum
velocity, resulting in designed pipes that could violate too many other constraints.
This wide range of choices and priorities emphasizes the need for careful review of
any automated design by a professional. It is not always possible to meet every desired
condition, so it is very much the responsibility of the engineer to make final judgments
and decisions regarding the best design for the client.
Inlet Design
The length of any inlet can be automatically designed. The available design lengths
(standard lengths) for a given inlet are defined in the inlet library, and can easily be
changed. The design algorithm uses the same equations used in analysis to determine
the minimum available inlet length that meets the design constraints.
Designing Inlets on Grade

Since gutter width and spread are independent of the inlet characteristics, inlets on
grade are designed simply to meet the minimum efficiency. If the minimum efficiency
cannot be met with any of the lengths, StormCAD will choose the largest of the avail-
able lengths.

Designing Inlets in Sag

When designing inlets in sag, the objective is to keep gutter spread and depth below
desired maximum levels. StormCAD will choose the minimum available inlet length
that meets these constraints. In a case where the constraints cannot be met with any of
the available lengths, StormCAD will choose the largest inlet length possible.
There are a few special considerations that should be realized when analyzing a storm
sewer. These are conditions where special assumptions need to be made, or where
calculations may seem counter-intuitive at first glance. These considerations include:
• “Flow Balance at Junctions”

• “Energy Discontinuity”
• “Structure Energy Grade”
• “Design Considerations”
Flow Balance at Junctions
Because of the use of rational method hydrology, flow discontinuities may be noticed.
This is a condition where the sum of the inflows does not equal the sum of the
outflows. The main reason for this is that the rational method is only concerned with
peak flows and has a high dependence on duration (system time). As the system time
changes, the intensity changes and has a direct effect on the rate of flow in the system.
The most common cause of confusion with this discontinuity stems from rational
loads that are tracked through a long piping system without any other loads entering
the network. At the inlet of origin, the time of concentration may be relatively small,
resulting in a high intensity and a large peak discharge. As the load travels through the
pipes, the system time becomes larger, so the intensity lowers. This results in smaller
discharge values, so the peak flow at the outlet may be significantly smaller than the
peak flow at the original inlet.
This may seem counter-intuitive at first, with questions like "Where did the rest of the
flow go?" coming to mind. In reality, the rest of the flow was not lost, but an attempt
to balance peak flows is not valid. Picture standing at the top of a hill with a bucket of
water. If you empty the entire bucket into the gutter in one second, then the peak rate
of discharge at the top of the hill is one bucket per second. Racing to the bottom of the
hill, you can observe the flow and see that the peak flow is much less than one bucket
per second. However, the flow lasts longer than one second. There was no water lost,
but the peak was lower.

Theory
StormCAD does not simply add flow at a junction node; rather, it takes into account
the attenuation of peak flow as one moves downstream by keeping track of upstream
catchment properties and decreasing the peak intensity according to the time of
concentration and travel.
The flow out of a catchment is:
Q = Cia
Where Q = Flow
C = Coefficient
i = Intensity
a = Area
And the flow out of a junction is:
Q out = ΣCia + ΣQ known
One would think therefore that flow in equals flow out. However, the intensity (i) used
for determining the flow into the manhole will be higher than the intensity of the flow
leaving the manhole.
This intensity is calculated using the longest possible flow travel time in order to
generate the most conservative value for peak flow. For example, say a catchment
empties into a catch basin and has a Time of Concentration of 10 minutes. On the
other hand the travel time of the piped flow getting to the catch basin is 12 minutes.
The rational flow generated at the catch basin will be generated based on the intensity
associated with the 12 minute duration. This way you are assured that the whole
system is contributing to the flow and hence you are using the most conservative peak
flow value at that point.
If you do not wish to have this flow attenuation taken into account, you should specify
Known or Additional flows at the catch basins.
See the “System Time / Controlling Time / Duration” topic for more information.

Energy Discontinuity
The program by default uses hydraulic grade as the basis for its hydraulic computa-
tions. Energy grade at any given point is then computed by adding the velocity head to
the hydraulic grade. Because of this standard practice, energy discontinuities may
occasionally occur, such as when pipe size decreases in the downstream direction, or
pipe slope increases.
If you wish the calculations to be based on the energy grade line you can modify the
Haestad.ini file located in the base Bentley directory. Find [STMC] in the file
depending on which product you are using, and create a new line below the heading.
In the new line enter in the following text typed exactly as printed below.
StructureLossMode=EGL
Save and close the Haestad.ini file and reopen the program. To revert back to an HGL
based analysis; simply remove the line from the Haestad.ini file and save.
Flow discontinuities can also be responsible for energy discontinuities. Since a struc-
ture is analyzed based on a different system time than a pipe, a direct comparison of
energy grades is not reasonable.
Structure Energy Grade
The energy grade line (EGL) at the upstream side of a structure is computed based on
the characteristics of the structure and its upstream pipes. The reported EGL is gener-
ally reported as the lowest EGL of all nonplunging upstream pipes, based on normal-
ized flow values. If there are no non-plunging pipes upstream, the structure's upstream
EGL is taken as the higher of the structure's downstream EGL and upstream hydraulic
grade line (HGL).
In situations where the structure's upstream EGL is lower than its downstream EGL or
upstream HGL, the highest value governs. This rare condition may indicate that the
presumed headloss in the structure is not significant enough to produce the expected
energy loss. The modeler may accept this as a minor limitation of the hydraulic theory,
or may choose to use different structure headloss methods or values.
The reported upstream velocity and velocity head for the structure are based on the
difference between the structure's upstream EGL and HGL.

Theory
Design Considerations
As with any automated design, the program’s design is intended only as a preliminary
step. It will select pipe sizes, inlet lengths (StormCAD only), and pipe invert eleva-
tions based on the input provided, but no computer program can match the skills that
an experienced engineer has. The modeler should always review any automated
design, and should make any changes required to adjust, improve, and otherwise
polish the system.
Engineer’s Reference
• “Table of Rational Coefficients”
• “Headloss Coefficients for Junctions”
• “Roughness Values - Manning’s Equation”
• “Roughness Values - Kutter’s Equation”
• “Roughness Values - Darcy-Weisbach Equation (Colebrook-White)”
• “Roughness Values, Hazen-Williams Formula”
Table of Rational Coefficients
Following are ranges of rational coefficients. These ranges cover return periods of 2 to
10 years, and are based on Intensity-Duration-Frequency (IDF) methodology. See
References (HEC No. 19, 1984)
Table 10-2: Table of Rational Coefficients
Area C Value
Business
Downtown 0.70-0.95
Neighborhood 0.50-0.70
Residential
Single Family 0.30-0.50
Multiunit Detached 0.40-0.60
Multiunit Attached 0.60-0.75
Suburban Resident 0.25-0.40

Table 10-2: Table of Rational Coefficients
Area C Value
Apartment 0.50-0.70
Residential (1.2 acre lots or larger) 0.30-0.45
Industrial
Light 0.50-0.80
Heavy 0.60-0.90
Parks and Cemetaries 0.10-0.25
Playgrounds 0.20-0.40
Unimproved 0.10-0.30
Pavement
Asphalt/Concrete 0.70-0.95
Brick 0.70-0.85
Drives and Walks 0.70-0.85
Lawns, Sandy Soils
Flat, 2% 0.05-0.10
Average, 2-7% 0.10-0.15
Steep, >7% 0.15-0.20
Lawns, Heavy Soils
Flat, 2% 0.13-0.17
Average, 2-7% 0.18-0.22
Steep, >7% 0.25-0.35
Railroad Yard 0.20-0.40
Roofs 0.70-0.95

Theory
Headloss Coefficients for Junctions
These are typical headloss coefficients used in the standard method for estimating
headloss through manholes and junctions.
Table 10-3: Typical Headloss Coefficients
Type of Manhole Diagram Headloss

Coefficient
Trunkline only with no bend at the

junction
0.5
Trunkline only with 45° bend at the

junction
0.6
Trunkline only with 90° bend at the

junction
0.8

Table 10-3: Typical Headloss Coefficients
Type of Manhole Diagram Headloss

Coefficient
Trunkline with one lateral
Small 0.6
Large 0.7
Two roughly equivalent entrance lines

with angle < 90° between lines
0.8
Two roughly equivalent entrance lines

with angle > 90° between lines
0.9
Three or more entrance lines
1.0

Theory
Roughness Values - Manning’s Equation
Commonly used roughness values for different materials are:
Table 10-4: Manning’s Coefficients n for Closed-Metal Conduits Flowing

Partly Full
Channel Type and Description Min. Normal Max.
a. Brass, smooth 0.009 0.010 0.013
b. Steel
1. Lockbar and welded 0.010 0.012 0.014
2. Riveted and spiral 0.013 0.016 0.017
c. Cast iron
1. Coated 0.010 0.013 0.014
2. Uncoated 0.011 0.014 0.016
d. Wrought iron
1. Black 0.012 0.014 0.015
2. Galvanized 0.013 0.016 0.017
e. Corrugated metal
1. Subdrain 0.017 0.019 0.021
2. Storm drain 0.021 0.024 0.030

Roughness Values - Kutter’s Equation
Table 10-5: Kutter’s Coefficients n for Closed Non-Metal Conduits

Flowing Partly Full
Channel Type and Minimum Normal Maximum

Description
Lucite 0.008 0.009 0.010
Glass 0.009 0.010 0.013
Cement
Neat, Surface 0.010 0.011 0.013
Mortar 0.011 0.013 0.015
Concrete
Culvert, straight and free of 0.010 0.011 0.013

debris
Culvert with bends, 0.011 0.013 0.014

connections, and some debris
Finished 0.011 0.012 0.014
Sewer with manholes, inlet, 0.013 0.015 0.017

etc., straight
Unfinished, steel form 0.012 0.013 0.014
Unfinished, smooth wood 0.012 0.014 0.016

form
Unfinished, rough wood form 0.015 0.017 0.020
Clay
Common drainage tile 0.011 0.013 0.017
Vitrified sewer 0.011 0.014 0.017
Vitrified sewer with manholes, 0.013 0.015 0.017

inlet, etc.
Vitrified subdrain with open 0.014 0.016 0.018

joint

Theory
Table 10-5: Kutter’s Coefficients n for Closed Non-Metal Conduits

Flowing Partly Full
Channel Type and Minimum Normal Maximum

Description
Brickwork
Glazed 0.011 0.013 0.015
Lined with cement mortar 0.012 0.015 0.017
Sanitary sewers coated with 0.012 0.013 0.016

sewage slimes, with bends
and connections
Paved invert, sewer, smooth 0.016 0.019 0.020

bottom
Rubble masonry, cemented 0.018 0.025 0.030
Roughness Values - Darcy-Weisbach Equation (Colebrook-White)
Table 10-6: Darcy-Weisbach Roughness Heights k for Closed Conduits
Pipe Material k (mm) k (ft)
Glass, drawn brass, copper (new) 0.0015 0.000005
Seamless commercial steel 0.004 0.000013
Commercial steel (enamel coated) 0.0048 0.000016
Commercial steel (new) 0.045 0.00015
Wrought iron (new) 0.045 0.00015
Asphalted cast iron (new) 0.12 0.0004
Galvanized iron 0.15 0.0005
Cast iron (new) 0.26 0.00085
Concrete (steel forms, smooth) 0.18 0.0006

Table 10-6: Darcy-Weisbach Roughness Heights k for Closed Conduits
Pipe Material k (mm) k (ft)
Concrete (good joints, average) 0.36 0.0012
Concrete (rough, visible form marks) 0.60 0.002
Riveted steel (new) 0.9~9.0 0.003~0.03
Corrugated metal 45 0.15
Roughness Values, Hazen-Williams Formula
Table 10-7: Hazen-Williams Roughness Coefficients C
Pipe Material C
Asbestos Cement 140
Brass 130-140
Brick Sewer 100
Cast-Iron
New, unlined 130
10 yr. Old 107-113
20 yr. Old 89-100
30 yr. Old 75-90
40 yr. Old 64-83
Concrete or concrete lined
Steel Forms 140
Wooden Forms 120
Centrifugally Spun 135

Theory
Table 10-7: Hazen-Williams Roughness Coefficients C
Pipe Material C
Copper 130-140
Galvanized Iron 120
Glass 140
Lead 130-140
Plastic 140-150
Steel
Coal-tar Enamel 145-150
New Unlined 140-150
Riveted 110
Tin 130
Vitrified Clay (Good Condition) 110-140
Wood Stave (Average Condition) 120


Chapter
Gravity Flow 11
Diversions
Basic Concepts
• “What Are Diversions?”
• “What Happens to the Flow at a Diversion?”
• “Why do Diversions Exist only in Gravity Systems?”
• “Is a Surcharged Gravity Pipe Considered a Pressure Pipe?”
• “How Can a User Model a Diversion?”
• “What Happens to the Diverted Flow?”
• “Are There Rules for the Diversion Targets?”
• “What Does a Diversion Look Like in the Drawing?”
• “How Does a Diversion Split the Flow Between Flow Being Piped Downstream
and Flow Being Diverted?”
What Are Diversions?
Most system structures (e.g., manholes, wet wells) have only a single outlet pipe,
because of the tree-like structure of gravity storm and sanitary sewer systems.
However, in certain situations, there can be more than one way for water to leave a
node, and in some cases leave the sewer system altogether. A node with more than
one outflow pipe is called a diversion node.

Basic Concepts
Some examples of diversions are combined sewer overflows, flow out of a manhole
due to a hydraulic restriction downstream, multi-barrel sewers, relief sewers, pump
station flooding, diversion of flow into a holding tank or tunnel, and basement
flooding. Some typical diversion structures are shown below.

Gravity Flow Diversions

Basic Concepts
*Water Environmental Federation (1999) Prevention and Control of Sewer System

Overflows. 2nd Ed., Manual of Practice FD-17 Copy right Water Environment Feder-
ation. Reprinted with permission.
What Happens to the Flow at a Diversion?
To model overflows and diversion, lay out a conduit between the node from which the
flow is to be diverted and the target of the diversion. Designate the “from” node as the
start (upstream)node, and the target node which the flow is diverted to as the stop
(downstream) node.
In the new conduit’s properties, set the Is Diversion Link? property to True. The
Diversion Rating Curve field will then become available. Define the rating curve to
establish the proportions of upstream flows that become diverted through the diver-
sion link. Note that flow through the diversion link is entirely based on the data in the
rating curve and the system flow in the bounding start node; all physical properties of
the conduit are ignored.
As an example, assume there is a diversion link between nodes CB-1 and CB-2.

Assume node CB-1 has the following System Characteristics:
• System CA = 1.2 acres

• System Flow Time = 10 min
• System Intensity = 3 inches/hr
• System Rational Flow = 3.6 cfs
• System Additional Flow = 2 cfs
• Flow (Total Out) = 5.6 cfs
Now assume based on the Diversion Rating Curve associated with the diversion link
that for Flow (Total Out), 20% of the flow is diverted through the rating curve.
StormCAD does not simply send 20% of 5.6 cfs through the diversion link.
StormCAD conserves the CA as follows:
• Diverted CA = 1.2 * 0.2 = 0.24 acres

• Diverted Additional Flow = 2 * 0.2 = 0.4 cfs
At CB-2, there is a System Flow Time of 12 minutes, and a System Intensity of 2.8
inches/hour.
Therefore the contribution of flow to the catch basin from the diversion link would be
as follows:
Rational Flow of 0.672 cfs (0.24 acres * 2.8 inches/hour)
plus
Additional Flow of 0.4 cfs
equals 1.072 cfs.
Why do Diversions Exist only in Gravity Systems?
Pressure flow systems can have multiple loops. Thus, the flow split at any pressure
node can be calculated directly from the continuity and energy equations. However,
in gravity systems, the calculation of the quantity of water going in each direction
is considerably more complicated, necessitating a special diversion node, or a
hydraulic solution, such as Bentley's CivilStorm, that solves the full Saint Venant
hydraulic equations.

Basic Concepts
Is a Surcharged Gravity Pipe Considered a Pressure Pipe?
A gravity pipe is a pipe that can flow less than full, while a pressure pipe must always
be full. In terms of diversions, a gravity pipe that is full, or surcharged, is still treated
as a gravity pipe.
How Can a User Model a Diversion?
A diversion is modeled as a conduit element (signifying the physical link between the
diversion node and the diversion target). Lay out the diversion link as you would any
other conduit, then set the Is Diversion property of the conduit to True, and enter a
rating curve for the diversion (which describes the relationship between flow to the
diversion node versus diverted flow). During a calculation, flow will then be diverted
to the downstream node of the diversion link.
What Happens to the Diverted Flow?
The diverted flow can either leave the system completely, as in an overflow, or return
to the system at a downstream node, as in the case of a parallel relief sewer. In the
latter instance, the downstream node, referred to as the diversion target, can be
located either in the same network (tree-shaped layout) or in another subnetwork
altogether.

Are There Rules for the Diversion Targets?
If the diversion target is not an overflow, it must be located downstream of the diver-
sion or in a separate subnetwork, such that water cannot be circulated back to the
upstream side of the diversion through a loop. Looping flow back upstream of the
diversion creates a mathematical anomaly that prevents the model from solving prop-
erly.
Users should ensure that diversion targets are valid, however the program will validate
your choice before computation and warn you of any errors. In validating diversion
targets, downstream nodes are defined as the nodes between the diversion and the
outlet, as well as all nodes in branches that merge into downstream nodes. The most
important thing is that the diversion does not create a loop in the system.

Basic Concepts
If there are two diversions in series, the target node for the upstream diversion must be
upstream of the target node for the downstream diversion. A diversion can divert flow
to any node in another network, as long as the target network is downstream from the
diversion network. A diversion network is considered to be upstream from a target
network if any node in the diversion network is diverting flow to a node in the target
network.
What Does a Diversion Look Like in the Drawing?
When the Is Diversion Link? property is set to True on a conduit, the conduit is auto-
matically annotated with the symbol shown below to signify that this conduit is a
diversion.
How Does a Diversion Split the Flow Between Flow Being Piped
Downstream and Flow Being Diverted?
While in theory it is possible to hydraulically determine the flow split given tailwater
conditions and detailed descriptions of the hydraulic characteristics of the diversion,
most users do not have that kind of data available. Instead, users enter .rating curves.
describing how the diversion structure splits the flow.

Rating Curves
A rating curve for a diversion determines the amount of flow that is diverted given the
total flow into the diversion. A rating curve is a function, shown as a table or a graph,
such that for any inflow value there is only one value for diverted flow. The diverted
flow must always be nonnegative and less than or equal to the total upstream flow.
• “How Many Data Points Do I Need to Describe a Rating Curve?”

• “How Can the Values for the Rating Curve be Determined?”
• “What if Flow Measurements Cannot Be Obtained?”
How Many Data Points Do I Need to Describe a Rating Curve?
The model uses linear interpolation and extrapolation to calculate diversions. If the
flow is diverted proportionately over the entire range of flows, then only two points
are needed to describe the rating curve. If the rating curve has a great deal of curva-
ture, significantly more points are needed to adequately represent the curve to the
model. Some typical rating curves are described below and shown in the figure
below:
• Proportional split (e.g. parallel relief sewer)

• All flow diverted (e.g. downstream blockage, power outage at pump station)
• Threshold flow with excess diverted (e.g. weir, regulator)
• Initial throttling of flow (e.g. vortex regulator)

Special Cases
How Can the Values for the Rating Curve be Determined?
The most accurate way to determine the values for the rating curve is to take field
measurements of two of the three possible flows (upstream, direct, and diverted flow)
at the diversion for a range of upstream flows. Because it is best to make these
measurements for as wide a range of flows as possible, it is recommended to conduct
the testing during wet weather periods.
What if Flow Measurements Cannot Be Obtained?
In the absence of flow measurements, the manufacturers of some diversion struc-

tures may be able to provide a table of flow capacity, or minor loss k-values, for
various sizes and settings of the control device (e.g. valve, regulator, weir, orifice,
vortex controller). Otherwise, some reasonable estimates must be made and possibly
adjusted during calibration.
Special Cases
• “Hydraulic Restrictions”
• “How Can Parallel Relief Sewers be Modeled?”
• “How Can Diversions be Used to Model Off-line Storage?”
• “How Should the Models be Used to Handle Basement Flooding?”
• “Modeling the Effect of Tailwater Depth on the Rating Curve”
• “Can I Divert Water Uphill?”
• “Where Can I Enter and View Data on Diversions?”
• “Diversion Profiles”
Hydraulic Restrictions
If a hydraulic restriction causes an overflow upstream, should the diversion be at the

location of the restriction or the overflow? The answer is that the diversion should be
located at the point of overflow, or where the flow actually leaves the collection
system.

How Can Parallel Relief Sewers be Modeled?
There are several ways to model such situations:
• Identical Pipes - This case is modeled explicitly in Haestad Methods software. In

this case, you do not need to use diversions. To model a sewer reach with multiple
equivalent pipes, set the "Number of sections" field to the number of parallel
equivalent pipe barrels.
• Equivalent Pipe - If the sections of the parallel pipes do not have the same diam-
eter, you can determine the diameter of the equivalent pipe using Mannings equa-
tion, as follows:
where
De = diameter of equivalent pipe
D1 = diameter of first parallel pipe
D2 = diameter of second parallel pipe
For example, to determine the equivalent diameter of a 12- and 16-inch pipe in
parallel, the equation becomes:
• Diversion - The two pipes can also be modeled as a pipe in the system with a
second pipe diverting flow to a downstream node. In this case you will generally
use the larger pipe as the direct flow pipe and the smaller one as the diversion. The
flow split should be proportional to the diameters to the 8/3 power. This relation-
ship is given by the following equation:
where
Q2 = diverted flow
Qt = total upstream flow
D1 = diameter of direct flow pipe

Special Cases
D2 = diameter of diversion pipe
For example, if the parallel pipes have diameters of 16- and 12-inches, and the diver-
sion is the 12-inch pipe, then the fraction of flow split into the 12-inch pipe is:
and the rating curve is given by:
Table 11-1: Rating Curve
Upstream Diverted
Flow (gpm) Flow (gpm)
0 0
1000 370
How Can Diversions be Used to Model Off-line Storage?
Steady state methodologies (such as the Rational Method for hydrology or Extreme
Flow Factor loading for a sanitary sewer) are based solely on rates of flow, not
volumes of flow. In order to determine volume of storage, you need to multiply flow
rate by the duration of the flow rate. If sizing of storage is the primary purpose for
using the analysis, then Bentley CivilStorm or Bentley PondPack may be a more
appropriate model.
How Should the Models be Used to Handle Basement Flooding?
To the extent that basement flooding can be represented by a rating curve, the gravity
flow models can predict the rate of flooding. However, in most cases, the volume of
water flowing into a basement is small compared with the total flow in the pipe, and
you are only interested in knowing whether or not basement flooding is occurring.
Therefore, it may be more useful to simply monitor the hydraulic grade line (HGL) in
the vicinity of suspected basement flooding. If the HGL exceeds a threshold value,
then basement flooding is likely to occur. This threshold value needs to be deter-
mined based on experience with the system.

Modeling the Effect of Tailwater Depth on the Rating Curve
There is only a single rating curve for any diversion in a given run. If there are
different rating curves for different tailwater depths, then you can utilize the Scenario
Manager to set up multiple rating curves based on the range of tailwater depths, run
the different scenarios simultaneously, and compare the results.
Can I Divert Water Uphill?
The model allows you to divert flow uphill, such as in the case of flow that is diverted
via a pump. If uphill diversions are not desired, you need to check that the invert, or
sump, of the diversion target node is at a lower elevation than the invert of the diver-
sion. It is your responsibility to determine if such a diversion is physically possible, as
in the case of a pumped diversion or one that activates only when a manhole or wet
well is surcharged.
Where Can I Enter and View Data on Diversions?
Data on diversions is considered to be physical data, and is therefore stored within a

Scenario under the current Physical Alternative on the Conduit tab.
Diversion Profiles
When you generate a profile plot of a diversion conduit, the displayed HGL and EGL
values are approximated between the HGL (Out) and EGL (Out) values of the
connecting upstream node through the downstream invert elevation of the diversion
conduit.

Special Cases

Appendix
About Haestad 12
Methods
Haestad Methods has been acquired by Bentley Systems, Incorporated. Bentley

Systems provides software for the lifecycle of the world’s infrastructure. The
company’s comprehensive portfolio for the building, plant, civil, and geospatial
vertical markets spans architecture, engineering, construction (AEC) and operations.
Bentley is the leading provider of AEC software to the Engineering News-Record
Design 500 and major owner-operators. For more information, visit the Bentley Web
site at http://www.bentley.com.
Bentley offers software solutions to civil engineers throughout the world for
analyzing, modeling, and designing all sorts of hydrologic and hydraulic systems,
from municipal water and sewer systems to stormwater ponds, open channels, and
more. With point-and-click data entry, flexible units, and report-quality output,
Bentley is the ultimate source for your modeling needs.
In addition to the ability to run in Stand-Alone mode with a CAD-like interface, many
of our products can be totally integrated within AutoCAD. These three programs also
share numerous powerful features, such as scenario management, unlimited undo/
redo, customizable tables for editing and reporting, customizable GIS, database and
spreadsheet connection, and annotation.
Be sure to contact us or visit our Web site to find out about our latest software, books,
training, and open houses.
Software
Haestad Methods software includes:
• “StormCAD”
• “WaterGEMS”
• “WaterCAD”
• “SewerCAD”
• “StormCAD”

Software
• “PondPack”
• “FlowMaster”
• “CulvertMaster”
• “HAMMER”
• “GISConnect”
StormCAD
StormCAD revolutionizes municipal stormwater management. Whether your concern

is a stormwater master plan, localized flooding, GASB34 requirements, water quality
BMPs, NPDES permitting, or just simply being able to do faster and smarter designs
every day, StormCAD fits your needs. It is the only commercially available software
package that lets you analyze all your system elements in one package. StormCAD
also gives you the ability to perform analyses using either the SWMM algorithm or
StormCAD’s own implicit solution of full Saint-Venant equations.
StormCAD provides numerical solutions for the toughest interconnected pipe, pond,
and open channel networks, and provides stunning graphics and reporting tools for
visualizing your storm systems in action.
Use StormCAD For:
• Comprehensive Stormwater Master Plans

• Watershed-Based Master Planning
• Analysis of Open-channel, Closed-conduit and Combination systems
• Floodplain Studies
• Complex Flow Regime Analysis
• Water Quality Assessments
• Integrated Stormwater Quantity and Quality Assessments
• NPDES Permitting
WaterGEMS
WaterGEMS brings the concept of water modeling and GIS integration to the next
level. It is the only water-distribution modeling software that provides full, completely
seamless integration with GIS applications. Now the combined functionality of
WaterCAD and GIS can be utilized simultaneously, synthesizing the distinct advan-
tages of each application to create a modeling tool with an unprecedented level of
freedom, power, efficiency, and usability.

About Haestad Methods
You can create, display, edit, run, map, and design water models from within the GIS
environment, and view the results of the simulations as native GIS maps or with tradi-
tional Haestad Methods modeling tools. These abilities, in conjunction with the cross-
product functionality provided by the core Unified Data and Object Model architec-
ture, provide a powerful cutting-edge solution for your modeling projects.
WaterGEMS works within your choice of environments: MicroStation, ArcView,

ArcEdit, ArcInfo, AutoCAD, or the standalone WaterGEMS Modeler interface.
WaterCAD
WaterCAD is the definitive model for complex pressurized-pipe networks, such as

municipal water-distribution systems. You can use WaterCAD to perform a variety of
functions, including steady-state and extended-period simulations of pressure
networks with pumps, tanks, control valves, and more.
WaterCAD’s abilities also extend into public safety and long-term planning issues,
with extensive water quality features, automated fire protection analyses, comprehen-
sive scenario management, and enterprise-wide data-sharing capabilities.
WaterCAD is available with your choice of a stand-alone graphical user interface, a

MicroStation-integrated interface, or an AutoCAD-integrated interface.
SewerCAD
SewerCAD is a powerful design and analysis tool for modeling sanitary sewage
collection and pumping systems. With SewerCAD, you can develop and compute
sanitary loads, track and combine loads from dry-weather and wet-weather sources.
You can also simulate the hydraulic response of the entire system (gravity collection
and pressure force mains), observe the effects of overflows and diversions, and even
automatically design selected portions of the system. Output covers everything from
customizable tables and detailed reports to plan and profile sheets.
StormCAD
StormCAD is a highly efficient model for the design and analysis of storm sewer
collection systems. From graphical layout and intelligent network connectivity to flex-
ible reports and profiles, StormCAD covers all aspects of storm-sewer modeling.
Surface inlet networks are independent of pipe connectivity and inlet hydraulics
conform to FHWA HEC-22 methodologies. Gradually varied flow algorithms and a
variety of popular junction-loss methods are the foundation of StormCAD’s robust
gravity piping computations, which handle everything from surcharged pipes and
diversions to hydraulic jumps.

Software
PondPack
PondPack is a comprehensive, Windows-based hydrologic modeling program that

analyzes a tremendous range of situations, from simple sites to complex networked
watersheds. PondPack analyzes pre- and post-developed watershed conditions and
estimates required storage ponds. PondPack performs interconnected pond routing,
and also computes outlet rating curves with tailwater effects, multiple outfalls, pond
infiltration, and pond-detention times.
PondPack builds customized reports organized by categories, automatically creating

section and page numbers, tables of contents, and indexes. You can quickly create an
executive summary for an entire watershed or build an elaborate drainage report
showing any or all report items. Graphical displays, such as watershed diagrams, rain-
fall curves, and hydrographs, are fully compatible with other Windows software.
FlowMaster
FlowMaster is an efficient program for the design and analysis of a wide variety of
hydraulic elements, such as pressure pipes, open channels, weirs, orifices, and inlets.
FlowMaster’s Hydraulics Toolbox can create rating tables and performance curves for
any variables, using popular friction methods. Inlet calculations follow the latest
FHWA guidelines, and weighting of irregular section roughness can be based on any
popular techniques.
CulvertMaster
CulvertMaster helps engineers design new culverts and analyze existing culvert
hydraulics, from single-barrel crossings to complex multibarrel culverts with roadway
overtopping. CulvertMaster computations use HDS No. 5 methodologies, allowing
you to solve for whatever hydraulic variables you do not know, such as culvert size,
peak discharge, and headwater elevation. Output capabilities include comprehensive
detailed reports, rating tables, and performance curves.
HAMMER
HAMMER is the premier software in the world for analyzing hydraulic transients,
surge control devices, and water hammer effects. HAMMER models any hydraulic
element, transient source or surge protection devices, including:
• Transients for flow, head, or entrained vapor

• Pressurized pipelines and networks
• Ingress of contaminants into pipe networks

• Surcharged sewers or storage tunnels

• Pump start and shut down scenarios
• Flow shifting via pumps or valves
• Power or pump failure
• Rapid valve closure
• Catastrophic pipe or pump breaks
HAMMER can easily import steady-state model results from industry-standard

models such as WaterCAD, WaterGEMS, EPANET, or EXTRAN (for line filling).
Users can also build their own models using the advanced graphical interface or
robust database connections.
GISConnect
Run your GIS inside AutoCAD®. GISConnect is the long anticipated product that
brings together the data management power of ArcGIS® and the drawing capabilities
of AutoCAD®. Master your company's existing CAD expertise to deliver the GIS
solutions that your clients demand.
Bentley Institute Press

Bentley Institute Press provides civil engineering professionals with affordable,
quality reference and textbooks dedicated to the practical application of engineering
theory to hydraulics and hydrology. Bentley Institute Press publications include:
References and Textbooks: Authored by industry-recognized experts, Bentley

Institute Press offers a complete line of reference
books for use in both academic and professional
settings.
Technical Journals: With an eye towards computer technology, journals
like “Current Methods” address the latest innovations
in water-resources modeling and practical modeling
case studies, as well as offering credit towards
certification.
Independent Papers: Bentley Institute Press also provides funding for
engineers to write case studies of their projects, with
potential publication in a variety of industry journals
and magazines.
Books from Bentley Institute Press:

Training
Advanced Water Distribution Modeling and Management, first edition

Haestad, Walski, Chase, Savic, Grayman, Beckwith, and Koelle
Computer Applications in Hydraulic Engineering, fifth edition

Haestad, Walski, Barnard, Durrans, and Meadows
Floodplain Modeling Using HEC-RAS, first edition

Haestad, Dyhouse, Hatchett, and Benn
Proceedings of the First Annual Water Security Summit, first edition

Haestad
Stormwater Conveyance Modeling and Design, first edition

Haestad and Durrans
Wastewater Collection System Modeling and Design, first edition

Haestad, Walski, Barnard, Merritt, Harold, Walker, and Whitman
Water Distribution Modeling, first edition

Haestad, Walski, Chase, and Savic
To order or to receive additional information on these or any other Bentley Institute

Press titles, please call 800-727-6555 (U.S. and Canada) or +1-203-755-1666 (world-
wide) or visit www.haestadpress.com.
Training
The Bentley Institute manages professional training programs to ensure consistent,
high quality, user training for a variety of Bentley products and varying levels of
application experience. Bentley Institute training is developed to maximize your
productivity by using examples relevant to your day-to-day project efforts. Training is
developed concurrently with software applications to provide knowledge of the latest
tools and features. Additionally, all Bentley Institute faculty meet rigorous certifica-
tion requirements.
The Bentley Institute offers complete training for Haestad Methods products.These
training programs are famous for efficiently and effectively teaching engineers how to
apply hydraulic theory and state-of-the-art software to real-world design situations.
Classroom Learning: Led by experienced Bentley instructors, classroom learning is

offered through scheduled courses at Bentley training facilities or as account-specific
training in your office or nearby training facility. Regional civil training events offer
comprehensive civil training and peer networking, plus training in accordance with
regional DOT and contractor needs.

Distance Learning: Live, instructor-led distance learning is taught by experienced

Bentley instructors via the Internet. Distance learning is available through scheduled
courses or as account-specific courses tailored to your workflow.
OnDemand eLearning: OnDemand eLearning delivers professional training to every

desk through recorded interactive courses and lectures. Hundreds of hours of OnDe-
mand eLearning courses are available to Bentley LEARN and Enterprise Training
Subscription users.
To obtain more information about Haestad Methods certification programs or to see

upcoming events in a city near you, visit http://www.haestad.com.
Accreditations
Bentley Systems has achieved the highest levels of accreditation from both the Inter-
national Association for Continuing Education and Training (IACET) and the Profes-
sional Development Registry for Engineers and Surveyors (PDRES). In addition to
our own prestigious certifications, these endorsements enable modelers to earn
Continuing Education Units (CEUs) and Professional Development Hours (PDHs) for
their satisfactory participation in various training and educational programs.
Internet Resources
In addition to modeling software, continuing education, and publications, Bentley
Systems also provides Internet-based tools to help engineers manage their account
information, manage their projects, and manage their sanity.
Use the Check for Updates button to access our knowledge base and instant software
updates for Bentley SELECT subscribers.
Use the Bentley Institute Training command in the Help menu to access the Bentley
Institute page of our website.
Use the Bentley Professional Services command in the Help menu to access the
Bentley Professional Services page of our website.
Use the Online Support command in the Help menu to access the SelectServices Use
the Support page of our website.
Use the Discussion Groups command in the Help menu to access the online sign up
form for our forum discussion groups:
• WaterTalk
• StormTalk

Internet Resources
• SewerTalk
• GISTalk
• UTalk
Use the Bentley.com command in the Help menu to access the main page of our
website.

Appendix
References 13
Ming Jin, Samuel Coran and Jack Cook (2004), “New One-Dimensional Implicit
Numerical Dynamic Sewer and Storm Model”, Haestad Methods Inc., Waterbury, CT
Ben C. Yen (2001), "Hydraulics of Sewer System", in Stormwater Collection Systems

Design Handbook, ed. Larry W. Mays, McGraw-Hill, New York
Danny L. Fread (1993), "Flow Routing", in Handbook of Hydrology, ed David R.

Maidment, McGraw-Hill, New York
Ming Jin and Danny L. Fread (2000) "Discussion on the Application of Relaxation
Scheme to Wave-Propagation Simulation in Open-Cannel Networks", Journal of
Hydraulic Eng., ASCE, 126(1), 89-91.
Ming Jin and Danny L. Fread (1999) "One-dimensional modeling of mud/debris

unsteady flows", Journal of Hydraulic Eng., ASCE, 25(8), 827-834.
Ming Jin and Danny L. Fread (1997) "Dynamic flood routing with explicit and
implicit numerical solution schemes", Journal of Hydraulic Eng., ASCE, 123(3), 166-
173.

Glossary
Alternative: A categorized data set that create scenarios when placed

together. Alternatives hold the input data in the form of
records. A record holds the data for a particular element
in your system.
Aquifer: A sub-surface groundwater area used to model the
vertical movement of water infiltrating from the
subcatchments which lie above them. Aquifers also
permit the infiltration of groundwater into the
conveyance system, or exfiltration of surface water from
the conveyance system, depending on the hydraulic
gradient that exists.
Backflow: The backing up of water through a conduit or channel in
the direction opposite to normal flow.
Basin: An area having a common outlet for its surface runoff.
Batch Run: A set of multiple scenarios that are computed together.
This is helpful if you want to queue a large number of
calculations, or manage a group of smaller calculations as
a set.
bmp: File name extension for bitmap image files, which can be
used as background layers in StormCAD.
Branch: In Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition, a series of
connected elements. The Bentley StormCAD V8 XM
Edition calculation engine includes a heuristic routine
that decomposes a network into its component branches,
and each branch is solved independently using an
implicit solver. Each branch comprises a series of
connected elements. Elements with the same branch ID
are solved together.
Calculation Options Profile: A set of calculation options associated with a specific
scenario.
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Glossary-579

Capacity (Design): The carrying capacity of the conduit under design
conditions. When the pipe is designed to flow part full,
the design capacity will be less than the full flow
capacity.
Capacity (Full Flow): The carrying capacity of the conduit under the filled
condition computed with the friction slope equal to the
constructed slope.
Captured flow: The portion of the inlet flow which actually drains into
the catch basin. The captured flow is dependent on the
inlet capacity of the catch basin.
Catalog Conduits: User-defined re-usable data sets that define common
physical characteristics of conduits.
Catch basin: The geographical area that "catches" the rainfall and
directs it towards a common discharge point within the
storm collection network.
Catchment: The area drained by a stream, lake or other body of water
in a sewer or stormwater system.
Channel: A channel refers to a channel that changes geometry from
the upstream cross section to the downstream cross
section. Channels can be used to model natural streams or
swales which are not prismatic in cross section. Channels
must have a cross section element at each end and
properties are interpolated along the channel.
CN: SCS Curve Number
Collection: Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition uses the term
Collection to identify some fields where you enter a set
of data instead of a single value. To use this feature, click
the field in which the word Collection appears, then click
the Ellipsis (…) button to open a dialog box into which
you enter data.
Composite Hydrograph: A graph of the total flow over time from multiple defined
fixed/unit loads, hydrographs, and pattern loads.
Conduit: An open- or closed-section element through which water
moves. A conduit has a constant roughness and cross
section shape along its entire length. In Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition, a conduit can refer to any
prismatic channel or pipe that conveys flow. The cross
section of a conduit must remain constant from one end
to the next.
Cross Section Node: An element which is perpendicular to flow across a
channel.
Glossary-580 Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

Glossary
DD: Excess duration rainfall.

Diurnal Curve: A pattern that relates to the changes in loads over the
course of the day, reflecting times when people are using
more or less water than average.
Drag: Dragging is an action you perform with the mouse to
select items in the drawing pane. Click in the drawing
pane, hold down the mouse button, and move the mouse
to form a rectangle around the elements you want to
select. After you have formed the rectangle around the
items you want to select, let go of the mouse button.
dwh: File name extension for the binary format file used by the
StormCAD Stand-Alone mode only. The .dwh file
contains the drawing.
dxf: File name extension for Data Exchange File format
image files, which can be used as background layers in
StormCAD. Dxf files store vector data for drawings
typically produced in CAD programs.
Dynamic Manager: A dialog box that can be displayed floating above the
workspace or attached (docked) to any one of the sides of
the workspace.
Dynamic selection set: A selection created by running a query.
English: E-Q-TWU.S. customary units, such as inch or acre
Element Symbology: Refers to the way in which elements and their associated
labels are displayed in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM
Edition You use the Element Symbology manager to
manage element annotations and color coding.
Element Table: A read-only, predefined FlexTable that you can use to
review data about a specific element type. There is one
predefined table for every element available in Bentley
E-Q-TW: Elevation-flow-tailwater rating curves
Extended Period Simulation:A calculation type where the model is analyzed over a
specified duration of time.
FlexTable: A customizable table that lets you view input data and
results for all elements of a specific type in a tabular
format. You can use the standard set of FlexTables or
create your own FlexTables to compare data and create
reports.
Flow (Additional): The sum of Additional Subsurface and Additional
Carryover flows after they have mixed together in the
subsurface (conduit) network.

Flow (Bypass): Flows that are not intercepted by the inlet at a catch basin
node, and continue on downstream via a gutter element.
Flow (Carryover): Flows at an inlet that were bypassed, via a gutter, from
the inlet upstream.
Flow (Fixed): Summation of Additional Flow and Known Flow.
Flow (Known): Similar to Additional Flow except that a local inlet input
will overwrite any accumulations (see Flow
(Additional)).
Flow (System): Total flows in the subsurface (conduit) network, on the
downstream side of a catch basin, manhole or transition
node. The system flows are equal to the sum of the Local
and Upstream flows.
Freeboard: The difference between the top of dam elevation and the
water surface elevation.
gif: File name extension for Graphic Image Format image
files, which can be used as background layers in
StormCAD.
GIS: Geographic information system
Global storm event: In Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition, project-wide
storm events, usually applied to catchments that do
not use local rainfall. Project-wide global storm
events are typically associated with Hydrology
alternatives.
Gutter: An open-section element that models overflow. Gutters
are used in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition only to
model the water which exceeds the capacity of in catch
basin inlet and must flow through a surface gutter to the
next catch basin. A Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition
gutter can only receive water from a catch basin.
Hydrograph: A graph of discharge versus time.
Hyetograph: A graphical representation of rainfall intensity with
respect to time.
Hyperlink: In Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition, a link to an
external file, such as an image or movie file, for the
purpose of associating the file with a specific element.
Ia : Initial abstraction
ICPM: Interconnected Pond Modeling
IDF/I-D-F: Intensity-Duration-Frequency

Glossary
Implicit Engine: One of two calculation engines available in Bentley

StormCAD V8 XM Edition. The implicit engine uses a
four-point implicit finite difference solver which tends to
be more stable than an explicit solver. The implicit
engine in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition is based on
the solver in the National Weather Service FLDWAV
model.
Infiltration: Water that enters the system from the ground through
defective pipes, pipe joints, connections, or manhole
walls
Inflow: Inflow is specified at a manhole or wet well as the total
amount of wet weather inflow. Together with the
infiltration along the pipes, the inflow forms the wet
weather part of the sewer load.
Inflow Collection: A collection of any combination of fixed, hydrograph, or
pattern inflows for an element.
Inlet flow: Flows added to the manholes, catch basins, ponds, and
wet wells in your model, including runoffs from
catchments, user input hydrographs, and flows from
other sources, such as pumps.
inp: File name extension for SWMM v5 project files.
jpg: File name extension for image files produced using the
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) standard.
JPEG files, which can also have the file name extension
jpeg, can be used as background layers in StormCAD.
Junction chamber: A structure in which flow can be mixed or split. In
combined sewers systems, flow can be split between that
going to treatment and that going to an overflow. Also
referred to as a transition.
K e: Entrance loss coefficient
Kr: Reverse flow loss coefficient
Land Uses: Categories of activities or land surface characteristics
that are assigned to catchment elements. Examples of
land use activities are residential, commercial, industrial,
and undeveloped.
Manhole: Element that provides access to the system for inspection
and maintenance. Manholes are usually installed where
there is a change in horizontal (plan-view) pipe direction
or pipe slope, where several pipes join, or where the pipe
size changes.

mdb: File name extension for StormCAD database files. The
.mdb file contains all modeling data, and includes
everything needed to perform a calculation. This file is an
open access database format file and can be viewed and
edited.
MrSID: File name extension for Multi-resolution Seamless Image
Database format raster image files, which can be used as
background layers in StormCAD.
Orifice Coefficient: For stormwater openings, an orifice coefficient of 0.60 is
often used.
Outfall: The ultimate termination points in a network.
Overflow: The flow lost when the water surface elevation at a
manhole or other type of node is above the rim elevation
or user-specified overtopping elevation.
Pattern: A series of multipliers which describe how the base load
varies over time.
Pattern Load: A single average base load and a series of dimensionless
multipliers used to delineate how the load varies over
time.
Pattern Setup: In StormCAD, a pattern setup allows you to match unit
sanitary (dry weather) loads with appropriate loading
patterns. Each scenario can use a different pattern setup,
thus allowing you to model different loading alternatives
for different extended period simulations.
png: File name extension for Portable Network Graphic
format image files, which can be used as background
layers in StormCAD.
Pollutograph: A plot of time vs. concentration or mass rate.
Pond outlet structure: A structure that allows flow to discharge from a pond.
Pressure junction: A connection between two or more pressure pipes of
varying characteristics. Loads may enter a pressure
portion of a network through a pressure junction.
Pressure pipe: In StormCAD, a type of link element used to connect
node elements in pressure portions of a network.
Profile: A graph that plots a particular attribute across a distance,
such as ground elevation along a section of piping. As
well as these side or sectional views of the ground
elevation, profiles can be used to show other
characteristics, such as hydraulic grade, pressure, and
constituent concentration.

Glossary
Pump: A structure in a wastewater system designed to add the

energy (head) necessary to overcome elevation
differences and head losses.
Q: Flow
Query: A SQL expression you build in Bentley StormCAD V8
XM Edition to filter a FlexTable or create a selection set.
Rise: The rise represents the maximum height of the conduit,
either the max depth of the channel or top depth of a
closed pipe.
Depending on whether the conduit is open or closed the
hydraulic grade line exibits different behaviour when it
exceeds the depth of the conduit.
If the conduit is closed, when the HGL exceeds its depth
the conduit goes under pressure flow, and the
computation will proceed accordingly. At this point the
depth will equal the rise.
Sanitary Flow Collection: A collection of loads that contains any combination of
hydrograph, unit, or pattern loads.
Sanitary Load: A load that results from human activity and are not
weather-dependent.
Scenario: A set of input data (in the form of alternatives),
calculation options, results, and notes associated with a
set of calculations. Scenarios let you set up an unlimited
number of "What If?" situations for your model, and then
modify, compute, and review your system under those
conditions.
Selection Sets: User-defined groups of network elements that let you
predefine a group of elements to manipulate together.
shp: File name extension for shapefiles, which you can import
as background layers for your model.
SI: International System of units or metric units.
Static selection set: A selection set created by selecting a group of elements
in your model.
Storm event: In Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition, a single rainfall
curve that represents one rainfall event for a given
recurrence interval.
swg: File name extension for StormCAD project files. The
.swg file contains data such as annotation, color-coding,
and project-level options. This file is an open .xml format
file and can be viewed and edited.

SWMM Engine: One of two calculation engines available in Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition. The SWMM engine uses the
solver from the EPA Stormwater Management Model
version 5. This is an explicit solver which, while more
prone to stability problems, exactly matches the results
from SWMM 5.
Tc: The time of concentration (Tc) is the time it takes for
runoff to travel from the hydraulically most distant part
of the watershed subarea to its outfall point. It is
computed by summing the times it takes the water to
travel through the different components of the subarea
drainage system.
tiff: File name extension for Tagged Image File Format raster
image files, which can be used as background layers in
StormCAD. The extension .tif is also used for these types
of files.
Transition: A structure in which flow can be mixed or split. In
combined sewers systems, flow can be split between that
going to treatment and that going to an overflow. Also
known as a junction chamber.
Unit Hydrograph: A time versus flow curve that represents a one-inch
volume of rainfall for a given excess duration of rainfall,
DD, for a set watershed area.
Unit Sanitary Load: Loading unit count representing the local count of
loading units for a specified unit dry weather load.
User data extensions: A set of one or more attribute fields that you can define to
hold data to be stored in the model. User data extensions
allow you to add your own data fields to your project.
User Notifications: Messages that appear after you compute your model.
These messages can help you troubleshoot errors in your
model.
Virtual Conduit: Virtual conduits are a special compatibility element
included in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition to help
modelers achieve fidelity between the Bentley
StormCAD V8 XM Edition model and other storm
modeling solutions that model pumps and control
structures such as weirs, orifices, and rating tables as
network links. Virtual conduits are displayed in your
model as dashed lines.

Glossary
In StormCAD the virtual conduit shape has a single

purpose: to serve as diversion links between nodes. When
a conduit is virtual the user can set the Is Diversion
Link? property of the conduit to true and define the
diversion rating curve to define what portion of total
inflow to the bounding node will be diverted through the
link.
If the conduit is virtual and is not set as a diversion link
then the conduit is ignored during the analysis. The
profile Hydraulic and energy grade line of virtual
conduits are just set to establish connectivity between
actual physical pipes. The HGL and EGL have no
physical meaning in regards to virtual conduits.
Watershed: A watershed is a collection of catchments which outfall
to the same point. In other words, for each storm in the
selected design storm collection, a hydrograph is
generated for each catchment. The sum of all those
hydrographs is the watershed hydrograph.
Wet Weather Load: A load that is not related to rainfall activity, such as
groundwater infiltration (water leaking into a pipe
through cracks, joints, and other defects) and structure
inflow (surface water entering a structure through the
cover).
Wet well: A boundary condition between the pressure and gravity
portions of a network. Wet wells serve as a collection
point for gravity systems, and as an HGL boundary node
for the pressure system. Dry loads can also enter the
sewer network at these locations.

Symbols
using with
Symbols
%u 352
about dialog box 12

active topology 315
active topology alternative 315
active topology child alternative 316
Active Topology dialog box 315
actual flow depth 478
add a help topic 10
Add Hyperlinks dialog box 233
Add To Selection Set dialog box 209
adding annotations 351
adding background layers 342
adding color coding 356
adding elements 167
Additional 581
Alternative Editor dialog box 315
Alternative Manager 313
alternatives 291, 311, 312, 579
base 312
boundary condition 330
child 312
creating 312
defined 296
editing 313
hydrology 331
making elements inactive in 316
merge 311
overview 291, 311
physical 317
rainfall runoff 331
types of 312
Annotation Properties dialog box 353
annotations 348, 353
%u 352
adding 351
deleting 352
displaying units 352
editing 352
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Index-i

B
renaming 353
aquifers 579
attributes
editing 174
scenario 296
attributes for calculation profiles 277
AutoCAD 50, 59, 392
commands 56, 64
drawing synchronization 62
entities 56, 64
importing WaterCAD 58, 67
proxies 67
undo/redo 57, 66
AutoCAD mode 50, 59
graphical layout 51, 61
project files 61
automated scenario management 292
automatic design 216
backflow 579
background layer files
using with ProjectWise 138
Background Layer manager 340
background layers 340
adding 342
deleting 343
dxf files 347
editing 343
image compression 345
renaming 344
shapefiles 346
supported image types 340
turning on and off 344
working with folders 341
backwater analysis 483
base alternative 311
base alternatives 312
Base Calcuation Options 276
basin 579
batch run 308, 579
Batch Run Editor dialog box 309
batch runs 308
Bend command 168
Bentley Institute Press 573
Index-ii Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

C
Bentley SELECT 11
Bentley Systems 569
accreditations 575
Haestad Methods products 569
program update 11
training 574
Border Editor dialog box 433
border properties for graphs 433
border tool 163
boundary condition alternative 330
boundary control depth 477
branch 579
browse topics 9
build number 12
building a model 168
Bypass 582
bypass flow 516
calculation detailed summary 282

calculation executive summary 282
calculation options 338
Calculation Options Manager 275
Calculation Options manager 275
Calculation Options Profile 579
calculation profiles 275
attributes 277
creating 276
calculation report 282
calculation summary 282
capacity 580
Capacity (Design) 580
Capacity (Full Flow) 580
captured flow 580
Carryover 582
carryover 516
Carter 530
Catalog Conduit 149
catalog conduits 227
catalog pipes 580
catch basin 170, 580
catch basins 154
physical alternative for 325
catchments 159
adding a Tc method to 159
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Index-iii

C
Tc methods 160
certification 574
change pipe width 55
Change Series Title dialog box 440
changing the drawing view 199
channels 580
when to use 169
Chart Options dialog box 395
Chart Tab 395
Export tab 430
Print tab 432
Series Tab 421
Tools tab 429
Chart Tools Gallery dialog box 440
Chézy’s equation 470
child alternative
creating active topology 316
child scenarios 307
circular channel shape 490
CivilStorm 2005 570
clearing element selection 172
CN 580
Colebatch 505
Colebrook-White equation 474
collapse a subtopic 9
collection 580
color coding 356
adding 356
deleting 357
editing 357
renaming 357
Color dialog box 435
Color Editor dialog box 435
Color Map Tables 359
Color-Coding Properties dialog box 357, 391
column headings
editing for FlexTables 374
combination inlet in sag 527
combination inlet on grade 521
commands (AutoCAD mode) 56, 64
Compact Database Enabled option 124
composite cross slope 520
composite gutter section 511
composite hydrograph 580
composite rational C 163
Compress Database command 23
compressing large database files 23, 124
Index-iv Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

C
conduit 149
Conduit Catalog dialog box 227
Conduit Description 323
Conduit Inventory 386
conduit shapes 489
conduits 580
when to use 169
connecting elements 168, 169
connection
synchronization 62, 63
connectivity
explicit 272
implicit 272
constraint-based design 216
constructing a query 239, 377
continuously depressed gutter 511
contour 393, 394
smoothing 394, 395
Contour Browser 392, 395
Contour Manager 391
Contour Plot 395
Contours 391
convert 226
copying
FlexTables 383
cox 505
Create Selection Set dialog box 206
creating a model 168
creating a query 237
creating alternatives 312
creating dynamic 206
creating queries 239, 377
creating reports 385
creating selection sets 206, 207
critical 477
critical depth 476, 478
critical flow 476
critical slope 476, 477, 478
cross section nodes 580
CulvertMaster 572
cumulative storm events 180
curb inlet in sag 523
curb opening 520, 521
curved pipes 168
custom AutoCAD entities 56, 64
custom sort 378
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Index-v

D
Customization Editor 47
Customization Manager 46
customize
drawing 61
customizing
FlexTables 379
Darcy-Weisbach 472, 474

data
organization 311
data types for user data extensions 251
Database Utilities 23
DD 581
decimal point 178
default units 130
defining geometry of link elements 150
defining user data extensions 246
deleting
FlexTables 372
deleting annotations 352
deleting background layers 343
deleting color coding 357
deleting elements 172
deleting groups of elements in a selection set 209
deleting profiles 362
depth 150, 152
Design Alternative 216
dimensionless rainfall curves 180
direct step 482
direct step method 482
display a topic 10
display format 179
Display Precision 178
display precision 177
display topics 9
displaying multiple projects 122
ditch 512
diurnal curve 581
diversion 567
DOT 387
downstream node 168
dragging 581
drawing
scale 129
Index-vi Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

E
setup (AutoCAD mode) 61

synchronization (AutoCAD mode) 62
drawing scale 129
DWG 62
DXF 392
DXF file
exporting 142
DXF Properties dialog box 206, 209, 347
dynamic inheritance 298
dynamic managers 581
Eagleson 531
edit elements 55
Edit Hyperlink dialog box 234
editing
FlexTables 373
numerous elements at once 374
editing alternatives 313
editing annotations 352
editing background layers 343
editing color coding 357
editing column headings
FlexTables 374
editing element attributes 174
editing scenarios 308
editing units
FlexTables 374
EGL 469, 567
element
deleting 55
modify 55
moving 56, 65
element connectivity 168
element connectivity table 169
element label project files 132
element labeling settings 132
element properties 53
element symbology 581
Element Symbology Manager 348
using folders in 350
element tables 385, 581
elements 147
adding data to link elements 150
adding in the middle of a pipe 172
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Index-vii

E
adding to your model 167

catch basins 154
catchments 159
clearing selection of 172
connecting 148, 168, 169
defining geometry of link elements 150
deleting 171
editing attributes 174
globally editing data in numerous elements 374
link 148
manholes 155
moving 171
outfalls 157
overview 147
reporting on 387
selecting 171
selecting all 171
selecting all of the same type 171
viewing in selection sets 205
elevation 244
elevation head 469
elevation vs. flow curves
adding to outfalls 157
Elevation-Flow Curve dialog box 158
ellipse shape 491
energy balance 481
energy equation 468
energy grade 469
energy grade line 469
energy principle 467
engineering libraries 223, 225, 226
overview 222
sharing on a network 225
working with 223
engineering libraries dialog box 225
engineering library 226
English units 581
entering additional data to link elements 150
entering data 174
entities
in AutoCAD 56, 64
entrance controlled 484
enumerated user data extensions 254
Enumeration Editor dialog box 254
EQT curves
adding to outfalls 157
equal length inlets 527
Index-viii Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

F
error messages 266

errors 288
Espey/Winslow 531
exit WaterGEMS 7
expand a subtopic 9
explicit connectivity 272
explode elements (AutoCAD mode) 65
exporting
FlexTables 384
exporting data
to a DXF file 142
exporting FlexTables 383
extended period simulation 581
External Tool Manager 255
FAA time of concentration 531

Federal Aviation Agency 531
filter
resetting 377
filtering a FlexTable 375
Find 175
finding elements 175
Fixed 582
Fixed Point 179
FlexTable dialog box 368
FlexTable Setup dialog box 380
FlexTables 366, 581
copying 383
copying data 383
creating 371
customizing 379
deleting 372
editing 373
editing column headings 374
editing globally 374
editing units 374
exporting 383
exporting data 384
filtering 375
global editing 374
navigating in 374
opening 371
ordering columns 375
printing 383, 384
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Index-ix

G
renaming 372
reports 384
saving as text 384
shortcut keys 374
sorting column order 375
FlexTables Manager 366
folders in 367
FlexTables manager 366
flow depth 478
flow regime 475, 478
Flow-Headloss Curve dialog box 164
FlowMaster 572
folders
in Background Layers Manager 341
in Element Symbology Manager 350
in FlexTables Manager 367
format
unit 177
Free Form 354
free form 355
free form annotation 354, 355
free surface flow 477
freeboard 582
friction loss 470
frontal flow 512
frontwater analysis 484
General 179
general settings 124
geodatabase support 269
geometry
of link elements 150
polyline vertices 150
GIS 582
global edit 374
global editing
FlexTables 374
global rainfall runoff alternatives 331
global settings 123
global storm event 582
Global Storm Events 189
Gradient Editor dialog box 434
gradually varied flow 469, 484
graphical layout
Index-x Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

H
AutoCAD 51, 61
grate 521
grate inlet in sag 522
grate inlet on grade 517
gutter 150
gutter depression 511, 514
gutter flow 508, 509
gutter slope 150
gutters 582
when to use 169
H3 478
Haestad Methods
program update 11
training 574
Haestad Press 573
Hatch Brush Editor dialog box 436
Hazen-Williams Formula 474
head gains 468
headlosses 468
HEC-22 508
HGL 469, 567
HGL convergence test 469
history of what-if analyses 292
horizontal 523
horton’s 504
hydraulic grade 469
hydraulic grade line 469
hydraulic head 469
hydraulic jump 484
hydraulic jumps 482
hydraulically mild slope 477, 478
hydraulically steep slope 477
hydrograph 582
hydrology alternatives 331
hyetograph 582
hyperlinks 231, 582
adding 233
deleting 234
editing 234
Hyperlinks dialog box 231
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Index-xi

I
ICPM 582
I-D-F e, b, d equations 461
IDF storm events 180
image compression 345
Image Filter 344
Image Properties dialog box 344
implicit connectivity 272
implicit engine 583
Import
WaterCAD 58, 67
import
WaterCAD 58, 67
importing
SewerGEMS data 140
importing data 139
improved Lotter 506
inactive elements in alternatives 316
inclined 523
incremental storm events 180
independent papers 573
individual elements
adding to your model 167
infiltration 583
inflow 583
Inflow Capture Curve 154
inflow collection 583
Inflow Collection Editor 583
inheritance 297, 299
dynamic 298
overriding 298
inlet capacity 508
inlet flow 583
inlets 154
inlets in sag 522
inlets on grade 516
installation 7
intensity storm events 180
irregular channel 151
irregular open channel shape 494
junction chambers
Index-xii Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

K
Kerby/Hathaway 532
Kirpich (PA) 532
Kirpich (TN) 532
KnowledgeBase 11
Known 582
Kutter’s equation 470
land uses 583

layout
AutoCAD 51, 61
layout settings 126
layout tool 167
legacy 226
length and velocity 533
library types 223
license 6
Like operator 242
line tool 163
link element
defining geometry of 150
link elements 148
entering additional data to 150
local depression 514
Lotter 506
M3 478
manholes 155, 170, 583
Manning's equation 471
median section 512
merge
merge
alternatives 311
mild 477
mild-1 478
minimum time of concentration 530
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Index-xiii

N
mixed flow profiles 482

ModelBuilder
errors and warnings 266
supported formats 257
using 257
ModelBuilder wizard 261
move
elements 56, 65
labels 56, 65
moving elements 172
moving rainfall from a catchment 169
moving toolbars 41
multiple elements
selecting 171
multiple projects
maximum number of 122
Municipal License Administrator 6
named views 389

navigating in a FlexTables 374
Neenah 195
network navigator 211
normal depth 475, 477, 478
Number 179
open channel
when the water level exceeds the top elevation 153
open Help 8
open the registration dialog box 12
opening an existing project 122
opening managers 42
operation 374
optimize 469
options 123
Options Dialog Box
ProjectWise settings 133
Options dialog box 127
ordering
FlexTable columns 375
organize data 311
orifice coefficient 584
Index-xiv Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

P
orifice flow 523, 525, 526

outfalls 157
adding elevation vs. flow curves to 157
adding EQT curves to 157
boundary condition alternative 330
output
tables 366
overflow 153, 584
overriding inheritance 298
Pan tool 199

panning 199
using a mousewheel to 199
parent scenario 307
pattern 584
pattern load 584
pattern setup 584
pavement drainage 508
Pavlovskii’s 504
physical alternatives 317
for catch basins 325
for conduits 317
for junction chambers 327
for manholes 324
for outfalls 328
pipe-arch shape 492
pipes
modeling with curves 168
splitting 172
pitot tube 469
Pointer dialog box 439
pollutograph 584
polyline vertices 150
Polyline Vertices dialog box 151
PondPack
build number 12
installation 7
upgrade 11
upgrades and updates 7
version number 12
predefined queries 235
pressure flow 475
pressure head 469
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Index-xv

Q
print preview
FlexTables 384
Print Preview Window 452
printing
FlexTables 384
printing FlexTables 383
prismatic 476
proejct queries 235
profile 584
editing 362
profile classification 477, 478
Profile Setup dialog box 363
Profile Viewer dialog box 364
profiles 359
creating 361
deleting 362
renaming 363
viewing 360
Profiles manager 360
Program Maintenance Dialog Box 11
project
files 52, 61, 62
project inventory 386
Project Properties dialog box 123
Project tab 127
ProjectWise
closing projects 135
general guidelines for using 135
using background layer files with 138
using with CivilStorm 135
using with SewerGEMS 135
viewing status 136
ProjectWise options 133
properties
editing 174
Property Editor 174
using Find Element 175
proxies 67
publications 573
Q 585
queries 234, 239, 377
creating 237
in FlexTables 375
Index-xvi Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

R
predefined 235
project 235
shared 235
using Like operator in 242
Query Builder dialog box 239
Query Manager 235
Query Parameters 213
rainfall runoff alternatives 331

global rainfall 331
Rainfall Table Files 226
ranking
rapidly varied flow 482
Rational Catchment Collection 163
rectangular channel shape 493
redo 57, 58, 66
references and textbooks 573
Remove
Columns 381
removing elements from selection sets 209
renaming
FlexTables 372
renaming annotations 353
renaming background layers 344
report
calculation 282
calculation summary 282
report options 388
reporting
on a group of elements in a selection set 209
reports 385
creating for elements 387
FlexTables 384
scenario 386
standard 386
reset
FlexTable filter 377
Reset Workspace 42
Rise 585
roughness coefficient 470
rounding of numbers 178
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Index-xvii

S
S3 478
sanitary flow collection 585
sanitary load 585
save
as drawing *.DWG 63
saving FlexTables as text 384
scenario example 301
Scenario Management 305
Example 301
Scenario Manager 309
scenario summary 386
scenarios 291, 585
advantages of using 292
attribute inheritance 299
attributes 296
base 307
batch run 308
calculation options for 338
creating new 307
editing 308
inheritance 297
local and inherited values in 299
overview 291, 294, 306
Scientific 179
SCS lag 533
sealing conditions 482
search for text 10
section hydraulics
conduit shapes 489
Select in Drawing button
in Query Manager 237
selecting all elements 171
selecting an element 171
selecting elements
all of the same type 171
selecting multiple elements 171
Selection by Query dialog box 207
Selection Set Element Removal dialog box 209
selection sets 202, 203, 206, 209, 585
adding a group of elements to 208
adding elements to 208
creating 206, 207
creating from queries 206
group-level operations 209
Index-xviii Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

S
in FlexTables 370
removing elements from 209
viewing elements in 205, 206
Selection Sets Manager 203
Selection tool 27
Set Field Options dialog box 177
setting options 123
setting the outflow node for a catchment 169
setup 61
SewerCAD 571
SEWERGEMS database file
importing 140
Shapefile Properties dialog box 346
Shared Field Specification dialog box 253
shared queries 235
sharing engineering libraries on a network 225
shortcut keys
FlexTables 374
SI 178, 585
slope 477
slope classification 477, 478
slot inlet in sag 526
slotted-inlet on grade 521
smoothing contours 394
snap menu (AutoCAD mode) 57, 65
software
upgrades 11
Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SELECT 11
sorting
spatial data 271
splitting pipes 172
spread 150
standard reports 386
standard step 469, 482
standard step method 482
start WaterGEMS 7
starting a new project 122
Starting Bentley WaterGEMS 7
starting Bentley WaterGEMS 7
Station-Elevation Curve dialog box 151
steep 477
Stored Prompt Responses dialog box 127
Storm Data 180
storm event 585
StormCAD 571
subcritical 478
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Index-xix

T
subcritical flow 476

supercritical 484
supercritical flow 477
surcharging conditions 482
Swamee and Jain equation 473
SWG file 62
SWMM engine 586
symbol
visibility (AutoCAD mode) 61
synchronize (AutoCAD mode) 62
synchronize existing model 260
System 582
Table
Properties 380
Type 380
table
setup 380
tables
column headings 374
editing FlexTables 373
units 374
tabular report 366
tailwater condition 477
Tc Data Collection dialog box 160
Tc definition 586
Tc methods 160
Tc methods for catchments 159
technical journals 573
TeeChart Gallery dialog box 452
templates 222
text 56, 65
text height 129
multiplier 129
text tool 163
The 574
theme folders
renaming 351
theme groups
deleting 351
theory 455
time of concentration 528
Carter 530
definition 586
Index-xx Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

U
Eagleson 531
equation 528
Espey/Winslow 531
Federal Aviation Agency 531
Kerby/Hathaway 532
Kirpich (PA) 532
Kirpich (TN) 532
length and velocity 533
minimum 530
SCS lag 533
TR-55 channel flow 535
TR-55 shallow concentrated flow 534
TR-55 sheet flow 533
user-defined 530
Time of Concentration methods 160
time of concentration methods 159
top elevation 153
TR-55 channel flow 535
equations 535
TR-55 shallow concentrated flow 534
TR-55 sheet flow 533
training 574
transition 156
transition flow 526
transitional flow 523, 527
trapezoidal channel shape 490
TRex 244
TRex Wizard 244
triangle shape 493
Troubleshooting 11
troubleshooting 287
knowledge database 11
turning background layers on and off 344
turning toolbars off 41
turning toolbars on 41
U.S. customary 178

undo/redo operations in AutoCAD 57, 66
uniform flow 475
uniform gutter cross slope 509
Unit 178
unit hydrograph 586
unit of measurement 178
unit sanitary load 586
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Index-xxi

V
units 130, 131

displaying in annotations 352
editing for FlexTables 374
units and formatting 177
updates 7
updating PondPack via the Web 11
upgrade
PondPack 11
upgrades 7
upstream node 168
use the index 9
user data extensions 246, 586
data types 251
enumerated 254
User Data Extensions dialog box 248
User Defined Conduit 149
User Notification Details dialog box 290
user notifications 287, 586
User Notifications Manager 288
velocity head 469

version number 12
vertical 523
vertices 150
view
tabular 366
viewing elements in a selection set 205, 206
viewing profiles 360
virtual conduits 586
visibility of symbols 61
warning messages 266

warnings 288
water level in an open channel 153
WaterCAD 571
custom AutoCAD entities 56, 64
WaterGEMS 570
watershed 587
WCD file 52
Web updates 11
weir flow 523, 524, 526
Index-xxii Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

Y
Welcome dialog 146

Welcome dialog box 146
wet weather load 587
white
table columns 373
window color settings 125
Working with WTG Files 7
World Wide Web
See Web. 11
WTG 7
yellow
table cells 373
Z Order 58
zone 1 478
zone 2 478
zone 3 478
zone classification 477, 478
Zoom 201
Zoom Center 201
Zoom Center dialog box 202
Zoom Extents 200
Zoom Factor 202
Zoom In 199
Zoom Out 199
Zoom Previous
Zoom Next 201
Zoom Realtime 201
Zoom Window 200
zooming 199, 201
element tables
See also predefined FlexTables
Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Index-xxiii

StormCAD Users Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

StormCAD Users Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

StormCAD Users Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Welcome to Bentley

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition Help provides complete information for using

“Welcome to Bentley StormCAD V8 Help” on page -1

“Getting Started” on page 1-1

“Introducing the Workspace” on page 2-13

“Quick Start Lessons” on page 3-69

“Quick Start Lessons” on page 3-69

“Starting a Project” on page 4-121

“Creating Your Model” on page 5-145

“Using Modelbuilder” on page 6-257

“Calculating Your Model” on page 7-275

“Using Scenarios and Alternatives” on page 8-291

“Presenting Your Results” on page 9-339

“Theory” on page 10-455

“Gravity Flow Diversions” on page 11-555

“About Haestad Methods” on page 12-569

“References” on page 13-577

“Glossary” on page Glossary-579

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide -1

Chapter : Welcome to Bentley StormCAD V8 Help 1

Chapter Contents: Contents i

Chapter 1: Getting Started 1

Chapter 2: Introducing the Workspace 13

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Contents-i

Contents-ii Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

Chapter 3: Quick Start Lessons 69

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Contents-iii

Chapter 4: Starting a Project 121

Chapter 5: Creating Your Model 145

Contents-iv Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Contents-v

Editing a Hyperlink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-233

Chapter 6: Using Modelbuilder 257

Contents-vi Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

Chapter 8: Using Scenarios and Alternatives 291

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Contents-vii

Chapter 9: Presenting Your Results 339

Contents-viii Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Contents-ix

Chapter 10: Theory 455

Contents-x Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Contents-xi

Contents-xii Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

Chapter 11: Gravity Flow Diversions 555

Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide Contents-xiii

Chapter 12: About Haestad Methods 569

Chapter 13: References 577

Chapter Glossary: Glossary 579

Contents-xiv Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition User’s Guide

“When to Use Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition?” on page 1-2

“What’s New in Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition?” on page 1-2

“System Requirements” on page 1-4

“Municipal License Administrator Auto-Configuration” on page 1-6

“Starting Bentley StormCAD V8 XM Edition” on page 1-7

“Working with stm and stc Files” on page 1-7

“Exiting StormCAD” on page 1-7

“Using Online Help” on page 1-8

“Troubleshooting” on page 1-11

“Checking Your Current Registration Status” on page 1-12